Today’s News 27th July 2021

  • Woman Wearing Charlie Hebdo T-Shirt Stabbed At London Park In Broad Daylight
    Woman Wearing Charlie Hebdo T-Shirt Stabbed At London Park In Broad Daylight

    A woman was attacked with a knife in broad daylight at a section of Hyde Park in London known as a venue for demonstrations specially protected as a “free speech” zone. The 39-year old victim was wearing a Charlie Hebdo T-shirt. Thankfully she survived the horrific broad daylight attack.

    The Daily Mail reports she suffered multiple stab wounds after a masked attacker started slashing at her. Blood was seen pouring down her face as the assailant fled, with Westminster Metropolitan Police later seeking the public’s help in identifying the black-clad attacker. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Police later described it as a “minor slash injury” for which she was treated at the scene and then transported to the hospital. The shocking attack was caught on multiple cell phone videos, and members of the public reportedly gave chase but the assailant got away.

    According to one local media report, the woman appears to be well-known for street preaching and ministry activities geared toward a Muslim audience, which points to a likely or even obvious motive in the attack, though police have yet to name one.

    “Speakers’ Corner is a historic place for open-air debate where people are allowed to make speeches on any lawful subject,” the report said of the Sunday attack. “Police did not identify the victim by name but social media said she was Hatun Tash, a preacher from a group called DCCI Ministries that says it seeks to preach the Christian Gospel to Muslims. Detectives said they had recovered a knife at the scene and the victim gave an account of what happened.”

    Via The Post Millennial

    Police issued the following statement: “We know that this assault was witnessed by a number of people, many of whom captured it on their phones. I would ask them, if they have not already done so, to contact [the] police.”

    Her identity was later widely confirmed on social media as indeed being Hatun Tash.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Close-up video of the moments leading up to the attack showed a group of Christians and Muslims holding an intense, but peaceful, debate before chaos erupted due to the stabbing attack…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As evidenced by the sirens blaring nearby the scene in the video, police appeared to be nearby, so it’s unclear as to why they weren’t able to arrest the attacker, who fled on foot. One video showed a police car giving chase.

    The Charlie Hebdo shirt worn by the woman featured a Muslim cleric kissing a cartoonist with the French satirical magazine with the words “L’amour plus fort que la haine” (love is stronger than hate).

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/27/2021 – 02:45

  • UK Labour Councillor Ridiculed For Bragging About Wearing A Mask On An Empty Train
    UK Labour Councillor Ridiculed For Bragging About Wearing A Mask On An Empty Train

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    A Labour Councillor faced ridicule after she bragged on Twitter about wearing a face mask on an empty train.

    Not all heroes wear capes.

    “Going to keep wearing my mask on public transport. Even when it’s just me on the tube,” tweeted Alice Perry.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Numerous respondents pointed out that Perry must have been disappointed that no one on the train could see how compliant and virtuous she was, which is why she decided to take selfie and post it to Twitter.

    “This pandemic has provided an opportunity for normies to feel like heroes for being absolutely useless, and they endlessly gloat about it too,” reacted one person.

    “This is evidence of irrational though, psychological trauma and human conditioning. People need leadership to break this cycle, not encourage it,” opined lawyer Viva Frei.

    “What bravery and sacrifice,” remarked Aubrey Huff.

    Perry’s bizarre tweet underscores once again how the mask has little to do with virus protection and everything to do with signaling subservience to the cult of conformity.

    As previously highlighted, Dr Colin Axon, a SAGE advisor for the government, dismissed face masks as “comfort blankets” that do virtually nothing, noting that the COVID-19 virus particle is up to 5,000 times smaller than the holes in the mask.

    “The small sizes are not easily understood but an imperfect analogy would be to imagine marbles fired at builders’ scaffolding, some might hit a pole and rebound, but obviously most will fly through,” Axon said.

    *  *  *

    Brand new merch now available! Get it at https://www.pjwshop.com/

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Get early access, exclusive content and behinds the scenes stuff by following me on Locals.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/27/2021 – 02:00

  • Escobar: China's BRI Battles The 'New Quad' For Afghanistan's Coming Boom
    Escobar: China’s BRI Battles The ‘New Quad’ For Afghanistan’s Coming Boom

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    The race is already on to build and extend Afghanistan’s shattered infrastructure as rival powers advance competing initiatives…

    Afghan security forces deployed and start operations against Taliban around Torkham border point between Afghanistan and Pakistan in Nangarhar province, Afghanistan on July 23, 2021. Photo: AFP via Anadolu Agency / Stringer

    Over a week ago the excruciatingly slow Doha peace talks between the Kabul government and the Taliban resumed, and then they dragged on for two days observed by envoys from the EU, US and UN.

    Nothing happened. They could not even agree on a ceasefire during Eid al-Adha. Worse, there’s no road map for how negotiations might pick up in August. Taliban supreme leader Haibatullah Akhundzada duly released a statement: the Taliban “strenuously favors a political settlement.”

    But how? Irreconcilable differences rule. Realpolitik dictates there’s no way the Taliban will embrace Western liberal democracy: They want the restoration of an Islamic emirate.

    Afghan President Ashraf Ghani, for his part, is damaged goods even in Kabul diplomatic circles where he’s derided as too stubborn, not to mention incapable of rising to the occasion. The only possible solution in the short term is seen as an interim government.

    Yet there is no leader around with national appeal – no Commander Massoud figure. There are only regional warlords – whose militias protect their own local interests, not distant Kabul.

    While facts on the ground spell out balkanization, the Taliban, even on the offensive, know they cannot possibly pull off a military takeover of Afghanistan.

    And when the Americans say they will continue to “support Afghan government forces,” that means still bombing, but from over the horizon and now under new Centcom management in Qatar.

    Russia, China, Pakistan and the Central Asian “stans” – everyone is trying hard to circumvent the stalemate. Shadow play, as usual, has been in full effect. Take for instance the crucial meeting of the Collective Security Treaty Organization (former Soviet states) – nearly simultaneous with the recent Shanghai Cooperation Organization summit in Dushanbe and the subsequent Central Asia-South Asia connectivity conference in Tashkent.

    The CSTO summit was 100% leak-proof. And yet, previously, they had discussed “possibilities of using the potential of the CSTO member states” to keep the highly volatile Tajik-Afghan border under control.

    That’s very serious business. A task force headed by Colonel-General Anatoly Sidorov, the chief of the CSTO Joint Staff, is in charge of “joint measures” to police the borders.

    Now enter an even more intriguing shadowplay gambit – met with a non-denial denial by both Moscow and Washington.

    The Kommersant newspaper revealed that Moscow offered some “hospitality” to the Pentagon at its military bases in Kyrgyzstan and Tajikistan (both SCO member states). The objective: keep a joint eye on the fast-evolving Afghan chessboard – and prevent drug mafia cartels, Islamists of the ISIS-Khorasan variety and refugees from crossing the borders of these Central Asian ‘stans.

    What the Russians are aiming at – non-denial denial withstanding – is not to let the Americans off the hook for the “mess” (copyright Sergey Lavrov) in Afghanistan while preventing them from reestablishing any offshoot of the Empire of Bases in Central Asia.

    They established bases in Kyrgyzstan and Uzbekistan after 2001, although they had to be abandoned later in 2004 and 2014. What is clear is there’s absolutely no chance the US will re-establish military bases in SCO and CSTO member nations.

    Birth of a new Quad

    At the Central Asia-South Asia 2021 meeting in Tashkent, right after the SCO meeting in Dushanbe, something quite intriguing happened: the birth of a new Quad (forget that one in the Indo-Pacific).

    This is how it was spun by the Afghan Ministry of Foreign Affairs: a “historic opportunity to open flourishing international trade routes, [and] the parties intend to cooperate to expand trade, build transit links and strengthen business-to-business ties.”

    If that sounds like something straight out of the Belt and Road Initiative, well, here’s the confirmation by the Pakistani Foreign Office:

    “Representatives of the United States, Uzbekistan, Afghanistan and Pakistan agreed in principle to establish a new quadrilateral diplomatic platform focused on enhancing regional connectivity. The parties consider long-term peace and stability in Afghanistan critical to regional connectivity and agree that peace and regional connectivity are mutually reinforcing.”

    The US doing Belt and Road right into China’s alley? A State Department tweet confirmed it. Call it a geopolitical case of “if you can’t beat ’em, join ’em.”

    Now this is probably the only issue that virtually all players on the Afghanistan chessboard agree: a stable Afghanistan turbo-charging the flow of cargo across a vital hub of Eurasia integration.

    Taliban spokesperson Suhail Shaheen has been very consistent: the Taliban regard China as a “friend” to Afghanistan and are eager to have Beijing investing in reconstruction work “as soon as possible.”

    The question is what Washington aims to accomplish with this new Quad – for the moment just on paper. Simple: to throw a monkey wrench into the works of the SCO, led by Russia-China, and the main forum organizing a possible solution for the Afghan drama.

    In this sense, the US versus Russia-China competition in the Afghan theater totally fits the Build Back Better World (B3W) gambit, which aims – at least in thesis – to offer an alternative infrastructure plan to Belt and Road and pitch it to nations from the Caribbean and Africa to the Asia-Pacific.

    What is not in question is that a stable Afghanistan is essential in terms of establishing full rail-road connectivity from resource-rich Central Asia to the Pakistani ports of Karachi and Gwadar, and beyond to global markets.

    For Pakistan, what happens next is a certified geoeconomic win-win – whether via the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor, which is a flagship Belt and Road project, or via the new, incipient Quad.

    China will be funding the highly strategic Peshawar-Kabul motorway. Peshawar is already linked to CPEC. The completion of the motorway will symbolically seal Afghanistan as part of CPEC. 

    And then there’s the delightfully named Pakafuz, which refers to the trilateral deal signed in February between Pakistan, Afghanistan and Uzbekistan to build a railway – a fundamentally strategic connection between Central and South Asia.

    Full connectivity between Central Asia and South Asia also happens to be a key plank of the Russian master strategy, the Greater Eurasia Partnership, which interacts with Belt and Road in multiple ways.

    Lavrov spent quite some time in the Central Asia-South Asia summit in Tashkent explaining the integration of the Greater Eurasia Partnership and Belt and Road with the SCO and the Eurasia Economic Union.

    Lavrov also referred to the Uzbek proposal “to align the Trans-Siberian Railway and the Europe-West China corridor with new regional projects.” Everything is interlinked, any way you look at it.

    Watching the geoeconomic flow

    The new Quad is in fact a latecomer in terms of the fast-evolving geopolitical transmutation of the Heartland. The whole process is being driven by China and Russia, which are jointly managing key Central Asian affairs.

    Already in early June, a very important China-Pakistan-Afghanistan joint statement stressed how Kabul will be profiting from trade via the CPEC’s port of Gwadar.

    And then, there’s Pipelineistan.

    On July 16, Islamabad and Moscow signed a mega-deal for a US$3 billion, 1100-kilometer gas pipeline between Port Qasim in Karachi and Lahore, to be finished by the end of 2023.

    The pipeline will transport imported LNG from Qatar arriving at Karachi’s LNG terminal. This is the Pakstream Gas Pipeline Project – locally known as the North-South Gas project.

    The interminable Pipelineistan war between IPI (India-Pakistan-Iran) and TAPI (Turkmenistan-Afghanistan-Pakistan-India) – which I followed in detail for years – seems to have ended with a third-way winner.

    As much as the Kabul government, the Taliban seem to be paying very close attention to all the geoeconomics and how Afghanistan is at the heart of an inevitable economic boom.

    Perhaps both sides should also be paying close attention to someone like Zoon Ahmed Khan, a very bright Pakistani woman who is a research fellow with the Belt and Road Initiative Strategy Institute at Tsinghua University.

    Pakistani naval personnel stand guard near a ship carrying containers at the Gwadar port, 700kms west of Karachi, where a trade program between Pakistan and China operates. Photo: AFP/Aamir Qureshi

    Zoon Ahmed Khan notes how “one significant contribution that China makes through the BRI is emphasizing on the fact that developing countries like Pakistan have to find their own development path, rather than follow a Western model of governance.”

    She adds, “The best thing Pakistan can learn from the Chinese model is to come up with its own model. China does not wish to impose its journey and experience on other countries, which is quite important.”

    She is adamant that Belt and Road “is benefiting a much greater region than Pakistan. Through the initiative, what China tries to do is to present the partner countries with its experience and the things it can offer.”

    All of the above definitely applies to Afghanistan – and its convoluted but ultimately inevitable insertion into the ongoing process of Eurasia integration.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/27/2021 – 00:20

  • Majority Of Hospitalized Covid Patients In UK Only Tested Positive After Admission: Leaked NHS Data
    Majority Of Hospitalized Covid Patients In UK Only Tested Positive After Admission: Leaked NHS Data

    Over half of those hospitalized with Covid-19 in the UK only tested positive after admission – suggesting that “vast numbers are being classed as hospitalised by Covid when they were admitted with other ailments, with the virus picked up by routine testing,” according to The Telegraph, citing leaked government figures.

    The takeaway? Oft-cited statistics published daily may far overstate Covid hospitalizations – and consequently, pressures on the National Health Service (NHS).

    The leaked data – covering all NHS trusts in England – show that, as of last Thursday, just 44 per cent of patients classed as being hospitalised with Covid had tested positive by the time they were admitted. 

    The majority of cases were not detected until patients underwent standard Covid tests, carried out on everyone admitted to hospital for any reason. 

    Overall, 56 per cent of Covid hospitalisations fell into this category, the data, seen by The Telegraph, show. 

    Crucially, this group does not distinguish between those admitted because of severe illness, later found to be caused by the virus, and those in hospital for different reasons who might otherwise never have known that they had picked it up. -Telegraph

    In June, UK health officials instructed NHS trusts to provide “a breakdown of the current stock of Covid patients” between those who were hospitalized primarily for Covid and those admitted for other reasons. Thus far, the NHS has failed to publish this now-leaked information.

    Breaking it down, out of more than 780 hospitalizations dated last Thursday, 44% tested positive within 14 days prior to admission, while 43% tested positive within two days of admission, and 13% tested positive ‘in the days and weeks that followed’ – including those likely to have caught the virus in the hospital.

    “Experts said the high number of cases being detected belatedly – at a time when PCR tests were widely available – suggested many such patients had been admitted for other reasons,” according to the report.

    “This data is incredibly important, and it should be published on an ongoing basis,” said Prof Carl Heneghan, director of the Center for Evidence-Based Medicine at the University of Oxford. “When people hear about hospitalizations with Covid, they will assume that Covid is the likely cause, but this data shows something quite different – this is about Covid being detected after tests were looking for it.”

    Heneghan has urged UK officials to be more transparent with this data – including whether or not the virus was the primary cause of hospital admission.

    “This needs to be fixed as a matter of urgency,” he said, adding that the currently published data could lead the public “towards false conclusions,” which exaggerate the true level of pressure on the UK medical system.

    “Nearly 18 months into the Covid crisis, it is absurd that data breaking down hospital admissions still isn’t publicly available on a regular basis,” said Sir Graham Brady, the chairman of the 1922 committee of Tory MPs. “Counting all patients who test positive as Covid hospitalisations is inevitably misleading and gives a false picture of the continuing health impact of the virus.”

    Greg Clark, the chairman of Commons science and technology select committee, on Monday night said he would write to Sajid Javid, the Health Secretary, asking him to publish the breakdown on a regular basis following The Telegraph’s disclosure. 

    If hospitalisations from Covid are a key determinant of how concerned we should be, and how quickly restrictions should be lifted, it’s important that the data is not presented in a way that could lead to the wrong conclusions being drawn,” he said. 

    “While some of these people may be being admitted due to Covid, we currently do not know how many. And for those who are not, there is a big distinction between people who are admitted because of Covid and those are in for something else but have Covid in such a mild form that it was not the cause of their hospitalisation.” 

    The leaked statistics come from NHS daily situation reports, collected by all hospital trusts in England. -Telegraph

    “It creates an impression that all these people are going into hospital with Covid, and that simply is not the case. People are worried and scared and not really understanding the true picture – that is what I find despicable,” one NHS data expert told the Telegraph.

    Wonder how many US Covid hospitalizations were only diagnosed post-admission, keeping in mind of course that US hospitals are paid more for Covid patients under the CARES Act.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/27/2021 – 00:00

  • Cincinnati Tops List Of Cities Where Renters Can Afford To Live Alone In 2021: Report
    Cincinnati Tops List Of Cities Where Renters Can Afford To Live Alone In 2021: Report

    Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times,

    Cincinnati has once again topped the list of major U.S. cities where renters can afford to live alone, according to a recent report.

    SmartAsset, an online resource for personal financial advice, said in its most recent annual report on the most affordable cities for solo renters that Ohio’s third most populous city not only has the fifth-lowest average rent ($612 per month) for a unit with fewer than two bedrooms, but it also offers renters relatively low living costs at $22,721 per year.

    With two cities each in the top 10, Nebraska and Kentucky were the top states for solo renters, according to the study. The two Nebraska cities—Omaha and Lincoln—and the two from Kentucky—Lexington and Louisville—had an average rent cost for units with fewer than two bedrooms of $724 per month, while the average annual cost of living was less than $24,000 per year.

    The study compared the 100 largest cities in the United States across five metrics, including average rent for smaller units—the kind preferred by solo renters—as well as the cost of living, median earnings, unemployment rates, and the percentage of housing units with fewer than two bedrooms.

    Cincinnati, which took the top spot for the fourth consecutive year, had an unemployment rate of 4.6 percent in April 2021, while more than 28 percent of its occupied housing units have fewer than two bedrooms, according to the report.

    According to SmartAsset, the 10 top cities, ranked in order, where renters can afford to live alone are Cincinnati; Minneapolis; Omaha; St. Louis; Lexington; Lincoln; Pittsburgh; Louisville; Tulsa, Oklahoma; and Boise, Idaho.

    Top 10 major U.S. cities ranked according to affordability for solo renters in 2021. (Table: ET; Data source: SmartAsset)

    The report comes as the cost of renting a home continues to rise in the United States, as more people return to work in metro areas, boosting demand for rental apartments. While rents dropped significantly across the country during the pandemic, as of June, the median national rent was up by 8.4 percent year-over-year, according to Apartment List, an online rental marketplace.

    The most recent inflation data provided by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (pdf), released on July 13, showed hotter-than-expected June inflation, with the consumer price index (CPI) rising by 0.9 percent month-over-month in June, hitting at a 13-year high. In the 12 months through June, inflation was up by 5.4 percent, the largest 12-month increase in the measure since 2008.

    Republicans, and some economists, have been raising the alarm about inflation, while the Biden administration has insisted the upward price pressures are transitory and will fade as the pandemic-related supply chain dislocations get ironed out.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 23:40

  • BLM Group Demands White Parents 'Pledge' Not To Send Their Kids To Ivy League Schools So Black Students Can Attend Instead
    BLM Group Demands White Parents ‘Pledge’ Not To Send Their Kids To Ivy League Schools So Black Students Can Attend Instead

    A Texas Black Lives Matter group called Dallas Justice Now (DJN) has sent a letter to white Democrats in two wealthy Texas neighborhoods demanding that white parents pledge not to let their kids attend Ivy League schools so that black students can attend instead.

    We are writing to you because we understand you are white and live within the Highland Park Independent School District and thus benefit from enormous privileges taken at the expense of communities of color,” the letter begins.

    “You live in the whitest and wealthiest neighborhood in Dallas. Whether you know it or not, you earned or inherited your money through oppressing people of color. However, it is also our understanding that you are a Democrat and supporter of the Black Lives Matter movement which makes you one of our white allies and puts you in a position to help correct these cruel injustices. We need you to step up and back up your words with action and truly sacrifice to make our segregated city more just.

    We are asking you to pledge that your children will not apply or attend any Ivy League School or US News & World Report Top 50 School.”

    For those without children under the age of 18, the letter asks white Democrats to “hold your white privileged friends, family, and neighbors with children to this standard,” as “These schools have afforded white families privilege for generations.”

    According to the Daily Mail, DJN appears to have been recently organized.

    DJN said in a press release it has sent the pledge out to the ’95 percent white Highland Park and University Park neighborhoods’.

    Data from the US Census Bureau shows 88 percent of residents in University Park are white, with just 1.5 percent of people being black or African American. In Highland Park, 91 percent are white and less than 1 percent black or African American. 

    Both areas are among the richest in the state, with residents enjoying a median household income above $200,000 and Highland Park ranking in the 10 wealthiest communities in America back in 2018. 

    The average house price stood at $1.3 million in University Park and $1.5 million in Highland Park between 2015 and 2019, with some mansions along the iconic Beverly Drive currently on the market for $10 million. 

    The group has threatened on their website to publicly doxx white people who haven’t signed the pledge.

    “Many wealthy white folks including those who live in the 95% white Park Cities think they are allies because they put up a Black Lives Matter sign or parade black people like animals at their charity galas that somehow they aren’t part of the problem,” DJN spokeswoman and founder, Michele Washington, told Dallas City Wire.

    “Since their creation, top educational institutions have been vehicles for the perpetuation of white supremacy,” she added. “Ivy League and other Top 50 Schools provide the best vehicles for upward mobility, particularly for marginalized communities. Yet, a vast majority of the spots at these institutions are taken by wealthy white folks.”

    Maybe DJN could send black parents a letter encouraging their kids to study for 3 hours a day and forego a social life so they can get into Ivy League schools by themselves?

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 23:19

  • Unidentified Aerial Phenomenon Sighting In South Carolina Stirs MUFON Interest
    Unidentified Aerial Phenomenon Sighting In South Carolina Stirs MUFON Interest

    Authored by Matt McGregor via The Epoch Times,

    While at a stoplight in Goose Creek, South Carolina, Shaneika Joyner and her daughter watched an amorphous, cloud-like body glide across the sky.

    “Is it a ship?” Joyner’s daughter asked in the video, filmed early in July.

    Joyner told The Epoch Times she watched it for several seconds before she began recording it with her phone.

    Though the video only lasted 45 seconds, she said the object was in their line of sight for around 2 minutes, adding that the video doesn’t accurately portray the size, which she said appeared to be much larger when seen with the naked eye.

    As it disappeared behind a tree, traffic going to wait, so they had to go.

    Although only one object can be seen clearly in the video, Joyner said “there were more.”

    The other two, she said, were moving too rapidly to track.

    “When I look back at the video, there are three, but the other two are moving so fast that you’ve got to really look at it, and play the video back to catch them,” Joyner said.

    She’s heard suggestions as to what it could have been, such as a large, plastic bag, or a flock of birds, but Joyner, having seen it with own eyes, maintains uncertainty.

    “I have never seen anything like that before,” Joyner said. “I still don’t know what it was.”

    Mutual UFO Network

    Cheryl Ann Gilmore, state director for the South Carolina chapter of the Mutual UFO Network, or MUFON, told The Epoch Times that in July they received six reports of unidentified aerial phenomenon (UAP), which is the updated term for unidentified flying objects (UFOs), with a current total of 69 reports to date.

    MUFON is a multi-national nonprofit organization that investigates and researches UAP.

    Established in 1969 and headquartered in Cincinnati, Ohio, it has chapters in each state, as well as in 43 countries.

    Gilmore, who’s investigated “hundreds of cases over the years,” is no stranger to Joyner’s experience.

    Her interest in the field of Ufology began in 1959.

    The Flying Saucer Kid

    While walking through a pasture with her cousin, Gilmore, then 14, and her cousin, witnessed a silver disk quietly hovering against the blue sky.

    When they ran back home, she told her grandmother and aunt.

    “I can remember my aunt saying, ‘Oh yea, that’s one of those flying saucers,’” Gilmore said.

    From there, she began her research, though back then not much was written about UFOs.

    That next day in school, she told her science teacher that she had something to share.

    When he asked if what she had to say had anything to do with science, she said—categorizing the subject in her mind as astronomy—that it did.

    “I can remember to this day clear as a bell, he sat on the edge of his desk with one foot on the floor and the other leg swinging, and I was about halfway back in the class,” Gilmore recollected.

    When she told everyone what she saw, they laughed, as did the teacher, Gilmore said.

    It was then that her nickname became the Flying Saucer Kid, a name that followed her until high school graduation.

    “You grow a thick skin after a while,” she said.

    A Sighting in Gaffney

    At MUFON, Gilmore reviews cases and then assigns them to field investigators.

    If one’s not available, she’ll do it herself.

    In winter 2000, a couple reported that they were driving down the highway when they saw a “translucent balloon, with sparklers,” fly over power lines and into a wooded gulley.

    Though there had been a freeze, the trees caught on fire and the object charred the ground.

    With boots on the ground, Gilmore—a retired emergency medical technician—and her team investigated the site after the fire department cleared it.

    She recollected the fire chief being perplexed by the burned ground.

    “It had been icy and raining, so they were amazed,” Gilmore said.

    Using a Geiger counter, they tested the area for radiation—finding none—and took soil samples, revealing nothing unusual.

    If there were any artifacts from the crash, they were missing when her team investigated.

    She classified the case as an “unknown,” determining that it might have been a magnesium balloon that had escaped a nearby college science experiment.

    It was a good case for the deployment of all resources and training, even though it turned up nothing conclusive.

    UAP Shapes

    When one reports a UAP to MUFON, there is a multiple-choice option on the form for choosing the shape of the craft seen: triangle, round, rectangle, or cigar-shaped.

    However, the most reported objects aren’t craft, but what she called orbs, something she said is a global phenomenon.

    “Nobody can figure out what in thunder they are,” she said, adding that the common trajectory of an orb is to “come to a dead stop, then shoot into another direction.”

    “There have been 13 cases of orbs this year, and ten of spheres, which are either orange, clear, or white,” Gilmore said. “We get a lot of those over the Myrtle Beach area, but we also take into account the Shaw Air Force Base in Sumter.”

    Reverse engineering of recovered UAP craft for military and other technological purposes is one of the theories behind what is seen today. The theory was strengthened by the late Col. Philip Corso’s 1997 autobiography, “The Day After Roswell,” in which he alleges that when he was a member of President Dwight D. Eisenhower’s National Security Council and head of the Foreign Technological desk at the U.S. Army’s Research and Development department, he headed the Army’s reverse-engineering project that took recovered technology from the 1947 Roswell crash and seeded the information out to major corporate firms.

    Using the provided information, these firms were able to manufacture “integrated circuit chips, fiber optics, laser technology, and super-tenacity fibers.”

    The Intelligence Report

    In June, the Office of the Director on National Intelligence (DNI) presented a nine-page report on UAPs before Congress.

    According to its conclusion in the executive summary, because of the “limited amount of high-quality reporting” on UAPs, the DNI said it can’t “draw firm conclusions,” but that UAPs “clearly pose a safety of flight issue and may pose a challenge to U.S. national security.”

    The investigation relied on reports that occurred between 2004 and 2021 that were recorded by “multiple sensors, to include radar, infrared, electro-optical, weapon seekers, and visual observation.”

    “It’s pretty much what I expected it to be,” Gilmore said on the report. “No commitment. It could be this; it could be that. It went the way I expected it would go.”

    An Easier Conversation to Have

    Still, the report—in its acknowledgement of not knowing—is considered progress by many in the field, given that for years, just bringing the subject up could lead to what Gilmore experienced in the science classroom back in 1959: ridicule.

    On Joyner’s sighting, after Gilmore watched the video she said, “Interesting.”

    “In one frame it looks like a plane in nosedive coming down at a steep angle, but then, it starts morphing,” Gilmore said. “It looks like a cloud, but it’s not moving like the other clouds.”

    A pair of binoculars might have ended the mystery, Gilmore said, but she ruled out the likeliness of the nebulous object being bugs or a flock of birds.

    “I get the impression it’s morphing from one thing to the other, but it could be a large bag in an upper air current getting turned and twisted,” Gilmore said. “When it goes down through the trees, it is almost like a disk shape.”

    She uses the word “morphing” because once a person reported what was initially perceived to be a commercial jet transform into a flying saucer, then back to a commercial jet, she explained.

    For Joyner’s sighting, Gilmore considers the backdrop: the clouds, the movement of the object in relation to them, how it appears to be changing shapes, and the fact that the Joint Base Charleston—the U.S. Air Force facility that operates in conjunction with the Charleston International Airport—is nearby.

    “This is really hard to discern, and I can’t give any definite answer,” Gilmore said. “It seems to be moving, tumbling, and changing shapes, but it could be an illusion.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 22:52

  • Goldman Applies For Blockchain And DeFi ETF
    Goldman Applies For Blockchain And DeFi ETF

    Just days after we learned that Goldman is quietly clearing and settling cryptocurrency exchange-traded products for some hedge fund clients in Europe, on Monday the bank which has been increasingly ramping up its exposure to crypto currencies in recent months, filed an application with the SEC for a crypto ETF, and not just any ETF but one that would offer exposure to public companies in decentralized finance (defi) and blockchain around the globe.

    Yes, Goldman very unironically wants to offer clients exposure to the same defi technology whose only purpose is to make banks such as Goldman Sachs obsolete by decentralizing all financial transformation functions and services.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to the the filing, the fund will invest at least 80% of its assets (exclusive of collateral held from securities lending) in securities included in the Solactive Decentralized Finance and Blockchain Index, which will deliver exposure to companies that are aligned with two key themes, the implementation of Blockchain Technology and the Digitalization of Finance.

    • Blockchain Technology is defined as the technology underlying distributed ledgers applicable to payments, currencies and other fields and  industries that depend on a trusted intermediary. 
    • Digitalization of Finance is defined as the digital transformation of traditional financial services, including the support and delivery of payments, transaction services, lending and insurance.

    “The Goldman Sachs Innovate DeFi and Blockchain Equity ETF (the ‘Fund’) seeks to provide investment results that closely correspond, before fees and expenses, to the performance of the Solactive Decentralized Finance and Blockchain Index (the ‘Index’),” the filing said, adding that it would focus at markets in Australia, Canada, France, Germany, Hong Kong, Japan, South Korea, Switzerland, the Netherlands, the United Kingdom and the United States.

    While it is unclear which names will comprise the Solactive Decentralized Finance and Blockchain Index, a quick look at the Solactive Blockchain Technology Performance-Index reveals the following constituents. One can hope that Solactive and/or Goldman are a bit more selective in their stock picking.

    With its filing, Goldman joins a long line of Wall Street entities hoping to be the first to market with a blockchain ETF. According to CoinDesk, the SEC is currently reviewing over a dozen bitcoin ETF applications and has delayed decisions on several of them. And while both VanEck and WisdomTree have filed for Ethereum ETFs, Goldman’s filing is the first DeFi-related ETF application.

    Goldman’s filing comes just days after Goldman’s inaugural survey of more than 150 family office decision makers found that only about 15% of respondents globally have indicated to have existing investments in cryptocurrencies, while almost half are considering initiating exposure not only to cryptocurrencies but also to innovation in the digital assets ecosystems through private investments.

    “Of the approximately two-thirds of family offices that are actively thinking about an increase in inflation, digital assets emerged as one portfolio solution. Currency debasement has also been top of mind for about 40% of global respondents, with more than 40% of the subset indicating they would consider investing in digital assets

    And sure enough, if clients want exposure to digital assets, Goldman is happy to deliver it to them.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 22:15

  • Here's Why the New COVID Relief Program Will Turn The Working Class Into Serfs…
    Here’s Why the New COVID Relief Program Will Turn The Working Class Into Serfs…

    Authored by Chris Macintosh via InternationalMan.com,

    This work was strictly voluntary, but any animal that absented himself from it would have his rations reduced by half.”

    George Orwell, Animal Farm

    Everything is now political.

    ESG, climate change, racism, gender, vaccines. Ask yourself why is it that  all of these things are non-negotiable? Why can’t they be discussed? Why is there no room for dissent, questioning, and discourse?

    Something is amiss. Think about it.

    The pointy shoes at the IMF tell us that the pandemic will cost the world $28 trillion by 2025, which means it’ll be much, much more.

    The truth is the pandemic isn’t the cause. The lockdowns, however, are.

    Understanding what exactly this “pandemic” is, is really critical to understanding everything taking place globally and in financial markets both now and in the future.

    This virus is statistically as dangerous to the population as a bad flu. “No, not possible, Chris. Look at the response by governments. Surely that’s disproportionate.” Yes, it is, but there is a reason.

    To understand the answer to this more fully we need to go back to 2008 and then walk forward tracking the unfolding events.

    Following the housing crash and subsequent banking crisis QE was brought in as the tool to “fix” what could have and should have been fixed by letting the banks fail and putting on trial and jailing Wall Street bankers as well as regulatory agencies who were all willfully and knowingly involved in a massive fraud.

    The economy has been hanging by a thread ever since.

    Then in 2019 the money market seized up with the overnight lending rate shooting up, causing the pointy shoes at the Fed (and the ECB in coordination with the BOE, too) to step in to “fix” it.

    They printed upwards of 100 million smackaroos PER NIGHT.

    Bankers should have been screaming… but they’re not. Why?

    Since the beginning of 2020 the major central banks around the world have expanded the money supply by anywhere from 30% to… how do I even say this without my throat catching? Better yet a visual to display the situation.

    The central banks would have struggled to do this without drawing attention to their scandalous behaviour if it weren’t for the scapegoat of Covid. “This is unprecedented,” they tell us. “We have to do something,” they say.

    To convince the public of the absolute necessity for the tyranny now imposed, they have used every lying trick in the book, and when found out and revealed quickly and mercilessly acted to ensure the truth is “canceled”.

    Breach of community guidelines. No mention made of what this community is or what the guidelines are. The level of distraction availed by the Covid fraud is breathtaking and has allowed for the most egregious transfer of wealth in history.

    This money has been printed not to provide “covid relief” as is being sold to a gullible public but to bail out the banks in a more palatable fashion.

    If direct bailouts were enacted, the outrage would have likely been of far greater magnitude than the 1% protests that followed the 2008 debacle. Instead, they chose to funnel the capital directly to the consumer.

    Make no mistake about it though, without this we’d be in a full-blown banking crisis. This is why we don’t have banks failing and the fat cats on Wall Street chewing their fingernails.

    Less than 3% of money supply is in physical format. The balance is all debt-based money. Money is brought into circulation by the creation of debt. This debt burden has grown to uncontrollable eye watering levels. It will collapse and was in the process of doing so back in 2008. It was about to do so again in 2019 when the money market seized up.

    The desperate need to hold this ball of wax together was why in 2014, bank bailouts not being enough, they enacted laws to allow bank bail-ins. Meaning that they can (and will when necessary) seize customer deposits in order to bail out the bankers.

    That it is legalized theft won’t matter. As is always the case the average Joe has no idea about any of this and gleefully plonks his hard-earned wages in the bank believing that he is a customer and that the bank is there to serve him. Customers of Cypriot banks thought the same thing right up until they received a shocking jolt of reality back in 2013.

    One thing to remember is that you can’t have a collapse like this without taking the currency down with it. Never happened before in history and it isn’t going to happen this time around either.

    The coming problem is this. We have a truly monstrous increase in money supply, and if we open the global economy back up, we’re going to then get an increase in velocity. I.N.F.L.A.T.I.O.N.

    While the money conjured up and given to the banks in 2008 led to an explosion in “growth assets,” the money now printed has been fed to the general populace (who then don’t default on their debts to the bankers).

    It solves two problems for the pointy shoes. Firstly, it ensures the bankers don’t go bankrupt. And secondly, it turns a working class into a slave class.

    You see, when you work for a living and vote for your government, they are reliant on you. But when you don’t work for a living and are reliant on your government then you are a slave to them. The roles are completely reversed.

    To sum it up

    We have entered a period of time where ideologies are driving literally everything.

    Ideas and opinions are becoming weaponized.

    What is important to understand is that this absolutely is and will drive capital flows more than ever.

    This will impact economies and sectors.

    This is the fourth turning, and it will run until it collapses or implodes on itself.

    *  *  *

    The Fed has already pumped enormous distortions into the economy and inflated an “everything bubble.” The next round of money printing is likely to bring the situation to a breaking point. If you want to navigate the complicated economic and political situation that is unfolding, then you need to see this newly released video from Doug Casey and his team. In it, Doug reveals what you need to know, and how these dangerous times could impact your wealth. Click here to watch it now.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 21:55

  • 59 Million Americans Prohibited From Buying High-End Dell Gaming PCs
    59 Million Americans Prohibited From Buying High-End Dell Gaming PCs

    Approximately 59 million Americans spanning five states can’t buy Dell’s high-end Alienware brand desktop PCs “due to power consumption regulations.”

    When one goes to the Dell Alienware online configurator to buy an Aurora R12 gaming desktop, a special notice appears which reads:

    This product cannot be shipped to the states of California, Colorado, Hawaii, Oregon, Vermont or Washington due to power consumption regulations adopted by those states. Any orders placed that are bound for those states will be canceled.

    Screenshot dell.com

    Among other state policies, the prohibition puts Dell in compliance with California’s Energy Commission regulations which took effect on July 1. Under the new guidelines, annual energy consumption cannot consume more than 75 kWh/year, and cannot exceed an “expandability score” (ES) of 690, which includes idle power consumption.

    In order to comply with California’s requirement, Alienware now offers a special version which adheres to the new regulations.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 21:35

  • Record Coral Cover Of Great Barrier Reef Shames Climate Alarmists, Media
    Record Coral Cover Of Great Barrier Reef Shames Climate Alarmists, Media

    Authored by Peter Ridd via ClimateChangeDispatch.com,

    The annual data on coral cover for the Great Barrier Reef, produced by the Australian Institute of Marine Science, was released on Monday showing the amount of coral on the reef is at record high levels.

    Record high, despite all the doom stories by our reef science and management institutions.

    Like all other data on the reef, this shows it is in robust health.

    For example, coral growth rates have, if anything, increased over the past 100 years, and measurements of farm pesticides reaching the reef show levels so low that they cannot be detected with the most ultra-sensitive equipment.

    This data is good news. It could hardly be better.

    This data series, which started in 1985, is taken from the Australian Institute of Marine Science’s yearly long-term monitoring of the Reef. Source: Peter Ridd

    But somehow, our science organizations have convinced the world that the reef is on its last legs. How has this happened?

    One reason is that occasionally colossal amounts of coral are killed, mostly by cyclones, but also by the crown of thorns starfish and bleaching.

    So the media, with its predilection for bad news, can be fed a regular diet of doom. Our scientists are always happy to oblige.

    The quiet recovery is generally downplayed or ignored.

    Growing up in Innisfail, adjacent to the reef, in the early 1970s, I recall the initial doom stories about the reef.

    The scientific study of the reef had only just started, and plagues of starfish that eat the coral had just been discovered and were making headlines worldwide. The reef had, supposedly, only a decade left.

    It was reasonable in the ’70s to be concerned about these plagues and they ultimately precipitated AIMS’ long-term monitoring of coral and starfish in the ’80s.

    I was working at AIMS when this important work started, and it is interesting to look back on what has changed.

    The coral cover is no less, the number of starfish is no more, but the number of scientists and managers working on the reef has exploded. Perhaps this is the problem.

    In 50 years we have now learned a great deal about the cycles of coral death and regrowth. The data reported every year by AIMS shows all areas go through these cycles every decade or two.

    Remarkably, even the excellent news of record coral still has the scientists pessimistic. The reef is, apparently, still doomed from climate change and this is just a temporary reprieve. How well does the data need to be to make them admit the reef is fine?

    The science institutions have been claiming that there have been three disastrous bleaching events in the past five years, which does not accord with the latest statistics.

    Record coral cover means there was no disaster on the reef. The only disaster is the quality assurance at the science organizations.

    An examination of the data shows that, while there have been three events, they occurred in largely different regions in each year. The reef has thus effectively had one major bleaching event in the past five years and the previous major event was in 2002.

    So the reef has had roughly one event in 15 years, and most of the coral on the reef did not bleach and most that bleached did not die. Therefore, it is not surprising that the reef is in good shape.

    The science institutions have been caught out by their own deception. They exaggerated the bleaching events – as usual.

    Luckily, we have the AIMS long-term coral monitoring surveys, which are done professionally with good-quality protocols, to demonstrate the state of the reef.

    The bad news is that the record high coral cover means it is likely that coral cover will decline in the next few years.

    Prepare for the headlines saying the reef has lost much of its coral and is indicative of climate change and farmers polluting the reef. And the reef will be predicted to be gone by 2050 – or whenever.

    When will these doom stories about the reef, which have been going for 50 years, cease? Will it be like the Ancient Greek legend of Prometheus, who was chained alive to a rock so that his liver could be eaten by an eagle, only for the liver to grow overnight so that it could be eaten again and again? Will the agony ever end?

    According to legend, Heracles saved Prometheus. Who will be our Heracles, and support a better quality assurance of the science?

    It should be the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority, but so far it has not been interested. The various ministers could also take an interest.

    In the meantime, don’t forget we have record-high levels of coral. It is time to stop scaring the children with doom stories about the reef.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 21:15

  • Afghan Civilian Casualties Hit Record High Amid Rapid Taliban Gains
    Afghan Civilian Casualties Hit Record High Amid Rapid Taliban Gains

    A United Nations monitor issued figures on Monday showing that civilian casualties in Afghanistan have soared over the period the United States began rapidly withdrawing forces ahead of Biden’s declared full exit, which is to be accomplished before the symbolic date of September 11. 

    Civilian casualties in the war-torn country hit record highs for the first half of the year, the UN Assistance Mission in Afghanistan (UNAMA) said in its report. “In May and June alone, when the Taliban began its surge of attacks, 783 civilians were killed and 1,609 were injured,” the group indicated according to The Hill, which notes further: “In just those two months, the civilian casualties neared the total from January through April, when 876 civilians were killed and 1,915 were injured, the mission added.”

    Via Reuters

    Just last week Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman Gen. Mark Milley admitted the Taliban now has “strategic momentum” against Afghan national forces. He said the Taliban holds roughly half of all the country’s districts, yet also held out hope for national forces’ ability to push the Islamic fighters back, saying “I don’t think the end game is yet written.” Washington has lately pledged continuing air strikes in support of the national army.

    The new UN report indicates the majority of civilian casualties were caused by the Taliban, the Afghan ISIS branch, and other terrorist insurgents, while a big portion were also caused by being “caught in the crossfire”.

    The Hill summarizes of the report’s findings:

    • More than 60 percent of civilian casualties documented by the U.N. mission were caused by “anti-government elements,” which includes the Taliban, the Afghan branch of ISIS and other “undetermined” groups, according to the report.
    • The leading cause of civilian casualties was improvised explosive devices (IEDs) used by the Taliban and ISIS, according to the report. Pressure-plate IEDs used mostly by the Taliban have killed and injured 42 percent more civilians this year than the same period last year.
    • Another 33 percent of the civilian casualties were people caught in ground fighting between the Taliban and Afghan forces, the report said.
    • The number of women and girls killed and injured nearly doubled this year compared to last, the report added.

    President Biden in his big early July Afghan exit speech said he believed it’s “highly unlikely” the Afghan government will ultimately retain “unified” control of the country.

    Since that July 8 speech the terror group has continued advancing at lightning pace, lately also with the majority of border areas in Taliban control (the Taliban itself boasts control of at least 90% of major border crossings as areas). The Taliban has also lately overrun prisons where they’ve freed hundreds or possibly thousands of detained jihadists which have rejoined Taliban ranks.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 20:55

  • America Is A Moral Cesspool, And Student Loans Prove It
    America Is A Moral Cesspool, And Student Loans Prove It

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    If America somehow managed to educate millions of college students without burdening them with $2 trillion in debt in 1993, why is it now “impossible” to do so, even as America’s wealth and gross national product (GDP) have both rocketed higher over the past 27 years?

    Predators thrive on Americans’ short memories. Student loans in their present scale did not exist prior to 1994. According to the Federal Reserve FRED database, the student loan balance was zero in 1993.

    From zero in 1993 to $1.728 trillion in 2021: this is the predatory financialization of higher education which has enriched lenders, Wall Street and the Higher Education Cartel. As I’ve noted before, such parasitic rapaciousness would have been criminal a few generations ago; now it’s cheered as a reliable source of profits by Wall Street and treated as business as usual by the corporate-owned media.

    If America somehow managed to educate millions of college students without burdening them with $2 trillion in debt in 1993, why is it now “impossible” to do so, even as America’s wealth and gross national product (GDP) have both rocketed higher over the past 27 years?

    America is now a moral cesspool, and student loans prove it. Note that the $1.728 trillion isn’t the entire load of debt crushing students; that’s only the securitized student loans. Wily sharpsters have found all sorts of private-debt niches which they sell as “student loans” but which are actually consumer loans. Then there’s the credit card debt from card issuers giving students “student-only cards.” Add it all up and the total likely exceeds $2 trillion.

    Monopolies, cartels, profiteers and insiders always have a raft of excuses and justifications for their exploitation of the powerless, and all those profiting from the $2 trillion have the usual excuses plus a novel set of noble-sounding academic rationalizations.

    Journalist Matt Taibbi lays waste to one slice of the student loan racket in The Trillion-Dollar Lie (courtesy of correspondent Joel W.), the legal foundation of the entire parasitic swindle: “students can’t escape student loans in bankruptcy court.” But suppose the legal edifice were to recognize that universities are not “non-profits” but are instead a racketeering cartel?

    While crying poor, universities have pursued a construction boom of trophy buildings without precedent and piled up slush funds with hundreds of millions of dollars extracted from student debt-serfs. If this doesn’t make your blood boil, then you must be swimming laps in America’s moral cesspool, praising the putrid stench as “the smell of money.”

    It doesn’t have to be this way. Way back in 2012 I laid out a way to offer 4-year university degrees for 10% of the current cost (minus living expenses, which accrue whether you’re a student or not) in my book The Nearly Free University. There are models which would produce better educational results at a fraction of the current bloated cost.

    To all those swimming laps in America’s moral cesspool, a few words of warning:

    1. America has run out of powerless people who can be exploited and turned into debt-serfs.

    2. The pendulum of exploitation, racketeering and greed that’s been pushed to near-infinity is about to swing to the other extreme. The banquet of consequences will soon be served, and the doors to the banquet hall will be locked. The courses in karma and Divine Retribution will be especially enlightening.

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    A Hacker’s Teleology: Sharing the Wealth of Our Shrinking Planet (Kindle $8.95, print $20, audiobook $17.46) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World (Kindle $5, print $10, audiobook) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($5 (Kindle), $10 (print), ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 20:35

  • "Vehicles All Over" – Freak Sandstorm Causes 22-Vehicle Pileup In Utah
    “Vehicles All Over” – Freak Sandstorm Causes 22-Vehicle Pileup In Utah

    A freak sandstorm two hours south of Salt Lake City caused a deadly 22-vehicle pileup on Sunday, according to the Utah Department of Public Safety (DPS). 

    The accident occurred on Interstate 15 in Millard County on Sunday afternoon. Twenty-two vehicles were involved in the crash “after high winds caused a sand or dust storm and impaired visibility on the roadway,” said DPS. 

    The “series of crashes” resulted in seven deaths and ten others injured, DPS said, adding that “some children” were among the deaths. 

    “The Utah Highway Patrol summoned troopers from Richfield and Beaver to assist,” DPS said. “Multiple ground and air ambulances also responded to transport victims.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     Sgt. Cameron Roden with the Utah Highway Patrol told local news KUTV that he “can’t remember in recent memory of (a crash) being this large, with this many vehicles and this many fatalities.” 

    “We have vehicles all over. Several vehicles tried to swerve off the roadway. We have vehicles that are flipped up on their sides,” he added. “One of the vehicles that was pulling a trailer, the trailer has pretty much completely been destroyed and is on the freeway.”

    “We’re stunned and saddened by the horrific accidents in Millard County,” Utah Gov. Spencer Cox said in a statement on Twitter. “We fervently pray for the loved ones of those who perished and for those fighting for their lives.” 

    The sandstorm comes as Utah is experiencing dangerous drought conditions and sweltering heat.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 20:15

  • Leveling Down To Utopia
    Leveling Down To Utopia

    Authored by Caroline Breashears via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Decades ago, F. A. Hayek warned that socialism was the Road to Serfdom. He explained not only why central planning was impossible but how the attempt destroys morality: planning leads to misery and increasing control, then totalitarianism, the corruption of truth, and finally even the ability to articulate it. 

    Today we are heading down a similar path, recast as the freeway toward “equity” and “justice.” No student should be forced to repay loans, no retiree should be deprived of free hearing aids, and no Asian-Americans should have an advantage in college admissions based on outstanding records.  

    This is not, we are reassured by Democratic Socialists, the route mapped by the old, mean authoritarians, but a new way toward equal outcomes planned by the Enlightened and the Majority.  

    Never mind how slim the Congressional Majority might be. Never mind that some of the Enlightened promoting equity are unable to master basic grammar (“CRT is a verb”), much less math. These experts know how to fix things.

    Let’s grant the possibility that they do. Let’s grant that democratically elected officials could magically solve the knowledge problem and lead us down this road in which equal outcome would follow equal outcome until no disparities existed in health, wealth, or achievement. Where would we be? What would we be?

    One answer appears in “The New Utopia” (1891), Jerome K. Jerome’s response to similar socialist visions in the late nineteenth century. Jerome captures not only the appeal of those visions but their inevitable result: the leveling down of the human race.

    Equitable Dreams, Nightmarish Results

    Jerome’s tale begins with delicious irony. While savoring stuffed pheasant and a bottle of Chateau Lafitte at the Nationalist Socialist Club, the narrator learns of “the coming equality of man and the nationalization of capital.” With what Hayek would later call fatal conceit, the narrator’s friends declare that while the world had been going wrong for millennia, “in the course of the next few years or so, they mean to put it right.”

    Back home, the narrator reflects on the beauty of this vision: 

    There would be no more of this struggling and striving against each other, no more jealousy, no more disappointment, no more fear of poverty! The State would take charge of us from the hour we were born until we died. . . . There would be no more hard work . . . no poor to pity, no rich to envy. . . nothing to think about except the glorious destiny (whatever that might be) of Humanity!

    The narrator, in a satirical twist on Edward Bellamy’s Looking Backward (1888), falls asleep and awakens a thousand years later to the New Utopia. Gone is the “massive wealth and income inequality” censured by socialists then and millionaire socialist Senator Sanders now. Everything is equal.

    That’s right: everything. As the narrator’s guide explains, to prevent inequalities, every person sleeps in a block of a thousand citizens, rises at the same time, dons the same grey ensemble, and eats the same vegetarian meal. If Pheasant and a glass of Bordeaux are forbidden, at least one can savor the equal privation of 999 roommates.  

    Furthermore, everyone’s hair is the same (black, of equal length). “What would become of our equality if one man or woman were allowed to swagger about in golden hair, while another had to put up with carrots?” the narrator’s guide demands. “Men have not only got to be equal in these happy days, but to look it, as far as can be.”  

    And when cosmetic adjustments are insufficient, bodies must be altered, not simply handicapped as in Kurt Vonnegut’s later “Harrison Bergeron” (1961). The government equalizes strong, handsome men by lopping off their arms, while surgically softening the brains of the intelligent.  

    Such strategies are certainly more direct than current attempts to eliminate disparities in education: eliminating accelerated classes, reducing standards for college programs, handicapping certain races in college admissions. Jerome’s tale is also more direct in acknowledging the envy driving such assaults on excellence.

    In the New Utopia, however, the narrator’s guide admits they have few problems with superiority anymore: “I have sometimes thought . . . that it was a pity we could not level up sometimes, instead of levelling down; but, of course, that’s impossible.”

    The Tyranny of the Majority

    Indeed. To level up would require individual thought and achievement, impossibilities in a society determined to minimize hurt feelings and maximize the majority’s power.

    For make no mistake: in Jerome’s tale, every decision is made by vote. “The MAJORITY” determines what is correct, even if it means literally cutting people down to size. As the guide explains, “A minority has NO rights.”   

    And that majority never ceases to find sources of envy and discomfort. Once everyone was equal in wealth and appearance, sports had to go, because “competition led to inequality.” Then any books reminding people of “the wrong notions” had to be destroyed, just as educators drop Shakespeare and Homer today. New art and literature were banned, too, “as such things tended to undermine the principles of equality. They made men think, and the men that thought grew cleverer than those that did not want to think.” 

    In fact, people did not want to do much of anything and made sure their neighbors didn’t, either. Even marriage was banned for its “antisocialistic”– what the Smithsonian recently called “White”–tendencies: “Each house was a revolutionary centre for the propagation of individualism and personality.” 

    Waking Up to Life

    In such a “Utopia” without love or art or individuality, what is left? 

    Certainly not choice. The State manages all activities, from the propagation of the species (every spring, like cattle) to bathing, since unequal habits led to “two distinct classes, the Clean and the Dirty.” 

    Nor is progress conceivable. Apart from three hours of work a day, the citizens sit around discussing the Destiny of Humanity, which is “to go on being like we are now, only more so—everybody more equal . . . and everybody to have two votes instead of one.” 

    In fact, the narrator sees “a patient, almost pathetic, expression upon” all their faces. It then occurs to him why it was familiar: “It was just the quiet, troubled, wondering expression that I had always noticed upon the faces of the horses and oxen that we used to breed and keep in the old world.”  

    This is Jerome’s greatest insight: even if a society could miraculously create equal outcomes, the process of doing so would dehumanize the race. 

    The alternative is what the narrator faces when he awakens from the nightmare. Outside his window are men striving, “laughing, grieving, loving, doing wrong deeds, doing great deeds,—falling, struggling, helping one another—living!” It is these individual, human choices that make us alive.  

    As Hayek concludes in The Road to Serfdom, “A policy of freedom for the individual is the only truly progressive policy.” Even if the problems of planning could be solved, even if equality could be achieved through democracy, we would only be lumbering down a far worse path: the Road to Stupidity.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 19:55

  • "Sky Has Fallen" – Chinese Farmers Reel After Floodwaters Devastate Pig Herds
    “Sky Has Fallen” – Chinese Farmers Reel After Floodwaters Devastate Pig Herds

    A week later, after heavy rains hammered Henan province in central China, hog farmers in the pork-producing region are reeling over their herds drowning in floodwaters. There’s also a risk of the deadly pig disease African swine fever returning. 

    Small to medium-sized farmers have been severely impacted by floodwaters. 

    Reuters spoke with Chinese farmers who expressed despair after their pig herds drowned. 

    Chinese farmer Cheng said he’s been pulling out dead pigs lodged in mud after floodwaters devastated his property. He said at least 100 pigs had drowned so far.

    “I’m waiting for the water levels to go down to see what to do with the remaining pigs,” said the farmer from Wangfan village, who is located 55 north of Zhengzhou. 

    “They’ve been in the water for a few days now and can’t eat at all. I don’t think even one pig will be left.”

    Cheng is one of the many farmers in Henan that were heavily impacted by floodwaters. Not just livestock farms but also agricultural farms saw their fields flooded. 

    In an instant, we now have no way of surviving. We have no other skills. We have no more money to raise pigs again,” Cheng said, adding, “the sky has fallen.”

    China is still rebuilding its pig herds following African swine fever swept the country during 2018 and 2019. However, the latest floods could impact hog populations in the province.

    Now there’s a significant risk of an outbreak of African swine fever – floods increase the risk of disease as feces, blood, and tissue can transmit the virus. Contaminated feed and water can easily infect healthy hogs. 

    Henan province is the top wheat-producing province in the country, accounting for about 30% of output, and the second-largest hog producer. 

    There have also been logistical issues with transportation for farmers due to floodwaters destroying infrastructure in the province. 

    To sum up, China may have to continue buying US farm goods due to an already devastating flood season.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 19:35

  • Boxer Mugged: 80-Year-Old Former Dem Senator Robbed In Oakland
    Boxer Mugged: 80-Year-Old Former Dem Senator Robbed In Oakland

    Former California Senator Barbara Boxer (D) was mugged in Oakland on Monday, after an assailant pushed her, stole her cell phone, and jumped into a waiting car.

    The 80-year-old Democrat’s twitter account announced the news later in the day, adding that Boxer “is thankful that she was not seriously injured.”

    The mugging comes weeks after a NBC Bay Area news crew was held up by two armed men who demanded their equipment, only to leave without stealing any equipment after a good guy with a gun – the news crew’s security guard – ordered the would-be robbers to leave. 

    Earlier in the month, Oaklald Police announced an investigation into two similar incidents which were caught on camera – one in which two women were jumped by two suspects wearing hoodies, and a similar incident in which two men in hoodies pull the same routine with an elderly man holding a cane while standing in front of the Chinese Independent Baptist Church, pistol whipping him.

    More white supremacists, we’re sure.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 19:15

  • Did Today's Shockingly Bad Home Sales Data Just Derail The Fed's Tapering Plans
    Did Today’s Shockingly Bad Home Sales Data Just Derail The Fed’s Tapering Plans

    In previewing Wednesday’s FOMC meeting, DB’s Jim Reid pointed out that the bank’s economists are generally expecting the Fed to provide an update on the progress of taper discussions that will help refine the likely timeline for an announcement in the coming months. Their view is that there’ll be a clearer signal from the Fed’s leadership that the timeline is coming into view at the Jackson Hole economic symposium in August or at the September meeting, before an official announcement at the November meeting, though the incoming data will dictate the exact sequence. Basically the meeting can be simplified to working out which the committee sees as the biggest risk – the recent rise in inflation vs the recent rise in the delta variant.

    Further to that, speculation is rife that that key debate topping the FOMC agenda on Wednesday is whether to taper the Fed’s purchases of mortgage-backed securities faster than its buying of Treasury debt. As Bloomberg wrote on Sunday, “policy hawks at the Federal Reserve are setting their sights on scaling back the U.S. central bank’s massive intervention in the mortgage market as home prices soar. But the Fed leadership doesn’t sound convinced by arguments in favor of a hasty exit strategy.”

    Maybe not.

    As today’s surprisingly weak new home sales data for the month of June showed, the housing market – record home prices notwithstanding…

    .. suddenly finds itself in an unexpectedly weak spot as home sales tumbled by a whopping 6.6% M/M to a level not seen since April 2020…

    … and not due to supply – as noted, there was a generous 6.3 months of housing supply, back to where it was just before the pandemic struck…

    … but demand, the same lack of demand we highlighted recently which according to sentiment surveys has manifested itself in a buyer’s strike with US consumers reportedly balking at any future purchases of everything from Houses to Durable goods and cars due to soaring prices.

    As UMichigan economist Richard Curtin elaborated, “Inflation has put added pressure on living standards, especially on lower and middle income households, and caused postponement of large discretionary purchases, especially among upper income households” adding that “consumers’ complaints about rising prices on homes, vehicles, and household durables has reached an all-time record.”

    Which again brings us to today’s shockingly poor new home price sales report, which has not only pushed builder stocks lower, but according to Bloomberg’s Felize Maranz is also “adding to the case that the housing market may have peaked, potentially furthering expectations for slowing inflation across the board.”

    And while sales of new homes dropped in June to the lowest since April 2020, indicating weaker demand amid high prices and tight supply, this follows last week’s mixed report on housing starts and permits, which also signaled that a hot market may be cooling.

    So in light of the sharp slowdown in the housing market will this be enough to, pardon the pun, taper the Fed’s tapering language, and more specifically, will it end any debate that the Fed will focus on cutting its MBS purchases before it shifts to Treasurys?

    “The agenda for this next meeting is probably to start hashing out some of the logistics,” said Aneta Markowska, chief financial economist at Jefferies LLC in New York. “On timing, it’s still too early to make decisions, but I think the focus is going to be on those operational details.”

    The slowdown comes at a time when we are facing an “unprecedented spike” in US evictions as the foreclosure moratorium comes to an end, and also as households which no longer are receiving unemployment benefits saw their spending drop sharply

    … all of which has culminated with Goldman slashing its GDP forecast for next year (more in a subsequent post). In other words, not only has US economic growth peaked but it may be on the verge of contracting in just a few months.

    So what does the Fed do: will it taper just as fears about the US economy resurface, sparking the market shock which Bank of America, Morgan Stanley and even Goldman have been warning about in recent weeks, or will it announce that it is no longer “talking about talking about tapering” at least until there is some clarity on the Biden infrastructure stimulus which is emerging as the most important variable whether the US economy enjoys a healthy tailwind into the end of the year?

    The answer will be revealed in just over 48 hours…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 18:55

  • Big Tech Forms 'White Supremacist' Counterterror Database; PayPal Works With ADL To 'Fight Extremism And Hate'
    Big Tech Forms ‘White Supremacist’ Counterterror Database; PayPal Works With ADL To ‘Fight Extremism And Hate’

    Big tech – which overwhelmingly employs leftists who’ve casually called anyone right of Mao a ‘Nazi’ over the past five years – is banding together to monitor, track, and take action against ‘white supremacists and far-right militias,’ according to Reuters.

    A counterterrorism organization formed by some of the biggest U.S. tech companies including Facebook and Microsoft is significantly expanding the types of extremist content shared between firms in a key database, aiming to crack down on material from white supremacists and far-right militias, the group told Reuters.

    Until now, the Global Internet Forum to Counter Terrorism’s (GIFCT) database has focused on videos and images from terrorist groups on a United Nations list and so has largely consisted of content from Islamist extremist organizations such as Islamic State, al Qaeda and the Taliban.

    Over the next few months, the group will add attacker manifestos — often shared by sympathizers after white supremacist violence — and other publications and links flagged by U.N. initiative Tech Against Terrorism. It will use lists from intelligence-sharing group Five Eyes, adding URLs and PDFs from more groups, including the Proud Boys, the Three Percenters and neo-Nazis. -Reuters

    What kind of slippery slope are we on? And as long as we’re playing identity politics, where’s the counterterrorism organization trying to stop inner-city murders largely committed by blacks against other blacks? Wouldn’t big tech have all sorts of location data, emails and texts from murder suspects? Or don’t black lives actually matter to big tech?

    Participating tech companies also include Twitter and YouTube, which routinely share ‘hashes’ – unique digital fingerprints – in order to remove content from their services.

    Fourteen companies can access the GIFCT database, including Reddit, Snapchat-owner Snap, Facebook-owned Instagram, Verizon Media, Microsoft’s LinkedIn and file-sharing service Dropbox.

    “Anyone looking at the terrorism or extremism landscape has to appreciate that there are other parts…that are demanding attention right now,” said said GIFCT’s Executive Director Nicholas Rasmussen.

    And of course, Reuters connects the initiative to the Jan. 6 Capitol ‘insurrection’ led by an unarmed mentally ill man in a viking helmet (and no nukes or F-15s).

    The tech platforms have long been criticized for failing to police violent extremist content, though they also face concerns over censorship. The issue of domestic extremism, including white supremacy and militia groups, took on renewed urgency following the deadly Jan. 6 riot at the U.S. Capitol. 

    Meanwhile, the GIFTC has received criticism from human and digital rights groups over censorship.

    “The group wants to continue to broaden its database to include hashes of audio files or certain symbols and grow its membership. It recently added home-rental giant Airbnb and email marketing company Mailchimp as members,” according to the report.

    It doesn’t stop there. PayPal on Monday announced they’re teaming up with the Anti-Defamation League (ADL). Notably, PayPal owns Venmo.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile across the pond, the EU is coming for memes – and has unveiled a plan to “Quarantine extremist humor” and “Debunk harmful content of extremist humour.”

    And China also on Monday announced a six-month “special campaign” to regulate its internet and crack down on “malicious internet company practices,” according to Disclose.tv.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Where are we headed with all of this?

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 18:55

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 26th July 2021

  • The 'Incomplete' Map That Has China Fuming At NBC's Olympic Coverage
    The ‘Incomplete’ Map That Has China Fuming At NBC’s Olympic Coverage

    A mere two days into the Tokyo Summer Olympic games and geopolitical controversy centering on China has already erupted. Beijing has angrily denounced major US network NBC for displaying an “incomplete” map of the country, slamming it as the news channels attempt to “play political tricks” which has resulted in ‘hurt feelings’.

    NBC’s Opening Ceremony coverage on Friday featured a map generated on the screen as the Chinese team walked into the stadium which showed the outline of mainland China, but was lacking Taiwan and claimed possessions in the South China Sea

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China’s foreign ministry issued its protest and denunciation via its Chinese consulate in New York which included explanation that “The map is an expression of the national territory, symbolizing national sovereignty and territorial integrity.”

    As it’s “incomplete,” China is now urging “NBC to recognize the serious nature of this problem and take measures to correct the error.”

    “Attempts to use the Olympic Games to play political ‘tricks’ and self-promotion to achieve ulterior motives will never succeed,” the statement added. The consulate stopped short of specifying exactly what was missing, but it’s clearly a reference to the most hotly contested territorial issue of the moment – Taiwan’s status. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    No doubt adding insult to injury was also NBC’s narration at the time the Chinese team was making their Olympic debut.. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The NBC anchor pointed out that China remains under “international scrutiny from human right organizations”. She then went through the litany: Hong Kong, the treatment of Muslim Uighur minorities, and strained tensions with Washington – in a somewhat unusually specific list of grievances during what’s supposedly an ‘apolitical’ international athletic competition.

    Chinese state media was also quick to call it a violation of the spirit of the Olympic Charter

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    NBC has made no indication that it plans to backtrack or refrain from using the map during its ongoing coverage. The disagreement comes just after China retaliated against US Hong Kong-related sanctions with its own targeted punitive measures, including against former Commerce Secretary under Trump, Wilbur Ross.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 02:45

  • Nordstream 2's Hard Lesson In Reality For Everyone
    Nordstream 2’s Hard Lesson In Reality For Everyone

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    For more than six years everyone who is anyone in a politically sensitive position in Europe and the U.S. has wrung their hands over the Nordstream 2 pipeline. From the moment it was announced the howls of pain could be heard all around the world.

    Those screams were the screams of people who had grown fat and rich on the status quo realizing their gravy train was over.

    Now the project is all but complete and the saga coming to an end we have a weak deal between all the major parties to keep some of that gravy train running. German Chancellor Angela Merkel and Joe Biden finally buried the hatchet over Nordstream 2.

    But the reality was that Nordstream 2 was always going to get completed. I’ve never wavered in my assessment of this.

    The reasons were myriad.

    The Germans need the gas.

    The Germans wanted another political cudgel to use over the recalcitrant Poland and the Baltics.

    The Germans need the gas.

    Former German Chancellor Gerhard Schroeder is a board member of the Nordstream 2 consortium who put the deal together.

    Oh, and the Germans need the gas.

    It wasn’t a tough set of equations to solve here. The major players are Russia, Ukraine, Germany, the U.S. Whose needs are fulfilled by Nordstream 2? Germany’s. Who controls the EU? The Davos Crowd through Germany. Who needs relatively cheap energy to keep popular revolts from overthrowing major governments? Davos.

    In the end economics and the reality of positive incentives always force a resolution on people determined to hold back the tide through regulation and arm-twisting creating perverse incentives. Believe me, there’s a broader lesson for all concerned here than just Nordstream 2.

    As to the pipeline itself, the main sticking point for many people in the U.S. was a combination of leftover Cold War policy of denying Russia any new pipelines into Europe and personal enrichment because of Ukrainian gas transit.

    But the events of the past decade and the existence of Nordstream 1 saw the dynamic in that relationship shift dramatically.

    The U.S clearly does not control the reins over European energy policy and hasn’t for a long time.

    The Davos Crowd controls U.S. policy over Europe and damn near everything else at this point, especially with Biden sporifying in the White House and Obama pulling all the strings behind the scene.

    That anti-pipeline policy was powerful when the U.S. called the shots in its relationship with Europe. Trump tried to reassert U.S. dominance over Europe and beginning to be successful. But Merkel and others simply waited for his term to end, hoping their incessant meddling in his presidency would weaken him.

    Because of the times and Trump’s excellent media instincts and unwillingness to be publicly shamed, he only grew stronger. So they had to depose in the most nakedly brutal way imaginable. However, his opposition to Nordstream 2 forced a lot of people to expose themselves over their corruption in Ukraine. Davos called in nearly every marker they had to bury Hunter Biden’s corruption.

    At the same time Hunter was nothing more than a distraction to keep people from looking deeper at Mitt Romney, Speaker Nancy Pelosi and Poppy Eyed Adam Schiff, all of whom have interests in Ukraine continuing to transit gas through the old leaky Soviet pipelines.

    The reason Nordstream 2 got finished is because Davos finally acceded to reality that it lost in Ukraine.

    That’s what the Biden/Putin summit was about (among other things).

    In the past, when Davos had its sights set on Ukraine to take it away from Russia through a terrible offer of EU membership in 2013, new pipelines into Europe were actively blocked, e.g. Southstream. U.S. Cold War policy and their goals converged.

    In the case of SouthStream, the U.S. was made out to be the bad guy putting the final pressure on Bulgaria to stop the project. The truth was the EU kept changing the rules on Gazprom in order to lock them into a long-term relationship which the EU would consistently hold the regulatory whip hand over and use to dictate prices once they had their monopsony in place.

    At least that was the plan.

    When that plan failed and Putin cancelled Southstream, disallowed Ukraine’s admittance into the EU — which former President Viktor Yanukovich was never serious about — and blocked the full takeover of the country by backing the independence of both the Donbass and Crimea, Nordstream 2 was put on offer.

    This was a desperation move. Plain and simple.

    Now Gazprom had all the leverage in new Ukraine gas transit talks. Putin froze the conflict in Ukraine. The current gas transit deal is all in Gazprom’s favor. It will be again in 2024 when it ends then.

    This reality forced Davos to back Germany over the pipeline otherwise Germany would no longer be able to run its economy and leverage that to lord over the rest of Europe. Davos’ control over Europe rests on Germany’s economic and political strength within in the bloc. Period. Without that the EU splinters rapidly.

    This is why Tump was such a real problem. Once he was removed and order restored from their perspective they made one last attempt to test Russia’s resolve in Ukraine. They got a firm, if not stern, Russian “Nyet,’ and then sent Biden over to Geneva to sue for peace after he made it kinda look like he wasn’t rolling over.

    And that peace was a face-saving way out of the mess in Ukraine; the face-saving ‘deal’ that allows the U.S. to look like it forced Germany to recompense Ukraine for potential future revenue losses which was agreed to by a lame duck Merkel and Biden this week.

    The deal is a joke. The boys at The Duran covered it beautifully last night. It’s nothing more than a slush fund to ensure a couple of billion dollars continues moving through the right people’s hands while it has the political veneer of ‘green’ energy investment in Ukraine to appease the locals.

    It’s a typically cynical deal by Merkel as she throws Ukraine further under the bus, tries to threaten Russia with something Germany will never do — not buy gas from them — and ensure that the American politicians with the most to lose are insulated from further scrutiny.

    The reality is, as Gazprom deputy chairman Alexander Medvedev said back in 2018, all the wrangling over Nordstream 2 is silly. Germany and Europe are going to need Nordstream 3. There’s plenty of gas demand in Europe to go around.

    And in case anyone hasn’t been watching, natural gas prices are signaling that we’re in for a lot more than just a tranistory rise in energy prices.

    Natural gas is looking to close July at more than $4.00 / mcf for the first time since the cold weather spike during the nasty 2018 winter which saw even the obnoxiously belligerent British buy tankers of Russian gas to keep people from freezing.

    Natural gas prices haven’t been sustainably above $4.00 / mcf since 2014. And this price spike is happening during the summer, not the winter when gas demand is highest. This is yet another reason why Germany simply could not afford to lose Nordstream 2.

    They’ll not only need Nordstream 2 and likely 3 but also those LNG terminals that Merkel promised Trump as a sop to get him to back off on the pipeline. Trump, for all of his faults, understood Merkel well enough to know she wasn’t offering anything she wasn’t already prepared to do alreaady.

    Trump’s pressure on the project was existential for Europe given Merkel’s (and Davos’) disastrous decision to shutter all nuclear power in Germany. The EU going forward is a massive energy importer. The offshore gas fields of the Netherlands and Norway are drying up faster than anyone wanted to admit until recently.

    And at the heart of Davos’ Great Reset is the imposition of their new more enlightened communism than that of the brutal Slavs and the sub-human Chinese. It is this Euro-centric arrogance and, frankly, racism that drives them.

    The fact is most of Europe is going to have to face the reality that their great social welfare systems which so many younger Americans have been propagandized into thinking are sustainable are actually on life support. They’ve always been on a ventilator.

    And that ventilator has been cheap, locally produced oil and gas, which is ending.

    Why do you think Davos is so hostile to oil and gas? It has absolutely zero to do with Climate Change and saving humanity from itself. They hate what they no longer have. The hard lesson for a lot of Millennials and frankly stupid Greens who can’t think beyond first order effects is the same one the Soviet Union had to face.

    Communism doesn’t work even if you subsidize the bejeesus out of it through energy exports and hand out ‘free stuff’ from the profits to everyone to mask the costs. In short, incentives matter. Perverse incentives just hollow out the productive class, in Marxist terms, the bourgeoisie, and ensure the collapse of the economy through the inability to rationally calculate costs. Some guy named Mises worked this out in 1922, here we are a century later having to explain the basics of human action over and over again.

    And Davos can’t run their new technocratic dystopia if they don’t have control over the input price of energy in their home turf, Europe. The Soviet Union lasted as long as it did because of Russia’s vast oil and gas reserves. Europe is trying to implement a more perfect Soviet Union while simultaneously sending real energy costs skyrocketing.

    This is truly a case of people thinking they are so clever they sell themselves the dumbest ideas imaginable.

    Nordstream 2 will likely see Gazprom undercut the global price for gas, helping to offset the EU’s disastrous regulatory scheme which creates a structural disadvantage for German companies. Moreover, since they are trapped at negative nominal yields and are desperate to maintain the façade of a strong euro to keep sovereign debt yields low, there is no hope or help from what should be the natural ebb and flow of exchange rates.

    So, rock meet hard place. Something had to give and in this case the U.S. gave up on Nordstream 2 and Davos is going to find out really soon that no matter how many palms you grease, how much Kompromat you generate on important people, perverse incentives are the root cause of all human organizational failure.

    That’s likely the hardest lesson of all here. Davos blew up the world economy by vandalizing the middle classes of the first (and second) world, in the process mangling the capital investment cycle into energy which is now coming back to haunt them as prices rise alongside public unrest.

    *  *  *

    Join my Patreon if you like aligning incentives

    Donate via

    BTC: 3GSkAe8PhENyMWQb7orjtnJK9VX8mMf7Zf
    BCH: qq9pvwq26d8fjfk0f6k5mmnn09vzkmeh3sffxd6ryt
    DCR: DsV2x4kJ4gWCPSpHmS4czbLz2fJNqms78oE
    LTC: MWWdCHbMmn1yuyMSZX55ENJnQo8DXCFg5k
    DASH: XjWQKXJuxYzaNV6WMC4zhuQ43uBw8mN4Va
    WAVES: 3PF58yzAghxPJad5rM44ZpH5fUZJug4kBSa
    ETH: 0x1dd2e6cddb02e3839700b33e9dd45859344c9edc

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 02:00

  • Greenwald: FBI Using Same Fear Tactic From First War On Terror, Orchestrating Its Own Terrorism Plots
    Greenwald: FBI Using Same Fear Tactic From First War On Terror, Orchestrating Its Own Terrorism Plots

    Authored by Glenn Greenwald via substack,

    Questioning the FBI’s role in 1/6 was maligned by corporate media as deranged. But only ignorance about the FBI or a desire to deceive could produce such a reaction.

    The narrative that domestic anti-government extremism is the greatest threat to U.S. national security — the official position of the U.S. security state and the Biden administration — received its most potent boost in October 2020, less than one month before the 2020 presidential election. That was when the F.B.I. and Michigan state officials announced the arrest of thirteen people on terrorism, conspiracy and weapons charges, with six of them accused of participating in a plot to kidnap Michigan’s Democratic Governor Gretchen Whitmer, who had been a particular target of criticism from President Trump for her advocacy for harsh COVID lockdown measures.

    The headlines that followed were dramatic and fear-inducing: “F.B.I. Says Michigan Anti-Government Group Plotted to Kidnap Gov. Gretchen Whitmer,” announced The New York Times. That same night, ABC News began its broadcast this way: “Tonight, we take you into a hidden world, a place authorities say gave birth to a violent domestic terror plot in Michigan — foiled by the FBI.”

    Democrats and liberal journalists instantly seized on this storyline to spin a pre-election theme that was as extreme as it was predictable. Gov. Whitmer herself blamed Trump, claiming that the plotters “heard the president’s words not as a rebuke but as a rallying cry — as a call to action.” Rep. Maxine Waters (D-CA) claimed that “the president is a deranged lunatic and he’s inspired white supremacists to violence, the latest of which was a plot to kidnap Gov. Whitmer,” adding: “these groups have attempted to KILL many of us in recent years. They are following Trump’s lead.” Vox’s paid television-watcher and video-manipulator, Aaron Rupar, drew this inference: “Trump hasn’t commended the FBI for breaking up Whitmer kidnapping/murder plot because as always he doesn’t want to denounce his base.” Michael Moore called for Trump’s arrest for having incited the kidnapping plot against Gov. Whitmer. One viral tweet from a popular Democratic Party activist similarly declared: “Trump should be arrested for this plot to kidnap Governor Whitmer. There’s no doubt he inspired this terrorism.”

    New York Governor Andrew Cuomo instantly declared it to be a terrorist attack on America: “We must condemn and call out the cowardly plot against Governor Whitmer for what it is: Domestic terrorism.” MSNBC’s social media star Kyle Griffin cast it as a coup attempt: “The FBI thwarted what they described as a plot to violently overthrow the government and kidnap Michigan Gov. Gretchen Whitmer.” CNN’s Jim Sciutto pronounced it “deeply alarming.”

    lengthy CNN article — dressed up as an investigative exposé that was little more than stenography of FBI messaging disseminated from behind a shield of anonymity — purported in the headline to take the reader “Inside the plot to kidnap Gov. Whitmer.” It claimed that it all began when angry discussions about COVID restrictions “spiraled into a terrorism plot, officials say, with Michigan Gov. Gretchen Whitmer the target of a kidnapping scheme.” CNN heralded the FBI’s use of informants and agents to break up the plot but depicted them as nothing more than passive bystanders reporting what the domestic terrorists were plotting:

    The Watchmen had been flagged to the FBI in March, and one of its members was now an informant. That informant, others on the inside, as well as undercover operatives and recordings, allowed the bureau to monitor what was happening from then on.

    The article never once hinted at let alone described the highly active role of these informants and agents themselves in encouraging and designing the plot. Instead, it depicted these anti-government activists as leading one another — on their own — to commit what CNN called “treason in a quaint town.” The more honest headline for this CNN article would have been: “Inside the FBI’s tale of the plot to kidnap Gov. Whitmer.” But since CNN never questions the FBI — they employ their top agents and operatives once they leave the bureau in order to disseminate their propaganda — this is what the country got from The Most Trusted Name in News:

    Gov. Whitmer herself attempted to prolong the news cycle as much as possible, all but declaring herself off-limits from criticism by equating any critiques of her governance with incitement to terrorism. Appearing on Meet the Press two Sundays after the plot was revealed, Whitmer said it was “incredibly disturbing that the president of the United States—10 days after a plot to kidnap, put me on trial, and execute me, 10 days after that was uncovered—the president is at it again, and inspiring, and incentivizing, and inciting this kind of domestic terrorism.”

    On October 22 — just two weeks before Election Day — MSNBC’s Rachel Maddow hosted Whitmer and told the Michigan Governor that the evidence was clear that Trump had been “turning on a faucet of violent threats” against her. Whitmer agreed that Trump was to blame for the kidnapping plot by having repeatedly attacked her in his rallies:

    Joe Biden also made repeated use of this storyline. Appearing at a campaign rally in Michigan on October 16, the Democratic candidate blasted Trump for the crime of continuing to criticize Whitmer even after she was the target of a terror plot. He explicitly blamed Trump for having incited it: “When the president tweeted ‘Liberate Michigan, Liberate Michigan,’ that’s the call that was heard. That was the dog whistle.” And he accused Trump of purposely stoking a wave of the worst kind of terrorism on U.S. soil: “it’s the sort of behavior you might expect from ISIS,” he said of the accused.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Yet from the start, there were ample and potent reasons to distrust the FBI’s version of events. To begin with, FBI press releases are typically filled with lies, yet media outlets — due to some combination of excessive gullibility, an inability to learn lessons, or a desire to be deceived — continue to treat them as Gospel. For another, the majority of “terror plots” the FBI claimed to detect and break up during the first War on Terror were, in fact, plots manufactured, funded and driven by the FBI itself.

    Indeed, the FBI has previously acknowledged that its own powers and budget depend on keeping Americans in fear of such attacks. Former FBI Assistant Director Thomas Fuentes, in a documentary called “The Newberg Sting” about a 2009 FBI arrest of four men on terrorism charges, uttered this extremely candid admission:

    If you’re submitting budget proposals for a law enforcement agency, for an intelligence agency, you’re not going to submit the proposal that “We won the war on terror and everything’s great,” cuz the first thing that’s gonna happen is your budget’s gonna be cut in half. You know, it’s my opposite of Jesse Jackson’s ‘Keep Hope Alive’—it’s ‘Keep Fear Alive.’ Keep it alive.

    In the Whitmer kidnapping case, the FBI’s own affidavit in support of the charges acknowledged the involvement in the plot of both informants and undercover FBI agents “over several months.”

    Excerpt of FBI affidavit criminal complaint accompanying the criminal complaint in U.S. District Court against six defendants in the Whitmer plot

    In sum, there was no way to avoid suspicions about the FBI’s crucial role in a plot like this absent extreme ignorance about the bureau’s behavior over the last two decades or an intentional desire to sow fear about right-wing extremists attacking Democratic Party officials one month before the 2020 presidential election. In fact, the signs of FBI involvement were there from the start for those who — unlike CNN — wanted to know the truth.

    report from the Detroit Free Press published just two days after CNN’s FBI stenography noted that the FBI agents were incapable of identifying any specifics of this supposed plot, adding that defense attorneys were adamant that those accused were merely engaged in idle chatter, boasting that they were never really serious about following through. Then the paper added that, for defense lawyers, “it remains to be seen what roles the undercover informants and FBI agents played in the case, and whether they pushed the others into carrying out the plan.” Meanwhile, an actually independent journalist, Michael Tracey, had no trouble identifying the telltale signs of FBI orchestration that were so apparent countless times during the first War on Terror. Three days before the CNN story, he wrote:

    But the value of depicting Trump as having incited a frightening terrorist attack just weeks before the election, and the zeal to feed the broader narrative pushed by the U.S. security state that anti-government extremism is America’s greatest national security threat, drowned out any skepticism. The storyline was clear and unquestioned: Trump was inciting ISIS-like terrorism on U.S. soil and right-wing extremists, who would fester even after Trump was done, were the primary menace that requires new domestic powers and larger budgets in order to defeat.

    Yet just as happened with so many other narratives — from the origins of COVID to Hunter Biden’s corrupt use of his ties to his father — Trump’s defeat means the media is now willing to reconsider some of the propaganda that was pushed in the lead-up to the election. An excellent piece of investigative journalism published by BuzzFeed on Tuesday documents that, far from being passive observers of the plot, FBI informants and agents were the key drivers of it:

    An examination of the case by BuzzFeed News also reveals that some of those informants, acting under the direction of the FBI, played a far larger role than has previously been reported. Working in secret, they did more than just passively observe and report on the actions of the suspects. Instead, they had a hand in nearly every aspect of the alleged plot, starting with its inception. The extent of their involvement raises questions as to whether there would have even been a conspiracy without them.

    So central to this plot were those acting at the behest of the FBI that many of the accused plotters only met each other because of meetings arranged at the direction of the FBI, who targeted them based on social media postings and other political activities that suggested anti-government and anti-Whitmer sentiments which could be exploited:

    A longtime government informant from Wisconsin, for example, helped organize a series of meetings around the country where many of the alleged plotters first met one another and the earliest notions of a plan took root, some of those people say. The Wisconsin informant even paid for some hotel rooms and food as an incentive to get people to come.

    One of the FBI’s informants, a former Iraq War soldier, “became so deeply enmeshed in a Michigan militant group that he rose to become its second-in-command.” With his leadership role in one of the key groups, and all while acting under the direction of the FBI, he was “encouraging members to collaborate with other potential suspects and paying for their transportation to meetings.” Indeed, he even “prodded the alleged mastermind of the kidnapping plot to advance his plan, then baited the trap that led to the arrest.”

    A review of not only the BuzzFeed reporting but also the underlying court documents leaves little doubt that the primary impetus for this plot came over and over from the FBI. On July 12, a lawyer for one of the defendants filed a motion asking the court to compel the FBI to turn over all chats which their agents and informants involving the plot. He did so on the ground that the few chats they had obtained themselves — from their own clients — repeatedly show the FBI pushing and prodding its agents over and over to lure defendants into more meetings, to join in “recon” exercises, and to take as many steps as possible toward the plot.

    While it was clear from the start that there were FBI informants and agents in the middle of all of this, it turns out that at least half of those involved were acting on FBI orders: twelve informants and agents. As BuzzFeed says, those acting at the behest of the FBI “had a hand in nearly every aspect of the alleged plot, starting with its inception.” All of that, concluded the reporters, “raises questions as to whether there would have even been a conspiracy without them.”

    But this evidence does not so much raise that question as much as it answers it. The idea of kidnapping Gov. Whitmer came from the FBI. It was a plot designed by the agency, and they then went on the hunt to target people they believed they could manipulate into joining their plot — either people were easily manipulated due to psychological weakness, financial vulnerability, and/or their strongly held political views. In sum, the FBI devised this plot, was the primary organizer of it, funded it, purposely directed their targets to pose for incriminating pictures that they then released to the press, and then heaped praise on themselves for stopping what they themselves had created.

    For anyone covering the FBI during the first War on Terror, none of this is new. So many of the supposed “terror plots” the FBI purported to disrupt over the last twenty years were — just like the Michigan plot — ones that were created and driven by, and would not have happened without, the FBI’s own planning, funding and direction.

    Just as they are doing now, the FBI used those plots to elevate fear levels and justify more domestic surveillance power and funding for the U.S. security state. While the targets then were typically young American Muslims with anti-government views rather than young right-wing white men with anti-government views, the tactics were identical.

    The examples are far too numerous to count. As one illustrative example, in 2015, the FBI flamboyantly praised itself for arresting three Brooklyn men on charges of “attempt and conspiracy to provide material support to the Islamic State of Iraq.” Then, as now, outlets such as The New York Times promoted the FBI’s maximalist-fear-mongering version of events: “3 Brooklyn Men Accused of Plot to Aid ISIS’ Fight,” blared the headline.

    But even that largely pro-FBI Times article raised the question of whether this plot was real or manufactured by the bureau:

    The case against the three men relies in part on a confidential informant paid by the government, court documents show. Defense lawyers have criticized the government’s use of informers in similar cases, saying they may lure targets into making extreme plans or statements. In some cases, the threat has turned out to be overstated.

    And the FBI itself admitted that the “threats of violence” from the three arrested — such as killing President Obama — “had an ‘aspirational’ quality to them, with no indication that the suspects were close to staging an attack, large or small.” The Times article also noted that the FBI observed that “in online postings, the two younger men seem to be searching for meaning in their lives,” adding that “as they were led into court, the youthfulness of Mr. Juraboev and Mr. Saidakhmetov was striking.”

    Analyzing all the evidence in this case, my then-colleague at The Intercept Murtaza Hussain documented “the integral role a paid informant appears to have played in generating the charges against the men, and helping turn a fantastical ‘plot’ into something even remotely tangible.” Indeed, he wrote, “none of the three men was in any condition to travel or support the Islamic State, without help from the FBI informant.” It was only when the FBI sent an older Muslim man to gain their trust — acting as an FBI informant and being paid for his services — did anything resembling a crime start to form. The paid FBI informant encouraged the young men to pursue the plan more concretely, and only then did they begin agreeing with the informant’s proposed plot. The informant befriended them, moved in with them, and spent months “convincing both of them that he intended to travel to Syria and join Islamic State.”

    Just as was true in the Michigan case, Hussain wrote about this arrest: “Crucially, it appears that only after the introduction of the informant did any actual arrangements to commit a criminal act come into existence.” In sum, “the covert informant under the direction of the FBI” — which employs teams of psychologists and other mental health professions who are experts in how to manipulate people’s thinking — “evidently helped encourage the two toward terrorism over the course of these months.”

    Article by Murtaza Hussain of The Intercept, Feb. 20, 2015

    I have also covered countless other FBI plots over the years where all the same attributes were present. After the 2015 “ISIS arrest,” I wrote an article compiling how often the FBI was doing this and asked this question in the headline: “Why Does the FBI Have to Manufacture its Own Plots if Terrorism and ISIS Are Such Grave Threats?,” noting that the bureau’s behavior “is akin to having the DEA constantly warn of the severe threat posed by drug addiction while it simultaneously uses pushers on its payroll to deliberately get people hooked on drugs so that they can arrest the addicts they’ve created and thus justify their own warnings and budgets.”

    Months before the 2015 ISIS arrests, the FBI issued a press release praising itself for arresting “a Cincinnati-area man for a plot to attack the U.S. Capitol and kill government officials.” But as I reported, the scary terrorist was “20-year-old Christopher Cornell, [who] is unemployed, lives at home, spends most of his time playing video games in his bedroom, still addresses his mother as ‘Mommy’ and regards his cat as his best friend; he was described as ‘a typical student’ and ‘quiet but not overly reserved’ by the principal of the local high school he graduated in 2012.”

    Then House Speaker John Boehner immediately seized on that arrest to warn Americans to be afraid: “We live in a dangerous country, and we get reminded every week of the dangers that are out there.” Boehner also told Americans they should be grateful for domestic surveillance and not try to curb it: the Speaker claimed that “the National Security Agency’s snooping powers helped stop a plot to attack the Capitol and that his colleagues need to keep that in mind as they debate whether to renew the law that allows the government to collect bulk information from its citizens.” Yet the only way Cornell got close to any crimes was because the FBI informant began suggesting to him that he act on his rage against U.S. officials by attacking the Capitol.

    Salon articles of my reporting on FBI’s creation of terror plots it “stops”: Nov. 28, 2010 and Sep. 29, 2011

    One of the most egregious cases I covered was the 2011 arrest of James Cromitie, an African-American convert to Islam who the FBI attempted to convince — over the course of eight months — to join a terror plot, only for him to adamantly refuse over and over. Only once they dangled a payment of $250,000 in front of his nose right after the impoverished American had lost his job did he agree to join, and then the FBI swooped in, arrested him, and touted their heroic efforts in stopping a terrorist plot.

    The U.S. federal judge who sentenced Cromitie to decades in prison, Colleen McMahon, said she did so only because the law of “entrapment” is so narrow that it is virtually impossible for a defendant to win, but in doing so, she repeatedly condemned the FBI in the harshest terms for single-handedly converting Cromitie from a helpless but resentful anti-government fanatic into a criminal. The defendant “was incapable of committing an act of terrorism on his own,” she said, adding: “only the government could have made a terrorist out of Mr. Cromitie, whose buffoonery is positively Shakespearean in scope.” She added: “There is not the slightest doubt in my mind that James Cromitie could never have dreamed up the scenario in which he actually became involved.”

    Her written ruling is worth quoting at length because of how relevant it is to current FBI activities. The judge began by noting that Cromitie “had successfully resisted going too far for eight months,” and agreed only after “the Government dangled what had to be almost irresistible temptation in front of an impoverished man from what I have come (after literally dozens of cases) to view as the saddest and most dysfunctional community in the Southern District of New York.” It was the FBI’s own informant, she wrote, who “was the prime mover and instigator of all the criminal activity that occurred.” She then wrote (emphasis added):

    The Government indisputably “manufactured” the crimes of which defendants stand convicted. The Government invented all of the details of the scheme – many of them, such as the trip to Connecticut and the inclusion of Stewart AFB as a target, for specific legal purposes of which the defendants could not possibly have been aware (the former gave rise to federal jurisdiction and the latter mandated a twenty-five year minimum sentence). The Government selected the targets. The Government designed and built the phony ordnance that the defendants planted (or planned to plant) at Government-selected targets. The Government provided every item used in the plot: cameras, cell phones, cars, maps and even a gun. The Government did all the driving (as none of the defendants had a car or a driver’s license). The Government funded the entire project. And the Government, through its agent, offered the defendants large sums of money, contingent on their participation in the heinous scheme.

    Additionally, before deciding that the defendants (particularly Cromitie, who was in their sights for nine months) presented any real danger, the Government appears to have done minimal due diligence, relying instead on reports from its Confidential Informant, who passed on information about Cromitie information that could easily have been verified (or not verified, since much of it was untrue), but that no one thought it necessary to check before offering a jihadist opportunity to a man who had no contact with any extremist groups and no history of anything other than drug crimes.

    One of the reporters who has most extensively covered the FBI’s role in manufacturing terrorism cases it then proceeds to “break up” is Trevor Aaronson. In 2011, he documented, working with the Investigative Reporting Program at the University of California-Berkeley, that of 508 post-9/11 terrorism defendants, “nearly half the prosecutions involved the use of informants, many of them incentivized by money.” After 9/11, the FBI’s budget-increasing, power-enhancing strategy was to target “tens of thousands of law-abiding people, seeking to identify those disgruntled few who might participate in a plot given the means and the opportunity” by monitoring their social media postings, and “then, in case after case, the government provides the plot, the means, and the opportunity.” Of the terrorism arrests from sting operations, almost 1/3 were ones in which “defendants participated in plots led by an agent provocateur—an FBI operative instigating terrorist action.”

    It is this long history and mountain of evidence that compels an investigation into the role played by the FBI in the planning of the 1/6 riot at the Capitol. And it is that same evidence that made the corporate media’s derisive reaction to such demands — as voiced by Darren Beattie’s Revolver NewsFox News’ Tucker Carlson and myself — so ignorant and subservient. They acted as if only some unhinged conspiracy theorist could possibly believe that the FBI would have informants and agents embedded in the groups that planned that Capitol riot rather than what it is: the only logical conclusion for anyone who knows how the FBI actually behaves.

    Indeed, the BuzzFeed reporters who investigated the FBI’s key role in the Michigan case must have been very disturbed by what they found since they used their reporting to raise that taboo topic: what role did the FBI have in 1/6? Moreover, they asked, is this yet another era where the FBI is targeting Americans not for criminality but for their political views, and then orchestrating their own plots that justify the U.S. security state’s massive budget and unlimited powers?

    Instead, [the accused] say, they were targeted because of their political views. Some describe the case as a premeditated campaign by the government to undermine the Patriot movement, an ideology based on fealty to the Second Amendment and the conviction that the government has violated the Constitution and is therefore illegitimate. They argue that the recordings and text messages that the government calls proof of a criminal conspiracy are in fact constitutionally protected speech — expressions of frustration at what they see as the government’s betrayal of its citizens.

    The Michigan case is unfolding at another fraught moment in American history. In court, the government has drawn a direct line between the alleged kidnapping plot and the Jan. 6 insurrection, holding up the storming of the US Capitol as evidence that the Michigan defendants posed a profound threat. . . . [I]f the defense is able to undermine the methods used to build the Michigan case, it could add weight to the theory that the administration is conducting a witch hunt against militant groups — and, by extension, that the Jan. 6 insurrection was a black op engineered by the FBI.

    When Carlson raised these same questions on his Fox program, he did what I did when doing so: cited my reporting as well as Trevor Aaronson’s about the FBI’s long history of orchestrating such plots and luring people into them using informants and undercover agents. Much of that reporting about the FBI’s tactics was published by The Intercept, which — when aimed at American Muslims during the First War on Terror — had an editorial view that it was extremely improper and dangerous for the FBI to do this. But now that it is being done to American anti-government activists on the right, the site’s liberal editors seem happy about it. They got Aaronson to write an article under the headline “Tucker Carlson Distorted My Reporting in His Latest Jan. 6 Conspiracy Theory.”

    But that headline was an absolute lie. There was nothing in Aaronson’s article that pointed to any “distortions” in how Carlson (or I) cited Aaronson’s work. To the contrary, Aaronson himself acknowledged that the FBI’s past history — including in the Whitmer case — made such questions highly rational and necessary:

    In many of these stings, informants or undercover agents provided all the money and weapons for terrorist plots, and sometimes even the ideas — raising significant questions about whether any of these people would have committed the crimes were it not for the FBI’s encouragement. Many targets of these FBI stings were mentally ill or otherwise easily manipulated. . . .

    Carlson’s claim fits an existing and well-established argument: that the FBI creates crimes through aggressive stings where no crimes would otherwise exist. . . . I think it’s worth noting that there’s a reason for the cultural stickiness of the claim by Revolver and Carlson. It might be a conspiracy theory, but it’s not exactly “baseless,” as the Post described it. That’s because there are genuine concerns that the sting tactics used over the past two decades against impressionable Muslims will be used against equally impressionable Americans with right-wing ideologies. In the supposed plot to kidnap Michigan Gov. Gretchen Whitmer, for example, FBI agents and an informant played significant roles, raising the same question that surrounds so many supposed Islamic State and Al Qaeda cases in the United States: Would this plot have happened were it not for the FBI?

    In addition, there is evidence the FBI is assigning informants to infiltrate groups based solely on right-wing ideology. And the increase in right-wing violence in recent years has prompted calls for new anti-terorrism laws that would give the FBI even more power.

    I think the FBI’s investigation of potential right-wing threats, and the degree to which the bureau replicates its abusive post-9/11 tactics, will be a critically important story in the coming years. How news organizations report on it will be a significant test.

    While Aaronson insists that no proof has yet been presented that the FBI had foreknowledge of the 1/6 plot or encouraged it to happen, and also seized on a minor error in the Revolver News article originally raising these questions about “confidential informants” — an error I noted in my own article about this topic while explaining that it was ancillary and insignificant to the overall question — Aaronson’s article has far more in common with the primary theme raised by Carlson than it does arguments that Carlson “distorted” anything. In particular, Aaronson writes, the FBI’s ample history requires a serious investigation into the role it may have played in knowing about and/or encouraging the 1/6 plotters.

    As I documented in my own reporting on this question, there is ample evidence to believe that the FBI had informants embedded in at least two of three key groups it says were behind the 1/6 Capitol riot. As I noted at the time, most of the corporate press spewed contempt and scorn on these questions because 1/6 has become an event that carries virtually religious importance to them, and their reverence for the U.S. security state makes them resistant to any suggestions that the FBI may have acted deceitfully — an utterly bizarre mindset for U.S. journalists to possess. But such is the state of the liberal sector of the corporate press today.

    Now that one of their own liberal members in good standing — BuzzFeed — has not only proven the FBI’s key role in the Whitmer plot but also themselves suggested that it makes more plausible the bureau’s involvement in 1/6, these questions are becoming increasingly unavoidable. Both the Whitmer plot and especially 1/6 are absolutely crucial to everything that has happened since: the launch of the new War on Terror, billions more in funds for the security state, proposals for greater surveillance, Biden’s use of the intelligence community to insist that anti-government activists constitute the greatest threat to U.S. national security. Asking what role the FBI played in the episode at the Capitol is not only rational but imperative.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/26/2021 – 00:00

  • Biden Approval Drops, Hits New Low In Gallup Poll 
    Biden Approval Drops, Hits New Low In Gallup Poll 

    President Joe Biden’s approval rating is showing the “first signs of a meaningful decline” as the “honeymoon period” appears to be over, according to the latest Gallup opinion poll

    Biden’s latest job approval rating plunged six percentage points to 50%, a new low, down from 56% in June. The latest survey consisted of 1,007 US adults between July 6-21. “Before this month, his ratings had not shown meaningful variation during his time in office, and the current figure marks the lowest measured for him to date,” Gallup said. 

    The lower rating comes as vaccination rates have hit a wall, the spread of the COVID-19 Delta variant, and concerns about rapid inflation, exploding wealth inequality, and millions of people unemployed

    The poll found 45% of respondents disapprove of Biden’s performance, and 5% had no opinion. 

    Gallup expands more on why the president’s approval ratings are in decline:

    It comes at a time when U.S. progress in fighting the coronavirus has stalled, with vaccination rates slowing and case levels now rising. The economic recovery continues, with unemployment declining and stock market values near record highs. But consumers are paying higher prices for gas and other goods. Biden has also struggled to deliver on his promise of greater bipartisanship, although negotiations on an infrastructure bill continue in the Senate.

    By political party, about 12% of Republicans give Biden a positive job approval rating compared to 90% of Democrats and 48% of independents.

    Despite the slump in support, Biden remains in positive territory, and “it’s common for presidents to see about a 3-point decrease in their average job approval ratings between their first and second quarters,” Gallup said. 

    Biden’s first-quarter job approval rating averaged 56%.

    His second-quarter average approval rating was 53.3%, higher than former President Bill Clinton (44%) and former President Donald Trump (38.8%). But below former President Barack Obama (62%) and former President George W. Bush (55.8%).

    Gallup’s bottom line on Biden falling approval rating: 

    Biden’s approval rating is showing the first signs of meaningful decline. If the lower ratings persist, it could indicate his “honeymoon” period is over. Because Republicans have been unlikely to support him from the beginning of his presidency, changes in his approval are likely to come from Democrats’ and independents’ evaluations of him. That is what has occurred now, with both groups slightly less positive toward Biden than they have been to this point. Still, he maintains very high approval among Democrats, and his rating among independents remains higher than his immediate predecessor Trump ever received from that group.

    Biden’s “Build Back Better” plan and trillions of dollars in stimuli pumped into financial markets and the economy, along with continued supply chain disruptions, is causing the administration to publicly address inflation because it could be a sour topic for Democrats come 2022 midterms.

    Meanwhile, another poll via ABC shows pessimism continues to accelerate against Biden and his administration.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Biden still holds high favorability ratings, but not taming inflation could result in further rating declines. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 23:30

  • Emerging Market Vulnerability Heatmap: Are EMs Threatened By Increasing Inflation Expectations
    Emerging Market Vulnerability Heatmap: Are EMs Threatened By Increasing Inflation Expectations

    By Wouter van Eijkelenburg, economist at Rabobank

    Emerging Market Vulnerability Heatmap

    Summary

    • There are divergent paths to economic recovery in advanced economies and emerging markets, due in part to differences in Covid-19 infections and vaccination rates
    • Inflation expectations are increasing in advanced economies, raising questions on central bank policies going forward
    • Tapering of QE or even policy interest rates hikes by central banks in advanced economies, particularly by the Fed, pose downside risks to the economies of emerging markets
    • Our vulnerability Heatmap provides an overview of economic indicators that signal potential vulnerabilities for certain emerging markets
    • Factors like a country’s (foreign currency denominated) debt, international trade position and interest rate risks are important determinants for EM vulnerability
    • We examine these factors in detail for certain emerging markets by diving into debt metrics, current accounts and interest rates

    Back to business?

    In 2020, the Covid-19 pandemic triggered the largest crisis since WW2. Across the world countries went into lockdown to mitigate the spread of the corona virus. While they succeeded in containing the virus, the lockdowns had severe economic implications. Governments and central banks have stepped in by providing enormous amounts of fiscal and monetary stimulus in order to counter the negative economic consequences of the imposed lockdowns. A recent publication showed that economic contractions could have been much worse if there had been no additional fiscal stimulus by governments.

    Halfway through 2021, we are seeing restrictions being loosened in many parts of the world due to increased vaccination rates. Although the virus is far from beaten, as new variants continue to emerge, economies are opening up globally and the economic outlook for most, if not all, countries is improving. A better economic outlook might require other policies by central banks and governments as inflationary pressure intensifies. However, economies are not all recovering at the same pace, and every economy has its own individual characteristics and autonomous regime. In this publication we will explore some of the implications of divergent economic growth paths between advanced economies (AEs) and emerging markets (EMs) with a special focus on the vulnerability of emerging markets to potential tighter monetary policy by AEs.

    Different speeds of recovery

    Globally, all of us have felt the impacts of the pandemic. But the intensity, limitations and consequences vary per country and probably even per person. Diverse policy actions have led to differences between countries in terms of virus penetration, containment success and economic consequences. Furthermore, we have seen that AEs have a greater vaccine availability and better logistical networks to start vaccinating quickly and effectively while most EMs are lagging behind. Figure 1 shows the varied pace of vaccination rates, which tends to be lower for most EMs (notwithstanding some exceptions, like Chile). It’s generally thought that higher vaccination rates allow economies to open up with a reduced risk of infections rising and therefore a lower risk of new waves of the virus hitting the country and economy.

    While many Europeans are planning or enjoying summer holidays at home abroad, countries like Indonesia, Thailand and Vietnam are close to or at the highest number of infections since the start of the pandemic. At the same time, India is still licking its wounds after a devastating 2nd wave, while other countries like Brazil, Argentina, and Colombia still need to up their games and improve their current pace of vaccination. These differences translate into the path to economic recovery and the economic outlook going forward. Figure 2 shows GDP growth per country compared to what it would have been in the absence of the Covid-19 pandemic based on average GDP growth in the period 2011-2019. Figure 2 illustrates that not only did AEs (solid lines) generally suffer less than EMs (dashed lines) in terms of “lost” growth in 2020, they are also better able to regain lost ground in 2021 through to 2022. The US is expected to have regained almost all lost ground by the end of 2022. In contrast by the end of 2022 especially Asian EMs like Thailand, India and Indonesia will still face a loss of almost 10% in economic output due to the crisis.

    Structural impact on the economy

    One of the most pressing questions regarding the pandemic for developing countries is whether the unprecedented crisis will result in any lingering, structural scars on the economy. The impact of the current crisis has mainly felt in high-contact service industries, tourism in particular. The World Tourism Organization estimates that tourism shrank by 74% in 2020 and the IMF forecasts that it would take at least 3 years for global tourism to return to pre-pandemic levels. Even if the rest of the economy slowly recovers, it is highly likely that the tourism sector will remain extremely weak in the coming years. Economies that are more dependent on tourism like Thailand, Mexico and Malaysia are more vulnerable to these shocks than countries that are less dependent on tourism (Figure 3)

    Manufacturing in general bounced back relatively quickly in 2021 (especially compared to the aftermath of the Global Financial Crisis), due to pent-up demand, government support to households in advanced countries and more spending in durables instead of services. The car industry has been the largest driver of the manufacturing recovery, accounting for about 35 percent of the global rebound in the second half of 2020, while electrical equipment accounted for almost 5 percent of the rebound.

    However, the economic recovery is mainly driven by large, while small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) were hit very hard by the pandemic, due to lower capital levels, lower capacity to adjust to remote working, and lower access to government funds. Moreover, the penetration of online retailers increased substantially during the lockdowns, which reduced the market share of traditional SMEs. In most emerging markets, the line between the SMEs and the informal sector is quite blurred, making it particularly difficult for these companies to receive government support. Support for SMEs was an important part of government packages in many countries: the Brazilian government dedicated 58.0% of their BRL1.27trn package to support workers and firms, the Indian government extended guarantees for SME loans, created a fund for equity infusion and loosened the regulations; Turkey offered an extended lending scheme for SMEs ; Thailand approved close to USD 20bn in soft loans to SMEs (both through private banks and directly from the government), to name but a few. It is likely that in the coming years non-payment of these loans or guarantees might materialize as liabilities for the sovereigns states.

    Rising inflation (expectations)

    The recovering economic growth and optimistic growth outlook in AEs increase pressure on prices in a number of ways, potentially leading to higher inflation. This extensive report dives deeper into drivers for inflation and potential scenarios. Here we give only a brief description of some main drivers of current inflation expectations: Firstly, the restrictions of the pandemic are fading, leading to higher private consumption and consumer confidence which increases demand and puts pressure on prices. Secondly, global commodities prices are surging (Figure 4) which increases input costs for manufacturers and potentially pushes costs down the supply chain, leading to higher prices. Thirdly, most central banks have an ultra-accommodative stance: this means low interest rates and low borrowing costs, leading to increased investments and potentially an increase in prices (for example, housing prices). Finally, fiscal stimulus by governments is very large (as explained in this publication), which also has the potential to increase inflation.

    Reaction of central banks

    All of these factors push up inflation expectations. Recently, we have already seen the first examples in the US and UK, where inflation figures were higher than expected. Many central banks explain the rise in inflation as “transitory”, but the voices questioning the length of the period of higher inflation are getting louder. These developments cause us to wonder: what are central banks going to do? The question is particularly relevant for the Fed, as any material policy decisions related to inflation, which accelerated again in June, and a more hawkish stance by the Fed will potentially have direct consequences for the financial stability of EMs.

    The last time the Fed started tapering had dramatic consequences for many EMs, known as the “taper tantrum” back in 2013. One of the main reasons for the sudden collapse of EM currencies was that the tapering came somewhat unexpectedly. Therefore the Fed tries to be as predictable as possible in order to prevent such shocks going forward. For this reason, Fed chair Powell speaks about an advanced notice, which will signal any changes in policy before announcing a decision on a change in asset purchases. So how far away are we from an advanced notice?

    As we explain in our comments on the FOMC, the minutes from June highlight that the rise in inflation was higher than anticipated and a substantial majority of the participants think inflation risk is towards the upside. Furthermore, various participants expect the conditions to start reducing the pace of asset purchases (tapering) somewhat earlier than they expected previously. The median FOMC participant now expects two rate hikes of 25bps in 2023 instead of zero last March. Meanwhile, the discussion on tapering has started and Powell’s advance notice could come as soon as the Jackson Hole symposium in late August or the FOMC meeting in September.
    How vulnerable are EMs to any tightening of monetary policy at this time? Especially taking into account the asymmetry in the pandemic and divergence in economic recovery as described above.

    Risks for emerging markets

    Explosive cocktail in the making

    Tightening monetary policy in the US generally pushes up US yields and may also strengthen the USD verses EM currencies. This can potentially reverse some of the international capital flows which have been flowing towards EMs in the past year as a spill-over effect of the ultra-loose fiscal and monetary policy by advanced economies (Figure 5). These spill-over effects strengthened emerging market  currencies over  the last year, pushing them close to the highest level in a decade (Figure 6). The strength of the EM currencies, as a result of the capital inflows, helped EM governments in providing affordable financing to battle the consequences of the pandemic. However, there may be an explosive cocktail in store for vulnerable EMs due to the combination of weakening of domestic currencies vs. USD as a result of FED policy action, increased foreign currency debt levels as a result of Covid-19, high commodity prices (including oil), and faltering domestic recovery as a result of new waves of Covid-19.

    The ‘EM Vulnerability Heatmap’ as presented in Table 1 provides an overview of many economic indicators which allow us to asses and compare the relative vulnerability of EMs. In the next section we dive deeper into five indicators that could be valuable in order to assess a  country’s vulnerability.

    Public debt levels have increased across the board

    Governments have increased expenditures as a reaction to the negative economic consequences of the pandemic, resulting in higher debt levels (as a % of GDP) in many countries (Figure 7). Especially Colombia, India and South Africa show large increases in public debt over the past year.

    However, by using a methodology developed by Mauro and Zilinsky (Figure 8) we are able to nuance the growth in public debt to GDP ratio. Interestingly, despite falling interest rates, the interest expenses of advanced economies have slightly increased due to massive increases in the gross debt level. Simultaneously, we observe that the interest expense in emerging economies is only a marginal effect of the increase in public debt, while the loss in economic growth accounts for a much more significant part of the increase in public debt to GDP ratio. What is even more striking is that economic growth had a greater impact on the increase in debt to GDP ratio than fiscal policy measures in EMs. Figure 8 demonstrates that economic growth plays a much bigger role in emerging markets and low-income developing economies. In other words, economic growth rates are very important with regard to managing sustainable public debt levels. As already mentioned above, this is precisely what might work against EMs in 2021 as long as vaccination programs are slow to develop and the spread of the virus continues to drag on the economy.

    Nonetheless, while total public debt levels provide valuable information on the fiscal state of a country, there are other metrics which are well suited to explain EMs’ vulnerability. Debt levels are not always directly affected by any of the exogenous factors we discussed above (like increasing US interest rates). Therefore, a better indicator to gauge vulnerability would be the part of the total debt which is denominated in a foreign currency. : If the USD (or other foreign currency) were to strengthen versus the domestic currency this could have severe implications for the sustainability of EM debt levels Why? As the domestic currency depreciates this essentially increases the debt level in domestic currency. This implies that the higher your foreign currency denominated debt level is, the more vulnerable your fiscal position with regard to a depreciating currency.

    Moreover, a country can only service its foreign currency debt by reducing its currency reserves and/or earning enough currency in foreign trade. So apart from holding external FX reserves and international assets, a positive current account balance is crucial for these countries. On the other hand, a deficit here increases their financial troubles. We will look at the current account in more detail in the next section. Figure 9 shows that the governments of countries on the left-hand side like Argentina, Turkey and Colombia are relatively vulnerable in terms of foreign currency debt. China, Thailand and India have less foreign currency debt , making them less vulnerable to exogenous shocks that affect the price of the domestic currency.

    Trade positions have shifted due to the pandemic

    The pandemic hit countries in an asymmetric fashion as a result of diverse characteristics of domestic economies. This has also undoubtedly been the case with regard to trade. There have been swings in the current account of many emerging countries, in a positive sense for some and negative for others. A few developments that were aa direct consequence of the pandemic impacted the current account over the course of last year. Firstly, increased demand for medical goods meant that exporters of health-related products or inputs saw a dramatic rise in demand for their products. Secondly, at the same time, due to lockdowns in advanced economies people were unable to spend their money on services and therefore private expenditures shifted partly towards purchasing goods. This higher demand for goods from AE’s increased exports of products for emerging markets that produce these goods. Thirdly, over the course of the year commodity prices started to increase (Figure 4): this was due to a more positive economic growth outlook that increased demand and benefitted commodity exporters but negatively impacted commodity importers. Finally, domestic import of products and services collapsed in many EMs as a result of lower domestic consumption during the crisis, thereby increasing the current account. Figure 10 illustrates and compares the differences in current accounts of EMs from Q2 2020 to Q2 2021.

    The recent developments pose certain risks to the current account going forward. Firstly, as the coronavirus slowly fades, consumers in AEs might substitute the expenditures on goods back to services, which decreases the exports of EMs over time, shifting back to pre-corona levels. The second is that the de-globalisation trend will continue going forward and re-shoring will move some export products from EMs towards AEs. As explained earlier, a current account surplus makes it easier for countries to service their foreign currency debt. However, if one of the above scenarios materializes this might negatively impact the current account, leaving some EMs with current account deficits. In such a scenario the export cover is a factor that could limit the domestic FX currency risks. In Figure 11 we show how many months of imports can be covered by the FX reserves of the country. We observe that countries on the left-hand side, like Brazil, Russia and China, have many FX reserves, mitigating the risks of a depreciating currency. In contrast countries like Mexico, Hungary and Turkey are more vulnerable to FX shocks.

    Interest rate costs

    Nominal and real rates of EMs have steadily decreased over the past year partly as a result of the pandemic. But it is likely that 2021/22 will see a rise in interest rates across the emerging markets. This can be clearly seen with Brazil which is poised to hike its Selic rate by year-end to levels seen before the pandemic, but it has also been the case for other EMs like Russia and Chile. Anticipation of a US normalization of monetary policy might add pressures for central banks to hike sooner across the board.

    To give a more nuanced picture we have captured the real short-term interest rates (ex-post) in Figure 12. These are negative for five out of the seven countries in consideration (nominal rate adjusted for inflation) in 2021. Countries are using this as an opportunity to increase short-term borrowing instead of longer-term borrowing. This has been observed across both AEs and EMs. The strategy is to roll over short-term debts in the current “higher” inflation environment and wait for the market uncertainty to settle before converting it to long-term debt. Some countries like China and Mexico are relying on recovering revenues to pay back this debt, while others, like India, are also looking at privatization of public sector entities for the required cash.

    However, emerging markets will probably not be benefitting from negative real interest rates forever. Figure 12 already illustrates that nominal and real interest rates have started to climb in some countries over the course of 2021. So while the public debt figures kept climbing, the pandemic (or rather the related fiscal and monetary measures) temporarily reduced the cost of financing for most countries. Nevertheless, there is an increasing likelihood of higher interest rates on the back of inflation expectations and subsequent rate hikes by central banks. Higher interest rates will probably lead to higher interest rate costs for EMs, posing a threat to debt sustainability going forward.

    Having discussed some important indicators to monitor with regard to emerging market vulnerability, the question is: how do all of these factors add up?

    The final ranking

    Table 1 summarizes the main factors determining EM vulnerability according to the indicators included in our Heatmap. In Table 2 we have added them up to get a general sense of which countries can be deemed more vulnerable with regard to the indicators included. In general we see that LatAm countries are relatively vulnerable compared to their peers. Asian countries are relatively less vulnerable, although the Philippines, Malaysia and Indonesia are increasingly vulnerable and rank lower compared to six months ago. The same holds for South Korea, although it is still close to the top of the chart. European countries are now better ranked than 6 months ago although their individual scores did not improve so much.

    In conclusion, we hope that the use of the Heatmap and accompanying economic indicators has helped to sketch a clear picture of potential risks and vulnerabilities of EMs. Naturally, they help to indicate risks and compare the relative vulnerabilities of EMs. However, keep in mind that these are based on current economic indicators and are therefore an illustration of the current situation and vulnerability. They do not include any forecasts or have the intention to rank future economic performance of the countries included.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 23:00

  • Crypto Soars Higher In Early Asia Trading, Bitcoin Nears $40k
    Crypto Soars Higher In Early Asia Trading, Bitcoin Nears $40k

    As Asian investors woke this morning, crypto markets have roared higher…

    Source: Bloomberg

    That is jump of over 30% from the below-$30k lows ahead of last week’s much anticipated “B-Word” conference with Elon Musk and Jack Dorsey…

    Source: Bloomberg

    This is the biggest jump since early May and second biggest since February.

    The catalyst for the move remains uncertain but we note that Bitcoin broke above its 50DMA and is testing up towards its 100DMA

    Source: Bloomberg

    Others suggested it is pre-emptive buying ahead of TSLA’s earnings this week, anticipating a pro-crypto message.

    Still more pointed out the headlines around Amazon ramping up its crypto team and hopes for more widespread adoption could be a driver.

    CoinTelegraph reports that an anonymous source within Amazon has reportedly told London business newspaper City A.M. that the e-commerce giant is planning to accept Bitcoin (BTC) payments by the end of 2021, possibly setting the stage for broader mainstream acceptance of crypto transactions. 

    “This isn’t just going through the motions to set up cryptocurrency payment solutions at some point in the future – this is a full-on, well-discussed, integral part of the future mechanism of how Amazon will work,” the anonymous source told City A.M., according to a report published on Sunday

    She indicated that, while Bitcoin is the first step in Amazon’s crypto ambitions, executives at the company were keen to add other established cryptocurrencies in the future.

    The “directive is coming from the very top,” referring to Jeff Bezos, she said, adding:

    “This entire project is pretty much ready to roll.”

    Finally, we note that Japanese markets were closed Thursday/Friday for the Olympics and so this morning represents a reopening of liquidity from those markets.

    Bitcoin was not alone with Ethereum spiking above $2300…

    Source: Bloomberg

    Is The Fed’s recent rebound in its balance sheet signaling time to rotate back into bubble markets?

    Source: Bloomberg

    Get back to work Mr.Powell.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 22:29

  • Typhoon In-Fa Hits China's East Coast, Forcing Container Ports To Close 
    Typhoon In-Fa Hits China’s East Coast, Forcing Container Ports To Close 

    Typhoon In-Fa made landfall in eastern China with high wind and torrential rains as other parts of the country were cleaning up from last week’s historic flooding.

    In-Fa came ashore Sunday on China’s east coast south of Shanghai. Hundreds of thousands of people were evacuated, airline flights and trains were canceled, seaports were shuttered, and the public was advised to remain indoors. 

    The national weather agency said the typhoon made landfall in Zhoushan in Zhejiang province and is expected to dump 10-14 inches. 

    On Saturday, Yangshan Port in Shanghai moved containerships and secured containers on land ahead of the storm. Yangshan Port is a deep-water port and one of the most active in China. The disruption throws another wrench in global supply chains that are already under stress. 

    Melinda Liu, Beijing bureau chief for Newsweek, said, “the problem with this typhoon is not only that it is wreaking economic havoc in some key parts in China but also that it comes at a very delicate time.”

    “It, first of all, comes just a few days after massive flooding in central China, which has disrupted lives of a million people and killed dozens. Not just killed people but also created images that went viral on social media, some very graphic pictures of people who apparently drowned in a subway system,” she said.

    “But there is also a political significance, and the point of that is probably going to play out in the coming months.”

    “There is a possibility that … if the handling of the preparedness is not up to par, then the government might be blamed.”

    Videos posted on social media show the dark sky over Shanghai’s skyscrapers. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As the storm came ashore, 60 mph winds ripped through city streets. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    At least 360,000 people were evacuated. Here’s another video of damaging winds.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, Tropical Storm Nepartak is in the Philippine Sea and barreling towards Japan as the Olympic Games begin. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 22:00

  • Time To Buy Gold As A Hedge Against "Extreme Financial Deleveraging" Credit Suisse Says
    Time To Buy Gold As A Hedge Against “Extreme Financial Deleveraging” Credit Suisse Says

    It’s been a while since Wall Street banks recommended anything to do with either gold or gold stocks, but in a surprising reversal, last week one of Wall Street’s biggest bulls Credit Suisse said that the time has come to use gold stocks as a risk off diversifier, while seeing material upside for the precious metal.

    Here is why CS’ global equity strategist Andrew Garthwaite, believes that it is now time to buy gold:

    • First, according to Garthwaite, the valuation of gold stocks is abnormally cheap on both P/E – trading at a 25% discount to the broader market vs a 30% premium normally, and also cheap on a price-to-book basis relative to the market

    • Looking at individual stocks, Credit Suisse writes that its “outperform”-rated stocks which screen cheap and have positive earnings revisions are: Newcrest Mining, Newmont, Endeavour Mining, Perseus, Regis Resources, St Barbara, Agnico Eagle Mines, Barrick Gold, Kinross Gold, Yamana Gold

    As for the metal itself, the Swiss bank notes that gold is also at the bottom end of its 10-year range against silver or industrial commodities and 20% below its 2011 peak in real terms.

    According to the Credit Suisse model, the price of gold is driven by the TIPS yield and the dollar. Why does this matters?

    Recently, the gold price has lagged the fall in TIPS yield (should be 5% higher). Looking at TIPS yields, Garthwaite sees little change; the more investors fear an inflation tail risk as they do on the UoM or FOMC data, the more they will likely want to buy inflation protection and the more expensive the TIPS yield becomes.

    As for the dollar, CS remains structural bears. The last time the European current account surplus was this high against the dollar, the euro was 30% higher. Meanwhile, the US current account deficit is not improving with US net debt now at 70% of GDP (anything above 50% according to the IMF, could cause a currency crisis) and globally the world is overweight dollars (60% of FX reserves and 25% of GDP). Speculative positions are at one-year highs.

    Combining the two signals, the bank’s model suggests 7% upside potential to the gold price.

    But while gold may be undervalued in strictly fundamental terms, there is always a risk that central banks will lose control and markets will crash. Gold fixes this, because as Garthwaite writes, “Gold is a hedge against extreme financial deleveraging” and adds:

    The level of government debt, deficit and corporate debt is extreme. We continue to believe that if the TIPS yield gets much above zero, that would start to cause the markets to worry about a debt trap and that in turn could lead to a major risk-off trade. This could then prompt a Fed response driving down real yields (and debasing money).

    Additionally, gold is also a hedge against the explosive global money supply:

    We think this will also cause central banks to buy more gold (as currencies are being debased). Central banks account for 12% of gold demand. If all central banks had a minimum of 10% in gold, then gold demand would increase 1.6x, on our calculations.

    What about crypto? If bitcoin is digital gold, is gold then the physical bitcoin? Well, not really: according to Credit Suisse, the disintermediation risk from cryptocurrencies appears to have decreased.

    Digging deeper into this, Credit Suisse sees that following constraints on the ability of cryptos to disintermediate gold:

     

    Finally, gold’s technicals also hint at a potential upside breakout, with speculative positions neutral, while gold is trading close to its six-month MA.

    Of course, none of this matters as long as the BIS strategically lends out paper gold to its member banks who have a net deficit in the thousands of tons, and tactically decides to slam the bid every time there is an even modest breakout to make sure that golden animal spirits never emerge.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 21:00

  • Why Did China Buy An Airstrip In Texas?
    Why Did China Buy An Airstrip In Texas?

    Authored by Aden Tate via The Organic Prepper blog,

    Should nations let their enemies purchase land within their own borders? You’d likely give a resounding ‘no’ to this question, correct? 

    And yet, a former Chinese general with alleged ties to Chinese concentration camps recently bought an airstrip in Texas. And this isn’t just some random ranch in the middle of nowhere. It is 200 square miles (130,000 acres) of land between one of the most active Air Force bases in the U.S. and the border of Mexico.

    As the world is being fear-mongered about “variants,” this is happening right under American noses. 

    Who is Sun Guangxin?

    Sun Guangxin is a former General of the People’s Liberation Army in China. He owns two-thirds of real estate where the Uyghur concentration camps are located in the capital of Xinjiang. 

    Russia had The Gulag. China has the LAOGAI.

    The terrors that take place within the LAOGAI system can be seen and read about on the LAOGAI Research website. The pictures and nightmarish stories within will show you the brutal truth about socialism/communism. 

    Why Did Guangxin Purchase Land in the U.S.? 

    The former Chinese General purchased the land to allegedly build wind farms. The name of the property purchased by the Chinese firm is called the Morning Star Ranch.

    Sun Guangxin, who has close ties to the Chinese Communist Party, purchased the land allegedly to build wind farms, Kyle Bass, founder, and principal of Hayman Capital Management and a founding member of the Committee on the Present Danger: China, told Epoch T.V. in a recent interview.

    The wind farm project, known as the Blue Hills Wind development, is being managed by G.H. America Energy, the U.S. subsidiary of Sun Guangxin’s Guanghua Energy Company. [source]

    Should We Be Concerned About the Morning Star Ranch?

    Well. Perhaps, yes. 

    “You’ve got a former People’s Liberation Army general billionaire who has bought over 130,000 acres of Texan land, including a giant wind farm in an area where there isn’t particularly a lot of wind but happens to be right beside a very sensitive U.S. military installation,” Bass said.[source]

    And the Morning Star Ranch has its own airfield. We’re not talking about just some cruddy dirt airstrip for a Cessna, either. We’re talking about a well-maintained, paved runway that’s somewhere in the ballpark of 4000-5000 feet. Current reports indicate that the former General may have expanded to 10,000 feet. The airfield is listed as permanently closed by the FAA (its call sign is TA81), yet it appears to be well-maintained. 

    Who Wants a (Reportedly) 10,000-Foot Long Airway in the Middle of Nowhere, Texas?

    Or, perhaps a better question: WHY would anyone want an airway of this size in the middle of Nowhere, Texas? 

    Maybe to land a Chinese-130 or Chinese-130J clone? (This size runway could easily accommodate such an aircraft.)

    We’re talking about a remote ranch with excellent views in all directions. It has ready access to a nearby Air Force pilot training base. And it’s not too far from Mexico.

    Let’s Build a Wind Farm Where There’s No Wind!

    As I mentioned above, Guangxin allegedly purchased the airstrip to develop a wind farm on the premises. Interestingly, this region of Texas is not known for its high wind volume.

    “You’ve got a former People’s Liberation Army general billionaire who has bought over 130,000 acres of Texan land, including a giant wind farm in an area where there isn’t particularly a lot of wind but happens to be right beside a very sensitive U.S. military installation,” Bass said.

    ” My view and this is my view only, not our country view yet, but my view is the reason that he bought the wind farm and wants to put up 700-foot turbines is he plugs directly into our electric grid.” [source]

    A report from news4santonio.com claims Texas lawmakers passed a bill stopping Guangxin from building the wind farm.

    Property owners and conservationists were the first to raise alarm about the wind farm, saying construction might harm the pristine Devil’s River. The also worry allowing a foreign company to connect to the Texas power grid would make it vulnerable.

    “There are foreign actors, as we’ve seen recently with the gas pipeline hack, that have ill intent for our country and our critical infrastructure,” said Julie Lewey with the Devil’s River Conservancy.

    Those concerns were amplified by China-watchers like Kyle Bass, who recently took a picture of an air strip on Sun’s ranch. Bass alleges Sun Guangxin is a former general with ties to the communist party, and his company should not be allowed access to the power grid.

    “When you’re able to plug directly in you’re able to map it, you’re also able to upload malware, you can do all kinds of horrible things to our grid,” Bass said. [source]

    And Now There are Strange Drone Sightings in the Region

    On February 9, 2021, an unknown drone was spotted surveilling the Kinder Morgan fuel tanks in the region around Davis-Monthan Air Force Base. 

    The drone, spotted accidentally, did not appear on any radar systems nearby, nor could it be seen with night vision technology. It seems as if this is some form of highly modified ‘stealth’ drone. The presence of a single, green LED light is the only reason the drone was spotted. 

    The drone, described as a quad-copter, is roughly 5′ in length and 3′ in width. Two helicopters were sent out to follow it: one by the CBP and the other by the Tucson police department. The drone outran and outmaneuvered them both.

    As the helicopters chased after the drone, the drone accelerated and ascended until it disappeared into the cloud cover at 14,000′. At that point, the search ended as the drone could no longer be found

    Who Has That Kind of Technology? 

    Who has the technology necessary to create a drone with zero radar signature, is invisible to night vision, can outrun two helicopters, and can ascend to 14,000 feet? That’s an incredible display of technology!

    We know that China has invested heavily in drones of late, as referenced in our recent post on drone swarms. Chief of these drones would be the Y-8, an electronic warfare drone, and the GJ-11, aka the ‘Sharp Sword.’ The GJ-11 was unveiled in October 2019 and is a hypersonic stealth drone.

    Given all the other Chinese involvement in the region, it seems logical that these are Chinese drones.

    What Conclusions Can We Draw?

    So we have a former Chinese general purchasing an airstrip in Texas. He expanded the airstrip. He allegedly bought the land to build a wind farm in an area that is not known for its wind. Multiple Chinese real estate investments have hit the surrounding region. And now, there are highly advanced drones being spotted in the region.

    Something else to consider, as noted in a recent article by Robert Wheeler, part of China’s strategy to become the world’s superpower is to buy up Western businesses.

    Are Chinese troops conducting surveillance of Texas and the surrounding regions? Are they prepping the ability to launch drones throughout this part of America? What possible reasons could there be for their desire to tie into the American power grid here?  

    What do you think the motive might be? Is it entirely innocent? What are your thoughts? Let us know in the comments.

    We’ll leave that up to the reader to decide. As for me, I believe that the reasoning is pretty straightforward: the Chinese want American soil.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 20:30

  • Move Over COVID: A Drug Resistant Super Bug Fungus Is Now Being Reported In Texas And Washington D.C.
    Move Over COVID: A Drug Resistant Super Bug Fungus Is Now Being Reported In Texas And Washington D.C.

    Just when you thought things couldn’t get any better on the global health landscape, along comes one of those pesky drug-resistant superbug fungi.

    An outbreak of such a “superbug” has spread among patients in hospitals and long-term care facilities in Texas and Washington, D.C., according to CBS News. The 30 day mortality rate for the outbreaks, combined, was 30% the report said.

    The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention said late last week that the Candida auris fungus preys on people with weak immune systems and that cases were the result of person-to-person transmission.

    The cases in Texas and Washington, D.C. appear to be unrelated to one another. 

    Candida auris was first discovered in 2013 and is “resistant to multiple anti-fungal drugs that we have, and it’s also resistant to all the things that we use to eradicate bacteria and fungal strains in the hospital,” according to internal medicine specialist Dr. Neeta Ogden.

    101 cases have been identified in Washington D.C. between January and April 2021. Three cases “were isolated as being resistant to all three major classes of anti-fungal medications”, CBS reported.

    In Texas, 22 cases were identified over the same period, with two cases “being resistant to all three anti-fungal medications, and five resistant to two of the medications”.

    Dr. Meghan Lyman of the CDC said: “This is really the first time we’ve started seeing clustering of resistance.”

    People with breathing tubes, feeding tubes or central venous catheters appear to be the most at risk to catch the superbug, the CDC said. The superbug has been reported in hospitals and long-term care facilities around the world.

    The CDC report concluded: “Surveillance, public health reporting, and infection control measures are critical to containing further spread.”

    There’s been no word on whether or not locking down the entire country and economy, along with double, triple and quadruple masking, are options. We’ll wait to hear from Dr. Fauci on that.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 20:00

  • Trans Individuals Sue Montana Over Proof-Of-Sex-Change Requirement To Amend Birth Certificates
    Trans Individuals Sue Montana Over Proof-Of-Sex-Change Requirement To Amend Birth Certificates

    Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times,

    Two Montanans who claim to be transgender filed a lawsuit against the state over a law that requires those wishing to change their sex on birth certificates to prove that they’ve had sex reassignment surgery.

    The measure, known as Senate Bill 280, signed in April by Gov. Greg Gianforte, a Republican, provides that the sex designation on a birth certificate may be altered only if the Montana Department of Public Health and Human Services has first received a certified copy of a court order indicating that the sex of the individual born in Montana had been changed by surgical procedure.

    State Sen. Carl Glimm, who introduced the bill, said in March he believes a birth certificate is “an item in fact” that should record reality.

    “When a person is born, you record where they’re born, you record their weight, you record their sex. And that’s important information to document,” the Republican lawmaker said, according to local media.

    The lawsuit, known as Marquez v. State of Montana, was filed July 16 as case number DV21-00873 in the 13th Judicial District Court in the state court system.

    According to the legal complaint, the plaintiffs are Amelia Marquez, a man who identifies as a woman, and John Doe, a woman who identifies as a man. Marquez and Doe wish to “correct” their respective Montana birth certificates, which they claim no longer reflect reality.

    Both plaintiffs have taken hormone therapy, and Doe has “completed masculinizing chest reconstruction surgery.” Both have no desire to undergo more surgery.

    The American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU), which is representing the plaintiffs, argues the statute in question violates their constitutional rights to privacy, equal protection of the law, and due process, according to a statement. Having a birth certificate that doesn’t match a person’s gender identity puts that individual at greater risk of harassment, hostility, and discrimination, the group stated.

    “I would like to change the sex designation on my birth certificate to match my female gender identity, but am unable to do so because of the Act,” Marquez said.

    “My inability to obtain a birth certificate that accurately reflects my female gender identity is a painful and stigmatizing reminder of the State of Montana’s refusal to recognize me as a woman. Further, denying me an accurate birth certificate places me at risk of embarrassment or even violence every time I am required to present my birth certificate, because it incorrectly identifies me as male.”

    According to the 2015 U.S. Transgender Survey, only 25 percent of transgender people in America reported having undergone some form of transition-related surgery. As a result, advocates say laws requiring surgery make it impossible for most of these people to change their gender on birth certificates or driver’s licenses.

    A lack of linguistic clarity has clouded the issue in recent years as the concepts of sex and sexual identity, or gender—a politically and scientifically contentious concept whose definition isn’t universally agreed upon—have become difficult to separate. Despite the distinct meanings of the two words, many institutions and individuals use “gender” to mean biological sex, especially on fillable forms and documents.

    “A person’s sex designation is determined by the gender identity, not their sex assigned at birth or their anatomy,” the complaint claims.

    “Gender-affirming surgery, even for those transgender people who have a medical need for it, does not ‘change’ their sex, but rather affirms it.”

    “By embracing the Act, the State of Montana has imposed a draconian medical requirement on transgender people that has no medical or other rational justification. It reinstates an archaic understanding of transgender people and ignores modern medical treatment guidelines.”

    Former transgender activist James Shupe told The Epoch Times via email that the lawsuit is nonsensical because the idea that one can change one’s sex is a “legal and medical fiction.”

    “So a penis of a male that’s been flipped inside out or otherwise reconstructed by a surgical procedure to resemble a vagina is still made of up cells that are male,” Shupe said.

    “Likewise, tissue removed from the arm of a female to construct a fake penis is still composed of cells that are female. No sex change has taken place. It’s legal and medical fiction. When the police find an unrecognizable body on the side of the road, they don’t use gender identity, a person’s belief about themself, to determine the sex of that corpse. Nor do archeologists.”

    Shupe, after serving as an icon of transgender activism, denounced the movement and the idea that one can change one’s sex as a fraud. Shupe was the first individual in Oregon to receive legal recognition for his “non-binary” sex designation, only to ask to have the status rescinded and his male sex designation restored on his birth certificate after his epiphany.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 19:30

  • The Role Of Impaired Liquidity On The Recent Treasury Market Rollercoaster
    The Role Of Impaired Liquidity On The Recent Treasury Market Rollercoaster

    Two weeks ago, on July 8 we summarized what Wall Street thought were the main reasons behind the sudden volatility observed in 10Y yields, when over the span of a few weeks, benchmark Treasury rates plunged from 1.70% to 1.30%, covering everything from fundamentals worries to technical positioning. However considering that just as volatile moves observed since then…

    … one wonders if there isn’t a more basic, if ominous, reason behind the roller coaster observed in what once was the world’s deepest and most liquid market: lack of liquidity.

    That’s the conclusion reached by JPMorgan quant Nick Panigirtzoglou, who writes that given the recent market moves, particularly in bond markets, it has raised the question of whether liquidity conditions have played an amplifying role. Reminding readers of the violent moves in rates earlier in the year, when following the catastrophic February 7Y auction the bond market suffered a historic breakdown and when a deterioration in market liquidity undoubtedly contributed to the bond market sell-off, the JPM strategist asks whether something similar could have exacerbated market moves more recently?

    His answer is a decisive yes, and after pointing out the sharp decline in equity vol in recent weeks, something we highlighted last week when we showed the sudden drop (and subsequent rebound) in e-mini top of book depth liquidity…

    … Panigirtzoglou goes on to observe bond market liquidity and notes that after the bond market had recovered its early 2021 liquidity deterioration by mid-May, it has since deteriorated again to levels closer to the late February lows. By contrast, market depth in 10y Bund futures appears little changed (figure 5). Furthermore, JPM’s metric for market breadth, or the price impact of trading volumes, for 10y UST futures is also consistent with a deterioration in liquidity conditions to levels earlier in the year (Figure 6).

    In other words, in contrast to equities where liquidity conditions show little sign of deterioration, in UST markets a deterioration in liquidity conditions has likely amplified market moves.

    Finding no similar contraction in liquidity in commodities or credit, the JPM strategist concludes that “the deterioration in liquidity conditions in markets appears to have been mainly concentrated in UST markets and has very likely exacerbated the magnitude of those moves.” In equities, the deterioration in liquidity conditions appears relatively modest for US equities, though there is some evidence of deterioration in non-US markets.

    Of course, declining liquidity merely means that every sizable trade will have a far greater impact than otherwise, and in a world where momentum, trend-following managers and CTAs in general dominate (as most carbon-based traders are out on vacation), it pays to take a look at how CTAs are positioned. Well, according to JPMorgan, when 10y TSYs reached intra-day lows of around 1.13% on Tuesday, a move exacerbated by the deterioration in liquidity conditions noted above, some of these short-term overbought CTA signals have likely triggered mean reversion or profit taking.

    And while Panigirtzoglou concedes that the longer-term signals are still some way from being triggered, but similar to signalling the oversold levels in March it is likely that shorter-term signals have a greater weight in the current conjuncture.

    In other words, the CTAs are now done buying Treasurys and if anything, will seek to sell to book profits, and – eventually – short outright.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 19:00

  • Chicago Chamber Of Commerce Rages As Average Unemployed Illinoisan Parent Earns $35/Hour Sitting On The Couch
    Chicago Chamber Of Commerce Rages As Average Unemployed Illinoisan Parent Earns $35/Hour Sitting On The Couch

    Authored by Noah Sheer via IllinoisPolicy.org,

    Illinois employers are hurting from a lack of workers while the state unemployment rate remains high. When a parent can stay home and make $51,627 on unemployment, the prospects of getting more workers back to work this summer appear dim.

    Illinois’ unemployment rate rose to 7.2% July 15, the 8th worst in the nation, at the same time employers are having trouble filling job vacancies.

    The average Illinoisan earns $55,770 a year at work. If that person stayed home with their kids and collected unemployment, it would be $51,627.

    For a parent earning around the state average, that’s $4,000 less for deciding not to work, and with no child care or transportation expenses.

    Crunch the numbers another way and add federal stimulus, and the Chicagoland Chamber of Commerce calculated an unemployed worker receives $35 an hour.

    “In Illinois alone, there are tens of thousands of unfilled jobs. Employers are offering substantially higher wages, employment bonuses and taking other steps to encourage people to return to work,” the chamber wrote in an open letter to Gov. J.B. Pritzker.

    “The problem is employers cannot compete with the approximate $35 per hour unemployed workers have received over the last four months as a result of enhanced UI benefits, tax credits, and stimulus payments.”

    Illinois’ 7.2% unemployment rate exceeds the national average of 5.9%. Government policies are not helping reduce it.

    Unemployed Illinoisans before the COVID-19 pandemic were required to upload a resume on IllinoisJobLink.com, a state-run job bank. The state rescinded the requirement for those unemployed by the pandemic. Currently, employers have posted over 120,000 jobs on the state jobs site; residents have only posted 37,834 resumes.

    This month, Washington joined a growing list of states to require unemployment recipients to search for a job. Illinois will not be joining them.

    “I don’t want to pull the rug out from under people that have certainly legitimate reasons for remaining on unemployment,” Pritzker said when asked about the reform.

    He also promised to keep paying the extra $300 in federal pandemic unemployment relief through the federal expirationdate of Sept. 6. Over half of states are already putting an early stop to the additional $300 over concerns it is incentivizing people to stay unemployed.

    Pritzker’s solution has been to ponder paying people bonuses for returning to work. The program has been used in Arizona, Montana, New Hampshire and Oklahoma and replaces extended benefits with a $1,000 bonus received upon return to work. Even with the bonuses, recipients will still have trouble making more by working than by staying home.

    Maximum unemployment benefits – which are set based on the average wage of a person paying into unemployment – are currently $805 per week for single, childless Illinoisans. That is $505 from the state and $300 from federal Pandemic Emergency Unemployment Compensation funds. Because lower wage individuals are more likely to collect unemployment benefits, average unemployment payouts are lower than what the average worker would make on unemployment. Across all recipients, the average benefit paid out was $364.76 as of May 2021 plus the additional $300.

    A recipient with a child can receive up to $993 in weekly benefits. The state gives a maximum of $693 to individuals with children, regardless of how many children, plus the $300 from the federal government. Parents as of July were also eligible to receive their child tax credit monthly, which has also been increased per child and per month.

    So go to work, average $55,770 and pay for child care, transportation and taxes. Stay home, save the expenses, collect tax breaks and get up to $51,627.

    It would be nice if Illinois didn’t leave people questioning their work ethic.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 18:30

  • Watch: RINO AZ Senator Who Voted Against Election Integrity Bill Booed Off Stage
    Watch: RINO AZ Senator Who Voted Against Election Integrity Bill Booed Off Stage

    Republican Arizona State Sen. Michelle Ugenti-Rita was booed off the stage at a rally which former President Trump was set to appear.

    Ugenti-Rita, who notably voted against a GOP-backed measure that would remove tens of thousands of voters from the state’s early ballot mailing list, was met with a chorus of boos while speaking at the “Protect Our Elections” rally hosted by TPUSA in Phoenix on Saturday.

    “Why don’t you listen to what I have to say?” asked Ugenti-Rita, adding “Listen. Fine, OK… I am running to be your next Secretary of State. I’m going to win the primary. Thank you very much.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsIn addition to voting against the election integrity measure, Ugenti-Rita also no longer supports a months-long audit of the 2020 election in Maricopa County.

    “I won’t support bills that fail to strengthen our election system. The same holds true for the audit. I supported the audit, but I do not support the Trump audit any longer,” she said, adding “I wanted to review our election processes and see what, if anything, could be improved. Sadly, it’s now become clear that the audit has been botched.”

    Following her booing, Ugenti-Rita allegedly had a Gateway Pundit reporter handcuffed by police for ‘harassing’ her, then lashed out at Sen. Kelly Townsend for ‘encouraging him to break the law by committing trespassing by re-entering the building to continue to harass me.

    More from the National File’s Andrew White

    After Townsend expressed her outrage over how Ugenti-Rita had the police arrest a reporter, the reporter was ultimately released. “I think it’s concerning that someone on our side has such disregard for the Constitution that she would seek to have a journalist arrested because he dared ask her a question about me that angered her. I am glad we were able to resolve the issue and correct what could have been a great miscarriage of justice,” said Townsend.

    “As a veteran, I believe the only thing that is important right now is to get our elections secured. Americans, choose wisely in 2022, support those who support the audit. You will know who does, and who does not. Do not back down.” The Gateway Pundit explained what happened to their reporter at the behest of Ugenti-Rita:

    While on the phone with the Senator and simply walking to meet her outside of the event, police grabbed Conradson and used handcuffs to put him in the back of a police car.

    Conradson could hear police radios accusing him of being a member of the Proud Boys, a right-wing organization that the left has labeled as terrorists. Conradson has no affiliation with any political groups.

    The police said he was facing a misdemeanor and a fine of up to $900. This tyrant violated Conradson’s free press rights. State Senator Kelly Townsend raised hell when this happened which is most likely what led to Conradson’s release. The officers dropped Conradson off at his vehicle and said that he is permanently banned from the venue.

    *  *  *

    Needless to say, Midterms may be a bloodbath for RINOs trying to ‘take their party back.’

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 18:00

  • Weaponizing FARA? Trump Ally Barrack Released On Stunning $250 Million Bail
    Weaponizing FARA? Trump Ally Barrack Released On Stunning $250 Million Bail

    Authored by Andrea Widburg via AmericanThinker.com,

    There are so many things wrong with the story of Thomas Barrack that it’s hard to know where to begin.  

    Briefly, Biden’s DOJ charged Barrack, the man who chaired Trump’s inaugural fund, with illegal lobbying for the UAE.  Then, for the 74-year-old Barrack to get out of jail, a federal magistrate imposed a $250,000,000 bail on him, along with other serious restrictions on travel.  This is a travesty of justice and a clear threat to Trump allies, past, present, and future.

    As always, the Daily Mail has a good summary:

    Donald Trump‘s billionaire ally Thomas Barrack is being released on $250 million bond after being charged with illegally lobbying the Trump administration on behalf of the United Arab Emirates.

    The 74-year-old reached a deal with prosecutors on Friday that will see him released from custody while he awaits trial on charges of illegal lobbying.

    A federal magistrate judge in Los Angeles signed off on the conditions of the agreement, which will include surrendering his passport, complying with a curfew, and wearing an ankle bracelet with GPS monitoring.

    The agreement also calls for Barrack to put up a $250 million bond, secured by $5 million cash, which would be forfeited if he does not appear for court proceedings.

    Barrack, who chaired Trump’s inaugural fund in 2017 and founded the private equity firm Colony Capital, waived his right to appear in federal court.

    He will be arraigned in federal court in Brooklyn, New York on Monday. 

    There are several points to be made here, which I offer in no particular order:

    One: Before the Democrats weaponized it, few people had ever been prosecuted as unregistered foreign agents under the Foreign Agents Registration Act (FARA).  An article from 2010 reveals that the act was intended to sweep up foreign nationals:

    The major roll-up of 11 Russian spies-cum-suburbanites involves the relatively rare use of the criminal code that requires agents of foreign powers to register with the U.S. Justice Department – a provision that allows prosecution of covert foreign operatives working without diplomatic immunity.

    By 2010, when people were swept up under the act, they were working for hostile governments, as was the case with Robert Cabelly, a former State Department official under George H.W. Bush and Clinton who worked for Sudan, and Frank Duran, a Venezuelan national who worked for Hugo Chávez.

    By 2019, when the leftist Foreign Policy declared that the Act “is broken,” it also noted that its purpose, when enacted in 1938, was to combat fascist propaganda and that, since then, it was a “previously obscure piece of legislation.”  The same publication noted that it was Mueller who revitalized it to go after Trump allies.

    Just to remind you of the uneven application of this law, the DOJ, which has long been a leftist swamp, ignored it entirely when Tony Podesta represented a bank that was tied to Russian spying agencies.

    Two: Given that FARA was meant to protect against people sneakily representing enemies of the United States, it’s telling that, in Barrack’s case, the DOJ brought the charge against someone working with the United Arab Emirates.  The UAE not only has a friendly relationship with America but is also completely dedicated to the Abraham Accords with Israel.  It seems likely that the Biden administration is sending a “back off” message to anyone who gets too friendly with a nation the left wants to destroy.  Certainly, MSNBC wants everyone to understand that any Mideast nation friendly with Trump is a Biden enemy.

    Three: The trend across Democrat-run cities and states across America is to do away with bail.  After all, no one would expect a repeat violent offender, released without bail, to commit another violent crime or make a run for it.

    However, an elderly man with an ankle bracelet and a seized passport nevertheless must put up $250,000,000 in bail.  You don’t correct the age-old situation of having one law for the rich and one for the poor by relieving the poor of any obligations under the law and treating those rich people who aren’t political allies as if every one of them is Jack the Ripper.

    Four: What’s happening to Barrack has nothing to do with law or justice.  This represents the left’s continued persecution of anybody who worked with Donald Trump.  The clear intent is to make sure that everyone gets the message that, if Trump runs again, whether he wins or loses, those who work with him will be completely destroyed — not just shunned and barred from the “right” parties, but ground into dust.

    The peaceful, constitutional transition of power in America cannot include hunting down every ally of the previous administration and destroying those people.  But if it does — if that’s what the Democrats have set as the new standard — game theory says we win by doing this twice as hard (and on much better evidence) when Republicans gain power from the corrupt, feckless Democrats.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 17:30

  • Why Is The CDC Quietly Abandoning The PCR Test For COVID?
    Why Is The CDC Quietly Abandoning The PCR Test For COVID?

    We have detailed (most recently here and here) the controversy surrounding America’s COVID “casedemic” and the misleading results of the PCR test and its amplification procedure in great detail over the past few months.

    As a reminder, “cycle thresholds” (Ct) are the level at which widely used polymerase chain reaction (PCR) test can detect a sample of the COVID-19 virus. The higher the number of cycles, the lower the amount of viral load in the sample; the lower the cycles, the more prevalent the virus was in the original sample.

    Numerous epidemiological experts have argued that cycle thresholds are an important metric by which patients, the public, and policymakers can make more informed decisions about how infectious and/or sick an individual with a positive COVID-19 test might be. However, as JustTheNews reports, health departments across the country are failing to collect that data.

    Here are a few headlines from those experts and scientific studies:

    1. Experts compiled three datasets with officials from the states of Massachusetts, New York and Nevada that conclude:“Up to 90% of the people who tested positive did not carry a virus.”

    2. The Wadworth Center, a New York State laboratory, analyzed the results of its July tests at the request of the NYT: 794 positive tests with a Ct of 40: “With a Ct threshold of 35, approximately half of these PCR tests would no longer be considered positive,” said the NYT. “And about 70% would no longer be considered positive with a Ct of 30! “

    3. An appeals court in Portugal has ruled that the PCR process is not a reliable test for Sars-Cov-2, and therefore any enforced quarantine based on those test results is unlawful.

    4. A new study from the Infectious Diseases Society of America, found that at 25 cycles of amplification, 70% of PCR test “positives” are not “cases” since the virus cannot be cultured, it’s dead. And by 35: 97% of the positives are non-clinical.

    5. PCR is not testing for disease, it’s testing for a specific RNA pattern and this is the key pivot. When you crank it up to 25, 70% of the positive results are not really “positives” in any clinical sense, since it cannot make you or anyone else sick

    So, in summary, with regard to our current “casedemic”, positive tests as they are counted today do not indicate a “case” of anything. They indicate that viral RNA was found in a nasal swab. It may be enough to make you sick, but according to the New York Times and their experts, probably won’t. And certainly not sufficient replication of the virus to make anyone else sick. But you will be sent home for ten days anyway, even if you never have a sniffle. And this is the number the media breathlessly reports… and is used to fearmonger mask mandates and lockdowns nationwide…

    In October we first exposed how PCR Tests have misled officials worldwide into insanely authoritative reactions.

    As PJMedia’s Stacey Lennox wrote, the “casedemic” is the elevated number of cases we see nationwide because of a flaw in the PCR test. The number of times the sample is amplified, also called the cycle threshold (Ct), is too high.

    It identifies people who do not have a viral load capable of making them ill or transmitting the disease to someone else as positive for COVID-19.

    The New York Times reported this flaw on August 29 and said that in the samples they reviewed from three states where labs use a Ct of 37-40, up to 90% of tests are essentially false positives. The experts in that article said a Ct of around 30 would be more appropriate for indicating that someone could be contagious – those for whom contact tracing would make sense.

    Just a few days earlier, the CDC had updated its guidelines to discourage testing for asymptomatic individuals. It can only be assumed that the rationale for this was that some honest bureaucrat figured out the testing was needlessly sensitive. He or she has probably been demoted.

    This change was preceded by a July update that discouraged retesting for recovered patients. The rationale for the update was that viral debris could be detected using the PCR test for 90 days after recovery. The same would be true for some period of time if an individual had an effective immune response and never got sick. Existing immunity from exposure to other coronaviruses has been well documented. These are many of your “asymptomatic” cases.

    However, due to political pressure and corporate media tantrums, the new guidance on testing was scrapped, and testing for asymptomatic individuals is now recommended again. Doctors do not receive the Ct information from the labs to make a diagnostic judgment. Neither the CDC nor the FDA has put out guidelines for an accurate Ct to diagnose a contagious illness accurately.

    Hence, our current “casedemic.” Positive tests as they are counted today do not indicate a “case” of anything. They indicate that viral RNA was found in a nasal swab. It may be enough to make you sick, but according to the New York Times and their experts, probably won’t. And certainly not sufficient replication of the virus to make anyone else sick. But you will be sent home for ten days anyway, even if you never have a sniffle. And this is the number the media breathlessly reports.

    A month later, Dr. Pascal Sacré, explained in great detail how all current propaganda on the COVID-19 pandemic is based on an assumption that is considered obvious, true and no longer questioned: Positive RT-PCR test means being sick with COVID.

    This assumption is misleading.  Very few people, including doctors, understand how a PCR test works.

    In mid-November, none other than he who should not be questioned – Dr. Anthony Fauci – admitted that the PCR Test’s high Ct is misleading:

    “What is now sort of evolving into a bit of a standard,” Fauci said, is that “if you get a cycle threshold of 35 or more … the chances of it being replication-confident are minuscule.”

    “It’s very frustrating for the patients as well as for the physicians,” he continued, when “somebody comes in, and they repeat their PCR, and it’s like [a] 37 cycle threshold, but you almost never can culture virus from a 37 threshold cycle.”

    So, I think if somebody does come in with 37, 38, even 36, you got to say, you know, it’s just dead nucleotides, period.”

    So, if anyone raises this discussion as a “conspiracy”, refer them to Dr.Fauci.

    In response to this and the actual “science”, Florida’s Department of Health (and signed off on by Florida’s Republican Governor Ron deSantis), decided that for the first time in the history of the pandemic, a state will require that all labs in the state report the critical “cycle threshold” level of every COVID-19 test they perform.

    Then, in January,  as Biden takes office, The FDA publicly admits it…

    The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) is alerting patients and health care providers of the risk of false results… with the Curative SARS-Cov-2 test.

    First Fauci, then WHO, and then FDA all admit there is malarkey in the PCR Tests, but have – until now, done nothing about it… allowing the daily fearmongering of soaring “cases” to enable their most twisted 1984-esque controls.

    All of which brings us to today’s announcement from The FDA, that it will be abandoning the PCR Test for COVID at the end of the year.

    Audience: Individuals Performing COVID-19 Testing

    Level: Laboratory Alert

    After December 31, 2021, CDC will withdraw the request to the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for Emergency Use Authorization (EUA) of the CDC 2019-Novel Coronavirus (2019-nCoV) Real-Time RT-PCR Diagnostic Panel, the assay first introduced in February 2020 for detection of SARS-CoV-2 only. CDC is providing this advance notice for clinical laboratories to have adequate time to select and implement one of the many FDA-authorized alternatives.

    Visit the FDA website for a list of authorized COVID-19 diagnostic methods. For a summary of the performance of FDA-authorized molecular methods with an FDA reference panel, visit this page.

    In preparation for this change, CDC recommends clinical laboratories and testing sites that have been using the CDC 2019-nCoV RT-PCR assay select and begin their transition to another FDA-authorized COVID-19 test. CDC encourages laboratories to consider adoption of a multiplexed method that can facilitate detection and differentiation of SARS-CoV-2 and influenza viruses. Such assays can facilitate continued testing for both influenza and SARS-CoV-2 and can save both time and resources as we head into influenza season. Laboratories and testing sites should validate and verify their selected assay within their facility before beginning clinical testing.

    The question one is forced to ask is simple – as with everything else that happens in the Healthcare-Industrial-Complex – cui bono?

    Is another provider of testing about to be enrichened?

    Or is it even more sinister than standard crony capitalism? Given the traditional winter spike in ‘flu’ cases and the PCR-Test-driven “casedemic” we experienced into the election and through the start of the Biden administration, one could be forgiven for suggesting that the last thing an already weakened Democratic Party, desperate to cling to control in DC, would be a dramatic re-emergence of the “deadly” virus (driven by the numerous false positives of the PCR Test as described in detail above) ahead of the Midterms?

    Killing off the PCR Test would go a long way to “solving” the “casedemic” and offer Biden and his pals a positive talking point for voters.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 17:00

  • America Has Lost The Trade War With China, And The Real Pain Has Yet To Begin
    America Has Lost The Trade War With China, And The Real Pain Has Yet To Begin

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Corporate America sacrificed national interests in service of greed, and so did the U.S. government.

    As we all know, the source of Corporate America’s unprecedented explosion in profits in the 21st century is the offshoring of manufacturing to China. If you doubt this, please study the chart below of corporate profits. Apologists claim many excuses in an attempt to evade the central role of offshoring production to China, but they all ring hollow: no, it wasn’t increasing productivity or automation or Federal Reserve magic, it was shipping production to China and other low-labor-cost nations.

    Whether we like to admit it or not–mostly not–the American economy is entirely dependent on manufacturing in China. America’s short-sighted obsession with increasing profits to fund buybacks and golden parachutes for corporate insiders and vast fortunes for financiers has led to a dangerous dependency that has handed China tremendous leverage, which China is now starting to make use of. (And why not? Wouldn’t the U.S. start using the same leverage if it could?)

    A long-time U.S. correspondent who prefers to remain anonymous for obvious reasons recently shared his experiences with parts shortages and price increases from previously reliable suppliers in China. Here is his account of the disruptive shift in the supply chain of essential parts from China to the U.S.

    China is laying siege to the USA by slowing down production and delivery of goods. It doesn’t take much to hang up US production, just one missing item can do it. So much stuff is sourced through China they can affect all supply chains. Semiconductors are just the canary–because the chains are so long and complex, and specialized materials are required, etc. But it is happening everywhere.

    I have a little manufacturing company and I am seeing this in supply lines. I sent an order to China for printed circuit boards (US prices are astronomical because of various factors). They don’t get back for a week, then they quote, then I send money, then they sit on it, then I call and they say they are having problems with some process… etc. But all the suppliers are like this, it is not an isolated incident. They are sandbagging.

    So just as in laying siege, the attackers have the food outside the castle and wait for the people inside to starve.

    As prices rise the Chinese manufacturers take bigger profits so the slowdown effects on that end are mitigated. For products they do not have a monopoly on, like PC boards, they slow down. for things like LCD displays and NFeB magnets, the items become unavailable (try buying magnets on Amazon).

    I have to say this is a brilliant idea on China’s part, and no one on this side has realized the situation yet. This plan is straight out of Sun-Tzu. implications? inflation and shortages will continue for a long time… maybe forever. The only long-term solution is repatriation of manufacturing to the US. But it is going to cause some serious hurt, vastly more than the sanctioning of Chinese tech companies.

    i just sent a request for quote for some radio chips I use to Alibaba. they are $1 each and there are many vendors. I sent notes to 2 vendors i used before and after 4 or 5 days got a ping back that my requests were cancelled. i wound up getting the parts–for 2x the price– from Hong Kong, which at the moment seems to be something of a channel to the mainland. But I expect they will close that leak pretty soon.

    I have long made the case that manufacturing, energy and food are all fundamentally national security issues. Those benefiting from “free trade” (there is no such thing, that’s just a handy PR cover) have sold the unwary the fraudulent notion that “everyone benefits” from globalization. Nothing could be further from reality. A handful of corporate insiders and financiers have benefited at the expense of everyone else.

    And now the chickens are coming home to roost. Essential parts and feedstocks become unavailable for all sorts of flimsy excuses, prices double, triple, then double again, and since we’ve allowed our entire economy to become dependent on a handful of sources for these essentials because that dependency maximized profits, then there are no alternatives.

    America has already lost the trade war, but the pain has yet to begin. Corporate America sacrificed national interests in service of greed, and so did the U.S. government. Now it’s too late, and all the good seats at the banquet of consequences have already been taken.

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    A Hacker’s Teleology: Sharing the Wealth of Our Shrinking Planet (Kindle $8.95, print $20, audiobook $17.46) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World (Kindle $5, print $10, audiobook) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($5 (Kindle), $10 (print), ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 16:30

  • Previewing The Next Crisis: Spending Tumbles Among Households Cut Off From Unemployment Benefits
    Previewing The Next Crisis: Spending Tumbles Among Households Cut Off From Unemployment Benefits

    First, the good news. As we first observed one month ago and as we confirmed on Thursday, the debate – inasmuch as one ever existed – is now over: jobless claims, both initial (as Morgan Stanley shows)…

    … and continuing (as shown just a few days ago by Goldman)…

    … are tumbling in Republican states which have ended emergency covid benefits ahead of their official end in September, while barely budging in Democrat states which hope that government handouts will last forever, just like in all socialist success stories in the history of the world.

    The message here: republican states are well on their way to normalizing the most fractured and broken labor market the US has had since World War II, one where there are 9 million job openings and over 12 million people collecting jobless benefits (and refusing to look for a job) thanks to Biden’s generous handouts. Still, the transition back to a normal job market will be a painful one, and one where the jump from full handouts to full employment will be accompanied by a sharp drop off in spending and which may well spark the next (2 month) recession.

    Which brings us to the bad news. Total card spending based on the aggregated BAC credit and debit card data shows that as one would expect, states where generous government handouts have ended are seeing a sharp drop in spending, especially among the unemployed.

    As Bank of America notes, in the states where benefits were cut, spending was weaker for the cohort receiving UI as compared to those not getting benefits.

    For comparison, BofA ran this same exercise for the other states that did not allow for UI expiration: there was a smaller gap between the spending trends of the UI cohort vs. the non-UI recipients (Exhibit 11).

    To be sure, nobody is going cold turkey yet: one of the reasons why spending has not fallen off a cliff is that the first monthly payment of the Child Tax Credit was distributed on July 15th, and BofA will be able to quantify its impact in a few days, although it is safe to assume that comforted by the knowledge that Uncle Sam’s benefit will continuing trickling in, even if under a different name, consumers still spent aggressively.

    It’s also why despite a growing divergence in spending patterns between household who received unemployment benefits and those that didn’t in states where benefits were cut early, there wasn’t a discernible impact on aggregate spending yet, and overall spending in the states where UI has expired looks similar to the states where UI was not reduced.

    This, however, is likely due to the introduction of the abovementioned child credit as well as the accelerated drawdown of the $2.5 trillion in excess savings (of which over $2 trillion was accumulated by the 1%) accumulated during the crisis.

    In any case, one thing is clear: once the millions of Democrat US households that are still collecting extended ‘Rona unemployment see their emergency unemployment welfare benefits end in six weeks on September 4, expect a sharp plunge in overall spending, one which may push the current reflationary spike into all-out stagflation because with commodity prices are still in low earth orbit and will be for a far longer time than most expected (due to crushed supply chains which have unwound decades of disinflationary pressures as a result of China having been the source of cheap US goods ever since the 1980s), wages are set to plummet as millions of unemployed workers – no longer living on the government dole – return to the work force and instantly change the labor force equilibrium, giving employees all the leverage.

    There is just one thing that could short circuit this coming economic conflagration: another “emergency” which results in another trillion or two in stimmies. Which the government is well aware of, and is milking the delta covid “crisis” for all its worth, preserving the optionality to escalate it to the next lockdown and multi-trillion dollar bailout catalyst once needed

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 16:00

  • Turley: Could The Arrest Of FBI Agent Undermine The Whitmer Kidnapping Case?
    Turley: Could The Arrest Of FBI Agent Undermine The Whitmer Kidnapping Case?

    Authored by Jonathan Turley via jonathanturley.org (emphasis ours),

    The arrest of an FBI agent would always be newsworthy. Richard Trask of Kalamazoo has gone from making cases to being a case for prosecution. He  faces up to ten years for allegedly assaulting his wife with intent to do great bodily harm. However, Trask was also key to the arrest of men in the alleged plot to kidnap Michigan Gov. Gretchen Whitmer. Those defendants — and some observers — have criticized the FBI for entrapping the men by pushing them into the conspiracy and facilitating their efforts.  The question is whether Trask’s arrest could undermine those cases.  The answer is yes.

    There are legitimate concerns over the role of the FBI in the planning and preparation for this alleged conspiracy. As a criminal defense attorney, I have long been a critic of the degree to which the FBI often pushes defendants to take actions to trigger criminal charges. However, it is very difficult to make a case for entrapment and the agents know that.

    In the Michigan case, six men are charged with a conspiracy that involved kidnapping Whitmer but news outlets like BuzzFeed News have raised serious concerns over how much of the conspiracy was directed and facilitated by the FBI. At every critical juncture, agents like Trask appear to push the effort along, even overcoming reluctance of the alleged conspirators. That includes calling meetings where the conspirators first met and structuring the planning stage for the crime. The FBI even paid for room and foods to keep the planning going. Reportedly, the FBI informant ultimately rose to second in command of the conspiracy.

    Courts look to two elements in entrapment cases. While the government can encourage criminal conspirators, the courts ask whether the offense was induced by a government agent and whether “the defendant was disposed to commit the criminal act prior to first being approached by Government agents.”  In Jacobson v. United States, 503 U.S. 540 (1992), the Court ruled that a Nebraska man convicting of receiving child pornography through the mail was entrapped.

    This was a strong case for entrapment but was still a close vote. Writing for the 5-4 majority, Justice Bryon White ruled that

    “by waving the banner of individual rights and disparaging the legitimacy and constitutionality of efforts to restrict the availability of sexually explicit materials, the Government not only excited petitioner’s interest in sexually explicit materials banned by law, but also exerted substantial pressure on petitioner to obtain and read such material as part of a fight against censorship and the infringement of individual rights . . . convincing him that he had or should have the right to engage in the very behavior proscribed by law.

    These cases have raised a long debate over whether the test should be subjective or objective. In Sorrells v. United States287 U.S. 435 (1932), the Court followed a subjective test in showing the defendant had a “predisposition”  to commit the crime. Some states follow the objective standard advocated by figures like Justice Felix Frankfurter in  Sherman v. United States, 356 U.S. 369 (1958), in showing that the crime would not have occurred with the involvement of the law enforcement officials.

    So that brings us back to Trask, 39. Trask’s affidavit was used to arrest the men in the Michigan case. He and other agents are accused to prodding the alleged conspirators and ultimately organizing the effort. The FBI emphasizes that Whitmer’s home was “cased” before the arrests, showing a clear intent of the defendants to move forward with the plan.

    The question is whether a federal judge will be open to the entrapment defense at trial. In any case, Trask will be key to any proceedings as the author of the key affidavit. However, Trask may decide that he is at odds with his former colleagues now that he is persona non grata at the Justice Department.  He could cooperate with the defense through admissions or otherwise damaging testimony. He could even invoke his Fifth Amendment right to remain silent in fear of self-incrimination. While the prosecutors could force his testimony with an immunity grant, they would risk testimony that could undermine the case by highlighting the reluctance of defendants to go forward with their alleged conspiracy.

    Notably, Trask was charged by the Kalamazoo County Sheriff’s Office in Kalamazoo County District Court, not federal court. Those prosecutors may not be unduly concerned about his testimony in the federal case. However, federal prosecutors may be interested in reducing his exposure to keep him from becoming a liability in a major case.  Federal and state prosecutors often confer on such cases.

    The problem is that the allegations are pretty dramatic and serious — and there is no entrapment issues. Trask and his wife were reportedly returning from a “swinger’s party” at an Oshtempo Township hotel when they argued over his wife’s saying that she did not enjoy the party. Once home, Trask is accused of jumping on top of his wife in bed and slamming her head into the nightstand. She reportedly resisted and he choked her. She says that she was able to force him off and seek aid. Police describe her as covered in blood and bruises. He was arrested but then released on bond.

    As the author of the key affidavit, Trask could do considerable harm to the federal case. Even without such testimony in favor of the defense, his current status as an accused felon will likely be raised with the court. A judge could conclude that the two cases are unrelated and disclosure to a jury would be prejudicial and immaterial. However, the defense could argue that the pending charges could influence his testimony. He could seek to satisfy his former federal colleagues in the kidnapping case to improve his position in seeking a plea bargain with their state counterpart. Such testimony could also be cited to mitigate any sentence or charged the assault case.

    Any entrapment defense carries a very heavy burden that defendants can rarely shoulder successfully in federal cases. The advantage remains with the government in this case. However, this case has a credible claim of entrapment and one of the core witnesses for the government has suddenly become a liability. The Widner case is one o the “matinee” prosecutions of the Biden Administration but one of its stars may have just gone off-script.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/25/2021 – 15:35

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 25th July 2021

  • America Is Only One Step Away From A South African-Style Social Implosion
    America Is Only One Step Away From A South African-Style Social Implosion

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.us,

    On the global news front I have been watching one event with special attention, mainly because it seems like almost no one else is – I am speaking of course about the social and economic collapse in South Africa that has been escalating over the past couple weeks. What is strange to me is that certain parallels between South Africa and the US are being summarily ignored.

    Basically, the South African situation is a more exaggerated version of what is happening in America, and we need to consider if it is merely a preview of future events as the extra financial protections in the US begin to fall away.

    Cultural Marxism And Social Unrest (The Reparations Con)

    South Africa’s government under the ANC (African National Congress) was already going full communist in 2018-2019 before the covid pandemic. Under proposed amendments to the constitution, they demanded that “reparations” be taken from white farmers in the form of land grabs, which would then be redistributed to black citizens.

    This is the classic critical race theory argument – That because colonialism once existed, all beneficiaries and their supposed descendants owe dues to the descendants of indigenous people who lost their lands. The problem is, only the descendants of WHITE colonists are required to pay dues.

    This is exactly the same path that socialists/Marxists in the Democratic Party are pursuing in the US, with some states and cities demanding reparations for blacks be written into law because of slavery nearly 200 years ago. The reparations movement is tiny, but like all other social justice initiatives it is gaining power because politicians and corporations are supporting it artificially. Why? That’s easy: It’s all about divide and conquer.

    I think my take on it is simplified, but I feel this needs to be said because CRT and social justice lunatics tend to over-complicate issues in order to distract from certain fundamental realities. Black and brown people invaded each other’s lands and enslaved their neighbors for thousands of years before white people ever showed up on the scene. White people were made slaved within certain civilizations for many centuries as well, and yes, it was just as bad for them as it was for black slaves in America. Slavery and colonialism has NEVER been relegated to only one race or ethnicity. This is historic fact.

    But, that’s all forgotten in the bizarre justifications of critical race theorists. Why are white people the only people that are supposed to pay reparations when the whole world has been killing each other for land and resources since the beginning of recorded history?

    Frankly, if your ancestors lost a bunch of land centuries ago to colonists, then perhaps they should have fought harder for it. You don’t get to suddenly wave your hand and magically claim it back centuries later by default through government enforced eminent domain just because your ancestors sucked at self defense. Go back in time and tell your great-great-great-grandparents to “Get Good.”

    Of course, today’s communists don’t really fight for anything, at least not directly. I might respect them a little if they did. Rather, they loudly whine that they are “victims” even though they are not, and then demand they be given free stuff for life even though they never earned it. And, since free stuff has to be taken from somewhere, the people that have things are attacked through color of law even when they did nothing wrong and earned every cent they own.

    Communists steal from others through government proxy and by claiming victim group status. They work hand-in-hand with the very politicians and corporate oligarchs they say they despise. The governments and corporations do it because they can use the Marxist mob as a social weapon to strike fear in their ideological adversaries (conservatives), and the SJWs do it because they can feed on the scraps from the big boy’s table and use government to forcefully redistribute wealth into their own pockets. It’s kind of a win-win, at least for a while. Eventually the low level commies get nailed to a wall or sent to a gulag when they are no longer useful, but that’s a tale for another time…

    As international outrage developed over the proposed land confiscation mandates and accusations of reverse racism started to spread, the ANC dialed back their rhetoric and adjusted legislation to confiscate land that was “abandoned, unused or posed safety risks”. Let’s set aside the fact that these requirements are arbitrary and could still be abused by the government to take away land from white owners; for now we just need to acknowledge that racial tensions were high in a country which has been working hard to deal with its recent segregationist history. The social justice communists made things much worse, not better, as is always the case.

    As we saw last summer with the $1 Billion in damages caused by the “mostly peaceful” BLM riots, racial conflict is an effective weapon for the elites to create chaos. After all, BLM received most of its initial funding through the Ford Foundation and George Soros’ Open Society Foundation. They are a fabricated movement built around false critical race theory claims, but they are enough of a movement to enact violence on a nationwide scale.

    Covid Lockdowns And Vaccine Totalitarianism

    The South African government’s response to covid is brutal and ongoing. The lockdowns are some of the most strict in the world with curfews, zero gatherings indoors or outdoors, alcohol bans and restrictions on travel through certain areas. A large majority of the population has been blocked from participation in the normal economy. The public has been awaiting economic relief for over a year, but the hype and fear mongering around the “Delta variant” has dashed all hope. Lockdowns returned in full force in June.

    There is NO EVIDENCE that the Delta Variant is as deadly or more deadly than the original iteration of covid, and covid’s overall IFR (Infection Fatality Rate) is a paltry 0.26% according to the CDC and other independent studies. Meaning, draconian lockdowns are still being implemented over a virus that 99.74% of people will easily survive.

    Riots in Johannesburg and elsewhere erupted, with over 200 dead and billions in property damage and theft. In this case, it is hard to outright condemn the looting because the government continues to block citizens from earning a living in the name of stopping covid.

    This is on top of South Africa’s already high poverty level and the fact that, unlike the US with its world reserve currency, South Africa does not have the same ability to print stimulus checks from thin air to placate the masses and hide the damage.

    Not surprisingly the ANC refuses to acknowledge that the primary cause of the riots has been their own lockdown policies. Instead, they have blamed the the crisis on the arrest of former president Jacob Zuma for contempt of court charges as the trigger. This may have added gasoline to the fire, but it was not the cause. When the government is actively sabotaging the ability of millions of people to work and feed their families the only other option left for most is theft, or revolution.

    Supply chains in the country have been completely disrupted and the only retail outlets with stock are those protected by the military or those protected by business owners armed with guns and baseball bats. Only 6% of the population is allowed to own firearms under South Africa’s gun control bureaucracy and red tape. The government has a near monopoly on force and it is unlikely that the mobs will change much in terms of policy, but they do make life hell for the rest of the population.

    The civil unrest in this region is, in my opinion, a preview of what is to come in the US and other western nations. We have already seen riots in France, Italy and other parts of the western world over legislation that would make the experimental mRNA vaccines mandatory through vaccine passports. I would point out that the liberty media has warned OVER AND OVER that governments would try to enforce vaccine passports and make vaccines mandatory. We were called “conspiracy theorists” for this; now we are proven right once again.

    Covid laws will lead to unrest in the US, just as they have led to unrest in South Africa. The Biden Administration continues to push for total vaccination of Americans despite all science running contrary to his initiatives and claims. As I outlined in my article ‘Biden’s Vaccine Strike Force Plan Stinks Of Desperation’, the facts on covid do not support vaccine mandates or passports, and this is why around half the US population continues to defy the restrictions and refuses to take the jab. The only reason why medical tyranny has been beaten back in the US is because around 50% of US households are armed. We are not yet South Africa because of our gun rights, so be thankful for the millions of gun owners out there creating a deterrent to tyranny.

    The goals of the establishment will remain, however. They are going to continue to ignore the fact that Covid’s death rate is a mere 0.26% of those with confirmed infections. They are going to continue to ignore the fact that natural immunity is a part of herd immunity. They are going to continue to ignore the fact that covid infections and deaths dropped off a cliff in January of 2021 well before the vaccines were rolled out in the US. And, they are going to continue to ignore the fact that the experimental mRNA vaccines have no long term testing to prove they are safe for humans.

    The science is unimportant to them. Covid is only a tool for gaining control. They do not care about public safety in the slightest.

    Economic Decline And The Dark Cloud Of Inflation

    There are some differences between the US and South Africa in terms of motivations and economy, but the gap is not as wide and some might think. The US is exhibiting similar signs of decline in terms of poverty, small business closures and inflation.

    South Africa’s unemployment rate and poverty rate appears much higher, but the US has the ability to hide real poverty through temporary stimulus measures, welfare programs and eviction moratoriums. When the covid checks run out and evictions return, we are going to see a massive spike in poverty levels in the US once again. Furthermore, core price inflation has hit 30 year highs due to trillions in money printing and dollar devaluation, along with struggling supply chains. For now, increased demand created by covid checks is giving the illusion that the economy is in recovery, but just as home sales are now plunging after a short term spike, so too will demand in most sectors of the economy.

    This does not mean that prices will fall with demand, however. For example, lumber prices are in decline as demand lessens, but after rising by 300% in some areas they have a long way to go and will probably never go back to their pre-pandemic levels. We are now seeing the same dynamic happening in housing sales vs. house prices. When demand is falling but price inflation continues to rise or remains high, this is a sign of a stagflationary crisis. And if this is the case, then the US economy will falter dramatically in the coming months, leading to poverty levels similar to South Africa. Money printing is a temporary fix that leads to longer term disasters.

    It is also only a matter of time before a covid variant (like the Delta variant) is used as an excuse to bring back lockdowns across the country. And make no mistake, they will attempt harsher and harsher mandates similar to those in South Africa in order to intimidate people into submitting to the jab and the passports. At this stage, the US government will have not only mass riots on their hands, but also an armed rebellion. Undoubtedly, supply chains will crash if they have not already been disrupted by lockdowns or a related financial crisis.

    The question at that point will be this: Who will rebuild? If it’s the elites and the covid cult, then freedom will disappear forever. If it’s liberty minded people, then there might be a chance to bring our civilization back from the brink. Everything depends on who is left standing after the chaos subsides.

    South Africa is a warning to Americans: Do not get too comfortable. Do not get complacent. Be ready for the next shoe to drop. Prepare accordingly, and understand that a fight is coming.

    The establishment will place its bets that the unrest and economic disaster will create manufactured consent. They believe that the public will be sufficiently desperate and will beg for totalitarianism as a solution. Do not find yourself among the desperate, and if you can, organize your community to weather the storm.

    Finally, always remember who the people are that caused this mess in the first place. Rioters and looters are going to be a problem, but they are not the true enemy. The people behind the curtain need to be dealt with if we are ever going to find peace again.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

     

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 23:30

  • Visualizing Asia's Slide Into A Dangerous New Ballistic Missile Race
    Visualizing Asia’s Slide Into A Dangerous New Ballistic Missile Race

    The last couple years of military build-up and standoff between China and the United States in the South China Sea has resulted in fears of a new dangerous arms race, as smaller nations in the region rapidly bolster their defenses in order to avoid being “caught in the middle” which would result in having to be overly dependent on one side of the tensions. 

    A new Reuters report chronicling the growth in regional missile stockpiles says China is “mass producing its DF-26, a multipurpose weapon with a range of up to 4,000 kilometres, while the United States is developing new weapons aimed at countering Beijing in the Pacific.” 

    This has resulted in other countries once on the sidelines now “buying or developing their own new missiles, driven by security concerns over China and a desire to reduce their reliance on the United States” – the report underscores. 

    “Before the decade is out, Asia will be bristling with conventional missiles that fly farther and faster, hit harder, and are more sophisticated than ever before – a stark and dangerous change from recent years, analysts, diplomats, and military officials say,” the report adds.

    The below map and infograph from Reuters visualizes the emerging ‘Asia-Pacific missile race’…


    From the report, here’s a list of who has the growing arsenals and their reach in the region

    • US Indo-Pacific Command (INDOPACOM) plans to deploy its new long-range weapons in “highly survivable, precision-strike networks along the First Island Chain,” which includes Japan, Taiwan, and other Pacific islands ringing the east coasts of China and Russia.
    • Japan, home to more than 54,000 U.S. troops, could host some of the new missile batteries on its Okinawan islands, but the United States would probably have to withdraw other forces… Japan has spent millions on long range air-launched weapons, and is developing a new version of a truck-mounted anti-ship missile, the Type 12, with an expected range of 1,000 kilometres.
    • Australia recently announced it would spend $100 billion over 20 years developing advanced missiles.
    • South Korea fields the most robust domestic ballistic missile program, which got a boost from a recent agreement with Washington to drop bilateral limits on its capabilities. Its Hyunmoo-4  has an 800-kilometre range, giving it a reach well inside China.
    • North Korea recently tested what appeared to be an improved version of its proven KN-23 missile with a 2.5-ton warhead that analysts say is aimed at besting the 2-ton warhead on the Hyunmoo-4.
    • Taiwan has not publicly announced a ballistic missile programme, but in December the U.S. State Department approved its request to buy dozens of American short-range ballistic missiles. Officials say Taipei is mass producing weapons and developing cruise missiles such as the Yun Feng, which could strike as far as Beijing.

    David Santoro, president of the Pacific Forum, was cited in the report as forecasting that “missile proliferation will fuel suspicions, trigger arms races, increase tensions, and ultimately cause crises and even wars.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 23:00

  • JFK – Accept Our Diverse World As It Is
    JFK – Accept Our Diverse World As It Is

    Authored by Pat Buchanan,

    Seven months after the Cuban missile crisis, President John F. Kennedy, at American University, laid out his view on how the East-West struggle should be conducted to avoid a catastrophic war that could destroy us both.

    Kennedy’s message to Moscow and his fellow Americans:

    “If (the United States and the Soviet Union) cannot end now our differences, at least we can make the world safe for diversity.”

    As George Beebe writes in his essay, “It’s a Big World: The Importance of Diversity in American Foreign Policy,” in the July National Interest, Kennedy later elaborated:

    “We must recognize that we cannot remake the world simply by our own command. … Every nation has its own traditions, its own values, its own aspirations. … We cannot remake them in our own image.”

    To Kennedy, a student of history, acceptance of the reality of a world of diverse political systems, many of them unfree, was a precondition of peace on earth and avoidance of a new world war.

    Kennedy was asking us to recognize that the world consists not only of democrats but also of autocrats, dictatorships, military regimes, monarchs and politburos, and the goal of U.S. foreign policy was not to convert them into political replicas of the USA.

    Kennedy was willing to put our political model on offer to the world, but not to impose it on anyone: “We are unwilling to impose our system on any unwilling people — but we are willing and able to engage in peaceful competition with any people on earth.”

    The higher goal: “Preserving and protecting a world of diversity in which no one power or no one combination of powers can threaten the security of the United States.”

    For JFK, national interests transcended democratist ideology.

    He knew that throughout our history, we Americans had partnered with dictators, monarchs and autocrats when our interests required it.

    The 1778 alliance we forged with the French King Louis XVI was indispensable to the victory at Yorktown that ensured our independence.

    Woodrow Wilson took us into World War I as an “associate power” of four great empires — the British, French, Russian and Japanese.

    In World War II, we allied with Stalin’s Russia against Hitler’s Reich.

    The South Korea we saved at a cost of 37,000 dead from 1950 to 1953 was ruled by the autocratic and dictatorial Syngman Rhee.

    The thrust of Beebe’s article is that President Joe Biden, in defining the new post-Cold War era as featuring a new-world ideological struggle, between authoritarian and democracy, is misreading the conflict.

    Said Biden, in his major foreign policy address during the campaign: “The triumph of democracy and liberalism over fascism and autocracy created the free world. But this contest does not just define our past. It will define our future.”

    Biden’s Interim National Strategic Security Guidance fully embraces the same thesis of a new world ideological struggle:

    “Authoritarianism is on the global march. … We must join with likeminded allies and partners to revitalize democracy the world over.”

    Yet, neither of our great adversaries is preaching a global crusade to remake the world in its image.

    Communist China does business with Japanese and American capitalists, with South and North Korea, with Arab monarchs and Israelis, with Europeans and Iranians, Africans, Latin Americans and Central Asians, without attempting to impose its system beyond its borders.

    Consider Russia. President Vladimir Putin, it is said, is an autocrat.

    But Putin’s interest in bringing home ethnic Russian kinfolk left behind when the USSR broke apart is a normal and natural expression of his people’s and his country’s national interest.

    So, too, is Moscow’s effort at re-knitting relations with Ukraine and Belarus, the two nations with whom Russia’s ties are the oldest, closest and deepest, culturally and ethnically.

    What Russia, a Black Sea power since the 18th century, is doing in Yalta and the Donbas is understandable from the standpoint of history, ethnicity and national interests.

    The question is: What are we doing there?

    When did Ukraine, Belarus and Georgia become our concerns?

    Russia’s alarm at having the world’s largest military alliance, NATO, led by its former Cold War adversary, squatting on its front porch from the Arctic Ocean to the Baltic and Black Sea, is as understandable as is Putin’s impulse to push that alliance some distance away.

    That is what any Russian nationalist ruler would do.

    But when did relations between Belarus, Ukraine and Russia become the concern of the USA, 5,000 miles away?

    Is Putin an autocrat? But so what?

    When has Russia not been ruled by an autocrat?

    From Peter the Great to Catherine the Great to Alexander I, Nicholas I, Alexander II, Alexander III and Nicholas II in 1917, Romanov czars ruled Russia. After 1917 came Vladimir Lenin, Joseph Stalin, Nikita Khrushchev, Leonid Brezhnev, Mikhail Gorbachev, Boris Yeltsin and Vladimir Putin.

    During his speech at American University, Kennedy mentioned a crucial fact about the long history between Russia and America:

    “Almost unique among the major world powers, we have never been at war with each other.”

    Maintaining that 230-year tradition should be at the apex of our concerns, not how Vladimir Putin rules what is, after all, his country.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 22:30

  • China Unveils World's Fastest Maglev Bullet Train
    China Unveils World’s Fastest Maglev Bullet Train

    China unveiled a travel innovation this week of a maglev bullet train capable of reaching speeds of 600 km/h per hour (373 mph), according to Reuters

    The new maglev train rolled off the production line Tuesday in the eastern coastal city of Qingdao. Maglev trains have been used in China for nearly two-decade but only at a limited scale. 

    Over this decade, Beijing has plans to expand maglev track networks across the country. There is only one maglev line in commercial use, connecting Shanghai’s Pudong Airport with the Longyang Road station in the city. The 19-mile route takes just seven and a half minutes, with the train hitting speeds in excess of 430 km/h (267 mph).

    The new superfast train is expected to bridge a gap between airplanes and high-speed rail between major metro areas. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Reuters notes the new maglev train is the fastest in the world as it’s propelled by electromagnetic forces that levitate it above the track, making no contact between the train car and rail. 

    Future service of the train is expected between Beijing to Shanghai and halve the typical rail travel time from four hours to about 2.5 hours. 

    China’s high-speed maglev train project is all domestic and may one day link up cities along the Belt and Road Initiative.

    Countries like Germany and Japan are considering building or expanding maglev networks, although costs are expensive. Maglev is incompatible with the current track infrastructure, and there could be many challenges to build out new networks in densely populated areas. 

    Meanwhile, in Washington, Democrats have promised high-speed trains and supersonic planes in the latest infrastructure plan though talks with Republicans have stalled.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 22:00

  • It's About Time We Stopped "Trying Communism"
    It’s About Time We Stopped “Trying Communism”

    Authored by Ethan Yang via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    I don’t know how many protests, solidarity movements, refugees, human rights alerts, economic collapses, and purges are going to get this message through everyone’s heads, Communism is a terrible system of governance. In fact, at this point, we should be consistent. Any government that does not guarantee as to the very justification for its existence, individual rights, open markets, and accountable governance, is worth challenging.

    I am of course referring to the ongoing protest in Cuba, to which those on the far left will shamefully attribute to the US embargo on the Communist regime. Others may simply beat around the bush and try to attribute the reasons for the protests to current events. Although all these may contribute to the discontent fueling the Cuban protests, just like every single Communist regime, the ultimate reason why things are going poorly is that the people live under a crushing regime of incompetence and oppression. 

    To make room for a colleague that will inevitably publish on the Cuban protests in more detail, my article will focus not on Cuba but on the general topic of Communism. 

    The Shameful Track Record of Communism

    Real Communism has never been tried before, but it certainly has been attempted in all sorts of flavors and every single one of them sucked. For some reason, their leaders can’t bring themselves to care about the rights of individuals. Perhaps it undermines their overall collectivist views? Perhaps individual dignity would lead down the slippery slope to capitalism? Perhaps individual rights and preferences are a bourgeois construct? That’s certainly what Che Guevara, the leader of Cuba’s Communist revolution, and Fidel Castro, Communist Cuba’s first leader thought. In fact, Human Progress points out, 

    “Both Guevara and Castro considered homosexuality a bourgeois decadence. In an interview in 1965, Castro explained that “A deviation of that nature clashes with the concept we have of what a militant communist should be.”

    Although the American Left somehow rationalizes the deification of men like Che Guevara, they seem to conveniently forget that much like all power-hungry dictators with no regard for human life, he was blatantly a racist, a bigot, and a mass murderer. Human Progress notes,

    “According to Álvaro Vargas Llosa, homosexuals, Jehova’s Witnesses, Afro-Cuban priests, and others who were believed to have committed a crime against revolutionary morals, were forced to work in these camps to correct their “anti-social behavior.” Many of them died; others were tortured or raped.”

    Even today the Cuban government and every single communist country are incredibly repressive. In fact, in reaction to the protests that some may keep telling themselves aren’t against the Communist government, they just shut off the internet. You don’t do that when the people are protesting the actions of a foreign government, such as a US embargo; you do that when the protestors are against the domestic government.

    To briefly highlight some of the many atrocities committed by Communist regimes let’s start with China. It’s been a little bit more than a month since the anniversary of China’s Tiananmen Square Massacre and tens of millions died in Mao’s Great Leap Forward as well as the Cultural Revolution. A failure of Communist economic and political reform respectively. North Korea is such a repressive and poor country, it’s hard to even know where to begin. Furthermore, there are entire books about how life in the Soviet Union sucked.

    In Cambodia (this one is cool because my family fled this genocide so that’s why we all live in America now), under the communist Khmer Rouge, not only did they manage to kill off as much of a quarter of the population, but the mass murder, starvation, and torture got so out of hand, communist Vietnam had to intervene with military force. Vietnam is probably one of the more well-behaved communist nations; however, they still have a repressive one-party state and much like China, their current economic success is directly attributed to market reforms. In other words, becoming less communist and more capitalist.

    It is simply puzzling that in all these regimes that purport to represent the proletariat, they end up doing more to impoverish and oppress the working class than even the most sadistic capitalist. In hindsight, it really isn’t that difficult of a question. As mentioned before, any government that does not protect individual rights, open markets, and constraints on power is not only a recipe for disaster but a moral tragedy.

    In liberal democracies, like the United States, there is much talk about the consent of the governed to which governments derive their legitimacy. We already have trouble justifying the impositions that we live under as truly consensual. Such a notion cannot even remotely exist in a Communist regime or any authoritarian regime for that matter. 

    There is not a single country that adopted Communism or moved in its direction that was able to provide the standards of living and prosperity found in a free and open society like the United States. In fact, that bar is too high, because not a single one has produced any sort of relative prosperity without some sort of market reform, and not a single one can produce a human rights record that doesn’t make the problems in freer countries look like child’s play.

    The Basics of Governance 

    It has become fashionable for some, like the Chinese Communist Party and all those around the world who share their sentiments, to call for a system of moral relativism when it comes to governments. Respect the rights of governments, not individuals. Such a way of thinking believes that the world must be inclusive of different types of political systems, from the freest to the most oppressive. It eschews any sort of moral foundation when it comes to the rights of individuals or sound economic thinking. It subscribes to the fantasy that different political systems work for different countries.

    This is empirically false, which is why the current rules-based international order holds that human rights and open markets are the universal standards for good state conduct. 

    Take a look at any economic freedom index. There is a powerful correlation between prosperity and free markets. Objective metrics such as infant mortality rates, educational attainment, calorie consumption, life expectancy, and other desirable indicators are all better in richer countries than poorer countries. Basic political science and legal theory tell us that checks and balances are necessary for an accountable government, whether that be preventing the arbitrary use of power or full-on massacres.

    Think about it; qualified immunity, a doctrine granting protections for police in the United States against being sued for infringing on a private citizen’s rights, already causes enough problems here. Imagine if an entire government had such privileges? A restrained and gridlocked government is far preferable to an unrestrained and power-drunk one. 

    Finally, there’s the basic truth that governments cannot run society; they merely exist to facilitate a productive natural order by securing rights and establishing peace. Commerce, invention, culture, and trade arises spontaneously without central dictate. This is why societies in command economies like Maoist China were incredibly bleak and drab. This is also why former Soviet Union president Boris Yeltsin was so amazed and awestruck when he visited a grocery store in the United States. The New Haven Register notes,

    “He told his fellow Russians in his entourage that if their people, who often must wait in line for most goods, saw the conditions of U.S. supermarkets, there would be a revolution.”

    Key Takeaways

    People will always try to find some superficial reason for why a Communist state is failing, whether it’s because of sanctions, resource shortages, inflation, civil unrest, or what have you. These are all fine and good but they ultimately fail to see the elephant in the room. Or in this case, the highly authoritarian, oppressive, and economically incompetent system in place.

    We live in an age where ignorance is a choice when it comes to the superiority of a free and open society. The quicker we stop averting our eyes and look at the facts, the quicker we can move towards a world where every individual, regardless of their geographical and political fortune, can live free and prosper.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 21:30

  • These Are The World's Highest-Paid Athletes
    These Are The World’s Highest-Paid Athletes

    In Giannis Antetokounmpo, newly-crowned NBA champion and finals MVP, another player may have dominated the sporting headlines this week, but Lebron James still made some waves beside the court. For one he’s currently starring in Space Jam 2, stepping into the enormous shoes of Michael Jordan, who appeared in the original Space Jam movie in 1996.

    More importantly though, as Statista’s Felix Richter notes, James made headlines on Thursday for becoming the first active NBA player to become a billionaire, a milestone that Jordan only surpassed after his playing career. According to Sportico, James surpassed $1 billion in career earnings from salaries and endorsement deals, putting him far ahead of Kevin Durant ($580 million) and Steph Curry ($430 million), the other two active players who could eventually join the billionaires club.

    But, according to Forbes, James ‘only’ made a total of $97 million between May 1, 2020 and May 1, 2021, putting him fifth among the highest paid athletes.

    Infographic: The World's Highest-Paid Athletes | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    But, as the chart above shows, Conor McGregor took the money crown last year, taking home a whopping $180 million, mainly thanks to his sale of whiskey brand ‘Proper No. Twelve’, and all that wealth cost him was a broken leg.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 21:00

  • Electrical Engineer Gets Five Years In Prison For Selling Missile Technology To China
    Electrical Engineer Gets Five Years In Prison For Selling Missile Technology To China

    Authored by Isabel Van Brugen via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    An electrical engineer from Los Angeles who plotted to steal missile technology and sell it to a Chinese company has been sentenced to more than five years in prison.

    A U.S. Army 3rd Infantry Division, 1st Battallion, 39th Field Artillery Regiment (1-39) Bravo Battery Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) vehicle fires a M28A1 practice rocket during exercises near the Iraqi border in northern Kuwait on Feb. 13, 2003. (Scott Nelson/Getty Images)

    U.S. District Judge John A. Kronstadt sentenced Yi-Chi Shih, 66, of Hollywood Hills, to 63 months—or more than five years—in prison for his role in the scheme. He was also ordered to pay $362,698 in restitution to the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) and the judge fined him $300,000.

    Shih was arrested in January 2019 after he was found to have been involved in an illegal scheme to obtain monolithic microwave integrated circuits (MMICs) from an unnamed American company and smuggle them to the Chinese company Chengdu GaStone Technology (CGTC), which was placed on the Commerce Department’s Entity List in 2014.

    He was convicted on one count of conspiracy to violate the International Emergency Economic Powers Act and the Export Administration Regulations.

    Shih was also convicted of four counts of mail fraud, two counts of wire fraud, one count of conspiracy to gain unauthorized access to a protected computer to obtain information, one count of making false statements to an FBI agent, three counts of subscribing to a false tax return, and four counts of making false statements to the IRS about his foreign assets.

    Court papers state that Shih defrauded a U.S. company that manufactured broadband, high-powered semiconductor chips which have several commercial and military applications.

    The semiconductor chips, also known as MMICs, are used in missiles, missile guidance systems, fighter jets, electronic warfare, electronic warfare countermeasures, and radar applications. Those exported by Shih to China were intended for AVIC 607, a state-owned entity.

    According to court documents, Shih was president of CGTC, which was building an MMIC manufacturing facility in the city. The company was placed on the list “due to its involvement in activities contrary to the national security and foreign policy interest of the United States—specifically, that it had been involved in the illicit procurement of commodities and items for unauthorized military end use in China.”

    The case is just one of many examples of federal prosecutions focused on the theft of U.S. intellectual property for the benefit of China.

    In April, former Coca-Cola employee You Xiaorong was convicted of stealing trade secrets relating to the coating of beverage containers from U.S. companies. You then planned to use the technology to manufacture the coating for the global market.

    In June 2020, Chinese professor Zhang Hao was found guilty of economic espionage and stealing wireless technology from U.S. companies for the benefit of the Chinese regime. The technology in question filters out unwanted signals in wireless devices, such as mobile phones and tablets, and has both consumer and military applications.

    U.S. Senate and House lawmakers in May reintroduced a bill, called the Protecting America from Spies Act, that would deny visas to aliens who have stolen U.S. intellectual property or committed espionage—particularly those with ties to the Chinese Communist Party (CCP).

    We know that the Chinese Communist Party will spare no effort to steal from, and exploit, American companies and universities,” Sen. Marco Rubio (R-Fla.) said in a May 20 statement.

    If a Chinese citizen has spied on us before, we should absolutely assume he or she will do so again. This legislation prevents repeat offenders from gaining access to our country,” he said.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 20:30

  • Christmas Tree Farms Scorched In Oregon Amid Record Heat
    Christmas Tree Farms Scorched In Oregon Amid Record Heat

    Oregon’s record-breaking heat waves and raging wildfires are set to dent Christmas tree crop output, resulting in supply constraints that may send prices skyrocketing come December.

    According to Reuters, who spoke with multiple Christmas tree farm operators in Oregon, one of the top Christmas tree producing states, extreme heat and wildfires are impacting crop yields. 

    Jacob Hemphill, the owner of Hemphill Tree Farm in Oregon City, estimates he’s already lost more than $100,000 in trees due to the latest back-to-back heatwaves. At one point, temperatures in the area were triple digits for days. 

    “The second day of the heat, it was 116. I came in the driveway that night and seen the trees were basically cooking. Burnt down to nothing,” Hemphill said.

    He said the losses will impact his farm revenue this year but hopes the 2022 season will improve.

    “I mean, you just kind of got to roll with the punches, and replant next year… and hopefully make up for the loss that we’re gonna have in the future.”

    Reuters spoke to several tree farm operators across the Willamette Valley who said the heat waves have severely damaged their crops. 

    On top of the heat waves, the Bootleg Fire in Southern Oregon, spurred by months of drought, has burned nearly 400,000 acres and is likely to increase in size as no relief is in sight. 

    Oregon is the top-selling state of Christmas trees which are Douglas fir, Noble fir, Grand fir, and Nordmann fir. This could present supply constraints come December. 

    In other words, on the back of already record-high prices, consumers could shell out even more money this year for a Christmas tree if shortages materialize in Oregon. On top of the supply crunch, the cost of everything, from fuel to labor to transportation, has soared and will positively impact prices. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 20:00

  • Protesters Rage Across Europe As Lockdown, Vaccination Mandates Begin
    Protesters Rage Across Europe As Lockdown, Vaccination Mandates Begin

    Update (19115ET): Anti-lockdown protests kicked into high gear around the globe on Saturday, including irate Irish protesters:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bitter Brits:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Pissed-off Parisians:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And incensed Italians, where the country has restricted public access to restaurants and museums to the unvaccinated.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is what it looked like today in Australia, Milan, London, and France. 

    Protests were worldwide today as many are fed up with elites whittling away their freedoms under the guise of COVID. 

    *  *  *

    Thousands of anti-lockdown demonstrators took to the streets of Sydney and other Australian towns on Saturday to protest new lockdown measures amid a surge of COVID-19 cases in the country.

    Dozens were arrested and charged after crowds broke through barriers and clashed with officers, hurling bottles and anything they could get their hands on. 

    The unmasked protesters marched from Sydney’s Victoria Park to Town Hall. News.com.au estimates 15,000 people took part in the march. Many chanted anti-lockdown slogans and held signs calling for “freedom” and “the truth.”

    Footage on social media shows thousands of demonstrators marching through Sydney’s downtown area. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    There was a significant police presence, including mounted police and riot control officers in response to what authorities said was an “unauthorized protest.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The demonstrators defied restrictions on non-essential travel and mass public gatherings that could be extended through October. 

    The Greater Sydney area has been locked down for a month as infections rise.  

    Protesters were also seen in Melbourne and Adelaide. 

    There’s discontent with Australians being forced into lockdowns again as an outbreak of the delta variant began last month. 

    Protests are not limited to Australia. New COVID rules have been implemented across Europe as Delta infections flare-up, which demonstrators in France and Greece recently took to the streets. The UK has even triggered widespread panic through a new app that notified tens of thousands of people they must quarantine for ten days because of possible exposure. 

    Multiple US cities are now requiring people to wear masks indoors amid surging cases

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 19:14

  • Philadelphia's Murder Rate Highest Among Largest US Cities
    Philadelphia’s Murder Rate Highest Among Largest US Cities

    Last spring, Philadelphia Mayor Jim Kenney announced a series of police reforms within the 6,500-member police department. A year later, his administration has succeeded in implementing several of those changes, while others are a work in progress. But over the last year, did those meaningful police reforms result in better public safety? 

    The answer is no, as Philadelphia was just ranked the highest murder rate per capita among the US’ top largest cities. 

    According to CBS Philly, the number of homicides across the metro stands at 314 on Thursday, up 35% from this time last year. The city has become more dangerous as gun violence is out of control. 

    About a third of the violence happens in just five zip codes in North Philadelphia, Hunting Park, West Philadelphia, Kingsessing, Kensington, and Port Richmond.

    Philadelphia is on pace to have one of its most violent years on record. 

    Meanwhile, there are still cries from liberal lawmakers in the metro area to defund the police towards community efforts to thwart gun violence.

    Kenney has said he doesn’t want to reduce the size of the police force, especially when violent crime is surging. However, he has proposed to keep police funding flat. 

    Overall, Democratic mayors in 20 of the nation’s 25 largest cities slashed police funding as they spent millions of tax dollars on their private security forces. Their progressive policies have primarily backfired as metro areas become more violent.

    Defunding the police is flawed because it takes away from proven community policing. 

    Podcast king Joe Rogan recently warned the progressive campaign to defund police departments could transform parts of the US into a lawless state like Mexico. 

    And judging by the out-of-control homicide wave in Philadelphia, that may already be the case. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 19:00

  • Texas Begins Arresting Illegal Immigrants For Trespassing As Part of Gov. Greg Abbott’s Border Security Plan
    Texas Begins Arresting Illegal Immigrants For Trespassing As Part of Gov. Greg Abbott’s Border Security Plan

    Authored by Tom Ozimek via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Authorities in Texas have begun arresting illegal immigrants along the U.S.-Mexico border on trespassing charges, according to Texas Gov. Greg Abbott, who has blamed the Biden administration for the surge in illegal immigration and has put in motion his own border security plan to crack down on illegal crossings.

    Texas has begun arresting illegal immigrants who are trespassing in Texas or vandalizing property & fences. They are now being sent to this jail rather than being released like the Biden Admin. has been doing. We are adding more officers, National Guard & jails,” Abbott said in a tweet Thursday.

    File photo showing the Dolph Briscoe Unit correctional facility in Dilley, Texas, on April 6, 2020. (Tom Reel/The San Antonio Express-News via AP)

    So far, at least 10 people have been jailed, with more on the way, authorities said Thursday. The detainees are being held at what had been an empty state prison in Dilley, Texas, about 100 miles north of the border city of Laredo, according to Robert Hurst, a spokesman for the Texas Department of Criminal Justice. The converted facility will be able to hold more than 950 people, he said.

    Val Verde County Attorney David Martinez said that all of those arrested so far have been single adult men. He said he had been advised last week that the number of arrests of illegal immigrants could rise to as many as 100 to 200 per day.

    The arrests put in motion plans that Abbott first announced in June, when he hosted a Border Security Summit in Del Rio, during which he said individuals who enter Texas illegally would be subject to arrest for trespassing.

    President Biden’s open-border policies have led to a humanitarian crisis at our southern border as record levels of illegal immigrants, drugs, and contraband pour into Texas,” Abbott said in a June 10 statement. “While securing the border is the federal government’s responsibility, Texas will not sit idly by as this crisis grows. The state is working collaboratively with communities impacted by the crisis to arrest and detain individuals coming into Texas illegally.”

    Texas Gov. Greg Abbott during a border security summit in Del Rio, Texas, on June 10, 2021. (Charlotte Cuthbertson/The Epoch Times)

    During the summit, Abbott said he had directed the Texas Commission on Jail Standards and the Texas Commission on Law Enforcement to work with counties to establish alternative detention facilities to ensure enough jail capacity to house illegal immigrants arrested for trespassing.

    Our efforts will only be effective if we work together to secure the border, make criminal arrests, protect landowners, rid our communities of dangerous drugs, and provide Texans with the support they need and deserve,” Abbott said at the time.

    “This is an unprecedented crisis, and Texas is responding with the most robust and comprehensive border plan the nation has ever seen.”

    Illegal immigrants arrested by state troopers for trespassing first began showing up at the former prison on Tuesday. Prison officials said in a statement said that preparations for the Dilley facility included temporary air conditioning—which many Texas prisons don’t have in living areas—and training and licensing jailers.

    Abbott has also announced that Texas would continue building former President Donald Trump’s border wall and called on other governors to deploy law enforcement and National Guard members to the southern border.

    “In the Biden Administration’s absence, Texas is stepping up to get the job done by building the border wall,” Abbott said in a June 16 statement. “Through this comprehensive public safety effort, we will secure the border, slow the influx of unlawful immigrants, and restore order in our border communities.”

    Federal immigration officials recently announced that they had apprehended 188,829 people illegally crossing the southwest border in June, up from 180,034 in May. The figure includes more than 15,000 unaccompanied minors, over 55,000 family units, and over 117,000 single adults.

    The Associated Press contributed to this report.

    Follow Tom on Twitter: @OZImekTOM

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 18:30

  • San Francisco Rolls Out "Ridiculous" $20,000 Designer-Style Trash Cans 
    San Francisco Rolls Out “Ridiculous” $20,000 Designer-Style Trash Cans 

    What a bunch of rubbish. San Francisco elected officials can barely govern their own city as violent crime, homelessness, a drug epidemic, and trash plague the metro area. With complaints piling up about garbage strung across streets that resemble a third-world country, officials know how to do one thing: spend. They have proposed installing new prototype trash cans that cost a whopping $20,000 each. 

    Local news KRON4 spoke with San Francisco Public Works, Aleric Degrafinried, who defended the cost associated with the prototype trash cans shaped like a fancy salt shaker. 

    City officials agreed Wednesday to build 15 trash can prototypes, five each of three different designs. 

    Supervisor Matt Haney told the San Francisco Chronicle that he was not thrilled when he learned about the “ridiculous” $20,000 trash cans. 

    “Our streets and our sidewalks are a mess and the cans we have out there now are actually part of the problem,” Haney said. “At this point they’ve already come up with designs, we won’t save time now to go backward, but it’s really frustrating that they [Public Works] chose this route.”

    If the new trash cans are successful during pilot runs – the city plans to pick one design that will eventually replace 3,000 existing green trash cans scattered around the metro area. Mass-producing the prototype trash can would be around $2,000 to $3,000. Current costs for a trash can are approximately $1,200. 

    Haney said he held discussions with Public Works officials about reducing costs of the prototype trash can program. He said Public Works could’ve used models from other cities instead of reinventing the wheel. 

    The current trash cans easily overflow, attracting rats and the homeless. The locks are easily broken, and people search for recyclables to turn in for cash. 

    Costing $20,000 a pop, there had to be a little bit of technology in these new prototype cans. The San Francisco Chronicle describes each can is equipped with smart sensors that will notify trash collectors that the can is full to reduce overflow. 

    For the program of 15 trash cans, Public Works is asking the city for between $537,000 from $840,000. 

    And, of course, who would’ve guessed these expensive designer-style trash cans would receive a lot of flak on Twitter. People said the money should be spent elsewhere, such as cracking down on violent crime. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 18:00

  • Iran Opens Export Terminal To Bypass World's Biggest Oil Chokepoint
    Iran Opens Export Terminal To Bypass World’s Biggest Oil Chokepoint

    Via OilPrice.com,

    Iran says it has opened its first oil export terminal in the Gulf of Oman to allow Tehran to avoid using the strategic Strait of Hormuz shipping route that has long been a focus of regional tensions.

    “Today, the first shipment of 100 tons of oil is loaded outside the Strait of Hormuz,” President Hassan Rohani said in a televised speech on July 22, calling it an “important step for Iran” that will “secure the continuation of our oil exports.”

    The new terminal, located near the port city of Jask, will allow tankers headed into the Arabian Sea and beyond to avoid the Strait of Hormuz at the head of the Persian Gulf, through which one-fifth of world oil output passes.

    Rohani said Iran aimed to export 1 million barrels per day of oil from the facility, which officials said will cost some $2 billion.

    Oil Minister Zanganeh said that “82 percent of this project has been completed and so far more than $1.2 billion has been spent on this.”

    Iran’s main oil export terminal is located at Kharg inside the narrow strait, which is patrolled by warships of its arch-foe, the United States.

    There have been periodic confrontations between Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guards Corps (IRGC) and the U.S. military in the area.

    Iran has often threatened to block the Strait of Hormuz if its crude exports were shut down by U.S. sanctions, which have heavily impacted Iranian energy exports.

    Washington reimposed the sanctions more than three years ago when then-President Donald Trump withdrew the United States from the 2015 nuclear deal between Tehran and world powers.

    Tehran and U.S. President Joe Biden’s administration have been in indirect talks in Vienna since April to try to revive the agreement, under which Iran agreed to curb its nuclear program in return for the lifting of most international sanctions.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 17:30

  • "It Looks Like A Bazaar In Istanbul": Without Police On The Street, Illegal Vendors And Gamblers Are Taking Over The Bronx
    “It Looks Like A Bazaar In Istanbul”: Without Police On The Street, Illegal Vendors And Gamblers Are Taking Over The Bronx

    We’ll ask the same thing we asked days ago when it was reported that a man was shot at point blank range in Brooklyn: has Eric Adams been sworn in yet?

    Because once again the lack of police on the streets is turning into a problem – this time in the Bronx, where illegal street vendors and gamblers “have taken over a commercial strip,” according to the New York Post. The takeover is a result of new city laws that make it impossible for the NYPD to confiscate goods or even demand ID from street vendors. 

    The new law went into effect in May 2021 and moved enforcement away from NYPD and to the city’s Department of Consumer Affairs and Worker Protection. Someone from the agency told the Post the law doesn’t even go into effect until September. 

    Marko Majic, head of business development for City Jeans on East Fordham Road, told the New York Post: “It looks like a bazaar in Istanbul. The only difference is in Istanbul it’s legal and organized and here it is illegal and unorganized.”

    The Post reports there are now 242 sidewalk vendors, more than the 230 storefronts in the same area.

    “They sell water, jewelry, masks, toys, counterfeit goods, anything you can imagine,” said Wilma Alonso, director of the Fordham Road Business Improvement District. She said they even play three card monte and called the situation a “public safety crisis”. 

    On June 5, there was an incident near the area with a vendor which resulted in a second vendor getting shot in the arm by a stray bullet.

    Since January, there have been 311 complaints about illegal vending across the city, up 14% from the same period in 2019. The city appears to be doing very little about it.

    “We were stunned to learn on a day when there were hundreds of unauthorized vendors, only [a few] summonses were issued,” Alonso said.

    “Because of them we almost have no business,” one business owner told the Post. “These vendors, they have nothing to pay and they’re making much more money than us because everything goes to pocket. We have to pay taxes, we have to pay licenses, rent, other fees.”

    Majic added: “Our customers want to come and shop in peace. They don’t want to fight to get in the store because outside someone occupies 50 percent of the space. The only time we had enforcement on Fordham Road was the riots. You can’t even call the police they don’t pick up.”

    “The truth is, the City Council was very short-sighted thinking about the ramifications and the damage they would be doing to the business community,” Alonso concluded.

    Meanwhile…

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 17:00

  • California Is Experiencing A Crime "Tsunami", DA Says
    California Is Experiencing A Crime “Tsunami”, DA Says

    Authored by Vanessa Serna via The Epoch Times,

    California is experiencing a wave of crime despite Gov. Gavin Newsom’s claims of a decrease during the past three decades, officials say.

    “You’ve got violent crime off the charts,” Sacramento County District Attorney Anne Marie Schubert told The Epoch Times.

    “You’ve got this tsunami of things that are happening. Violent crime, illegal guns, [and] rampant theft.”

    On July 21 in Los Angeles, when asked if state policies are making crime worse, Newsom denied the state is seeing a rise in crime.

    “The evidence doesn’t back it up. Last three decades we’ve actually seen a significant decline in crime in the state,” Newsom said.

    According to a Public Policy Institute of California (PPIC) released in 2021, four major cities have witnessed an increase in homicide and car thefts. Los Angeles, Oakland, San Diego, and San Francisco are experiencing such heightened crime despite dropping in violent crime in March 2020 when the COVID-19 pandemic began.

    Data provided by PPIC shows that in 2020, Los Angeles reported a 40 percent homicide increase in comparison to 2019; Oakland reported a 36 percent increase. San Francisco and San Diego both witnessed increases from 41 to 48 percent and 50 percent to 55 percent, respectively.

    In January and February 2021, violent crime was 12 percent lower in comparison to the first few months of 2020. PPIC attributed the decrease to fewer robberies and aggravated assaults. Out of the four cities, Oakland was the only one that witnessed an increase in aggravated assaults of about 10 percent.

    “There isn’t a person in the state who believes that crime is on the decline,” Rescue California campaign manager Anne Dunsmore told The Epoch Times.

    “You have people casually walking out of the stores with stolen items. You have a store clerk who was shot and killed by people who are just going into stores and shoplifting. [Newsom] wants to manipulate numbers to make it look like California is roaring back and crime is on the decline.”

    Dunsmore said state policies enforced by Newsom, such as Prop 47, could attribute to heightened crime in the state. Through Prop 47, certain theft and drug possession offenses are marketed as misdemeanors rather than felonies. When passed, previous offenders that were serving sentences for felony offenses became eligible for resentencing.

    Pending bill AB 333 would remove burglary, identity fraud violations, looting, and felony vandalism from gang-related crimes.

    “He’s trying to show that he’s cutting down on prison population and that somehow indicates that crime is on the decline,” Dunsmore said.

    While Newsom said that there are fewer felons, Dunsmore attributed the drop to the state reducing many felonies to misdemeanors.

    As well, between 2021 to 2022, California is to close two state prisons as a part of the governor’s 2020-21 state budget plan to implement reforms and changes that will significantly reduce prison populations.

    In May, efforts to decrease prison populations escalated after the California Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation (CDCR) announced under Prop 57 that it would increase good conduct credit toward eligible inmates, allowing them to potentially be released early.

    Of those eligible to receive good credits, 63,000 are incarcerated for violent crimes, and 20,000 inmates are sentenced to life in prison with the possibility of parole.

    “You let a lot of felons out of prison, they’re on the streets, there’s a reason that crime is on the rise,” Dunsmore said.

    “They’re letting all these people out without any structure in place to monitor them, or even rehabilitate them.

    “For these people [to] sit there and know that their children’s killers could get out, like the guy who killed Michael Lyons” and committed aggravated sexual assault, Dunsmore said. “That guy is a model prisoner; he actually qualifies for early release.”

    In 1996, Robert Boyd Rhoades was charged with first-degree murder in Sutter County after torturing and killing 8-year-old Michael. Rhoades was no stranger to the criminal justice system as he committed multiple crimes prior to 1996.

    Rhoades is set to receive the death penalty, but California’s changing law might say otherwise.

    While some lawmakers are for reducing prison times, others advocate for victims’ rights.

    “Michael’s killer is on death row because he’s a horrific, not just serial killer [but] his history was atrocious,” Schubert said. “Now we have a legislature that even though the jury has recommended a certain sentence wants to pass a bill that he can petition to get out.”

    She continued, “It’s despicable when a cop talks about a crime victim and putting them through the wringer. Time and time again when they’ve been given assurance that this horrific serial rapist-murderer has been sentenced to never get out of prison.”

    Schubert said lenience toward those that have committed horrid offenses is making the state a more dangerous place.

    “You’ve got the Los Angeles DA who’s essentially doing everything you can do to dismantle the justice system,” she said. “You’ve got a legislature who’s consistently voted for bills that weaken accountability. You’ve got ballot initiatives that have misled the public, to the point that we’ve basically decriminalized left.”

    Amid the crime crisis, Schubert and Dunsmore said they are advocating for more structure within the state to enforce and carry out laws.

    “[Newsom] can’t fix a problem if he denies the fact that it’s there, and that’s what he’s doing,” Dunsmore said. “That’s dangerous.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 16:30

  • Colorado Monitoring Literal Plague Activity In At Least 6 Counties After Child Dies
    Colorado Monitoring Literal Plague Activity In At Least 6 Counties After Child Dies

    State health authorities in Colorado are investigating a potential outbreak of the literal plague across a handful of counties, after it’s believed a 10-year old girl died of the rapidly-acting disease. “The Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment noted lab-confirmed reports of plague-infected fleas and animals in areas including La Plata County, where the 10-year-old died,” Fox News writes based on local media. 

    It’s the state’s first known death from the plague since 2015, and scientists have now found the plague in tests of mammals and fleas from at least six counties, including La Plata county – which includes the city of Durango, a popular summer tourist destination in southwest Colorado. The counties named include San Miguel, El Paso, La Plata, Boulder, Huerfano and Adams, a Colorado Department of Public Health statement indicated. “Public Health is doing an epidemiological investigation and wants Coloradans to know that while this disease is very rare, it does occur sometimes, and to seek medical care if you have symptoms,” it added.

    Getty Images

    Deputy state epidemiologist and public health veterinarian Jennifer House said in a press release related to the health crisis that “In Colorado, we expect to have fleas test positive for plague during the summer months. Awareness and precautions can help prevent the disease in people,” after a slight historical uptick in cases spanning back over the past half-decade, though most didn’t result in deaths.

    It spreads to humans through bites of infected fleas or through contact with infected animals via the bacteria Yersinia pestis, and causes severe symptoms which have a rapid onset.

    According to the Denver Post

    Plague has a high fatality rate if untreated, but antibiotics are effective against it, especially in the early stages. Symptoms include fever, headache, chills and swollen lymph nodes. Less commonly, people can develop pneumonia-like symptoms or go into septic shock, if the bacteria spread to the lungs or through the bloodstream.

    Via The Daily Mail

    The report continued, “Prairie dogs, squirrels, chipmunks and other rodents many carry the fleas and become infected themselves, so everyone should avoid getting close to those animals, the health department said in a news release.”

    The CDC has written that “human plague infections continue to occur in rural areas in the western United States, but significantly more cases occur in parts of Africa and Asia.” Some recent cases have been observed in places like Mongolia. 

    Below are some tips for avoiding the plague from Colorado’s Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE):

    • Avoid fleas. Protect pets with a veterinary approved flea treatment and keep them on a leash and out of wild rodent habitats.
    • Stay out of areas where wild rodents live. If you enter areas inhabited by wild rodents, wear insect repellent and tuck your pant cuffs into your socks to prevent flea bites.
    • Avoid all contact with wild rodents, including squirrels. Do not feed or handle them.
    • Do not touch sick or dead animals.
    • Prevent rodent infestations around your house by clearing plants and materials away from outside walls, reducing access to food items, and setting traps.
    • Consult with a professional pest control company to treat the area around your home for fleas.
    • Contact a veterinarian if your pet becomes ill with a high fever and/or an abscess (i.e. open sore) or swollen lymph nodes. Pets with plague can transmit the illness to humans.
    • Children should be aware of these precautions and know to tell an adult if they have had contact with a wild animal or were bitten by fleas.

    Broadly in the United States what was a hoped-for ‘post-pandemic’ return to normal has seen a recent spate of headlines over everything from dangerous coronavirus variants, to vaccinated people becoming infected with COVID-19, to more recently a rare Monkeypox infection and potential outbreak in the US, to now concerns over the plague. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 16:00

  • Progressive Democrats Blast 'Reckless' Biden Plan To Allow Evictions To Resume
    Progressive Democrats Blast ‘Reckless’ Biden Plan To Allow Evictions To Resume

    Authored by Julia Conley via CommonDreams.org, 

    Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez was among several critics on Friday who warned that the Biden administration’s plan to allow the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention’s eviction moratorium to expire on July 31 would have devastating consequences for millions of renters as well as threatening public health as Covid-19 cases surge.

    President Joe Biden extended the moratorium by one month in June but has shown no signs that he plans to do the same this month. 

    Prior protest at Brooklyn Housing court, Getty Images

    According to US Treasury Department data, dozens of jurisdictions across the country have yet to start distributing assistance funds for renters that were appropriated in March as part of the American Rescue Plan Act.

    “It is reckless not to extend the deadline when rental assistance funds have not gone out fast enough to protect people,” said Ocasio-Cortez on Friday. “Eviction filings have already spiked in anticipation of the deadline being lifted.”

    According to analysis by the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities released this week, 11.4 million renters—or one in seven—are behind on rent payments. Advocates say about six million are at risk of promptly losing their homes if the eviction moratorium is not extended at the end of July.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to Paul Williams, a fellow at the Jain Family Institute, about 80% of those six million people “live in counties with rapid, Delta variant-driven [Covid-1] case growth.”

    Though the Biden administration has not signaled that it plans to extend aid for renters, the White House on Friday announced it will allow homeowners with Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac-backed mortgages to delay their payments until September, a measure that will help 1.8 million people in forebearance. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Diane Yentel, president and CEO of the National Low Income Housing Coalition, called on Biden to provide more assistance to renters as well.

    “The CDC eviction moratorium is a necessary public health measure to lessen spread of [and] deaths from Covid-19,” Yentel said. “The need clearly remains as Delta surges.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 15:30

  • Tropical Storm Barrels Towards Japan as Olympics Begin
    Tropical Storm Barrels Towards Japan as Olympics Begin

    The long-awaited Tokyo Olympics is underway this weekend, and in addition to facing COVID challenges, a weather disturbance may disrupt the Games next week. 

    Tropical Storm Nepartak developed in the Philippine Sea and is barrelling towards mainland Japan by Tuesday, with Tokyo in the forecast cone. 

    Japan Meteorological Agency said Nepartak could bring “hazardous phenomena such as heavy rain, strong winds, and high waves.” Winds speeds could reach over 50 mph on Monday, with potential landfall Tuesday north of Tokyo. 

    At the moment, there’s no indication Nepartak will strengthen into a typhoon, but that can’t be ruled out. 

    Jim Rouiller, a lead meteorologist with the Energy Weather Group, told Bloomberg that a tropical storm is coming “right toward Tokyo,” and this isn’t what they need during the Games. 

    Some games slated for early next week have been brought forward to Sunday due to deteriorating weather forecasts early next week. 

    Outdoor water sports, such as surfing, rowing, and sailing, could be the most at risk next week. Indoor games could be impacted as well if the intensity of the storm increases over the weekend. 

    Takaya Masa, the spokesperson of the Tokyo 2020 organizing committee, said weather forecasts are closely being monitored. 

    “Unlike an earthquake, we’re able to predict the path of a typhoon so we can make plans, and indeed when it comes to rowing, as a preventative measure, we have decided to change the schedule for the event,” Masa said. “Changing the schedule is not a rare event, and we understand the burden it’ll have on athletes.”

    Tokyo is already grappling with the more contagious Delta variant. This prompted the government to declare a state of emergency in the capital earlier this month.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 15:00

  • US Won't Investigate Governors Who Ordered Nursing Homes To Accept COVID-Positive Residents
    US Won’t Investigate Governors Who Ordered Nursing Homes To Accept COVID-Positive Residents

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times,

    The U.S. Department of Justice has opted against investigating any of the Democrat governors who last year ordered nursing homes to accept residents who tested positive for COVID-19 against the recommendations of health groups.

    Federal officials reviewed information they received from New York, Pennsylvania, Michigan, and New Jersey last year regarding the orders.

    Based on the review, they’re not opening Civil Rights of Institutionalized Persons Act (CRIPA) investigations in the first three states, Joe Gaeta, deputy assistant attorney general, told Rep. Steve Scalise (R-La.) in a letter on Friday.

    The act enables the attorney general to launch a case in court against a state or local government, or its employees or agents, when officials suspect or find that people in institutions owned or run by such a government have had their rights denied.

    The Department of Justice opened a CRIPA probe into conditions at two nursing facilities operated by the state of New Jersey in October 2020, but has given no indication that it is probing New Jersey Gov. Phil Murphy.

    Scalise, the ranking member of the House Subcommittee on the Coronavirus Crisis, reacted strongly to the refusal to investigate Murphy or governors of the other states, all Democrats.

    It is outrageous that the Department of Justice refuses to investigate the deadly ‘must admit’ orders issued by governors in New York, Pennsylvania, and Michigan that resulted in the deaths of thousands of senior citizens. Where is the justice for nursing home victims and their grieving families?” he said in a statement.

    “These deadly orders contradicted the CDC’s guidance, and needlessly endangered the most vulnerable among us to the deadly COVID-19 virus,” he added, referring to guidance from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

    The CDC issued guidance in March 2020, before the orders were released, saying COVID-positive patients could be released from healthcare facilities to long-term care facilities but if that happened, the facilities should be equipped with “adequate personal protective equipment supplies and an ability to adhere to infection prevention and control recommendations for the care of COVID-19 patients.”

    “Preferably, the patient would be placed at a facility that has already cared for COVID-19 cases, in a specific unit designated to care for COVID-19 residents,” the guidance stated.

    A patient is loaded into the back of an ambulance by emergency medical workers outside Cobble Hill Health Center in the Brooklyn borough of New York City on April 17, 2020. (John Minchillo/AP Photo)

    The orders in question were imposed by Cuomo and the others early in the COVID-19 pandemic. They informed nursing home operators that they could not turn away residents solely on the basis of a confirmed or suspected diagnosis of COVID-19.

    Health groups like The Society for Post-Acute and Long-Term Care Medicine warned against the orders, stating in a resolution in March 2020 that “admitting patients with suspected or documented COVID-19 infection represents a clear and present danger to all of the residents of a nursing home.”

    Large percentages of deaths pinned to COVID-19 in the four states took place among nursing homes.

    In Pennsylvania, 9,556 deaths have been among long-term care facility residents, according to state data. That’s approximately 34 percent of the state’s death toll.

    Governors have insisted the orders did not lead to more COVID-19 deaths among nursing homes and other long-term care facilities, which house groups that are most vulnerable to COVID-19, the disease caused by the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus, even as nursing home deaths were up by 32 percent last year.

    Cuomo, for instance, trumpeted a state report that claimed staff members and visitors were to blame for bringing the virus into nursing homes, though the report was quickly questioned by some.

    The offices of Cuomo and Wolf did not respond to requests for comment. Spokespersons for Murphy declined to comment. Whitmer’s office confirmed the receipt of a letter from the DOJ informing her that the state would not be investigated.

    Nursing home deaths were up by 32 percent last year

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/24/2021 – 14:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 24th July 2021

  • Bovard: The Coming "January 6" Train Wreck
    Bovard: The Coming “January 6” Train Wreck

    Authored by Jim Bovard,

    The January 6 Capitol clash may be the gift that keeps on giving to cynics everywhere. In the coming months, Americans will likely see jaw-dropping bureaucratic debacles, stunning abuses by federal prosecutors, and appalling bloodlust by angry Biden supporters.

    Perhaps the least likely outcome is that the coming train wreck will restore faith in American democracy.

    The Justice Department declared last week, “The investigation and prosecution of the Capitol Breach will be the largest in American history, both in terms of the number of defendants prosecuted and the nature and volume of the evidence.” The feds are sorting through “237,000 digital tips, 1 million Parler videos and images comprising 40 terabytes of data scraped from the Internet — roughly equivalent to 10 million photos, 20,000 hours of video, or 50,000 filing cabinets of paper documents,” theWashington Post reported. Investigators are also sorting through “cell tower data for thousands of electronic devices that connected to the Capitol’s interior distributed antenna system,” information provided by phone companies, Google, and other data aggregation companies. The problem will be compounded because many government employees are slow readers.

    More than 500 protestors have already been charged in federal court, but their trials will likely be delayed at least until next year. Federal judge John Bates recently warned that evidence snafus could result in judges “going on the warpath.” If judges conclude that the Justice Department is unreasonably keeping January 6 defendants locked up (often in solitary confinement) too long, judicial edicts could unravel prosecutors’ long-term plans.  

    Federal cases against January 6 protestors are being built on what one savvy electronic evidence consultant called a “Tower of Babel nightmare.” While federal agents gloated at the 300,000 plus tips that poured into the FBI with regards to January 6 protestors, prosecutors are obliged to sift the hairballs and provide each defendant and their lawyers with potentially exculpatory evidence.  The biggest data dump on record will likely spur a deluge of inadvertent or intentional withholding of evidence. The Justice Department recently notified defense lawyers that they would have to “build a system to receive the data” the feds delivered. The prosecution is also whining because a federal judge prevented them from relying on a private contractor to organize secret grand jury evidence.

    The Justice Department may be delaying release of the bulk of the more than 14,000 hours of video surveillance from inside the Capitol on January 6 in an attempt to preserve Biden’s “domestic terrorism” storyline of that day’s events. Even before Trump supporters poured into the Capitol that day, Democrats were accusing them of sedition for filing legal challenges to the 2020 election results, including popular Twitter hashtags such as  #GOPSeditiousTraitors and #TreasonAgainstAmerica. After the mob delayed congressional proceedings for six hours, congressional leaders compared the interruption to the 9/11 attacks, Pearl Harbor, and the War of 1812. The Justice Department may also be foot-dragging on releasing evidence because it is reluctant to disclose what role, if any, federal informants or undercover agents had in instigating or propagating violence that day.

    For January 6 defendants, federal prosecutors are using a simple formula: Trespassing plus thought crimes equals terrorism. On Monday, Paul Hodgkins was sentenced to 8 months in prison, though the feds admitted he was guilty simply of taking selfies, wearing a Trump T-shirt, and carrying a Trump flag into the Senate chamber and “did not personally engage in or espouse violence or property destruction.” Though Hodgkins pled guilty only to one count of obstructing an official proceeding, Biden’s Justice Department demanded a lengthy prison sentence for Hodgkins to “deter…domestic terrorism.” This is akin to prosecutors seeking harsh punishment for a confessed jaywalker because his negligent behavior could have caused a school bus to crash.

    At the same time the Justice Department is bumbling towards paralysis, many Americans are howling for the heads of January 6 defendants. In his Gulag Archipelago, Alexander Solzhenitsyn described the vast public outrage that went along with a prominent Soviet show trial of accused wreckers: “There were universal meetings and demonstrations (including even school-children). It was the newspaper march of millions, and the roar rose outside the windows of the courtroom: ‘Death! Death! Death!’”  The same spectacle has been stark on Twitter and in the comment section of the Washington Post, among other places.

    One Washington Postcommenter declared that “the only effective way for the government to respond to an act of war by domestic terrorists is to be prepared to meet them with machine guns and flamethrowers and mow them down. Not one of those terrorists who broke through police lines [on January 6] should have escaped alive.”  Hodgkins’s sentence terrified and enraged Post readers. One wrote, “The pitiful 8 month sentence scares me badly… I’m afraid the government is losing its ability to protect us from madmen (consider the mentally ill and tweakers roaming our streets untreated) and right wing Q inspired terrorists.” Another commented, “He should have been given the death penalty for sedition.” As always, one commenter even reached back to the Nazis for an analogy, writing, “It is comparable to the 9 months that Adolf Hitler served after his participation in an attempted 1923 putsch against the German government. Remember how that turned out?”

    Federal judge Randolph Moss, when he sentenced Hodgkins, declared that his action will make it “harder for all of us to tell our children and grandchildren that democracy stands as the immutable foundation of our nation.” Unfortunately, judges seem nonchalant when American democracy is subverted instead by federal agencies. After FBI Assistant General Counsel Kevin Clinesmith admitted falsifying key evidence to get a FISA warrant to spy on the Trump presidential campaign, federal judge James Boasberg gushed with sympathy at the sentencing hearing: “Mr. Clinesmith has lost his job in government service—what has given his life much of its meaning.” Scorning the recommendation of the federal prosecutor (who said the “resulting harm is immeasurable recommendation” from Clinesmith’s action), Boasberg gave Clinesmith a wrist slap—400 hours of community service and 12 months of probation. The Justice Department Inspector General documented many other abuses of power and deceit by FBI officials in the Hillary Clinton or Trump investigations, but not a single FBI official has spent a day behind bars.

    Will Justice Department prosecutors be caught in a Catch-22, pressured by the White House to harvest as many scalps as possible but crippled by the lack of proof that most of the accused were guilty of anything besides trespassing or “willfully and knowingly parading” in the Capitol? Political pressure for high-profile convictions resulted in disastrous courtroom defeats for federal attorneys prosecuting Ruby Ridge, the Branch Davidian standoff at Waco, and other cases. If juries rebuff prosecutors on more than a few January 6 cases, then the entire political storyline could quickly collapse.

    Federal prosecutor Mona Sedky is calling for harsh punishment for January 6 defendants because of “the need to preserve respect for the law.” But at this point, “respect for the law” is a loss leader in this process. That won’t be remedied when people realize that taking selfies can result in a federal sentencing enhancement.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 23:40

  • Lightning Lap Dances? Vegas Strip Club Now Accepts Bitcoin Payments  
    Lightning Lap Dances? Vegas Strip Club Now Accepts Bitcoin Payments  

    A strip club in Las Vegas is now accepting bitcoin payments using the Lightning Network. It’s intended to enable faster transactions among guests and dancers as payments will be processed on a “layer 2” payment protocol designed to be layered on top of blockchain-based cryptocurrencies such as bitcoin.

    The legendary Crazy Horse 3 is the first strip club to use the Lightning Network. The club partnered with payment processor OpenNode, which enables guests to purchase “VIP bottle packages with Bitcoin online,” the club’s website states. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Guests will also be able to purchase admission tickets, buy food and drinks, and tip entertainers. 

    The Lightning Network is reportedly a much better system than cash or card because payments are quick, secure, and private. That assumption will soon be tested.

    Crazy Horse 3 publicist Lindsay Feldman of BrandBomb Marketing said the strip club is “committed to innovating the modern-day guest experience and as leaders of the Las Vegas entertainment industry. We are embracing the opportunity to accept Bitcoin as a way to deliver convenience, first-class hospitality, and an added level of anonymity for our guests.” 

    “The club’s partnership with OpenNode allows us to cater to our tech savvy customers’ needs by offering an innovative form of payment that’s both seamless and secure. With the new Allegiant Stadium just feet away from our front door, this crypto power move allows us to give our customers, including global travelers flying in for conventions, concerts and sporting events, more purchasing power,” Feldman said. 

    In a piece called “The Future Of Adult Entertainment: Strippers Now Accept Bitcoin Via QR-Tattoos,” we noted how strippers in early 2018 were quickly adopting crypto payments. This dramatically increased during the virus pandemic as studies showed upwards of 3,000 different types of bacteria could survive on paper money.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 23:20

  • Taliban Warns Of Retaliation As US Is Continuing Airstrikes In Afghanistan
    Taliban Warns Of Retaliation As US Is Continuing Airstrikes In Afghanistan

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    The US launched several airstrikes in Afghanistan against the Taliban this weekthe Pentagon said on Thursday. The airstrikes were carried out in support of the Afghan government, which has been losing significant ground to the Taliban since the US started pulling troops out back in May.

    “In the last several days we have acted, through airstrikes, to support the ANDSF [Afghan National Defense and Security Forces],” Pentagon spokesman John Kirby told reporters. He was asked about alleged airstrikes in Kandahar, but said, “I won’t get into technical details of those strikes.”

    US Air Force file image

    Since the US-Taliban peace deal was signed in February 2020, US airstrikes on the Taliban have declined, but they do happen. The US usually frames the airstrikes as being carried out in the “defense” of the Afghan government. For their part, the Taliban has refrained from attacking the US or other foreign troops since the agreement was signed.

    This week’s airstrikes mark the first that the US admitted to since Gen. Scott Miller, the former top US commander in Afghanistan, handed his authority to Gen. Frank McKenzie, the head of US Central Command. It’s also a sign that the US will continue bombing Afghanistan until at least August 31st, when President Biden said the withdrawal will be complete.

    US airstrikes in Afghanistan are now being launched from outside the country, what the Pentagon has dubbed “over the horizon capability.” The US will maintain this capability after the withdrawal, so it’s possible that the US will continue bombing Afghanistan beyond September.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Taliban spokesman Zabihullah Mujahid condemned the new airstrikes as a violation of prior Doha agreements, vowing “consequences” after multiple Taliban fighters killed:

    “We confirm these air strikes and we condemn this in strongest term, it is a clear attack and violation of the Doha deal as they can’t have operations after May,” he said, referring to an agreement between the United States and the Taliban clearing the way for the withdrawal of U.S. forces.

    “If they conduct any operation then they will be responsible for the consequences.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The US also has plans to leave about 600 troops in the country that will be in Kabul to guard the embassy and the international airport.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 23:00

  • Florida's First 3D-Printed Home Under Construction Amid Housing Affordability Crisis
    Florida’s First 3D-Printed Home Under Construction Amid Housing Affordability Crisis

    While the federal government and Federal Reserve have been on a mission to inflate the debt away by boosting asset prices through unprecedented amounts of fiscal and monetary stimuli, housing affordability has become a significant issue for many Americans. To counter soaring costs of everything, from lumber to concrete to homes themselves, builders have begun to adopt 3D-printing technology to reduce costs. 

    Not too long ago, we noted “Screw Lumber, Just 3D-Print Your Next Home,” which is precisely what one builder did in Florida. 

    Florida’s first 3D printed house began construction last week in Tallahassee, according to Tallahassee Democrat

    “I have to keep pinching myself,” said Kyndra Light, the co-owner of the firm behind the project Precision Building and Renovating. “I can’t believe it’s actually happening.”

    Kyndra, and her husband, James Light, have tapped into the world of 3D printing to bring affordable homebuilding to Floridians who’ve been priced out of the market. 

    Construction began last Thursday on a plot of land in northwest Tallahassee and should wrap up by the end of the week. The automated printer is suspended on four posts and lays about two feet of concrete per day.

    Printing walls out of concrete instead of stick building with lumber and other materials is a huge cost saver and requires very little labor besides a small crew manning the printer, which follows a predetermined path for exterior and interior walls. 

    Construction takes about eight to 10 weeks for a three-bedroom, two-bathroom house. It will cost around $175,000 and $200,000, Light said. The cost savings is noticeable considering the median US-existing home price surged to a record $350,000 last month. 

    “This is the future,” said Chase Miller, the founder of the construction development firm Urban Land Co., who traveled from Ohio to watch the printing of the home. “There are so many possibilities with this technology and it can really help people.”

    Miller said that it could be a great tool to rebuild homes after a hurricane strike because the printer works quickly.

    “If this becomes the next big innovation construction, which I think it will, we are watching the very first one to be built in Florida,” he said. “That’s unique.”

    About a month ago, a home in South Richmond, Virginia, became the first 3D-printed home under construction in the state. The builders wanted to save costs and make the home affordable, considering lumber prices for a new single-family home had risen tens of thousands of dollars over the past year. 

    With rampant inflation everywhere, a record 71% of consumers said higher home prices were a reason why buying conditions have soured. Perhaps, those who are looking for affordable housing may find answers in 3D printing. 

    Find a cheap plot of buildable land in a rural area, order up a Starlink satellite connection, and remote-working can be possible while not being house poor. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 22:40

  • Despite What Biden Says, Guns Factor In Only A Small Percentage Of Violent Crimes
    Despite What Biden Says, Guns Factor In Only A Small Percentage Of Violent Crimes

    Authored by John R. Lott Jr. via RealClearInvestigations (emphasis ours),

    In response to sharp increases in violent crime, President Biden stressed again last week that his administration is focused on “stemming the flow of firearms used to commit violent crimes.” But critics warn that this “guns first” approach ignores a basic fact—about 92% of violent crimes in America do not involve firearms.

    Although firearms were used in about 74% of homicides in 2019, they comprise less than 9% of violent crimes in America.

    The vast majority of violent offenses—including robberies, rapes and other sex crimes—almost always involve other weapons or no weapons at all.

    Consider Chicago, which has become a national symbol of violent crime. While shootings have increased by about 11% this year, the number of murders has decreased slightly in 2021—to 382 as of July 11 compared to 387 for the same time period last year. The dramatic increase Chicago is experiencing is in sex crimes—a 23% rise (1,068 as of July 11 compared with 868 during the same period in 2020).

    Police investigate the scene in which police opened fire during an arrest near 109 S Kilpatrick in West Garfield Park in Chicago, Ill., on July 9, 2021. (Anthony Vazquez/Chicago Sun-Times via AP)

    In New York City, murders through the same period have dropped by 36.4% compared to last year. But robberies are up by 18%, rapes by 9%, and other sex crimes by 35%—all of which do not usually involve guns, sex crimes rarely so. This year murders make up 0.3% of felonies.

    Even if gun crime were to rise dramatically, experts point out that it would still be a small fraction of overall violent crime.

    The National Crime Victimization Survey, in the latest year available (2019), shows that there were 5,440,680 rapes, robberies, and aggravated assaults and 16,425 murders. Firearms were used in 440,830 incidents for rapes, robberies, and aggravated assaults (Table 25) and 10,258 murders. Adding those numbers up, 8.27% of violent crime incidents involved firearms. The percentage has stayed virtually the same for decades. For example, in 2000, it was 8.5%. In 2010, it was 9% (Table 4). Nor do most gun crimes end in murder: just 2% do.

    The gulf between Democrats and Republicans on this is large. While Democrats are continuing to push for restrictions on police authority, Republican states are responding by giving police more power to do their job.

    Nevertheless, Biden and other Democrats argue that lax gun control, which allows gun trafficking, is responsible for the increase in violent crime. The Biden administration’s focus on gun crimes is seen in the titles the White House put on Biden’s talks in April, June and last week: “Remarks by President Biden on Gun Violence Prevention,” “Remarks by President Biden and Attorney General Garland on Gun Crime Prevention Strategy,” and “Remarks by President Biden Discussing His Administration’s Comprehensive Strategy to Reduce Gun Crimes.”

    President Joe Biden speaks on gun crime prevention measures as Attorney General Merrick Garland looks on at the White House in Washington, on June 23, 2021. (Kevin Dietsch/Getty Images)

    In three speeches on crime, Biden mentioned “gun” or “firearm” 148 times. The term “weapon,” sometimes in connection with “assault weapon,” is used another 21 times. By contrast, when not directly discussing guns, he mentioned the words “crime,” “violence,” or “violent” about half as often—89 times.

    Unmentioned by the president as factors in the violent crime increase were last year’s widespread unrest over the George Floyd murder and the dislocations of the pandemic, including mass layoffs, youths kept out of schools and, notably, the early release of many convicts from infection-prone prisons. Against this backdrop, some scholars question the president’s focus on gun laws.

    “What change in gun control laws in 2020 could possibly explain the increase in violent crime over the last year?” asked Carl Moody, an economist who specializes in studying crime at the College of William & Mary, in an interview with RealClearInvestigations. “Why did violent crime increase now, rather than two or three or four years ago?” he asked rhetorically.

    The White House did not respond to a request for comment.

    Republicans, such as former Wisconsin Gov. Scott Walker, point more generally to law enforcement. They argue that in many urban areas, more than half of prison inmates have been released on account of the pandemic and the releases are continuing. Bail reforms allow those accused of crime to remain on the streets. In some places, police have been ordered to stand down and their budgets cut. Prosecutors in many major urban areas have refused to prosecute violent criminals.

    The Los Angeles Police Protective League, the union that represents rank-and-file officers, released a statement late last year criticizing Los Angeles County’s then newly elected District Attorney George Gascón’s pledge (since fulfilled) to reduce criminal sentences and eliminate cash bail for misdemeanors. “As homicides, shooting victims and shots fired into occupied homes soar in Los Angeles,” the union wrote, “it’s disturbing that Gascón’s first act in office is to explore every avenue possible to release from jail those responsible for this bloodshed.”

    Gascón’s office did not respond to a request for comment.

    Police officers patrol in their car in Los Angeles, Calif., on Nov. 1, 2020. (Chris Delmas/AFP via Getty Images)

    In contrast with Republicans, Biden mentioned policing just four times in his three addresses. He did so once in connection with “red flag” gun laws, and three times boasted that the American Rescue Plan passed earlier this year by Congress provided funds to hire “more police officers, more nurses, more counselors, more social workers.” However, the bill did not require that local governments spend any of the $350 billion they received on law enforcement.

    Moody told RealClearInvestigations that the president’s emphasis on violent crime is “understandable if only because of how heavily concentrated murders are in the country.” Over 50% of the murders take place in just 2% of the counties (60 of the 3,140 counties, the 60 making up 27.5% of the population), and even within those counties most murders occur within 10-block areas. These are overwhelmingly gang-related murders. They are surely important, but don’t touch the lives of most Americans. Fifty-four percent of counties have no murders and another 15% have one.

    This article was written by John R. Lott Jr for RealClearInvestigations.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 22:20

  • Things Are So Bad In California That Farmers Are Employing "Water Witches"
    Things Are So Bad In California That Farmers Are Employing “Water Witches”

    Some refer to it as “dowsing,” “doodlebugging,” or “water witching”—the practice of using a forked stick or rods to locate underground water. It sounds mysterious, but this practice has been around for hundreds, if not thousands, of years.

    So why revive water witching today? 

    Well, vineyard and farm operators in California are experiencing some of the worst drought conditions in decades. They’re getting desperate for new water sources as their wells run dry and reservoirs hit record low levels. 

    Rather than have faith in hydrogeologists and “science,” vineyard and farm operators are putting their trust in water witches.

    In Sonoma County, California, an area known for wineries, Rob Thompson, a water diviner, said the drought has increased business many folds. He said this is the “busiest I’ve ever been in my entire life.” 

    Thompson’s claim to fame is that he formerly owned one of Northern California’s largest well-drilling companies. He’s been in the business for decades and claims to have found thousands of groundwater sites across the state. 

    “This is the worst drought I’ve seen in my lifetime,” Thompson said. “In California, we’re going deeper and deeper,” he said, adding that farmers and land managers are drilling deeper to access groundwater. 

    Thompson uses rods to locate groundwater in the fractures of the earth’s bedrock. The method has been rejected by the United States Geological Survey (USGS) as there’s no science to support it. 

    But that doesn’t stop Johnnie White, the operations manager of Piña Vineyard Management, who runs dozens of vineyards in Napa Valley.

    “I haven’t ever used a geologist to find water,” White said, who acknowledged water witching sounds a bit “far fetched.” 

    Davie Piña, the owner of the vineyard management company, called the drought situation in the state a “disaster” and had a gloomy outlook for the future.  

    While water witching sounds a bit odd, a German study conducted in the 1990s spanned a decade that paired geologists and dowsers in Africa to drill for water and see how accurate they were. In Sri Lanka alone, drill teams drilled 691 wells under the guidance of dowsers and discovered water 96% of the time. 

    Now the argument that USGS makes is that “water exists under the Earth’s surface almost everywhere.” So it’s like shooting fish in a barrel. 

    Nevertheless, for whatever reason, farmers and land managers across California are desperate enough to turn to water witches to save their operations from turning into dust. 

    Still curious about water witching? Here’s a video on water witching 101.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 22:00

  • Rep. Jordan Asks IG Horowitz For More Evidence On FBI Official's Alleged Misconduct
    Rep. Jordan Asks IG Horowitz For More Evidence On FBI Official’s Alleged Misconduct

    Authored by Katabella Roberts  via The Epoch Times,

    Rep. Jim Jordan (R-Ohio) sent a letter to Justice Department Inspector General Michael Horowitz on July 21 regarding the alleged misconduct of an unnamed former senior FBI official.

    Jordan, in his letter, asks for Horowitz to explain to the House Judiciary committee “the extent of this serious misconduct, and evaluate the FBI’s handling of the matter.”

    “To allow the committee to better understand the OIG’s findings, determine the extent of his serious misconduct, and evaluate the FBI’s handling of the matter, I ask that you please provide the complete unredacted case file of investigative Summary 21-096, to include all documents, communications, and other evidence related to the report,” he wrote.

    The Republican representative asked that Horowitz provide him with the information by no later than 5 p.m. on Aug. 4, 2021.

    Department of Justice Inspector General Michael Horowitz testifies in front of the Senate Judiciary Committee in Washington on Dec. 11, 2019. (Charlotte Cuthbertson/The Epoch Times)

    His letter comes after the Department of Justice’s (DOJ) inspector general on Tuesday released the findings of an investigation that found that a former senior FBI official repeatedly violated the bureau’s policy by having unauthorized contact with the media.

    According to the report, the unnamed official had “received items of value from members of the media” and had “numerous unauthorized contacts with the media” between 2014 and 2016.

    Those unauthorized contacts included “substantive communications” with reporters and “unauthorized social engagements outside of FBI headquarters involving drinks, lunches, and dinners.”

    The official had also accepted tickets from media members to two black-tie dinner events, including one valued at $300 and the other at $225. They also received transportation to the event from a reporter, who was not named, the report said.

    The FBI described the behavior as a violation of FBI policy.

    “When later contacted by the [inspector general’s office] for a voluntary interview, the senior FBI official declined to be interviewed,” the office wrote, adding that it indeed has “the authority to compel testimony from current department employees upon informing them that their statements will not be used to incriminate them in a criminal proceeding.”

    But the office “does not have the authority to compel or subpoena testimony from former department employees, including those who retire or resign during” the course of the investigation, the report said.

    The FBI conducted the investigation in the months leading up to and after the November 2016 presidential election.

    Its findings will no doubt throw more weight behind claims that some members of the FBI and other U.S. intelligence officials have developed a close-knit relationship with journalists and other members of the media over recent years.

    Former President Donald Trump and his allies have previously spoken out about the FBI’s alleged collusion with mainstream media outlets, with Trump previously accusing former FBI director James B. Comey of illegally leaking classified information to them, including claims that Trump’s 2016 presidential campaign colluded with Russia or regarding allegations surrounding President Joe Biden’s son Hunter’s overseas business dealings.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 21:40

  • "Lights Will Stay On:" Texas Grid Operator Prepares For Imminent Heat Wave
    “Lights Will Stay On:” Texas Grid Operator Prepares For Imminent Heat Wave

    A dangerous heat wave is forecasted for Texas next week.

    The state’s Public Utility Commission (PUC) and Electric Reliability Council of Texas (ERCOT) informed customers Thursday that the power grid is in good shape and can withstand triple-digit temperatures. 

    The chair of the PUC told customers the number one priority next week is to keep the lights on for Texans.

    “We are in a good position,” PUC Chairman Peter Lake said in a Thursday news conference.

    “It will be tight for the rest of the summer,” Lake added. “We know the heat is coming, but we are ready for it.”

    He stood beside interim ERCOT President Brad Jones, who also spoke about reliability across the power grid next week. It was the second time the Jones and the new chair of the PUC appeared together to reassure the public about grid stability after a disastrous grid collapse during a winter blast in February. 

    Jim Rouiller, the lead meteorologist at the Energy Weather Group, told Bloomberg that a heat wave would form in the Great Plains this weekend and drive temperatures in Dallas above the 100-degree mark for the first time this year. We noted earlier this week that parts of the agriculture belt would experience rising temperatures and drier conditions over the coming weeks. 

    Rouiller said, “next week will be the hottest week they have had all summer long. Cooling demand will be the highest we have seen all summer.” Below is the cooling demand for the Midwest. What this means is that demand for energy needed to cool buildings will increase as temperatures rise. 

    Allison Prater, a National Weather Service meteorologist in Fort Worth, said Dallas-Fort Worth has yet to hit a 100F this year. Usually, the area reaches triple-digit temperatures by July 1. 

    This summer’s heat has been centered around the Pacific Northwest, setting record high temperatures in Oregon, Washington, Idaho, along with other surrounding states. 

    The high pressure, or heat dome, will be centered around Oklahoma, making conditions in Iowa to Arkansas brutal this weekend and next week

    “This is the hottest one so far for them, this is the dome of doom,” Rouiller said.

    Power grid prices are expected to rise through next week. As for the integrity of the power grid, there’s no telling what may happen next week, if that is outages or calls by regulators for customers to reduce power. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 21:20

  • Taibbi: The Luke Harding Experiment
    Taibbi: The Luke Harding Experiment

    Authored by Matt Taibbi via TK News,

    Eight days ago, on July 15th, The Guardian published an apparent bombshell by reporting curiosity Luke Harding and two other writers, entitled, “Kremlin papers appear to show Putin’s plot to put Trump in White House.”

    The paper claimed to have gotten hold of “leaked Kremlin documents” from January 2016, showing a secret plot by Russia to use “all possible force” to help elect “the most promising candidate,” Donald Trump, in order to bring about the “destabilization of the US’s sociopolitical system.”

    The article featured a snippet of the alleged document that purported to show Russian officials copping to the entire Russiagate narrative in a single sentence, even adding what the Guardian called “apparent confirmation” that the Kremlin possessed compromising knowledge about “certain events” involving Trump on Russian territory:

    It’s almost impossible to describe how low you have to have sunk for the American media to walk away from a story like this, in a still-vibrant environment of Trump-Russia mania. It’s like being unable to give away video game credits at Chuck E Cheese. Yet the explosive report was picked up by exactly zero American news agencies. The silence was so deafening, the rival Daily Mail wrote an article gloating about it.

    A week after the expose’s publication, the Washington Post — maybe the most enthusiastic print trafficker of McCarthyite paranoia in recent years and home to many of the biggest actual intelligence leaks through the Trump-Russia affair — finally addressed the “leaked Kremlin documents.” The piece by Phillip Bump tried to take the Harding revelations seriously, but couldn’t, saying the article “reads like one of those viral Twitter threads from a guy with 4.4 million followers whose bio describes him as ‘resister-in-chief.’”

    Ouch. Why so harsh? The Post mentions the reason: the Guardian author, Harding, also wrote one of the most infamous uncorroborated “bombshells” of this era, a November 27, 2018 report alleging Trump campaign manager Paul Manafort met with Julian Assange in the Ecuadorian embassy.

    This would-be smoking gun proof of collusion took the news world by storm for days, as the Trump-mad press went blind with eagerness, like high school boys seeing their first boobs. Poor Ari Melber of MSNBC would probably like this broadcast back, where he gushed that the Guardian report might be the “key to collusion,” noting:

    Sources tell the Guardian the key meeting lasted 40 minutes, and they have details, like that [Manafort] was dressed in chinos, cardigan, and a light shirt… Now, tonight, Paul Manafort is denying this story. I can report that. I can also report that Paul Manafort is a serial liar.

    This wasn’t just a bombshell, it was a bombshell with details. Who could make up chinos? “If it looks like collusion, meets like collusion, and acts like collusion, it probably is collusion,” agreed congresswoman Jackie Speier.

    Slowly, however, the minor issue of there being no record of any meeting between Manafort and the most surveilled person on earth began to raise concerns among America’s press wizards that the story might be on something less than solid ground. The Washington Post’s polite formulation was that Harding’s story was a bomb that “still hasn’t detonated.”

    The Guardian compounded the comedy. In the face of intense public criticism over the absence of evidence for such a major assertion, the paper essentially made one change. The headline, “Manafort held secret talks with Assange in Ecuadorian embassy” became “Manafort held secret talks with Assange in Ecuadorian embassy, sources say.”

    Needless to say, the qualifier didn’t exactly address concerns. This time around, the Guardian did their touching-up in advance, applying in bulk phrases like “what are assessed to be leaked Kremlin documents,” “the papers suggest,” “appearing to bear Putin’s signature,” “seem to represent,” “appear to be genuine,” “apparent confirmation,” etc. Despite these fine efforts, the silence over the new piece shows unchanged judgment on the Manafort-Assange affair, with editors essentially announcing an unwillingness to be hoaxed a second time.

    In response, Harding a few days ago tweeted a link to a YouTube interview with former KGB agent and co-author of American Kompromat, Yuri Shvets:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Harding has some unique talents when it comes to public defense of his work. At the peak of the Trump-Russia delirium, he wrote a book called Collusion, but walked out of an interview with Aaron Mate when asked where the evidence for the collusion was. “Looks like Luke has logged off,” Aaron commented, as his audience was left staring at an SMPTE color bar.

    That incident became Internet legend. This latest kerfuffle isn’t quite that bad, but still head-scratching. Harding has presented as additional backup for his new story this Russian-language interview with Shvets, a handy source for nearly every English-language reporter who’s cycled through Moscow since 1991 (he was a popular quote with pals of mine from the Moscow Times back in the day).

    In this YouTube monologue, the former KGB man does vouch for the Guardian story, opining, “This is a compilation of real documents located in the possession of the government of the United States.”

    Shvets shrugs off criticism of Harding’s story from Russian writer Leonid Mlechin, who accused the Guardian of being duped, noting “mistakes” in the language and the form of the report. This was in contrast to Harding, who said he’d showed the documents to “independent experts” who claimed the “incidental details come across as accurate,” and the “overall tone and thrust is said to be consistent with Kremlin security thinking.”

    Shvets actually concurred with Mlechin on many points here, wincing at the rambling language of the published excerpts. He conceded “there could not be such a document in the time of the Soviet Union,” when a KGB pro would never have “one sentence [go on] for almost a half-page,” because “qualified professionals don’t write like that.”

    However, he disagreed with Mlechin that these quality issues were conclusive, saying only that they spoke to the “general degradation of the government apparatus under Putin.” In between, he dropped his assessment that this collection of documents was realniy.

    Shvets may or may not be right. What’s funny, though, is Harding neglecting to mention Shvets was one of the harshest early critics of another story he boosted over and over, the dossier of British ex-spy Christopher Steele. Harding worked with Steele on Collusion, which continues to be marketed as “an explosive exposé that lays out the story behind the Steele Dossier.”

    As Barry Meier noted in Spooked, the excellent book about (among other things) the Steele affair, internet sleuths at one point believed Shvets was the source for Steele. But when the dossier came out, Shvets gave an interview in Russian that shat with force on the idea. His assessment of the dossier, in fact, sounded quite a lot like Mlechin’s assessment of this new Harding story.

    “There are experts in painting who can confidently tell you if you’re looking at a genuine Rembrandt or a fake, and their opinion will be accepted in court, even if they didn’t stand next to Rembrandt himself,” he said. “It’s the same with intelligence documents… The credibility of this ‘dossier’ from a professional perspective is zero.” Asked flat out if the Steele dossier was fake, Shvets replied, “Absolutely.”

    Was Shvets authoritative then, or now? Who knows, possibly both times. But Harding in tweeting this week probably could have mentioned that this person’s prior credentials included dismissing the entire basis of Collusion as a fake.

    Harding’s gig at the Guardian is curious. When you run a major expose and nobody picks it up, it’s a serious black eye editorially, one that impacts other writers on the staff. The Guardian (which did not respond to queries) must have known what the reaction to this latest anonymously sourced “expose” would be. So why run it? Either it’s one of the great all-time double-downs, or the paper has committed to being an ongoing experiment in publishing transparent trial balloons for the intelligence community.

    Just as there’s a fine line for rock stars between stupid and clever, there’s a thin line in journalism between being plugged in, and a dope — and the Guardian is jumping all the way over it, God knows why.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 21:00

  • Biden Says New Cuba Sanctions Are "Just The Beginning" 
    Biden Says New Cuba Sanctions Are “Just The Beginning” 

    President Biden says the newly announced sanctions against Cuba are “just the beginning” after rare widespread protests took over multiple cities on the communist-run island starting earlier in July. In the Thursday fresh sanctions announcement Biden condemned “the mass detentions and sham trials that are unjustly sentencing to prison those who dared to speak out in an effort to intimidate and threaten the Cuban people into silence,” according to a White House statement

    Specifically these latest sanctions target the defense minister and the National Special Brigade of Cuba’s Interior Ministry (on top of broader decades-long US sanctions against the government and economy).

    Cuban Americans at a protest in Miami, via AP

    Biden said these two officials in particular are spearheading the crackdown on Cuban protesters. He suggested there’s much more to come.

    “This is just the beginning — the United States will continue to sanction individuals responsible for oppression of the Cuban people,” Biden said.

    The administration further said it’s working to “restore internet access” in Cuba after widespread shutdowns were reported over this month as Cuban security forces struggle to gain control of the demonstrations, largely driven by an economy in tatters, food and fuel shortages, and severe mismanagement of the pandemic crisis. 

    Currently, the US even prohibits remittances, barring Cuban-Americans from sending money to their families, with last year Western Union also shutting down all money-sending services to Cuba after the Trump administration re-imposed sanctions. 

    The Biden White House since he took office has vowed to “review” Trump era policies, but so far has kept them in place and now even appears to be ramping up the pressure once again. He again hinted this week that there could be a policy change toward “easing” restrictions. 

    Cuba has for its part alleged a foreign hand behind the recent protests, especially following the so-called “Cuban Twitter” initiative of the past decade, which was long ago exposed as part of Washington’s covert efforts to stir unrest on the island. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 20:40

  • The Deep Seabed Is China's Next Target
    The Deep Seabed Is China’s Next Target

    By Alex Gray of 19fortygive.com

    In late 2020, a Chinese submersible, the Fendouzhe, descended over 30,000 feet to the bottom of the Marianas Trench, home to the deepest point in the earth’s oceans, known as Challenger Deep. Loaded with so much surveying equipment that the crew added additional buoyancy materials to keep it balanced, the Fendouzhe set a national record for the depth of its dive and broadcast a live feed of its exploits back to China. While the expedition was billed as focusing on the animal life of the Trench, state media noted that the surveying experience would be useful for China’s growing interest in deep-sea mining.

    The deep seabed, essentially the very bottom of the ocean’s floor, is a potentially rich source of oil and gas; elements like cobalt, copper, and nickel, as well as of the rare earth elements (REEs) required for many new technologies. Chinese President Xi Jinping has spoken repeatedly of the connection between “utilization of the ocean” and China’s quest for both maritime and overall national power. In 2016, he spoke specifically of the deep sea, saying: “the deep sea contains treasures that remain undiscovered and undeveloped, and in order to obtain these treasures we have to control key technologies in getting into the deep sea, discovering the deep sea, and developing the deep sea.”

    Policy has followed rhetoric. In February 2016, China began laying the predicate for exploitation of deep seabed resources with the passage of the PRC Law on Exploration and Development of Resources in Deep Sea Seabed Areas. In the 12th (2011-2015) and 13th (2016-2020) Five Year Plans, China prioritized “promoting commercialization of deep-sea mining, manufacturing of deep-sea equipment and utilization of deep-sea bioresources.” Beijing already leads the world in the number of deep-sea mining contracts undertaken, with more likely to follow given the breadth of its surveying efforts and the level of interest shown by senior Chinese Communist Party officials.

    Beijing is following a familiar pattern in its focus on the deep seabed. Senior officials are publicly extolling the economic importance of dominance in a particular underutilized domain, and connecting it explicitly to China’s broader role in the world. Xi has pursued similar approaches in the Arctic and Antarctic, declaring China a “Polar Great Power” in 2014. China’s 2018 Arctic Strategy declared Beijing a “near-Arctic” power, with an accompanying “Polar Silk Road” designed to accelerate Chinese economic influence in the region.

    In the Antarctic, meanwhile, Chinese officials have spoken regularly of the resource exploitation potential of the continent, despite the Antarctic Treaty’s (of which China is a signatory) constraints on extractive activities. Chinese scholars have gone so far as to propagate the myth of the 2048 expiration of the Madrid Protocol that governs Antarctic environmental conduct, against all evidence and contrary to international consensus. For his part, Xi has publicly called on China to “exploit” the Antarctic.

    As in the Arctic and Antarctic, China’s interest in economic dominance of the deep seabed has a significant military component. In 2018, a Ministry of National Defense document identified the domains relevant to the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) for future global operations. In addition to traditional domains like land, air, sea, and space, the document called for “confrontation activities” in areas including quantum, artificial intelligence, and, revealingly, the deep sea.

    Science of Strategy, a premier Chinese military journal connected to its National Defense University, noted the economic value of the deep seabed as early as 2015 and spoke of “military struggle in the deep sea” as a future warfare domain. Revisions to the country’s National Security Law that year also flagged the deep seabed as an area of national interest for Beijing.

    Chinese dominance of the deep seabed, whether in already-disputed waters like the South and East China Seas or farther afield in the Western Pacific, where China has conducted extensive surveying, including near U.S. territories like Guam and the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, poses significant military challenges for the U.S. and its allies.

    As retired U.S. Navy Captain James Fanell, formerly the Director of Intelligence for the U.S. Pacific Fleet, recently told me: “The PRC’s deep seabed survey operations have two purposes. One, and the one most publicized, is to find and exploit natural resources and the other is to collect oceanographic data for the Chinese Communist Party’s strategic goal of expanding the geographic area and lethality of the PLA Navy’s blue-water submarine force.”

    Fanell has noted that such operations provide the PLA Navy with oceanographic data on the bottom contours, water temperature, salinity, and other metrics of what the Chinese call the “ocean battlespace environment” (海战场环境). This type of information facilitates the PLA Navy’s objective of neutralizing one of the United States’ longtime warfare advantages: control of the undersea domain.

    The current international mechanism for regulating the deep seabed is the International Seabed Authority (ISA), created under the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS). The U.S. is not a party to either arrangement and for good reason. Not only is China the largest financier of the ISA, but its institutional framework remains heavily weighted against both U.S. economic and strategic interests. The Senate has consistently failed to ratify U.S. membership in UNCLOS and ISA out of concerns about sovereignty and the efficacy of either mechanism in upholding American interests.

    The United States will most effectively counter Beijing’s deep seabed activities by working proactively with like-minded states, including “Quad” members Australia, Japan, and India and trusted partners like Taiwan, to monitor China’s activities and respond accordingly. Attempts to exploit the deep seabed economically in ways contrary to international best practices, or to militarize it, should be strongly condemned.

    An allied strategy to defend the deep seabed from Beijing’s predations requires, as in the Polar regions, both an economic and military response, realizing the intrinsic linkage between them in Chinese statecraft. Like the Arctic strategies created by the U.S. government in recent years, a similar unified document for the deep seabed would assist in coordinating efforts across economic, scientific, and military agencies and focusing attention on China’s ambitions and its challenge to American interests.

    Additional intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance resources must be devoted to preventing unmonitored Chinese deep-sea surveying in U.S. territorial waters, exclusive economic zones (EEZs), or the waters or EEZs of the three Freely Associated States (FAS) for whose defense the U.S. is responsible. Allies like Japan and Australia can play important roles in monitoring Beijing’s activity in their backyards.

    As China continues to expand its activities across numerous domains, and its economic and military aspirations became ever more intertwined, the U.S. and its partners must adapt and respond accordingly. The deep seabed, like the Arctic and Antarctic before it, will increasingly become an area of Great Power competition requiring Washington’s attention and a clear strategy for the preservation of U.S. interests.

    Alex Gray is a Senior Fellow in National Security Affairs at the American Foreign Policy Council. Gray served as Director for Oceania & Indo-Pacific Security at the White House National Security Council (NSC) from 2018 to 2019.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 20:20

  • Kodak Deletes Instagram Post After Photographer Called Xinjiang "Orwellian Dystopia"
    Kodak Deletes Instagram Post After Photographer Called Xinjiang “Orwellian Dystopia”

    Eastman Kodak deleted an Instagram post featuring photos from the Xinjiang region of China, where western governments and media have criticized Beijing for human rights violations against the majority-Muslim Uyghur people. 

    According to The New York Times, the now-deleted Instagram post featured the work of the French photographer Patrick Wack who released numerous images on Kodak film about Xinjiang’s “abrupt descent into an Orwellian dystopia” in the last half-decade. 

    The international community, especially western countries, has accused China of human rights violations against the Uyghur people by forcing them into re-education camps, forced labor, surveilling them, and even controlling birth rates. 

    At issue was a subtitle written by Patrick Wack, the photographer behind the controversial images, which called the region an “Orwellian nightmare.”

    After receiving backlash from Chinese netizens, the post was deleted by Kodak, which was followed by a new post on Tuesday that offered an apology: 

    “Content from the photographer Patrick Wack was recently posted on this Instagram page. The content of the post was provided by the photographer and was not authored by Kodak. Kodak’s Instagram page is intended to enable creativity by providing a platform for promoting the medium of film. It is not intended to be a platform for political commentary. The views expressed by Mr. Wack do not represent those of Kodak and are not endorsed by Kodak. We apologize for any misunderstanding or offense the post may have caused.” 

    Hong Kong Free Press also said Kodak apologized on its WeChat page, blaming the mishap on “management loopholes.” 

    “For a long time, Kodak has maintained a good relationship with the Chinese government and has been in close cooperation with various government departments. We will continue to respect the Chinese government and the Chinese law.” 

    Western firms are increasingly choosing between customers in the West and or its thriving customer base in China. The West has pressured companies like Nike to purge its cotton supply chains from Xinjiang. Swedish company H&M experienced a decline in Chinese sales after it spoke out against cotton from the region.

    A little more than a week ago, the US Government issued a supply chain advisory for US firms with supply chains that extend into the Xinjiang region.

    Kodak is not the first international company to apologize. 

    At the moment, Chinese officials have yet to respond to Kodak, but Chinese state-owned Global Times said: 

    “It’s not uncommon for the West to hype about the Xinjiang issue under the instigation of anti-China forces headed by the United States.”

    Wack was frustrated with Kodak’s statement but didn’t believe any other company operating in China would’ve acted differently. 

    “We have created a globalized world where no company with international ambition can reasonably give up on the China market,” he said to CNET. “Would any other major photo company, or multinational company, behave differently and give up on the China market?”

    Yet another international company is bowing down to the communist because they don’t want to lose their massive Chinese market share. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 20:00

  • Federal Court Rules CDC's COVID-19 Eviction Moratorium Is Unlawful
    Federal Court Rules CDC’s COVID-19 Eviction Moratorium Is Unlawful

    By Jack Phillips of Epoch Times

    A federal court on Friday ruled that the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) overstepped its authority by halting evictions during the COVID-19 pandemic.

    The Cincinnati-based U.S. Sixth Circuit Court of Appeals unanimously agreed (pdf) with a lower court ruling that said the CDC engaged in federal overreach with the eviction moratorium, which the agency has consistently extended for months. Several weeks ago, the CDC announced it would allow the policy, which was passed into law by Congress, to expire at the end of July.

    Dr. Rochelle Walensky, director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), testifies during a Senate hearing in Washington, on July 20, 2021. (Stefani Reynolds-Pool/Getty Images)

    “It is not our job as judges to make legislative rules that favor one side or another,” the judges wrote. “But nor should it be the job of bureaucrats embedded in the executive branch. While landlords and tenants likely disagree on much, there is one thing both deserve: for their problems to be resolved by their elected representatives.”

    The ruling upheld one handed down by U.S. District Judge Mark Norris, who in March blocked enforcement of the moratorium throughout western Tennessee.

    Under the moratorium, tenants who have lost income during the pandemic can declare under penalty of perjury that they’ve made their best effort to pay rent on time. The CDC claimed the measure was necessary to prevent people from having to enter overcrowded conditions if they were evicted, which would, according to the agency, impact public health.

    Previously, the CDC’s lawyers argued in court filings that Congress authorized the eviction freeze as part of its COVID-19 relief legislation, while simultaneously asserting that the moratorium was within its authority. Those arguments were rejected by the three-panel appeals court on Friday.

    Demonstrators call for a rent strike during the COVID-19 pandemic as they pass City Hall in Los Angeles, Calif., on May 1, 2020. (Frederic J. Brown/AFP via Getty Images)

    “What’s the difference between executive-branch experts and congressional ones? Executive-branch experts make regulations; congressional experts make recommendations,” the appeals court wrote. “Congressional bureaucracy leaves the law-making power with the people’s representatives—right where the Founders put it.”

    But last month, the Supreme Court in a 5-4 decision rejected a different plea by landlords to end the ban on evictions.

    Justice Brett Kavanaugh had written in an opinion (pdf) that while he believes that the CDC had exceeded its authority by implementing the moratorium, he voted against ending it because the policy is set to expire July 31.

    “Those few weeks,” he wrote, “will allow for additional and more orderly distribution” of the funds that Congress has appropriated to provide rental assistance to those in need because of the pandemic.

    The CDC moratorium has faced pushback from property owners as well as the National Association of Realtors.

    “Landlords have been losing over $13 billion every month under the moratorium, and the total effect of the CDC’s overreach may reach up to $200 billion if it remains in effect for a year,” said the organization in an emergency petition to the Supreme Court.

    It’s not clear if the CDC’s attorneys will appeal the ruling. The Epoch Times has requested a comment from the agency.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 19:40

  • Dubai Makes Artificial Rain With Drones That Shock Clouds
    Dubai Makes Artificial Rain With Drones That Shock Clouds

    The United Arab Emirates (UAE) uses drones that fly into clouds and deliver an electric shock to “cajole them” into producing precipitation amid dangerous heat waves regularly surpassing triple digits. 

    According to Daily Mail, UAE’s National Center of Meteorology (NCM) is flying drones equipped with electric-charge emission instruments that deliver an electric charge to air molecules, which generally encourage precipitation. 

    NCM has produced “monsoon-like downpours across the country” with drones to deter sweltering 122F heat. Footage shows Dubai battered with torrential rain produced by cloud seeding technology.

    The country already uses cloud-seeding technology, such as dropping salt and other chemicals into clouds to stimulate precipitation. 

    The latest cloud seeding operations via drones is part of a $15 million program that is already producing rain in the country, which ranks one of the top driest in the world. The country has plenty of clouds, so triggering rainstorms with electrical charges via drones shouldn’t be an issue. Not every cloud will trigger, but seeding “increases the amount of rain by between five and 70 percent,” Daily Mail said. 

    Rain triggered through cloud seeding is much cheaper than desalinated water, where about 42% of the country’s water originates. 

    Cloud seeding via drones has enormous potential and shows water can be tapped from the sky. This technology might be helpful to North and South America, where huge megadroughts impact water supplies and damage crops. 

    The downside to artificial rain in arid climates is that these areas aren’t well-positioned to handle downpours and may result in flash floods. There’s always a caveat when playing with Mother Nature. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 19:20

  • Biden Gaffe Renews Questions About COVID Transparency
    Biden Gaffe Renews Questions About COVID Transparency

    Authored by Philip Wegmann via RealClearPolitics.com,

    President Biden so desperately wants the vaccine-hesitant part of the country to get their shots that he may have spread a little misinformation.

    “You are not going to get COVID,” he promised during a CNN town-event Wednesday night, “if you have these vaccines.”

    Of course, this is not true. Biden knows it. He said as much later during the forum, explaining that, while vaccinated individuals enjoy significant protections, they can still test positive for the virus. But even if that happens, the president pointed out, the vaccine largely mitigates the most serious dangers. “You are not going to be hospitalized,” he said, reciting the latest scientific consensus. “You are not going to be in the IC unit, and you are not going to die.”

    The fact that fully vaccinated individuals can still contract the coronavirus is a medical reality. It has also led to more uncomfortable questions about transparency for the Biden administration.

    White House Press Secretary Jen Psaki revealed at Tuesday’s briefing that there had been previously undisclosed “breakthrough infections” among vaccinated employees at 1600 Pennsylvania Ave. Psaki refused, two days later, to say how many White House officials had gotten sick.

    Reporters pressed her on the issue. After all, as the country learned the hard way during the pandemic, the health of the people working directly for the president can end up influencing the health of the republic. A lot of people have those jobs, more than 2,000 in the White House itself and the adjacent Eisenhower Executive Office Building. According to Psaki, that means “that just statistically speaking, there will be people who are vaccinated individuals who get COVID on the campus.”

    Will the White House make those statistics available as they develop? “No,” Psaki said. “I don’t think you can expect that we’re going to be providing numbers of breakthrough cases.”

    Well, why not? The story of the pandemic has been told through the charts and graphs presented to the public by members of the White House COVID task force. Why should this data be exempt?

    When Kelly O’Donnell of NBC News pressed the White House to explain the lack of transparency, Psaki responded by saying that things are different now:

    “Well, Kelly, I think, one, we’re in a very different place than we were several months ago. The vast, vast, vast majority of individuals who are vaccinated who get COVID will be asymptomatic or have mild cases.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Psaki continued by saying that everyone who clocks in and out at the White House campus “has been offered a vaccine.” But those administration employees, like the rest of the federal workforce, have not been required to roll up their sleeves and take the shot. Face coverings have disappeared all the same at the White House, and aides are expected to follow the rule Biden laid out in May: “Get vaccinated or wear a mask until you do.”

    But since even vaccinated individuals can become infected with the virus, what happens in those cases? “We have been very clear that we will be transparent with anyone who has had close proximity contact with the president or any of the four principles as deemed by the White House medical unit with all of you,” Psaki said.

    And if someone sick with COVID comes into close contact with those principles, the press secretary said that the case itself would be made public but the infected individual would decide whether or not his or her name would be released. She promised, “We will protect their privacy.”

    White House staff were made aware of this policy in a campus-wide email sent recently, and Psaki said Tuesday that the White House was abiding by “an agreement we made during the transition to be transparent and make information available.” They had committed then, she insisted, to releasing “information proactively if it is commissioned officers.”

    The White House did not provide a copy of that commitment to transparency when asked to do so by RealClearPolitics.

    It is a touchy subject. On one hand, the White House would rather not deal with headlines about vaccinated staffers coming down with COVID at the exact moment they are singing the praises of getting vaccinated. On the other, they would rather keep contact tracing apolitical and skip the pandemic parlor game that consumed the press and the previous administration.

    In the time before the vaccine, reporters kept meticulous notes of which Trump staffers were and were not wearing their masks. And after Supreme Court Justice Amy Coney Barrett’s ceremonial nomination in the Rose Garden was dubbed a “super-spreader” by Anthony Fauci, the press scrambled to carry out their own unofficial contact tracing to see who might have been the “patient zero” who infected President Trump, the first lady, and several members of Congress. Biden World would rather skip that drama.

    The risks aren’t as severe now, thanks to the vaccine. Get the shot and, as Biden explained, “you are not going to die.” All the same, even some Biden allies find the lack of transparency frustrating. “I get they’re trying to show strength and resolve, but I hated this secrecy with Trump and I hate it here with Biden too,” said Bradley Moss, a partner at the law firm that represented the whistleblower in Trump’s first impeachment. “Keep the public informed. Secrecy breeds mistrust.”

    So why not just tell the public how many breakthrough cases there have been? Again, as Psaki explained, “we’re in a very different place than we were several months ago.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 19:00

  • Mass Shootings On Course For Record Year As US Transforms Into Violent Mess
    Mass Shootings On Course For Record Year As US Transforms Into Violent Mess

    To date, the number of mass shootings in the U.S. is 21% higher than the same period in 2020 (Jan.1 – July 20), which is 30% higher than the previous high, according to nonprofit research group Gun Violence Archive (GVA). 

    GVA’s data so far shows the U.S. has recorded 375 mass shootings in 41 different states (and Washington D.C.) in the first 200 days of 2021. Putting that in perspective, the country had 310 by this date last year.

    Compared with the last several years, mass shootings are way above trend in 2021. The below chart clearly shows that pandemic lockdowns didn’t reduce the phenomenon whatsoever, and in fact may have contributed to the opposite.

    This year, a combination of defunding the police and relaxation of petty crimes by liberal-run metro areas has transformed the U.S. into a chaotic mess. 

    More than 1,800 people were injured or killed in mass shootings so far in 2021. That’s a higher total than in 2015 or 2018. 

    Rising violent crime positively correlates with surging gun ownership and elevated ammo prices. People are arming themselves as the liberal utopia miserably backfires. 

    Cumulative deaths from mass shootings were more than 370 this year, up 50% over the same period last year. 

    American mass shootings since 2014:

    • 2014: 270
    • 2015: 335
    • 2016: 382
    • 2017: 348
    • 2018: 336
    • 2019: 417
    • 2020: 611
    • 2021: 375 (in 201 days)

    And in case you’re wondering who’s involved with all these mass shootings – Mass-Shootings.info shows those who’ve been charged, convicted, or wanted for violent crimes in connection by year. The site also notes that 53% of mass shootings in 2021 have no known suspect, however as you’ll see their data is different than GVA’s – perhaps because “mass shooting” has several definitions.

    Meanwhile, here’s where the mass shootings are happening, according to the site:

    And in what should be a surprise to absolutely no one, Chicago and the state of Illinois take the cake:

    If the trend continues, 2021 could be set for a record year. 

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 18:40

  • A Gold Medal Question: Should Women's Sports Even Exist?
    A Gold Medal Question: Should Women’s Sports Even Exist?

    Authored by Charles Lipson via RealClearPolitics.com,

    The Tokyo Olympics prompted the latest furor over transgender participation in women’s sports. It came when New Zealand named a transgender woman to its weightlifting team. This athlete’s participation raises questions far beyond this Olympics or that particular sport. The same questions arise whenever a transgender person competes at any level, from high school to world-class. When the winner takes the victory stand, biological women can’t help but wonder if they were treated fairly. Transgender athletes respond, pointedly, that it would be unfair to exclude them.

    “She’s a woman,” they say.

    “This is a woman’s event. So she should compete.”

    The problem with this debate is that it raises other fundamental questions: Should we have women’s sports at all? Why? What is the rationale—and how compelling is it?

    The answers to those questions provide an answer to whether transgender athletes should compete in women’s sporting events.

    A century ago, the answers would have been obvious.

    Men and women were separated for all sorts of reasons—social, cultural, and biological. Mixed competition would have been unthinkable. Today, our norms about gender and sex are substantially different. The default is that men and women should be treated identically. Treating them differently, such as separating them in competition, requires a strong rationale, at least in liberal, Western societies. Separate treatment violates deeply held modern norms, which oppose discrimination because of irrelevant criteria, such as race, sex, gender, religion, and national origin.

    We consider it a national disgrace that black baseball players were excluded from Major League Baseball until Jackie Robinson ran onto the field on April 15, 1947. His race had no bearing on his skill as a ball player. Yet no one today would celebrate Rory McIlroy or Dustin Johnson “integrating” the women’s professional golf tour.

    Why the objections to McIlroy or Johnson on the women’s tour? For the same reason golf courses provide separate tees for women, the same reason the WNBA uses a smaller basketball than their male counterparts, the same reason there are thriving women’s leagues in tennis, soccer, bowling, and dozens more. It is not about the social construction of gender; it is about biological differences that bear directly on performance.

    Biological males and females differ systematically in size, strength, speed, height, lung capacity, and agility. Acknowledging those differences is separate from respecting how any individual self-identifies. Given our widely shared opposition to discrimination, those physical differences are the only reason to permit separate events. If gender differences don’t matter for a particular sport, then the rationale for separate events is weaker than our liberal ideal of non-discrimination.

    We would never permit, much less require, this kind of gender separation in chess tournaments. It would violate our basic norms demanding equal treatment unless there are very powerful reasons to treat people differently. Those reasons and their persuasiveness will differ from sport to sport. They hardly matter for equine events like show jumping and dressage. They probably don’t matter for target shooting. But they do matter for archery. Top male athletes pull their bows with higher “draw weights” than do top females, so they can shoot arrows with flatter trajectories, less affected by crosswinds. The differences matter in golf, too. On the men’s professional tour, the average drive is 295.5 yards. On the women’s tour, even the longest hitter doesn’t drive the ball that far.

    What about competition in the Boston Marathon, where male winners finish 10 to 15 minutes faster than women? That difference is prima facia evidence that we should crown separate winners. A more interesting fact is that Kenyan men and women win the races nearly every year, consistently beating Americans and Europeans. Yet we would rightly consider it invidious racism to segregate marathons by race or national origin. So, why isn’t it invidious sexism to crown separate men and women winners? The answer lies in our common-sense recognition that men and women have major physical differences.

    The Olympics certainly recognizes these consequential differences. In Tokyo, men and women will compete against each other only in equestrian events and one division of sailing.

    This kind of separation may not last forever. Social norms are changing. But, for now, we still hold separate sports competitions for men and women, and we do so solely because of their systematic physical differences. If that is the only compelling rationale for separating sports by gender, then it should be the only rationale in determining transgender participation.

    The best way to resolve this issue is to step back and ask yourself: Is there any compelling reason to hold separate competition for men and women in this particular sport? The answer might be different for golf, shot put, target shooting, or dressage. If the answer is “Yes, there are strong reasons in this particular sport,” then that same rationale answers the question, “Should transgender women compete against other women in this sport?”

    Put simply, if there are good reasons for holding separate competitions at all, then transgender women should not compete against other women.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 18:20

  • "We're In Fantasyland" – Soaring Used-Car Prices Allow Sellers To Take In More Than They Paid
    “We’re In Fantasyland” – Soaring Used-Car Prices Allow Sellers To Take In More Than They Paid

    The latest Labor Department report on consumer prices shocked economists when they saw how prices for used vehicles soared 10.5% in Jue, following already-robust increases of 7.3% in May and 10% in April. As the economy overheats and global shortages of computer chips crimps new-car production, an extremely rare phenomenon has turned the auto world upside down.

    For the first time in recent memory, prices on used cars are “defying gravity,” according to WSJ.

    Once seen as the ultmate depreciating asset, some car owners are being offered even more money than they originally paid for their vehicles, especially for certain popular models like the Kia Telluride and the Toyota Tundra. The problem is that consumer demand for cars and trucks has surged (thanks in part to all the federal stimulus dollars sloshing around in Americans’ bank accounts).

    To be sure, for most models, used vehicles can still be had at a lower price than the newer cars. But if things don’t change soon, most in-demand used models will see their prices remain elevated for a long time.

    “We have a long way to go before prices come down,” said Tyson Jominy, an auto analyst with research firm JD Power.

    But according to data from JD Power, the average price paid by a customer in June for a one-year-old vehicle was only $80 less than the selling price of a brand-new vehicle. Typically, the gap is closer to $5,000.

    The impact of this shift can already be seen in dealerships’ marketing materials. Dealers typically run ads advertising prices on cars they’re hoping to sell. Now, they’re telling customers how much their cars are worth.

    Some dealerships are even offering “drive-through appraisals.”

    “It just seems like we’re in fantasyland,” said New England auto dealer Abel Toll.

    And for low-mileage vehicles, offers equivalent to what customers initially paid aren’t uncommon.

    Amid this used-car gold rush, some dealership owners say they’re worried customers who buy now will end up being dissatisfied with the high prices when their vehicles depreciate more rapidly in the years to come.

    But some are milking it for all it’s worth. One small-business owner traded in his entire fleet of trucks and decided to use the premium to finance upgrades to more “high content” models. “I can’t imagine this will last for much longer, so I decided to go all in.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 18:00

  • Biden's Anti-Gun ATF Pick David Chipman Will Undermine Industry Cooperation
    Biden’s Anti-Gun ATF Pick David Chipman Will Undermine Industry Cooperation

    Authored by Emily Miller via Emily Posts (emphasis ours),

    Click here for my most recent article on Biden’s push for Senate Democrats to vote for David Chipman. Then click here for a refresher on what happened during Chipman’s committee hearing (confiscating AR-15s was the highlight!)

    Chipman and Gabby Giffords (from a video paid for by Giffords)

    Pres. Joe Biden will not withdraw his nominee to run ATF, despite all the Senate Republicans opposing David Chipman. Biden is banking on holding all Democrats and having Vice President Kamala Harris be the deciding vote. The firearms industry is prepared for the worst case scenario. 

    If Chipman is the head of ATF, members of the industry will be far less likely to work cooperatively with the bureau,” Larry Keane, who is the top lobbyist in DC for the firearms industry, told me in an interview

    Chipman is the Senior Policy Advisor at Giffords Courage to Fight Gun Violence, which was founded by Gabby Giffords and Sen. Mark Kelly (D-AZ). He’s also a member of the advisory board for Mike Bloomberg’s Everytown for Gun Safety. And Biden somehow thinks this appointment to be director of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms etc. (ATF) is going to work in reality. Uncle Joe is so wrong. 

    When ATF has a zero-tolerance mentality and the place is run by a gun-control lobbyist, retailers are going to think twice before calling ATF to seek guidance or admit a paperwork mistake. Major manufacturers will be less willing to help ATF to train agents and inspectors,” said Keane. 

    Keane is the Senior Vice President for Government and Public Affairs and General Counsel of the National Shooting Sports (NSSF), which is the firearm industry trade association. The NSSF has taken the lead in DC in trying to stop the Chipman appointment. (If you have my book, look up Keane in the index. He has taught me a lot about the industry through the years.)

    I didn’t know what Larry was referencing about the manufacturers cooperating with ATF. He explained that NSSF regularly arranges to have new ATF agents and inspectors tour factories. 

    You have these people showing up in the front office of ATF who have the faintest idea how guns are made. How can you regulate an industry you know nothing about? So you offer close up tours to teach the newbies about gun parts and all that stuff so they can learn,“ Keane said. “Our major manufacturers aren’t required to do this. They do it because they are good corporate citizens. But with Chipman, that’s not going to happen anymore.”

    Senate Whip Count:

    Since the Judiciary Committee voted — without Chipman’s ATF personnel files — two more Republicans said they won’t vote in favor: Sens. Mike Braun (R-IN) and Pat Toomey (R-PA), who is usually squishy on guns. Sen. Lisa Murkowski (R-AK) has not said publicly how she would vote but Republican leaders are confident she will be a nay to hold the 50 total.  

    The deciding votes are all moderate Democrats in pro-gun states:  Manchin (WVA), King (ME), Tester (MT), Shaheen (NH) and Sinema (AZ). They will have to decide if they vote on behalf of  their state’s Second Amendment advocates or with their president’s nomination. They are being lobbied hard. 

    “They are putting an enormous amount of pressure on these senators,” said Keane, who is tracking all the votes. “This could all end if one of the undecided Dems says ‘no.’ But they won’t do that out of deference to the president.”

    Read the rest of the report here.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 17:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 23rd July 2021

  • Volkswagen CEO Says EV Margin Parity With ICE Vehicles Will Be Reached In "2 To 3 Years"
    Volkswagen CEO Says EV Margin Parity With ICE Vehicles Will Be Reached In “2 To 3 Years”

    Ever since the forced adoption of EVs by governments worldwide, all eyes have been on when the electric vehicles would finally make economic sense to produce.

    According to Volkswagen, that milestone is still years away, but is moving closer. CEO Herbert Diess said at the company’s annual general meeting this week that its EVs would see margins at the same level of combustion cars “in two to three years”. 

    The company also disclosed that its shift to EVs continues on schedule, as it delivered 170,939 all electric vehicles in the first half of the year. This number is twice as many vehicles as the company delivered last year, according to Bloomberg. 

    Diess also stressed that electric mobility is seen as the “only way” to significantly reduce CO2 emissions in road traffic over the next 10 years.

    And the company is now also incentivizing its board and executives for its “green” initiatives: Volkswagen adopted a new management board remuneration system that “includes ESG targets”, Bloomberg commented. 

    Recall, back in March of this year, Volkswagen made its intentions of becoming a key player in EVs known, aspiring to compete with companies like Tesla. 

    At the time, the company laid out plans for expanding its EV offerings through 2030, which included dethroning Tesla as the reigning EV world champ. VW hosted its “Power Day” in Q1 and revealed plans to build six “gigafactories” with a total capacity of 240 gigawatt hours per year. 

    “The company is aiming to achieve an operating margin between 7% and 8% after 2021. VOW also confirmed it is looking to finish the year at the upper and of a 5% – 6.5% range in 2021. Higher profitability will be achieved through lower costs with as much as 2 billion euros savings identified for 2023 compared to 2020,” the company said in Q1, according to StreetInsider

    Chief Executive Herbert Diess said on CNBC at the time: “This period is probably the most crucial for the whole industry. Within the next 15 years we will see a total turnover of the industry. Electric cars are taking the lead and then software really becomes the core driver of the industry.”

    “Electric cars already today are very, very competitive and they’re becoming more competitive over time. that gives us the certainty that this is the right way going forward. Electric cars actually will bring down the cost of individual mobility further,” he continued.

    VW also disclosed at the time that it was working on a “new unified battery cell” to be launched in 2023. Diess said: “The one size fits almost all cell design will radically reduce battery costs … by up to 50% compared to today. Lower prices for batteries means more affordable cars, which makes electric vehicles more attractive for customers.”

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 02:45

  • List Of UK Venues That Could Mandate "Vaccine Passports" Already Expanding
    List Of UK Venues That Could Mandate “Vaccine Passports” Already Expanding

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    The list of attractions that could be forced to mandate vaccine passports as a condition of entry is already growing, with minister Nadhim Zahawi listing other “crowded venues” that may have to ban the unvaccinated.

    On Monday, Prime Minister Boris Johnson made a mockery of ‘freedom day’ – when all coronavirus restrictions were supposed to be lifted – by announcing that nightclubs would be made to check for vaccine status on the door.

    Despite widespread backlash to the idea and the potential for a defeat when it comes to a vote in Parliament, vaccines minister Nadhim Zahawi indicated today that the program could be extended further.

    During a speech to the Commons, Zahawi said sporting and business events, churches, music venues and festivals would also be subject to the rules, which are expected to come into force at the end of September.

    “We reserve the right to mandate its use in the future,” he said.

    Zahawi also asked venues to make providing evidence of taking the jab or a negative test a condition of entry before September despite the fact that it’s not the law.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Although we don’t encourage its use in essential settings like supermarkets, other businesses and organisations in England can adopt the pass as a means of entry where it is suitable for their venue or premises when they can see its potential to keep their clients or their customers safe,” he said.

    As we previously highlighted, some nightclub owners are already saying they will refuse to follow the law because the system will be unworkable and wipe out profit margins.

    It remains to be seen whether the entire issue is just a PR stunt to bully younger people into taking the vaccine or whether it will actually be implemented.

    The government previously assured the public that vaccine passports would not be introduced for domestic purposes, even going so far as to label the practice “discriminatory.”

    Despite widespread unruly protests in France forcing President Macron to walk back part of a similar plan, a vaccine passport will still be required to access a multitude of venues, including bars, cafes and public transport.

    *  *  *

    Brand new merch now available! Get it at https://www.pjwshop.com/

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here.Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Get early access, exclusive content and behinds the scenes stuff by following me on Locals.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 02:00

  • Transhumanism: Immortality, Anyone?
    Transhumanism: Immortality, Anyone?

    Authored by Aden Tate via The Organic prepper blog,

    You’ve likely heard a word tossed about in the narrative of late that has you somewhat dumbfounded: transhumanism.

    What on earth does that mean?

    What is Transhumanism? 

    While the term has been around for decades, it’s always been a fringe aspect of the scientific community. And by fringe, I mean fringe of the fringe. Nobody knew what transhumanism was. However, now the movement is growing like never before, and the well-informed American needs to know what it encompasses. 

    The end goal of transhumanism: defeat suffering, pain, disease, inequality, and death through biotechnological implants.

    Do you remember the Borg from Star Trek? While perhaps not as grotesque, transhumanism seeks a similar path to reach its end goal. In some cases, you can see aspects of transhumanism in today’s culture. Ever seen anybody with a prosthetic leg? Transhumanists would claim them as one of their own.

    But that only scratches the surface of the situation. A true transhumanist wants to see things go much further. Brain implants, neural links to the internet, and much more are all part of their ultimate goals.

    And what is the ultimate goal?

    Posthumanism.

    The Difference Between Posthumanism and Transhumanism

    It’s important to note that there is a difference between transhumanism and Posthumanism. Yet, just as socialism is the stepping-stone to communism, one is the stepping-stone to the other.

    • Transhumanism seeks to use technological implants to improve the human condition.

    • Posthumanism aims to eradicate humanity as we know it altogether.

    Within the realm of Posthumanism, the ultimate end goal is the death of death – to become immortal. And for that to happen, you have to become a machine. Such is the end goal of Posthumanism.

    What Are the Aspects to Usher in a Transhumanist World?

    There are several talking points transhumanists will reference when discussing how to reach their end goals. Chief of these are:

    • Nanotechnology – If you’ve ever seen Johnny Depp’s Transcendence and witnessed how nanotechnology was used in medicine there to make the sick well, the injured whole, and the weak strong, this is precisely what they are talking about.

    According to transhumanists, using nanotech to become stronger, smarter, and teleport are all potential uses for such science.

    • Molecular assemblers – This is the creation of living material or lifeforms. 3D bioprinting could somewhat be an aspect of this. If you have a burn victim who needs a skin graft but whose burns are so complete that he doesn’t have any locations to harvest from, then 3D bioprinting could print the skin graft for him.

    Designer babies would probably fall under this umbrella as well. Imagine the notion of showing up to a fertility clinic and choosing the traits you want your child to have (boy, blue eyes, athletic, intelligent, etc.) and then having a scientist compile those genetic traits together for you into an embryo. According to transhumanists, the end goal is a healthier child that meets your expectations and wishes.

    • Epigenetics – This is the act of changing genes. While this is already possible (and happens) by the lifestyle you live, transhumanists want to take things a step further. They actively want to change your DNA to improve your disease resistance, to make you stronger, smarter, and so on. If you’ve seen Iron Man 3 with the fire people, it’s pretty much the same concept.
    • Artificial Intelligence (AI) – Regularly touted as a means for improving our knowledge base, AI is argued as being the perfect scientist, and thus, the ideal means of further improving our condition. Done via the generation of a ‘superintelligence,’ a self-conscious AI connects to the internet. The AI quickly gains more knowledge than all of humanity combined, throughout all of history. This type of knowledge would mean we’d get sooner access to improvements in surgery, medicine, fuel, and the like.
    • Uploads – This is a concept considerably pushed by Ray Kurzweil, likely the most famous transhumanist around. It’s the point at which mankind melds with machines, entering a virtual world.

    What’s the Background Story Here? 

    To my knowledge, the earliest notions of transhumanism can be found in a 1929 article by JD Bernal titled The World, The Flesh, and The Devil.  Bionic implants, cognitive enhancement, and space colonization were all discussed here. While there are arguments made for transhumanism being a thought process even further back, I think this paper is the most modern example.

    However, the first self-described transhumanists didn’t meet until the early 1980s in Los Angeles at the University of California. The movement continued to spread as Nick Bostrom founded the World Transhumanist Association in 1998 (now Humanity+).

    Milestones were made for the movement. Among those were: 

    • Kevin Warwick has a 100-electrode array implanted into the nerves of his left arm in 2002 that directly linked his nervous system to the internet. 

    • Artist Neil Harbisson had a curved antenna implanted into his brain, allowing him to see infrared and ultraviolet colors.

    • The Journal of Posthuman Studies was started in 2017 by Penn State Press. 

    As you can see, transhumanist thought has been around for quite some time. As time goes on, it will become more frequently and openly discussed. You can check out Steve Quayle’s book on the subject for more information.

    Are There Moral Conundrums With Transhumanism? 

    Just as with anything, there will be pros and cons, and transhumanism is no exception here.

    What are your thoughts on:

    • George Washington having wooden teeth?

    • What about a little girl getting a cochlear implant?

    • Are you ok with a little boy getting a prosthetic leg after a freak accident leaves him missing his original?

    • What are your thoughts on braces?

    All of these situations had a problem solved by an implant/addition created by current technology. It’s hard to have a problem with such.

    But do transhumanists take things a step further? I believe they do.

    How Far Are Transhumanists Willing to Go?

    Uploads: Remember, this is the melding of man with machine. Ray Kurzweil points out in his book The Singularity is Near, this is when your consciousness is uploaded to a cloud. Uploads enable a person to theoretically teleport and manifest anywhere on earth. These capabilities are made possible by an ever-present cloud of nanobots that reassemble the person.

    Can the soul be transferred out of your body to a machine, though? Nope. To me, that is mass murder/suicide. A simulation may predict how you would react in every situation. However, it wouldn’t be the real you. The real you would have died at the moment of upload.

    Nanotechnology | Epigenetics: If ever-present nanotechnology is a goal, what about those who don’t consent to such. Is this not akin to a sheddable vaccine? Is it not a violation of informed consent? If I don’t want nanotechnology interacting with my body, what right does anyone have to force me to do so?

    Molecular Assemblers: What could be the cost of tinkering with genetic material? What if problems arise we can’t undo? Could we very easily end up with a Will Smith I Am Legend type scenario? Or, humans being genetically engineered to be tiny dolls, super polite waitresses, or other one-shot entities like those in Cloud Atlas?

    Artificial Intelligence: How much of your autonomy are you willing to give up to a machine? Eventually, one should ask, “How much government control should we hand over to artificial intelligence?”

    Are There Dangers to Transhumanism? 

    Aside from the moral qualms, there are some veritable dangers to transhumanist philosophy as well.

    The Singularity: As pointed out above, this would be mass suicide/murder. In a world where climate change is a chief concern, though, it could be argued the more uploads we have, the more negligible effect we’ll have as a whole on the planet. Could mandatory uploads result? This point is most certainly very remote and far out. However, if transhumanists are going to raise it, we should think of some response aforehand, should we not?

    Nanotechnology: Both Michael Crichton and Nick Bostrom have pointed out the dangers of self-replicating nanotechnology – something many transhumanists favor. How do you get self-replicating nanotechnology to stop? Does it reproduce indefinitely, becoming a new problem? Could nanotechnology be hacked? What’s to stop somebody from using your body’s nanobot to drill a hole through your heart, eat your pancreas, or cause a blood clot? What if you were given nanotechnology with capabilities you weren’t entirely made aware of?

    Epigenetics: DNA is notoriously complex. While one may believe they’ve created a solution, what if they’ve made a bad genetic trait that’s not revealed till 30 years down the road? Puberty is genetic, striking 13 years or so after birth. Baldness is genetic, striking decades after birth. Who’s to say they won’t create something more severe like psychosis that spontaneously demonstrates at the age of 25?

    We literally have no idea. Why? Because it’s never been done before? What if the bad trait created becomes inherited? Perhaps it’s that somebody’s arm rots off when they turn 38. We end up with a whole generation of kids who are bound to suffer the same fate. Once more, while that’s an extreme example, it gets us to think about the host of potential possibilities that need to be considered before engaging in such an action.

    What is the Future of Transhumanism? 

    According to Klaus Schwab“The Fourth Industrial Revolution will lead to a fusion of our physical, digital, and biological identity.” 

    Istvan’s Coffin Shaped Immortality Bus

    Some wonder if this is verification the Great Reset is foundationally driven towards transhumanism. We’ve most certainly seen it’s a growing movement. In 2016, noted transhumanist Zoltan Istvan actually ran for US president.

    So where are we going to turn next? It’s hard to say. I believe that nanotechnology will be one of the prime movers in the near future. However, I do know this: transhumanism is here to stay, and it is only going to gain even more momentum within the next few years.

    It pays to stay well-informed on what is happening here. This movement is going to impact your life.

    Tyler Durden
    Fri, 07/23/2021 – 00:00

  • Taliban Boasts Control Over 90% Of Afghan Border Areas
    Taliban Boasts Control Over 90% Of Afghan Border Areas

    The Taliban told Russian media on Friday that it now controls approximately 90% of Afghanistan’s border with neighboring countries as its fight for control against US-trained Afghan national forces continues. 

    Taliban spokesman Zabiullah Mujahid made the claim to Sputnik, saying “The borders of Afghanistan with Tajikistan, Uzbekistan, Turkmenistan, Iran — about 90% of the borders are under our control … The border with Turkmenistan and the border with Iran are completely under our control. The borders of Pakistan (with the exception of a few small sections) are also under our control.”

    Map source: Alcis Geographic Information Services

    There’s at least some degree of confirmation that the sweeping claim is partially true, given recent videos to come out of the Pakistani border region alongside Reuters reporting that some major crossings have been seized by the Islamist group.

    Earlier this month an alarmed Tajikistan government called up 20,000 reserve forces to protect the border from the advancing Taliban, and this week US Joint Chiefs chairman Gen. Mark Milley admitted the Taliban now has “strategic momentum” as the Pentagon enters its final days of the total troop draw down before Biden’s August 31 “complete” departure deadline. 

    The top general estimated the Taliban now controls 50% of the geographic country, though this doesn’t necessarily represent the dense population centers. The Taliban in contrast has said this month it possesses 85% of territory.

    The Daily Mail summarizes of Milley’s Wednesday comments at the Pentagon:

    Milley said the Taliban now held 212 or 213 of the country’s 419 district centers – last month the number was 81.

    ‘A significant amount of territory has been seized over the course of six, eight, 10 months by the Taliban, so momentum appears to be – strategic momentum appears to be – with the Taliban,’ he said.

    He added that the Taliban strategy appeared to be to isolate population centers, such as Kabul.

    So the Taliban strategy is likely to keep methodically advancing around major urban centers, waiting for the moment to strike big cities like Kabul after the final and full American troop departure.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The US is however keeping a large security force of 650 or more to protect its sprawling embassy complex in Kabul, but it’s still being debated the degree to which the US would respond in a ‘counter-terror’ capacity once the official mission and occupation is deemed over (ultimately Biden’s symbolic final deadline is Sept.11).

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 23:40

  • Victor Davis Hanson: These Aren't The Democrats Of Old
    Victor Davis Hanson: These Aren’t The Democrats Of Old

    Authored by Victor Davis Hanson via  AmGreatness.com,

    In the old days, Democrats had predictable agendas, supposedly focused on individual rights, the “little guy,” and distrust of the military-industrial-intelligence complex. 

    The Left, often on spec, blasted the wealthy, whether the “lucre” was self-made or inherited. The old-money rich were lampooned as idle drones. 

    If the rich were self-made, they were deemed sell-outs. A good example was ’70s pop icon Jackson Brown’s “The Pretender,” whose lyrics railed about “happy idiots” who “struggled for the legal tender.”

    Democrats talked nonstop about the “working man.” They damned high gas and electricity prices that hurt “consumers.”

    Almost every liberal cause was couched in terms of “The First Amendment”—whether it was the right of shouting obscenities, viewing pornography, or bringing controversial speakers to campus. 

    The Supreme Court was sacred. Thanks to the holy, liberally packed court led by Chief Justice Earl Warren, enlightened, progressive justices supposedly restrained the harebrained ballot initiatives of hick right-wing populists.

    Once upon a time, leftist congressional officials investigated the CIA and FBI nonstop. 

    Progressive political cartoonists cruelly caricatured the Pentagon’s top brass as obese, buffoonish looking clerks with monstrous jowls. Even their uniforms were mocked as festooned with ostentatious gold braids, shiny medals, and ridiculous peaked hats, smothered in gold and silver insignia. 

    The “revolving door” was a particular leftist obsession. Democrats blasted generals who retired into defense contractor boards and got rich.

    For the Left, elite professional sports were the opiates of the middle classes. Wannabe jocks supposedly wasted hours in front of the TV watching grown men toss around little balls. 

    Unions were sacred.

    So United Farm Worker kingpins like Cesar Chavez headed to the border to physically assault any would-be illegal alien “scabs.” 

    Politicians like Senator Chuck Schumer (D-N.Y.) and Bill and Hillary Clinton railed against illegal immigrant “cheap labor” that “drove down” American wages.

    That was then; this is now. 

    Liberals soon became rich progressives who transmogrified into really rich hardcore leftists.

    Suddenly not just millionaires, but multibillionaires such as Mark Zuckerberg, Bill Gates, Jay-Z, Oprah Winfrey, and a host of other celebrities and CEOs were cool and hip. 

    Deified Silicon Valley monopolists ensured the leftist candidates were usually better funded than were conservatives. “Dirty money” disappeared from leftist invective. 

    The Fortune 400 became mostly a list of billionaires who did not make their money in the old way of manufacturing, assembly, construction, farming, transportation, or oil and gas production. 

    The Left got drunk on the idea that they now had their hands on the money and influence in America. So they systematically began targeting institutions. And they leveraged them not from the noisy street with empty protests, but from within. 

    Suddenly the once revered Supreme Court, with a majority of conservative justices, became an “obstacle” to “democracy,” and had to be packed or restructured. 

    The First Amendment was redefined as a bothersome speed bump that slowed “progress.” It needlessly protected noisy conservatives and their backward values. 

    In contrast, the CIA, FBI, and Pentagon were suddenly OK—if staffed with the right people. 

    Their clandestine power, their chain-of-command exemption from messy legislative give-and-take, and their reliance on surveillance, were now pluses once in the correct hands. 

    These institutions now became allies, not enemies, and so their powers were augmented and unchecked.

    Sports were cool, given they offered a huge platform for social justice players to damn the very system that had enriched them. 

    The higher gas and electricity prices, the better to shock the clueless bourgeoisie that their club cab trucks and home air conditioners were anti-green and on the way out. 

    The union shop was written off as a has-been enclave of old white dinosaurs, an ossified, shrinking base of the Democratic Party. Its new hard-Left successor party wanted a bigger, better Democratic demographic—if illegal, indigent, and non-diverse immigrants, all the better.  

     

    The media glitterati were no longer to be mocked as empty suits and pompadour fools, but useful Ministry of Truth foot-soldiers in the revolution. 

    So what happened to turn the party of Harry Truman, JFK, and even Bill Clinton into a woke neo-Maoist movement? 

    Globalization created a new $8 billion consumer market for American media, universities, law firms, insurance groups, investment houses, sports and entertainment, and the Internet, social media, and online gadgetry. 

    In contrast, work with arms and hands was passé, the supposed stuff of meth heads, deplorables and clingers—and so better outsourced and offshored. 

    Traditional Democrats were seen increasingly as namby-pamby naïfs, who rotated power with establishment Republicans. 

    Now with money, institutions in their hip pocket, and cool popular culture, the Left would not just damn American institutions, but infect them: alter their DNA, and reengineer them into revolutionary agencies. 

    So here we are with a near one-party system of a weaponized fused media, popular culture, and the administrative state—confident that all Americans will soon agree to love Big Sibling. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 23:20

  • "Hundreds Of Thousands Have Disappeared" – Inside China's Largest Detention Center
    “Hundreds Of Thousands Have Disappeared” – Inside China’s Largest Detention Center

    President Biden is ramping up pressure on Beijing over its alleged human rights abuses in Xinjiang, which include – according to human rights groups – warehousing the Uygher Muslims who populate the far-western region in prisons that double as reeducation centers. The CCP says the Uyghers are receiving job training under the generous supervision of the state.

    But while that excuse might fly in China’s state-controlled press, thanks in part to President Trump, the US no longer has illusions. Even President Biden has been forced to burnish his tough-on-China credentials by following through on his threats.

    His latest round of Hong-Kong-related sanctions and the international condemnation over Beijing’s alleged role in organizing massive cyberattacks including the infiltration of Microsoft Exchange has greatly irritated Beijing. The fact that they rug-pulled the Didi IPO shows how serious China is about weening its economy off of American capital and markets (while simultaneously propping up its own markets).

    As Biden pushes ahead with the crackdown (much to the chagrin of those intelligence assets who partnered with Hunter Biden in that thinly -veiled influence-peddling operation) Beijing is apparently trying to convince the American public that claims of human rights abuses are overblown. 

    For that reason, it appears, the Chinese authorities granted reporters from the Associated Press a guided tour of Urumqi No. 3 Detention Center, one of the biggest detention centers in the country. It’s located in Dabancheng, a city in Xinjiang.

    According to the AP, the Detention Center is one of the largest in China, and possibly one of the largest in the world. It can hold an estimated 10K people, and many more if they are crowded in (like in American prisons). The compound itself is spread across 220 acres. The AP is the first western media outlet to be allowed inside (although the BBC and Reuters have reported from outside the facility).

    That China allowed the western journalists in suggests Beijing was trying to send a message: that it isn’t trying to hide the program, and expects t continue locking up and “reeducating” Uyghers (and, presumably, any other troublesome minorities) for as long as it takes.

    China insists the campaign of imprisoning and terrorizing more than 1MM Uyghers over the past 4 years is a “war against terror”.  The campaign was preceded by a series of attacks organized by radical Uygher separatists. The prisons, which, according to China, double as “vocational training centers” soon followed. Beijing has made some changes after being confronted with international condemnation. Many Uyghers have been released over the past year. But many others have simply been moved to prisons.

    China at first denied their existence, and then, under heavy international criticism, said in 2019 that all the occupants had “graduated.” But the AP’s visit to Dabancheng, satellite imagery and interviews with experts and former detainees suggest that while many “training centers” were indeed closed, some like this one were simply converted into prisons or pre-trial detention facilities. Many new facilities have also been built, including a new 85-acre detention center down the road from No. 3 in Dabancheng that went up over 2019, satellite imagery shows.

    The changes seem to be an attempt to move from the makeshift and extrajudicial “training centers” into a more permanent system of prisons and pre-trial detention facilities justified under the law. While some Uyghurs have been released, others have simply been moved into this prison network.

    Many Uyghers have been imprisoned for the crime of attending a religious gathering, or traveling abroad.

    “We’re moving from a police state to a mass incarceration state. Hundreds of thousands of people have disappeared from the population,” Byler said. “It’s the criminalization of normal behavior.”

    During the April tour of No. 3 in Dabancheng, officials repeatedly distanced it from the “training centers” that Beijing claims to have closed.

    “There was no connection between our detention center and the training centers,” insisted Urumqi Public Security Bureau director Zhao Zhongwei. “There’s never been one around here.”

    One of the reporters’ Chinese minders offered a telling comment.

    They also said the No. 3 center was proof of China’s commitment to rehabilitation and the rule of law, with inmates provided hot meals, exercise, access to legal counsel and televised classes lecturing them on their crimes. Rights are protected, officials say, and only lawbreakers need worry about detention.

    “See, the BBC report said this was a re-education camp. It’s not – it’s a detention center,” said Liu Chang, an official with the foreign ministry.

    However, a local contractor shared a dramatically different story with the AP.

    Records also show that Chinese conglomerate Hengfeng Information Technology won an $11 million contract for outfitting the Urumqi “training center”. A man who answered a number for Hengfeng confirmed the company had taken part in the construction of the “training center,” but Hengfeng did not respond to further requests for comment.

    A former construction contractor who visited the Dabancheng facility in 2018 told the AP that it was the same as the “Urumqi Vocational Skills Education and Training Center,” and had been converted to a detention facility in 2019, with the nameplate switched. He declined to be named for fear of retaliation against his family.

    “All the former students inside became prisoners,” he said.

    We can’t help but point out that the description of the site doesn’t sound like any school we have ever seen: it’s surrounded by a concrete wall with watchtowers, and electric wire. In one corner of the compound, the journalists could see masked inmates sitting in rigid formation. When the “students” consult with their lawyers in special rooms, they are strapped to their seats.

    The AP reported on documents showing some detainees were arrested for sharing religious texts, or even just downloading a file-sharing application to their phones – or simply just for being deemed an “untrustworthy person.”

    All in the name of fighting terrorism.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 23:00

  • Critics Pan Newsom's New Retail Crime Bill
    Critics Pan Newsom’s New Retail Crime Bill

    Authored by Drew van Voorhis via The Epoch Times,

    A newly approved California bill seeking to reduce the spread of retail theft is being slammed by critics, with some accusing Gov. Gavin Newsom of enabling crime.

    “In Los Angeles County alone homicide rates are up 95 percent this year,” said Rescue California campaign manager Anne Dunsmore in a July 21 statement.

    “He has dismantled the criminal justice system and blames local jurisdictions while rendering them helpless in the fight against crime. He says he is an advocate for public safety, but his policies are literally killing innocent people. He blames it on gun laws, yet California has the most restrictive laws in the nation. Los Angeles alone has experienced a 111.9 percent increase in criminal homicide over last year, yet he says that California is the best place to live and do business.”

    Her comments were in response to a bill Newsom signed July 21 that seeks to reduce the spread of retail crime.

    Prior to signing the bill, the governor held a press conference to discuss the bill with more than a dozen mayors and police chiefs of the state’s largest cities.

    “We’re here … to highlight the issues that our retail community is facing,” Newsom told reporters July 21.

    “This is not new to the state of California. … We’ve been organized in a very deliberative manner to address the issue of organized retail crime for a number of years. That said, we are doubling down on those efforts today with this bill.”

    The governor said the rise in crime is not always due to individuals looking to steal, but rather organized crime rings.

    “We’ve all seen the images of people rushing in [to retails stores to steal]. … You’re seeing them all across the state of California,” Newsom said.

    “We want to go after those rings, we want to go after those well-organized teams of folks that are connected, not just within communities but all across the state of California.

    Assembly Bill 331 will expand the California Highway Patrol’s (CHP) retail crime task force to focus on geographical areas of high retail crime, including the Bay Area, San Diego, and the Inland Empire. Under the bill, a CHP tip line will be established for the public to report retail crimes.

    Newsom said that “millions of dollars” were put into the state budget in anticipation of the successful passing of the legislation.

    Critics of Newsom and proponents of his impending September recall election say he has done far more to allow for the continuance of crime through lack of consequences for offenders than he has done to stop it.

    Former Los Angeles County District Attorney Steve Cooley said that the introduction of Prop 47—which allows thieves to steal $950 worth without being arrested—is the cause of the spike in retail crime.

    “This cliché-ridden press conference did nothing to address the theft crisis, organized or otherwise, plaguing California,” Cooley said in a statement following Newsom’s press conference.

     “Newsom and his DA appointee George Gascon, and their ‘baby,’ Prop 47, are at the very root of California’s crime problems including theft. Quite frankly, the whole thing was pathetic from beginning to end and an insult to all crime victims and law-abiding Californians.”

    CHP Commissioner Amanda Ray said the reduction in illicit proceeds garnered from retail crimes will help stop the funding of other illegal activities.

    “I’m extremely proud of the collaborative efforts of the task force members, the Department of Justice, and our local law enforcement partners,” Ray said during the July 21 press conference. “Organized crime retail theft has become a $30 billion criminal industry that often uses the illicit proceeds that they get from that to fund other crimes. Some of the other crimes that those monies are used for are vehicle theft, identity theft, human trafficking, and narcotics trafficking.”

    The retail crime task force already in place, which started in November 2019, had assisted law enforcement with 668 investigations, 252 arrests, and $16.3 million in recovered stolen merchandise, Ray said.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 22:40

  • "Sabotage, Disrupt, Delay": Mossad Reportedly Planning Expanded Strikes On Iran's Nuclear Facilities
    “Sabotage, Disrupt, Delay”: Mossad Reportedly Planning Expanded Strikes On Iran’s Nuclear Facilities

    The New York-based Algemeiner newspaper, a Jewish publication focused on American and Israel-related news, has issued a detailed report unveiling Israeli intelligence contingency plans to ramp up sabotage efforts against Iran’s nuclear facilities at a moment Vienna negotiations remain stalled into August.

    The publication cites Hebrew media sources to say “the IDF and the Mossad have emphasized to Prime Minister Naftali Bennett and the government generally that while it is necessary to prepare for the possibility of an Israeli air strike on Iran’s nuclear infrastructure, such an approach would be greatly complicated by a renewed nuclear deal.”

    Spate of mystery explosions have rocked Iran over much of past year, via Washington Post.

    This strongly suggests that Tel Aviv sees the window as closing on efforts to derail Iranian nuclear production capabilities, should Tehran and Washington inch closer to a restored JCPOA after Iranian president-elect Ebrahim Raisi takes office August 3rd. Iran, however, has maintained all along that its nuclear development is solely for peaceful domestic energy purposes.

    In the scenario of a future ‘done deal’ being reported out of Vienna amid the upcoming 7th round of talks, Israeli officials have expressed that any aerial bombing campaign would become too politically problematic – and could further risk a wider war, hence the need for smaller “surgical” operations.

    The report provides the following details on plans to expand the IDF and Mossad’s counter-Iran capabilities

    Given all this, the IDF and the Mossad stressed that Israel should develop multiple operational plans, which could be put into operation whether the US signs a new deal with Iran or not.

    The goal of such operations would not be to destroy Iran’s nuclear program in a single blow, but to sabotage, disrupt, and delay the program indefinitely through surgical strikes and intelligence operations.

    This would be in keeping with current policy, which has seen major accidents, sabotage, and assassinations related to Iran’s nuclear program, most of which are believed to be the result of Israeli intelligence activity.

    Such covert espionage campaigns would begin with greater black budget funding, according to the Israeli sources cited in the report. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    More details are as follows:

    IDF sources said that further operations are already in the planning stages, saying, “There are big plans and small plans.”

    The purpose of the operations is not solely military, but also to “humiliate the Iranians” and harm their morale, giving them the feeling that they are under siege by Israeli operations they are powerless to stop.

    Last summer especially saw major sabotage operations disrupt key infrastructure across Iran, which was widely blamed on Israeli intelligence, as well as more recent cyberattacks on the Natanz nuclear facility which caused fires and possibly explosions. Fires at oil facilities and factories have also been on the rise in recent months, making it hard to know what’s an ‘accident’ and what’s not.

    For example, in the month of June…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    There was also last November’s almost unbelievable Hollywood-style assassination of the Islamic Republic’s top nuclear scientist, which involved a one-ton remote automated gun – which Israeli officials and sources appeared to openly boast about. If this latest stunning report out of Algemeiner is accurate, there’s likely a lot more Israeli ‘dirty tricks’ inside Iran to come in the next weeks and months.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 22:20

  • Republican Hawks Want To Increase Biden’s 2022 Military Budget By $25 Billion
    Republican Hawks Want To Increase Biden’s 2022 Military Budget By $25 Billion

    Authored by Dave DeCamp Via AntiWar.com,

    The Senate Armed Services Committee is debating military spending for 2022 this week, and some lawmakers want to massively increase the budget that President Biden has requested.

    For the 2022 fiscal year, Biden requested about $753 billion for national security spending, including about $715 billion that will be the base budget for the Pentagon. According to a report from Military Times, one amendment being pushed by Republicans on the committee would increase the Defense Department’s budget by a whopping $25 billion.

    Image via Foreign Policy

    Sen. Jim Inhofe (R-OK), the ranking member of the committee, said he believes the $25 billion increase might have bipartisan support. “I feel very confident about getting support, from Democrats too,” he said.

    The increase in funding would be meant to give military services’ weapons and training programs that are not covered by Biden’s budget. For example, the Army wants an additional $1.1 billion for training and another $1.9 billion for aviation platforms and combat vehicles.

    Biden’s massive budget request is not enough for Republican hawks who don’t think the administration is doing enough to compete with China, although the Pentagon has agreed that Beijing is the top “pacing threat” facing the US military.

    Military Times comments that:

    The $716 billion budget proposal represents a 1.4 percent increase over fiscal 2021 spending levels, a figure that Republicans say does not keep up with inflation costs. Numerous GOP members have publicly attacked the plan, saying it failed to keep pace with the threats presented by China and terrorist groups around the globe.

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    The draft budget puts a focus on new weapons technology research, which US military leaders see as vital to compete with China.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 22:00

  • Here We Go Again: Toyota Shutters Factory In Thailand Due To COVID 'Delta' Variant
    Here We Go Again: Toyota Shutters Factory In Thailand Due To COVID ‘Delta’ Variant

    Today in “are we going to do the entire lockdown again for the Delta variant despite the entire world having access to vaccines” news…

    Toyota says it is halting operations at three of its factories in Thailand as a result of the Delta variant disrupting the supply of automotive parts globally. The stoppage began on July 21 and will last until at least July 28, according to a report from Nikkei

    The report says that Toyota “has sourced wire harnesses to connect electrical components from an external factory, which was recently forced to shut down”. 

    The annual production capacity of the factories that have been shuttered is 760,000 units. They produced only 440,000 units in 2020 and Thailand is the 3rd largest overseas hub for Toyota, after China and the U.S.

    The shuttered factories are mainly responsible for producing the Corolla and the company’s Hilux pickup. It is the second time the company’s Thailand factories have been closed down, with the first being in March 2020 at the onset of the pandemic.

    The Delta variant is “overwhleming” southeast Asia according to the report and the Thai government has “resorted to a business lockdown of affected provinces to contain the situation”. 

    Similarly, Malaysia also went into a nationwide lockdown in June, forcing auto factories there to close. “Indonesia has now overtaken India as the Asian epicenter of the pandemic,” Nikkei concluded. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 21:40

  • Montana Attorney General Provides Legal Basis For Rejecting Critical Race Theory: Activists
    Montana Attorney General Provides Legal Basis For Rejecting Critical Race Theory: Activists

    Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Putting the fight against critical race theory –which holds that white people are inherently racist— on a firmer footing by emphasizing that teaching it in public schools violates the Constitution and civil rights laws is an excellent tactic, supporters of traditional patriotic education told The Epoch Times.

    Montana Attorney General Austin Knudsen, (Montana Department of Justice)

    Their comments came after Austin Knudsen, Republican attorney general of Montana, wrote a legal opinion about whether Marxist-invented critical race theory (CRT) violated the U.S. and Montana constitutions as well as various federal civil rights laws. He was responding to an inquiry by Elsie Arntzen, Montana’s superintendent of public instruction, also a Republican.

    The opinion came as public resistance to CRT grows and intensifies among parents in communities across the country who are fighting back by protesting and taking over local school boards. In 26 state legislatures bills have been introduced or other steps have been taken to prevent CRT from being taught, according to Education Week.

    But those measures have rarely offered a comprehensive rationale for banning CRT, which is something Knudsen’s legal opinion provides, sources consulted for this article told The Epoch Times. Without tying objections to CRT to the Constitution or state constitutions, CRT opponents had left their laws more susceptible to being overturned.

    Acknowledging resistance to CRT in education is “absolutely grassroots” and led by parents at the local level, Ian Prior, a parent who helped to found and is executive director of Virginia-based Fight for Schools, said Knudsen did the right thing.

    Whenever one is taking action against policies being pushed downstream from the highest levels of government authority, having a rock-solid legal basis for those actions is absolutely necessary to accomplish required change and do so in a way that will not fluctuate with changes in political power,” Prior said.

    David Randall, director of research at the National Association of Scholars, told The Epoch Times that in his view “there has been a sudden spike of outrage by ordinary people, that the professional political class has been caught off-guard by it, and that they are struggling to catch up with popular outrage rather than fanning it.”

    Although legal opinions like Knudsen’s are needed, much more is required for the fight, he said.

    “Our elite institutions have practiced unconstitutional race discrimination for decades, regardless of the Constitution and the law. They will continue to do so until the people reassert control over their authoritarian elites. The solution must be political as well as legal. We need Knudsen, but we also need an effective political movement to remove all the elite discriminators from the chokepoints of power.”

    Adam Waldeck, founder of 1776 Action, a nonprofit group, said “the tighter and more grounded these anti-CRT laws are the better, and there are no doubt preexisting laws on the books against discrimination that CRT opponents should look to as well.

    “That said, the opposition to CRT started at the local grassroots level and that must continue, particularly in regards to school boards. It’s up to voters to make sure that their officials (and relevant candidates) state exactly what they believe and support, which is exactly why we created The 1776 Pledge to Save Our Schools.

    In his legal opinion, Knudsen wrote that in many instances the use of CRT and so-called antiracism programming does discriminate “on the basis of race, color, or national origin in violation of the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment, Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Article II, Section 4 of the Montana Constitution, and the Montana Human Rights Act.”

    CRT, he noted, calls for teaching students how white people are supposedly by their nature racist and for engaging in racial discrimination in the name of combating it.

    What Is Critical Race Theory?

    The driving force behind CRT and antiracism is the complete and total acceptance of a specific worldview—one that encompasses very specific notions about history, philosophy, sociology, and public policy. Being a so-called ‘antiracist’ requires individuals to accept these premises and advocate for specific policy proposals. Individuals who do not comply cannot truly be ‘antiracist,’ and are, therefore, considered racist,” Knudsen wrote.

    By its own terms, antiracism excludes individuals who merely advocate for the neutral legal principles of the Constitution, or who deny or question the extent to which white supremacy continues to shape our institutions,” he wrote. “To that end, no one can be antiracist who does not act to eliminate the vestiges of white supremacy, i.e., embrace the specific public policy proposals of CRT and antiracism.”

    “For example, critics have suggested that there is one, and only one, correct stance on standardized testing, drug legalization, Medicare for All, and even the capital gains tax rate. This paradigm is conveniently constructed ‘like a mousetrap,’” Knudsen wrote, quoting Christopher Rufo.

    “Disagreement with any aspect becomes irrefutable evidence of its premises of systemic racism, bias, fragility, or white supremacy. … CRT and antiracism are not merely academic ideas confined to university critical studies courses. These ideologies have begun to infiltrate mainstream American dialogue and permeate our institutions.”

    Compelled Speech

    Knudsen argues that, “Trainings, exercises, or assignments which force students or employees to admit, accept, affirm, or support controversial concepts such as privilege, culpability, identity, or status, constitute compelled speech,” which is something the First Amendment forbids the government from forcing people to do.

    “It is obvious that CRT and antiracism programming take strident positions on some of the most controversial political, societal, and philosophical issues of our time. Compelling students, trainees, or anyone else to mouth support for those same positions not only assaults individual dignity, it undermines the search for truth, our institutions, and our democratic system.

    Some schools have proposed separate housing and advisors based on race, as well as separate professional development training, he wrote. Some universities have been sued for diversity programs in which “they make people get down on the floor and apologize for being white.”

    Key elements of CRT and antiracism education and training, when used to classify students or other Montanans by race, run afoul of the U.S. Constitution and federal and state civil rights laws, Knudsen wrote.

    “The term ‘antiracism’ appears reasonable and innocuous on its face. After all, our Constitution, our laws, and nearly all our citizens are ‘antiracism,’” he wrote. But “antiracism,” when used to describe radical activists’ worldview, is “an Orwellian rhetorical weapon.”

    Knudsen added that the National Museum of African American History and Culture’s website had a page dealing with “Whiteness,” that bizarrely claimed traits such as “individualism,” “hard work,” “objectivity,” “progress,” “politeness,” “decision-making,” and “delayed gratification” were hallmarks of “white culture.”

    Teaching CRT

    CRT supporters have lashed out at critics. Michelle Leete, Vice President of Training at the Virginia PTA (Parent Teacher Association) wished death on CRT opponents at a public event on July 15. Two days later Leete, who is also a vice president of the NAACP’s chapter in Fairfax County, Virginia, was forced to resign her PTA post. The American Federation of Teachers and National Education Association have vowed to defend their members who teach CRT.

    After he was inaugurated, President Joe Biden promptly rescinded former President Donald Trump’s Executive Order 13950, which banned teaching CRT to government contractors. Trump said the ideology was “divisive and harmful” and “like a cancer.”

    Critical race theory—whose proponents frequently denounce American culture and history as “Eurocentrism” and “whiteness”—is “a variation of critical theory applied to the American context that stresses racial divisions and sees society in terms of minority racial groups oppressed by the white majority,” according to the report of the 1776 Commission, an advisory body created by Trump, which sought to move U.S. education away from a radical curriculum that unduly emphasized race-related injustices of the past.

    “Equally significant to its intellectual content is the role Critical Race Theory plays in promoting fundamental social transformation,” the report states, “to impart an oppressor-victim narrative upon generations of Americans. This work of cultural revolution has been going on for decades, and its first political reverberations can be seen in 1960s America.”

    Trump unveiled the commission last year as the New York Times-promoted 1619 Project gained widespread acceptance among elites as it rode a wave of national revulsion over the death in Minneapolis police custody last year of black suspect George Floyd which was popularly blamed on anti-black racism by police.

    The 1619 Project claims real American history began when the first African slaves arrived in colonial America in 1619, and not on July 4, 1776, when the colonists declared independence from the United Kingdom. Educators helped to lay the foundation for the revisionist history project years ago by teaching the ahistorical “A People’s History of the United States,” by academic Howard Zinn, who was a member of the Communist Party USA. Millions of copies of the book have been sold.

    Leftists claim CRT promotes racial equality by highlighting the supposed damage that white people have done to others in society. Left-wing sociology professor Robyn Autry of Wesleyan University, praised Biden for killing the commission, falsely claiming it promoted a “dangerous alternative history,” instead of seeking a return to the traditional way the country’s history has been taught.

    Subversion

    But critical race theory “is designed to subvert our system of government,” Mary Grabar, resident fellow at the Alexander Hamilton Institute for the Study of Western Civilization told The Epoch Times.

    “Distorted history, such as The 1619 Project, is used to make CRT seem plausible. CRT is inherently anti-Constitutional … and cannot be justified at the K-12 and even undergraduate levels because students are still learning history in terms of fundamentals and facts. They cannot perceive its Marxist underpinnings.”

    Grabar’s new book, “Debunking the 1619 Project,” will be published by Regnery on Sept. 7. She is also author of “Debunking Howard Zinn,” published in 2019.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 21:20

  • UK's Sending 2 Warships To Japan Infuriates China – Warns Against "Flexing Muscles"
    UK’s Sending 2 Warships To Japan Infuriates China – Warns Against “Flexing Muscles”

    China is urgently warning Britain against “flexing muscles” in and around its claimed territorial waters after the UK confirmed it is sending two warships to be permanently stationed off Japan to patrol Asian waters.

    Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson Zhao Lijian said in the wake of the announcement earlier this week that Beijing “firmly opposes the practice of flexing muscles at China.” His Wednesday comments to reporters further described that any ‘permanent’ UK military presence “undermines China’s sovereignty and security, and harms regional peace and stability.”

    HMS Queen Elizabeth and escort ships, via Royal Navy.

    As we described previously, Britain’s Defense Minister Ben Wallace this week unveiled that the UK will keep two warships in the region while in Tokyo meeting with his Japanese counterpart, Nobuo Kishi. “Following on from the strike group’s inaugural deployment, the United Kingdom will permanently assign two ships in the region from later this year,” he had said. 

    It broadly demonstrates that Britain has of late joined Washington in deepening its security ties with Japan at a moment tensions with China over Taiwan and other contested islands are at their highest in years. The US-UK military build-up appears centered on growing rumors of a near-future Chinese military move on Taiwan, also as the PLA military has of late sent unprecedented numbers of aircraft to breach Taiwan’s Defense Identification Zone. 

    Rabobank had this to say as the HMS Queen Elizabeth aircraft carrier is en route to the region – first taking part of joint exercises with regional allies including the US Navy:

    …The UK just announced its two new aircraft carriers will be based in Japan from now on, with the first due to arrive in September. Think about that for a moment. Two vastly-expensive pieces of military equipment, full of US-made F-35s, and British sailors and sausages, kept on the other side of the world. It says a huge amount about the UK’s intentions to go global in at least one dimension – alongside the Quad. Expect new trade architecture to eventually flow as a quid pro quo, or else the UK isn’t doing diplomacy right. (And that is admittedly a real possibility with the current UK bridge crew, as we see with Northern Ireland.)

    Britain is indeed describing a “realignment” to the Indo-Pacific based on its “commitment to collective security”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Japan is of course welcoming this at a moment the historic Senkaku Islands dispute with Beijing in the East China Sea is again heating up, while an anxious China looks on with growing anger, as Newsweek details

    The Queen Elizabeth Carrier Strike Group, which also has U.S. Navy and Royal Netherlands Navy escorts, is scheduled to transit the contested South China Sea on its way to Japan. China claims almost all of the energy-rich sea as part of its expansive “nine-dash line.”

    Earlier this summer China warned the Western allies – specifically the US, UK, and NATO that its military will not “sit by and do nothing” if “challenges” arise. No doubt Beijing will see any new US and UK ‘permanent’ military deployment off Japan as reason enough to act with its own ‘muscular’ deployment in response. 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 21:00

  • Secessionist, Border Realignment Movements Gaining Traction In US
    Secessionist, Border Realignment Movements Gaining Traction In US

    Authored by Allan Stein via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    The American Civil War is often thought of as being the deciding historical factor putting to rest any future ambition of individual or groups of states wanting to secede from the union.

    (Angelique Johnson/Pixabay)

    Well over a century later, the idea of secession appears far from settled in the minds of millions of Americans—Democrats and Republicans alike.

    In fact, secession mindedness has been gaining ground following the 2016 and 2020 presidential elections, which showed the nation to be more politically divided than ever.

    A newly released poll found that two-thirds (66 percent) of Republicans living in southern states, including Texas and Florida, would approve of seceding from the United States to join a union of southern states.

    That number is up from 50 percent from a similar poll conducted earlier this year.

    Among southern Democrats, 20 percent are in favor of breaking away and forming a new country, according to the latest poll by YouGov and Bright Line Watch of 2,750 Americans.

    For Daniel Miller, president of the Texas Nationalist Movement, founded in 2005, the poll numbers are revealing but not surprising.

    Similar polls conducted in the Lone Star State have also shown a willingness among Texans to leave the union and establish their own nation—a Texit, if you will.

    “You look at the size of our movement—we are literally the largest political advocacy organization in the state” with over 400,000 members, Miller told The Epoch Times in a phone interview.

    At the very core of the state’s secessionist movement is the belief that Texas is “past the breaking point” in terms of dealing with a liberal Washington establishment and its unfavorable policies regarding border control, immigration, culture, and finance, Miller said.

    We are being crushed by 180,000 pages of federal laws, rules and regulations every single day. What we want is a basic fundamental right of self-governance. Texans want to be able to create policies that can’t be overridden [by Washington politicians],” Miller said. “That is what this movement is all about.”

    Throughout his speaking engagements, Miller said, “I couldn’t find anyone that would vote to join the union.”

    Miller said Texas House Bill 1359 would have allowed Texans to vote in a referendum on the question of whether the state should leave the union and establish an independent republic. The bill died in committee.

    In the aftermath, the Texas Nationalist Movement has been “quietly” recruiting secessionist-minded candidates to run in the 2022 primary.

    The organization is also working to garner 80,000 signatures necessary to petition for a non-binding advisory ballot vote on the Texit proposal. The measure would need a simple majority to pass.

    Miller, however, said it would be up to the newly configured legislature to “put the next steps in place for full withdrawal.”

    “This is not a ‘mother may I?’ movement,” he said. “If the federal government needed a new motto, it’s ‘one size fits none.’”

    The Calexit movement in California is another breakaway effort whose goal is to divide the rural portions of the state from the coastal and liberal bastions to create the 51st state.

    In Arizona, the liberal-led Baja Arizona movement in 2011 sought to split the state into two separate states over the increasing partisan divide between the more conservative north and liberal southern areas.

    The non-binding initiative failed to gather the required number of signatures to place the measure on the 2012 election ballot.

    Other lesser known separatist movements in the United States have sprung up in states such as Vermont, Hawaii, and Alaska, though not all currently active movements desire secession from the United States.

    The Greater Idaho movement, for example, seeks a political merger of the rural eastern and southern counties in Oregon with neighboring conservative Idaho.

    “After Trump was elected the first time, in January 2017 Oregonians submitted a petition to place secession from the U.S. on the state ballot, and were only convinced to retract the petition by death threats,” according to a Greater Idaho statement to The Epoch Times.

    “One of our concerns is that after an economic depression, or after a more muscular Republican is elected president, conditions might deteriorate to the point that Oregon may choose to secede from the U.S. Eastern and southern Oregon certainly wouldn’t want to join northwestern Oregon in such an adventure, because our counties belong with Idaho.”

    The Cascadia secession movement, which proposes a union of Oregon, Washington, and British Columbia in Canada as a single “bioregion,” in Oregon is broadly supported, and “held back by the ‘normalcy bias’ of people expecting the future to look like the present,” the Greater Idaho statement added.

    “We admit that if the border of Oregon and Idaho were relocated as we propose, that northwestern Oregon would be more likely to be able to secede from the U.S., but that’s a chance we’re willing to take because our counties certainly don’t want to be stuck with [liberal] Portland.”

    The organization added, “We are confident that we will convince Idaho to accept our counties. Congress usually approves interstate compacts approved by both blue and red state[s]. We expect that the chances of the Greater Idaho movement being successful [will] depend entirely on whether we are able to convince northwestern Oregon to let our counties go.”

    According to Hans A. von Spakovsky, a senior legal fellow at The Heritage Foundation, which promotes conservative public policies, the question of state secession was settled by the Civil War.

    However, while border realignments between states are within the realm of congressional approval, he said, “the practical difficulties are so great” that they are unlikely to occur.

    Regarding state secession, “it’s not an area where we’ve been keeping our fingers” on recent activity, von Spakovsky said.

    In West Virginia, state Rep. Gary Howell, a Republican, is sponsoring a resolution inviting conservative Virginia counties to dissolve their borders and join West Virginia.

    Such a “Vexit” measure would require the approval of both states’ legislatures. Howell added that the benefits of the proposal are many.

    “You can elect every liberal you want and have the liberal utopia you want,” he said regarding the liberal counties in Virginia.

    There won’t be anybody standing in their way. This is a very serious offer to them. We have looked at the numbers. We want Virginia to make an actual request and hold a referendum in all counties [involved]. If they don’t make the ask, [the counties] have to be released from Virginia in some form.”

    “You’ve got cities in the western part of Virginia saying, ‘We’re done with you,’” Howell added. “Is [Vexit] unlikely to happen? Probably. It’s a long shot, but the odds are not zero.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 20:40

  • "He Totally Distorted Reality" – Fauci Accuses Paul Of Slander During Congressional Showdown
    “He Totally Distorted Reality” – Fauci Accuses Paul Of Slander During Congressional Showdown

    Rand Paul’s skewering of Anthony Fauci during a Congressional hearing earlier this week – followed by the senator’s announcement that he planned to write a letter to the DoJ asking that Fauci be investigated for lying to Congress – emerged as a major story. Even mainstream reporters like the Washington Post’s Josh Rogin asserted that Fauci hadn’t been truthful in his characterization of the NIH’s role in financing dangerous research involving bat coronaviruses at the Wuhan Institute of Virology.

    The incident has clearly had an adverse impact on Fauci’s already tarnished reputation, and we imagine if the administration wasn’t in such a panic about the Delta variant, WaPo, CNN and NYT would be printing anonymously sourced stories about the administration’s growing frustration with Fauci and his – as Paul put it – potential “moral culpability”.

    For those who haven’t been following along, here’s a quick summary: in the years before SARS-CoV-2 first started infecting people in Wuhan, the Fauci-led NIH gave grant money to an organization called EcoHealth Alliance. That group then turned around and funneled money to the Wuhan Institute of Virology, to help finance ‘gain-of-function’ research on bat coronaviruses. ‘Gain-of-function’ research involves manipulating viruses to make them more virulent and infectious against humans in the hopes that the scientists will deepen their understanding of how they work, and how to prevent them. However, the Obama Administration made it illegal to finance this type of research with federal dollars, lifting the ban just days before President Trump took office.

    As Sen. Paul pointed out before Congress, the report describing the research underway at the WIV involved “viruses that in nature only infect animals were manipulated in the Wuhan lab to gain the function of infecting humans. This research fits the definition of the research that the NIH said was subject to the pause in 2014-2017, a pause in funding on gain-of-function. But the NIH failed to recognize this.”

    Reporting from the Australian shows Fauci has (in the past) been an outspoken proponent of this type of research, even claiming that pursuing it was “worth the risks” of a deadly pandemic. We suspect he feels different today.

    Some have suggested that this is why Fauci pushed back so hard against the lab leak theory (until he finally acknowledged the theory’s ‘plausibility’). And Sen. Paul said during an interview on Fox News that Fauci is clearly too “conflicted” to be running the country’s COVID response.

    Now, it looks like Fauci is fighting back once again. In a headline that will almost certainly be picked up by the MSM, Fauci is claiming that Paul’s “inflammatory” comments amounted to slander.

    Both men accused one another of “lying” during a heated back-and-forth abotu the level of the National Institute of Health’s role in funding gain-of-function research at China’s WIV. Fauci made the remarks during an interview with MBNBC’s “The Beat” Wednesday evening.

    “I don’t any take great pleasure, Ari, in clashing with the senator,” Fauci said. “I have a great deal of respect for the institution of the Senate of the United States.”

    “But he was completely out of line,” the doctor continued. “He totally distorted reality. And he made some inflammatory and, I believe, slanderous remarks about lying under oath, which is completely nonsense.”

    “I mean, and some of the things he says are so distorted and out of tune with reality, I had to call him on that,” he added. “I didn’t enjoy it, but I had to do that because he was completely out of line. Totally inappropriate.”

    Watch the clip below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course, Fauci didn’t get into the details of Paul’s claim, nor offer to explain exactly why Paul is incorrect. And MSNBC’s Ari Melber seemed just fine with that.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 20:20

  • Mississippi AG Asks Supreme Court To Overturn Roe v. Wade
    Mississippi AG Asks Supreme Court To Overturn Roe v. Wade

    Mississippi’s Attorney General on Thursday asked the Supreme Court to overturn Roe v. Wade, calling the right to abortion “egregiously wrong,” while also asking the court to uphold a state law that bans most abortions after 15 weeks of pregnancy.

    According to the New York Times, “The court will hear arguments in the case in the fall, giving its newly expanded conservative majority a chance to confront what may be the most divisive issue in American law: whether the Constitution protects the right to end pregnancies.”

    Mississippi’s 15-week abortion statute was struck down by lower courts, which called it a cynical and calculated assault on abortion rights which are at odds with precedent set by the Supreme Court.

    In May, the USSC agreed to hear the case, several months after anti-abortion Justice Amy Coney Barrett joined the panel – replacing abortion rights advocate Ruth Bader Ginsburg, who died in September.

    The Constitution does not protect a right to abortion,” wrote Mississippi Attorney General Lynn Fitch, adding “The Constitution’s text says nothing about abortion. Nothing in the Constitution’s structure implies a right to abortion or prohibits states from restricting it.”

    The new filing, from Attorney General Lynn Fitch, was a sustained and detailed attack on Roe and the rulings that followed it, notably Planned Parenthood v. Casey, the 1992 decision that said states may not impose an “undue burden” on the right to abortion before fetal viability — the point at which fetuses can sustain life outside the womb, or about 23 or 24 weeks. –New York Times

    According to Fitch, the scope of abortion rights should be determined through a political process.

    “The national fever on abortion can break only when this court returns abortion policy to the states — where agreement is more common, compromise is often possible and disagreement can be resolved at the ballot box,” she wrote.

    At issue is Dobbs v. Jackson Women’s Health Organization, No. 19-1392, enacted in 2018 by the GOP-controlled Mississippi legislature. The law bans abortions if “the probable gestational age of the unborn human” was medically determined to be 15 weeks or more, with narrow exceptions for medical emergencies or “a severe fetal abnormality.”

    The precise question the justices agreed to decide was “whether all pre-viability prohibitions on elective abortions are unconstitutional.” Depending on how the court answers that question, it could reaffirm, revise or do away with the longstanding constitutional framework for abortion rights.

    Ms. Fitch urged the justices to take the third approach, saying it would bolster the legitimacy of the court. New York Times

    “Roe and Casey are unprincipled decisions that have damaged the democratic process, poisoned our national discourse, plagued the law — and, in doing so, harmed this court.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 20:00

  • Iranian Officer Killed In Worsening Water Crisis Protests – Internet Shutdowns Imposed
    Iranian Officer Killed In Worsening Water Crisis Protests – Internet Shutdowns Imposed

    Water and power shortage protests in Iran have now been raging continuously for one week, resulting in multiple deaths and injuries particularly out of the restive southwest oil-rich province of Khuzestan, including the death of a police officer

    State media by mid-week has reported a death toll of three: “According to the state-run IRNA news agency, gunfire killed the officer in the city of Mahshar and another suffered a gunshot wound to his leg,” the AP reports citing state sources. 

    Iranians protest again water shortages in the Khuzestan province

    Tehran has presented the violence and killings as the fault of “rioters” while the State Department early in the week referenced reports of security forces indiscriminately opening fire on peaceful protesters.

    “We support the rights of Iranians to peacefully assemble and express themselves… without fear of violence, without fear of arbitrary detention by security forces,” State Dept. spokesman Ned Price said.

    Chants saying “down with the Ayatollah” have also been reported based on widely circulating social media videos, also with external Iranian opposition groups as well as Saudi-funded think tanks in the West attempting to seize on the protests as an “opportunity” to weaken and overthrow the Islamic Republic regime.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Behind the crisis are US-led sanctions, severe government mismanagement of resources, but crucially what’s being dubbed the worst drought in 50 years.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    One opposition group called Human Rights Activists in Iran was cited in AP as saying:

    “As nearly 5 million Iranians in Khuzestan are lacking access to clean drinking water, Iran is failing to respect, protect, and fulfill the right to water, which is inextricably linked to the right to the highest attainable standard of health,” the group said.

    And in a sign of the growing fierceness of the security response and crackdown, the global web-outage monitor Netblocks has reported widespread internet outages in Khuzestan for days, place of multiple protests across towns and cities, that are part of “state information controls or targeted Internet shutdowns.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The monitor said outages began on July 15, with outages still being reported into this week…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Already throughout the summer other parts of Iran have witnessed protests over severe electricity shortages leading to unplanned, intermittent blackouts – which Tehran officials have actually in some instances admitted is due in large part to mismanagement and neglect, while also blaming US-led sanctions.

    Both the energy and water crisis are deepening the outrage of the Iranian populace, particularly during a hot summer, and given apartment high rises in places like Tehran and other big cities are not designed to go long periods without air conditioning. The water protests have reached several cities in the oil rich southwest. And in the balance are the Vienna nuclear talks and a new incoming Iranian president – the former said to be “stalled” till later in August. Thus the crisis is likely set to get worse for the time being.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 19:40

  • North Carolina State Board Of Election Denies Audit Request
    North Carolina State Board Of Election Denies Audit Request

    Authored by Matt McGregor via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    Citing overriding federal authority under the Cyber and Infrastructure Security Agency (CISA), the North Carolina Board of Elections (BOE) has denied a North Carolina House Freedom Caucus (HFC) request to examine voting machines.

    Morgan County election officials sort ballots during an audit in Madison, Ga., on Nov. 13, 2020. (John Bazemore/AP Photo)

    Chairman of the caucus, Rep. Keith Kidwell (R-Beaufort), told The Epoch Times that although there is a statute that requires state employees to comply with requests for data from the North Carolina General Assembly, Karen Brinson Bell, executive director of the elections board, declined the request to inspect voting equipment used in the November 2020 election in a July 7 letter.

    During a July 15 press conference, Kidwell said the HFC had been responding to public concern regarding transparency in the election process.

    Before the denial, the HFC met with the BOE twice, and Kidwell added that Elections Systems & Software (ES&S), the largest election vendor for North Carolina, agreed to provide access to three voting systems it manufactures.

    At the time, ES&S indicated that they would be willing to take any inspected system at a randomly selected precinct by the HFC and recertify the equipment so that there would be no cost to the BOE or county, Kidwell said.

    ES&S, he said, “seemed eager” to have the inspection to relieve the public concerns about the equipment.

    “We would not invade, compromise, or damage the machines,” Kidwell said in the press conference. “The only thing that would happen is the ES&S service technician would open, show us and allow us to see that there are no modems in the machines.”

    According to Bell, in her statement to the HFC, neither ES&S nor the machines manufactured by Hart InterCivic (Hart) have modems, which are prohibited by state law.

    After speaking with ES&S officials, Bell said in the statement that “they [ES&S] were unaware of any commitment by the company to take any accessed machines back to their headquarters for recertification.”

    ES&S didn’t respond immediately to The Epoch Times in request for a statement.

    Critical Infrastructure

    CISA, a division of the Department of Homeland Security, classifies voting equipment as “critical infrastructure,” Bell said.

    She included a letter from Geoff Hale, director of the Election Security Initiative (ESI) at CISA, in which he said “allowing unknown, unauthorized, or inexpert actors” to access the machines could risk damage and manipulation, which would compromise the security of the equipment.

    Bell said that the ESI would not “partake in, nor perpetuate, myths and falsehoods about the voting system or elections.”

    Kidwell said he wouldn’t classify members of the General Assembly as “unknown, unauthorized, or inexpert actors.”

    The goal of the HFC is to show the public that voting equipment is not a problem, Kidwell said.

    I want to point out that first, we seek transparency in the election process,” Kidwell said. “The North Carolina House Freedom Caucus believes that every legal vote should be counted, but not a single illegal vote should be counted.”

    The HFC has made no false or “misleading statements about the machines, processes, or staff,” Kidwell said.

    “In fact, we have sent out press releases and made social media post that clearly stated we thought—from what we had seen to date—our system did not have modems, and appeared to be secure,” Kidwell said.

    Up until the statement from Bell, Kidwell said the HFC had been “impressed by the cooperation” from the BOE.

    Now we’ve hit a wall,” Kidwell said in the press conference. “That wall—they’re seemingly hiding behind. Miss Bell, tear down that wall, unless you have something to hide.”

    The BOE told The Epoch Times that it’s not aware of a statute that allows a member of the General Assembly access to voting machines.

    Because county boards of elections are legally responsible for the voting equipment, access must be restricted to prevent tampering, said the BOE.

    North Carolina General Statute 120-19 states that “all officers, agents, agencies and departments of the State are required to give any committee of either house of the General Assembly, or any committee or commission whose funds are appropriated or transferred to the General Assembly or to the Legislative Services Commission for disbursement, upon request, all information and all data within their possession, or ascertainable from their records.”

    “Here is the key,” Kidwell said. “This requirement is mandatory.”

    Kidwell added that, at this point, he’s not asking for a “full-blown audit,” which is what took place in Arizona when Florida-based tech firm Cyber Ninjas performed a months-long forensic audit.

    Last week, Arizona’s GOP-led state Senate held a hearing in which Cyber Ninja CEO Doug Logan spoke, telling senators that, among other discrepancies, auditors could find no record of the county sending more than 74,000 mail-in ballots.

    After the hearing, some Republicans called for Arizona’s 11 electors—who went for Biden—to be recalled, to which Arizona Senate President Karen Fann, a Republican, said that the state Senate can’t recall electors.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 19:20

  • Facebook Moderators Demand Company Shred NDAs So They Can Share PTSD Horror Stories
    Facebook Moderators Demand Company Shred NDAs So They Can Share PTSD Horror Stories

    Dozens of Facebook content moderators from around the world are calling for the company to put an end to ‘overly restrictive nondisclosure agreements’ (NDAs) which discourage workers from speaking out about horrific working conditions, according to The Verge.

    “Despite the company’s best efforts to keep us quiet, we write to demand the company’s culture of fear and excessive secrecy ends today,” the group of at least 60 moderators wrote in a letter to Mark Zuckerberg, Sheryl Sandberg and the CEOs of contracting companies Covalen and Accenture. “No NDA can lawfully prevent us from speaking out about our working conditions.”

    The news comes amid escalating tension between the company and its contract content moderators in Ireland. In May, a moderator named Isabella Plunkett testified before a parliamentary committee to try to push for legislative change.

    The content that is moderated is awful,” she said. “It would affect anyone … To help, they offer us wellness coaches. These people mean really well, but they are not doctors. They suggest karaoke and painting, but frankly, one does not always feel like singing, after having seen someone be battered to bits.”

    The letter asks that the company give moderators regular access to clinical psychiatrists and psychologists. “Imagine watching hours of violent content or children abuse online as part of your day to day work,” they write. “You cannot be left unscathed. This job must not cost us our mental health.” -The Verge

    Horror stories from Facebook’s PTSD-stricken content moderators are nothing new – as anonymous mods have leaked several times in the past, or had conditions revealed via lawsuits. In 2018, a California woman sued the social media giant after she was “exposed to highly toxic, unsafe, and injurious content during her employment as a content moderator at Facebook.”

    Selena Scola moderated content for Facebook as an employee of contractor Pro Unlimited, Inc. between June 2017 and March of this year, according to her complaint. 

    Illustration by Corey Brickley

    “Every day, Facebook users post millions of videos, images, and livestreamed broadcasts of child sexual abuse, rape, torture, bestiality, beheadings, suicide, and murder,” the lawsuit reads. “To maintain a sanitized platform, maximize its already vast profits, and cultivate its public image, Facebook relies on people like Ms. Scola known as content moderators to view those posts and remove any that violate the corporations terms of use.

    As a result of having to review said content, Scola says she “developed and suffers from significant psychological trauma and post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD)” – however she does not detail the specific imagery she was exposed to for fear of Facebook enforcing a non-disclosure agreement (NDA) she signed. 

    “You’d go into work at 9am every morning, turn on your computer and watch someone have their head cut off. Every day, every minute, thats what you see. Heads being cut off,” another content moderator told the Guardian at the time.

    Moderators also want to be official Facebook employees – not held at arm’s length through contractors where they don’t receive the same pay or benefits as full-time Facebook moderators.

    “Facebook content moderators worldwide work grueling shifts wading through a never-ending flood of the worst material on the internet,” wrote Foxglove director Martha Dark in a statement. “Yet, moderators don’t get proper, meaningful, clinical long term mental health support, they have to sign highly restrictive NDAs to keep them quiet about what they’ve seen and the vast majority of the workforce are employed through outsourcing companies where they don’t receive anywhere near the same support and benefits Facebook gives its own staff.”

    Facebook pushed back against the moderators, saying in a statement: “We recognize that reviewing content can be a difficult job, which is why we work with partners who support their employees through training and psychological support when working with challenging content,” a spokesperson said. “In Ireland, this includes 24/7 on-site support with trained practitioners, an on-call service, and access to private healthcare from the first day of employment. We also use technology to limit their exposure to graphic material as much as possible.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 19:00

  • Who Will Own Economic Populism? Biden's New Competition Order, Antitrust Policy And Their Future
    Who Will Own Economic Populism? Biden’s New Competition Order, Antitrust Policy And Their Future

    By Mark Glennon of Wirepoints

    “This is from the Biden Administration?”

    If you’re a believer in free enterprise and the virtues of robust competition, that may be your initial reaction if you read through the fact sheet on President Biden’s new executive order to promote competition in the economy.

    More importantly, if you review reactions to the order, you’ll see the issues that may determine both political control and direction of part of the populist surge in America, both nationally and at the state level. Resolution of those issues may fundamentally reshape our economy.

    The driver is the huge majority of Americans who are now fed up with large corporations, particularly big tech platforms. Seventy-three percent say they are dissatisfied with major corporations, including 42% who are “deeply dissatisfied” with them, way up from earlier years. By numbers at least that large, Americans say big tech must be reined in and, most importantly, they support breaking up Amazon, Google and Facebook.

    The matter is playing out in a broad debate about antitrust policy and what to do about tech companies, which may significantly change what America’s economy looks like.

    Team Biden has noticed the space left empty after Trump. As reported by Politico, one of Biden’s lead campaign pollsters said Trump engaged repeatedly in cultural warfare but also weaved in economic populist threads. Now, however, they seem to be only doing one right now. “That’s surprising and it’s ceding a lot of terrain to us,” she said.

    Who will ultimately hold that terrain? At the national level, it’s unclear because deep fissures are already apparent within both the left and right.

    Failing national consensus, some of the answer may default to the states, including Illinois.

    But the most recent headlines are on Biden’s executive order on competition, so let’s start there.

    The order covers 72 distinct matters, some very specific and some broadly thematic. It’s written in language free marketeers probably will be comfortable with, not the leftist crazy talk so common in Washington today. That’s thanks no doubt to its primary author, Tim Wu, who is no stranger to free market thinking. He was a law clerk for Judge Richard Posner, who is regarded as perhaps America’s leading legal scholar on free market virtues (though Posner’s devotion thereto has diminished in recent years). Wu says Posner is “probably America’s greatest living jurist, and Posner called him Genius Wu.  “He’s very, very, very smart,” says Posner.

    Most free marketeers will find some of the order’s 72 items at least directionally appealing. For example, a Wall Street Journal editorial endorsed the order to expedite deregulation of the hearing aid market by allowing Americans to purchase hearing aids over the counter rather than by prescription. Retailers and other cargo owners cheered the order to crack down on what they see as rigged pricing by freight carriers. And most conservatives will applaud the effort to limit occupational licensing restrictions, which are widely criticized as barriers to labor mobility.

    But, geez, what a philosophical clash with the rest of what’s coming out of the Biden Administration and Congress!

    If the sting of competition is healthy, why are we paying millions of Americans not to work? What sense is there setting a minimum, worldwide corporate income tax, which the Biden Administration supports? Why is the administration trying to federalize most everything, undermining the competition among states that has served America so well since its founding? Why are government mandates of all sorts micro-managing huge parts of the energy sector? Why are so many in Washington enthralled by the concept of universal basic income – money for nothing at all?

    That clash is reason enough to worry how the new order will be implemented in practice. That worry is heightened by some of the vagueness in the order. Much of it requires later rule making, which means who-knows-what. It calls for creation of a new White House Competition Council ”to monitor progress on finalizing the initiatives in the Order and to coordinate the federal government’s response to the rising power of large corporations in the economy.” Who will be on it and what will they do? Nobody knows.

    Far more important than the specific items in the order itself, however, is the broader policy on competition and antitrust of which it is a part. The order calls on the leading antitrust agencies, the Department of Justice (DOJ) and Federal Trade Commission (FTC), to enforce the antitrust laws vigorously and “recognizes that the law allows them to challenge prior bad mergers that past Administrations did not previously challenge.”

    That’s a repudiation of antitrust policy that has been in place since the Reagan Administration. It’s a reference to a new approach whose champions will hold the two key positions – Lina Khan,who has already been sworn in as Chair of the FTC, and Jonathan Kanter, recently nominated to lead the DOJ’s Antitrust Division. Khan and Kanter, like Wu, want tougher legislation and stricter enforcement of competition and antitrust laws, particularly against big tech companies. Also like Wu, they are different from so many others in the Biden Administration – they are smart, credentialed and respected by many on both sides of the aisle.

    Real change, however, requires legislation. Biden’s new order has limited scope.

    Broadly speaking, the new call for tougher antitrust legislation is in line with many congressional Republicans. Rep. Ken Buck (Colo.), the top Republican on the House Judiciary antitrust subcommittee, recently formed a new “Freedom From Big Tech Caucus” along with a handful of other GOP lawmakers who supported antitrust bills advanced by the committee last month. The caucus will aim to unite Republicans in Congress to “rein in Big Tech” through “legislation, education, and awareness,” as reported by The Hill.

    On the Senate side,  Senator Josh Hawley (R-MO) is pushing a bill block big tech mergers and acquisitions outright.

    That makes for an unusual alignment with progressives, at least in broad terms. For months, many progressives have been posting images with mugs emblazoned with “Wu, Khan & Kanter, reports CNBC.

    But agreement on specific legislation has been elusive, no doubt stemming in part from each side hoping to claim ownership of any results. Moreover, many in both parties are beholden to big tech contributors.

    On the conservative side, however, there’s further reluctance. “There are some Republican members that are concerned with any proposal that might give the Biden government more authority to harass businesses along ideological lines,” Rachel Bovard, senior director of policy for the Conservative Partnership Institute, told Axios. “It’s Republicans thinking the cure is worse than the disease in terms of giving the Biden DOJ and Biden-controlled FTC broad powers to rework corporate America in their vision,” a GOP aide told Axios.

    Those are legitimate concerns that apply to Biden’s new order as well. Selective prosecution for political reasons has become a major concern, for good reason. Wu, Khan and Kanter didn’t come out of the Washington swamp, but the swamp corrupts people and the swamp has final say.

    Perhaps most importantly, there’s a fundamental disagreement coming from adherents to the hands-off attitude toward antitrust that has been in place since the 1980s. Big is by no means bad, under that approach, and the government should stay away absent solid evidence of harm to consumers. That has been the thinking from the Reagan Administration through Obama’s.

    As a result, between 2009 and 2019, antitrust enforcers did not block a single one of the more than 400 acquisitions by the five biggest online tech platforms. The Obama administration failed to prevent Facebook from acquiring Instagram and Whatsapp — “enabling Facebook to co-opt its most promising potential competitors,” as The Hill put it.

    A less charitable characterization of that old approach is summarized by what a former colleague of mine told me about his antitrust class when he was at Stanford Law School. It was taught by William Baxter, who championed the old approach and later headed DOJ’s Antitrust Division under Reagan. Students called his antitrust class “protrust.”

    In stark contrast, the new, aggressive approach of Wu, Kahn and Kanter “identifies concentrated corporate power — something both parties previously encouraged — as actually contributing to a broad range of harms for workers, innovation, prosperity and a resilient democracy overall,” said Sarah Miller, executive director of the American Economic Liberties Project.

    Democrats are particularly anxious to embrace the new approach to shake the growing perception that they are now the party of wealth and big corporations, not populism. It’s not just perception, as Victor David Hansen recently documented nicely.

    What if Congress is unable to overcome its differences and no legislation is passed? The struggle then may devolve to the states. To a significant extent, it already has, as catalogued here.

    Illinois, for example, already passed a law restricting the use of covenants not to compete in employment contracts, which is one of the items in Biden’s competition order. Legislation is pending in Illinois that would prevent certain technology companies from requiring use of their own preferred payment system, which is also the subject of an antitrust case brought against Google by 36 states. Legislation is also pending in Illinois on “right to repair,” another item in Bidens’s order.

    I’m not about to make any predictions on how this will all shake out. However, it’s clear that much is at stake, for both the economy and politicians.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 18:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 22nd July 2021

  • Pegasus Spyware Targeted French President Macron – "Extremely Serious" Breach Under Investigation
    Pegasus Spyware Targeted French President Macron – “Extremely Serious” Breach Under Investigation

    The latest victim who was targeted using the phone hacking spyware Pegasus has been revealed to French President Emmanual Macron – part of a growing list that’s said to include some 600 government officials and politicians from over 30 countries. Israeli tech firm and Pegasus-developer NSO Group is in damage control mode after an international consortium of news outlets has published dozens of stories exposing the hacks. Pakistan Prime Minister Imran Khan is also on the list.

    It’s believed that governments used the Israeli company’s military-grade hacking tools to access the phones of dissidents, activists and journalists in countries like UAE, Saudi Arabia, Morocco, and even Hungary. The fact that heads of state were also likely targeted suggests that customers also turned the powerful spyware against foreign rivals and enemies, or perhaps to get a leg up in major business or political negotiations. The Independent writes that the following 10 governments are believed to be NSO customers:

    Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Kazakhstan, Mexico, Morocco, Rwanda, Saudi Arabia, Hungary, India and the United Arab Emirates (UAE).

    AFP via Getty Images

    But in terms of world leaders also reportedly targeted, Macron may be the most visible and influential European figure thus far. 

    “French newspaper Le Monde reports that Moroccan intelligence services identified a phone that Mr Macron had been using since 2017,” BBC reports of the new revelation. However, Morocco has denied ever being a client of NSO, despite the country’s name being all over the recent reporting.

    The French presidency’s office has yet to confirm if Macron was a victim of a hack, and it’s as yet unclear if his phone was breached using Pegasus, but it called the allegations “very serious” if confirmed. 

    “If confirmed this would be extremely serious”a statement from Macron’s office said while saying a major investigation is underway.

    According to the BBC, “Numbers on the leaked list are also said to include those of President Baram Salih of Iraq and South Africa’s Cyril Ramaphosa, as well as the current prime ministers of Pakistan, Egypt and Morocco, and the King of Morocco.”

    Saudi Arabia was behind an NSO spyware attack on Jamal Khashoggi’s associates and family both before and after his murder, according to the new revelations…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As we described previously, Pegasus is a very advanced malware that infects iOS and Android devices to allow operators of the spyware to copy messages, photos, calls and other data, including secretly activate microphones and cameras. Based on the investigation of leaks initially reported in Forbidden Stories, the leak contains a list of 50,000 phone numbers that have been identified as those of people of interest by clients of NSO since 2016.

    The list includes many close family members of one country’s ruler, suggesting he might have instructed the country’s intelligence agencies to explore the possibility of tracking and spying on their own relatives. Forbidden Stories has summarized the enormity of the leak and follow-up investigative reporting as follows:

    An unprecedented leak of more than 50,000 phone numbers selected for surveillance with Pegasus, a spyware sold by Israeli company NSO Group, shows how this technology has been systematically abused for years to spy on journalists, human rights defenders, academics, businesspeople, lawyers, doctors, union leaders, diplomats, politicians and several heads of states.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Likely we have only witnessed the tip of the iceberg in terms of both government officials and journalists and activists targeted, with the further obvious implication of Israeli intelligence being at the center of this – as The Washington Post has recently explored.

    Meanwhile, NSO Group has announced it’s shutting down all media inquiries related to the ongoing scandal…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 02:45

  • Klaus Schwab 'The Humanist' Versus Klaus Schwab 'The Terrorist'
    Klaus Schwab ‘The Humanist’ Versus Klaus Schwab ‘The Terrorist’

    Authored by Joaquin Flores via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The rising technocratic dystopia may appear to carry forward the legacy of social-democracy, though perversely, and therefore the utilization of Green parties and social-democratic parties in Europe to implement these is both predicted and rational.

    There are two men named Klaus Schwab, no doubt.

    One man named Klaus Schwab is seen by the true-believers, fachidiots, the liberal intelligentsia, the institutionally refined population, as a man who deeply cares about humanity. It seems they believe his warnings to be earnest even if uncannily and strikingly prescient. The World Economic Forum after all, must have been established out of great concern for humanity since it is propped up chiefly by the most humane institution in human history, the International Monetary Fund. This Klaus Schwab is a humanist.

    So perhaps this is precisely the case for the true-believers; those who accept at face value the new Schwabian ‘distinction’ we are asked to appreciate between a shareholder capitalism and a capitalism 2.0, a stakeholder capitalism.

    Then there is a second man named Klaus Schwab, who is seen by the rest of the world and the thinking people within it, for the monster that he is. A grimacing Klaus Schwab who appears on smartphone and tablet screens to warn of impending doom, no going back to normal, new pandemics which will strike very soon, and a wave of cyber-attacks. This Klaus Schwab is a terrorist at large, a character who like Dr. Fauci and Bill Gates appear like a central casting dispatch of Bond villains.

    For people who haven’t traded in basic social intelligence for social credit realize that if the person who is issuing warnings of catastrophes is best friends with the very same people who will go on to create those catastrophes, those aren’t warnings. Just like for Fauci who said in 2017 that a massive pandemic would strike within Trump’s term. Those are not warnings, they are threats. Schwab is the one delivering the threats; Schwab is the terrorist.

    Why is it so hard to understand that the WEF only does what’s in the interest of the IMF?

    How are we to understand shareholder capitalism from stakeholder capitalism?

    The idea of ‘socially responsible’ capitalism isn’t a new one. It represented the centrist wing of fascism some 90 years ago; it is to wit the embodiment of the last century’s corporatist and technocratic ideal until about the 1970’s with the introduction of Friedmanism. In that sense, we can say that the U.S. and EU existed on two separate trajectories, with more of the underpinnings of the EU based in the idea of social responsibility in the board room.

    In our past work in the section on corporate ideology and the state in The Great Reset Morality: Euthanization of the Inessentials , we discussed the bifurcation of the corporatist idea of social good, a type of stakeholder capitalism that existed alongside progressivist ideas. These were trumpeted as reasons that socialism was not necessary, since what was good for corporations was also good for society because these industrialists needed strong communities to create stable conditions, well paid workers to buy the products they produced. This was the era of capitalism before globalization. We also had believers in this ideal, like Henry Ford.

    Then came a new idea, increasingly prominent in the American discourse into the 1980’s – where only the bottom line mattered. We can say that the Friedman period that had crept into culture in the 70’s had finally hit mainstream.

    But ultimately, the old idea of social capitalism has come back in a new incarnation, a new branding, from the WEF – stakeholder capitalism and capitalism 2.0.

    A critical difference that cannot be underscored enough, however, is that there is no long-term plan for the ISA (Ideological State Apparatus) of stakeholder capitalism. They simply use the term ‘capitalism’ to maintain social and ideological continuity from the present incarnation of monopoly capitalism. But the aim is to manage a strictly post-capitalist society. This is however not the one envisaged by the left, but rather one which develops new coercive and depopulating technologies along a misanthropic path towards the transition of the plutocracy into a technocracy.

    Its true believers who assume that people are good when they say good things and make good promises, and entirely ignores centuries of peoples’ history or any insights into political and social theory: as Lord Acton, the British historian said: “All power tends to corrupt; absolute power corrupts absolutely.”

    There is a reason we are seeing a resurgence of this old type of corporate ideal. As sovereign governments and democracies cease to exist, then the Friedmanian concept of externalizing costs which is unshakably a part of the present paradigm, can no longer be the official ideology of the ruling class.

    In truth, they must maintain this cost-externalizing view, which is the foundation of and explanation for their misanthropic scheme. Paradigms are not shaken this way, they tend to crash and burn along with their adherents. This gives rise to what Pareto has called the rotation of elites. So, we can see that the present ruling class does not really embrace any change of tact. Rather, they see it as a new demagoguery.

    And so we superficially see ‘stakeholder society’ embraced by a new ruling technocracy especially in light of automation and the fact that most of the human population will be a surplus and redundant one. Naturally, a shareholder society must give way to talking points about a stakeholder society.

    And so we are asked to imagine that there is a revolutionary difference between the ‘old’ Friedmanian concept of the shareholder run society, is the new stakeholder run society. This happy talk began a few decades ago, when we were asked to embrace a ‘Capitalism 2.0’, capitalism with a friendly face, and so on. That has been the official ideology of social democracy in the post-war era, and for these reasons we see the European moderate left (what in the U.S. would be misframed as ‘far left’) can get behind the Great Reset agenda provided they ignore the actual needs or labor, whether organized or not.

    The Great Hypocrisy of the Great Reset

    The two men named Klaus Schwab are both voices in his reader. Any apparent focus on humanity, inclusion, improving living conditions, controlling the power of corporations in Schwab’s book ‘Covid-19: The Great Reset’, is cant lip-service to curry to the liberal-idealist segment of the institutionally refined population.

    The WEF hosts forums on ‘Combatting Global Poverty’, and publishes reports like ‘Poverty: the past, present and future’.  As the primary think-tank of the IMF, it should come as no surprise that the actual aims of the WEF are to provide progressive cover for the upwards redistribution of capital to the same lending institutions which they serve, while disguising this through the reversal and bifurcation of the language in the Orwellian sense of ‘doublespeak’.  And it has been the concentration of capital along upwards distribution vertices – real capital flight – that is chiefly responsible for global poverty.

    The World Economic Forum presents an upside-down world, one where their policy briefs and white papers voicing concerns about poverty are working in harmony with the IMF’s upwards distribution schemes. Reduction of the local power of sovereign states are framed as ‘anti-corruption’ and ‘transparency’. The austere reduction in access to health and human services in developing countries are viewed positively as economic growth indicators, despite the high causal direct relationship between austerity (via structural adjustment) and poverty.

    They present the developing world’s compliance with global governance, i.e. stability, as directly related to poverty eradication – when in reality these two vectors are inversely related.

    To wit, the more that countries comply with structural adjustment schemes, the more difficult it actually is to overcome poverty. The IMF had until now oriented its work towards geopolitical and geoeconomic monopolarity, with its own Trans-Atlantic hub as the loci of power.

    Now it appears that the IMF and its Trans-Atlantic hub have given up on their aim of re-establishing their monopolar moment of the 1990’s.

    It is true that many countries have made strides in overcoming poverty – this has been accomplished by struggling against the IMF, and creating alternatives to the IMF like BRICS. This is not to say that the countries behind BRICS are well intended, but that intentions here have little to do with the net benefit to borrowing countries introduced by the mere fact of a competing interest.

    Klaus Schwab’s book ‘Covid-19: The Great Reset’ is written in an identical fashion: lamentations over economic crisis faced by populations are better read as exaltations. Descriptions of a dangerous process of dystopia formation in that book, openly referring to ‘The Handmaid’s Tale’, ought to be read as actual ‘solution’ traps in the works.

    Mock Execution of Handmaids from the Dystopic drama series, ‘The Handmaid’s Tale’ – referred to in Schwab’s ‘Covid-19: The Great Reset’

    In Klaus Schwab’s book ‘Covid-19: The Great Reset’, any potential ‘abuses’, ‘crimes’, and ‘dystopic futures’ arising from the social policies of the Great Reset, are contemplated or at least mentioned. In The Macro Reset chapter, section 1.6.3, subtitled ‘The Risk of Dystopia’, (pg. 167) for example, nightmarish visions like television’s ‘The Handmaid’s Tale’, ‘Black Mirror’, and the critiques of data mining and surveillance in ‘Surveillance Capitalism’, by Shoshana Zuboff, are discussed.

    These dystopias are acknowledged as analogous to real and potential outcomes of the legislation and corporate policies that populations will suffer and endure at the hands of corporate and government policy as a result of the Great Reset.

    On full display here in microcosmic form, is the entire ISA (Ideological State Apparatus) of the technocracy and, for some decades, neo-liberalism itself – through the parties of the 2nd International, through the NGOs of Soros and U.S.-AID and the NED, etc., ad infinitum.

    Two Men Named Klaus Schwab

    Schwab must be understood as a sort of Dr. Mengele of organizational psychology, and also ideologue for a new system which uses trauma – terrorist acts and terrorist threats – to introduce a new acceptance of reality in a horrific parallel to Max von Sydow’s character Dr. Naehring in Shutter Island.

    Trauma is the point of entry, and prior crimes which have been made against humanity can be warped through this trauma into being crimes that humanity has made itself, and must now pay for and very dearly. The crimes of the ruling class against people are changed into crimes that the people have made and that the ruling class – the stakeholders (governments, NGO’s, institutions) must now correct. And the corrective measures will be punitive and disciplinary in nature.

    Because the progressive ideology (modernity’s ISA) recognizes its present defects, it attempts to divide itself from the actual system it supports. It can be both the legitimating ideology of a system, and the primary critic of that system towards an improved future system. It legitimizes itself today based on things it promises can be fixed in the future.

    Max von Sydow’s character ‘Dr. Naehring’ from the 2010 psychological thriller, Shutter Island

    The WEF does not really need to listen to and hear the population’s actual problems, it can rely on an academy filled with professional critics which the system’s own academies produced, which use a concoction of ideology and speculation to synthesize something resembling a recognition of the population’s problems. This created the illusion that the system was pluralist, when it was practicing a high form of demagogic social psychology and sociology.

    The technocracy of the modern plutocracy, as it transitions to a new kind of oligarchy, is similar to fascism in that it takes many of the tropes and discursive framings of anti-capitalism and social justice but in a way that punches downwards as fascism-in-power did, and weaponizes them in the interests of the decidedly anti-social and unjust technocratic leviathan.

    The technocracy is different from fascism in that it uses the actual left, and clearly not the populist right. This is evidenced in Trumpism in the U.S. or Le Pen in France, whose base opposes the lockdowns, mask and vaccine mandates, business closures, and prison-like quarantines of the Covid-19 Great Reset. Here, the rising technocratic dystopia may even appear to carry forward the legacy of social-democracy, though perversely, and therefore the utilization of Green parties and social-democratic parties in Europe to implement these is both predicted and rational.

    Worse still, center-right parties are also part of this scheme, and when they also move in lockstep with the Great Reset agenda, they can even receive positive press from the center-left (cultural left) establishment media which defines most of European and Western media at present.

    And yet again, these are all political parties that, with the rise of neo-liberalism and globalization, in the aftermath of the destruction of the USSR, have for three decades (or more) taken up the mantle of corporate-public synergy – in the actual tradition of various fascisms, while not acknowledging so.

    To refine this point with clarity: fascism and social democracy share a nearly identical conception of political economy (corporate-public synergy). If fascism is social democracy without pluralism nor a liberal conception of human rights – or rather – if social democracy is fascism but with pluralism and a liberal conception of human rights – then the technocracy founds itself on that shared political economy of fascism and social democracy as a starting point, merely paying lip service to pluralism and liberal conceptions of human rights while in fact using a fascist method of undemocratic and anti-pluralist governance. That is why we have two men named Klaus Schwab.

    A July 15th 2021 Newsweek clipping shows that the movement against the 2030 Agenda is framed as ‘right-wing’.

    Adding to this, the social media corporate technocrats who are committed to the Great Reset, use the imaginary threat of ‘the far right’, and now ‘vaccine hesitancy’, to pursue a censorship policy indistinguishable from totalitarianism (of either far left or far right).

    In viewing the cynical perversion which is Klaus Schwab’s Great Reset text, his criticism of the very system he is developing within the very same book which touts its merits and inevitability, is so as to absorb, bureaucratize, professionalize, manage, subsume, and overtake actual criticisms of the emerging dystopia, as a form of ‘self-criticism’. The end-notes are filled with references to articles by authors and thinkers who are opposed to the rising technocracy, which the World Economy Forum exists solely in service of.

    This gas-lighting ‘self-criticism’ is a method of control by the system over potential criticisms of the system. It is a contrived criticism, managed by the system and in service of the system, as it marches forward with those very same features being criticized, nonetheless.

    Because regular people no longer possess political power in systems where corporate rule has replaced constitutional republics, the devastating costs will be pushed downwards.

    For these reasons we can see that there are two men named Klaus Schwab.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 02:00

  • Watch: California Shoplifters Stroll Out Of TJ Maxx With Arms Full Of Merchandise
    Watch: California Shoplifters Stroll Out Of TJ Maxx With Arms Full Of Merchandise

    In yet another example of California’s decline under Democratic leadership, two men were caught on film casually walking out of a suburban Los Angeles TJ Maxx store while carrying armfulls of merchandise – just seven months after LA District Attorney George Gascón announced his office would no longer prosecute misdemeanor crimes such as shoplifting.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The incident occurred at the TJ Maxx in Granada Hills. Neither man has been charged or arrested, though the LAPD continues to investigate the incident.

    They didn’t even run out, they walked out,” said LAPD Sgt. Jerretta Sandoz in a statement to CBS LA. “And so, that’s sending a message that we, the criminals, are winning.”

    Sandoz, who serves as vice president of the Los Angeles Police Protective League, said she blames the incident on Prop 47, a 2014 referendum that lowered criminal sentences on crimes such as shoplifting. 

    “If they’re caught, they’re probably given the equivalent of a traffic ticket,” she told CBS LA. “So it’s not taken seriously.”

    “If you let these criminals think that they can go in and steal merchandise and steal things, what happens when someone tries to stop them,” Sandoz added. –Fox News

    Recall that Gascón is the same DA who in April dissolved or downsized the city’s hardcore gangs and narcotics units ahead of a spike in homicides to 13-year highs – for which LA County Sheriff Alex Villanueva directly blames him.

    The video illustrates the latest in a spate of shoplifting across the state. In San Francisco, business owners and security officials are decrying the “lawlessness” in the city caused by shoplifters.

    “This is really bad. I’ve been in the Bay area 20 years, I’ve never seen this,” a local security guard, J.C. Hernandez, told Fox News, adding “It’s just lawlessness … people are just openly coming in and stealing stuff.”

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 00:16

  • Whitehead's 'State Of The Nation': Still Divided, Enslaved, & Locked Down
    Whitehead’s ‘State Of The Nation’: Still Divided, Enslaved, & Locked Down

    Authored by John W. Whitehead & Nisha Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    A house divided against itself cannot stand. I believe this government cannot endure, permanently, half slave and half free. I do not expect the Union to be dissolved—I do not expect the house to fall—but I do expect it will cease to be divided. It will become all one thing or all the other.”

    – Abraham Lincoln

    History has a funny way of circling back on itself.

    The facts, figures, faces and technology may change from era to era, but the dangers remain the same.

    This year is no different, whatever the politicians and talking heads may say to the contrary.

    Sure, there’s a new guy in charge, but for the most part, we’re still recycling the same news stories that have kept us with one eye warily glued to the news for the past 100-odd years: War. Corruption. Brutality. Economic instability. Partisan politics. Militarism. Disease. Hunger. Greed. Violence. Poverty. Ignorance. Hatred.

    The more things change, the more they stay the same.

    Brush up on your history, and you’ll find that we’ve been stuck on repeat for some time now.

    Take the United States of America in the year 2021, which is not so far different from the United States of America during the Civil Rights era, or the Cold War era, or even the Depression era.

    Go far enough afield, and you’ll find aspects of our troubled history mirrored in the totalitarianism of Nazi Germany, in the fascism of Mussolini’s Italy, and further back in the militarism of the Roman Empire.

    We’re like TV weatherman Phil Connors in Harold Ramis’ classic 1993 comedy Groundhog Day, forced to live the same day over and over again.

    Here in the American police state, however, we continue to wake up, hoping each new day, new president and new year will somehow be different from what has come before.

    Unfortunately, no matter how we change the narrative, change the characters, change the plot lines, we seem to keep ending up in the same place that we started: enslaved, divided and repeating the mistakes of the past.

    You want to know about the true State of our Nation? Listen up.

    The State of the Union: The state of our nation is politically polarized, controlled by forces beyond the purview of the average American, and rapidly moving the nation away from its freedom foundation. Over the past year, due in part to the COVID-19 pandemic, Americans have found themselves repeatedly subjected to egregious civil liberties violations, invasive surveillance, martial law, lockdowns, political correctness, erosions of free speech, strip searches, police shootings of unarmed citizens, government spying, the criminalization of lawful activities, warmongering, etc.

    The predators of the police state have wreaked havoc on our freedoms, our communities, and our lives. The government does not listen to the citizenry, refuses to abide by the Constitution, and treats taxpayers as a source of funding and little else. Police officers shoot unarmed citizens and their household pets. Government agents—including local police—remain armed to the teeth and act like soldiers on a battlefield. Bloated government agencies continue to fleece taxpayers. Government technicians spy on our emails and phone calls. And government contractors make a killing by waging endless wars abroad.

    Consequently, the state of our nation remains bureaucratic, debt-ridden, violent, militarized, fascist, lawless, invasive, corrupt, untrustworthy, mired in war, and unresponsive to the wishes and needs of the electorate.

    The policies of the American police state continue unabated.

    The Executive Branch: All of the imperial powers amassed by Donald Trump, Barack Obama and George W. Bush—to kill American citizens without due process, to detain suspects indefinitely, to strip Americans of their citizenship rights, to carry out mass surveillance on Americans without probable cause, to suspend laws during wartime, to disregard laws with which he might disagree, to conduct secret wars and convene secret courts, to sanction torture, to sidestep the legislatures and courts with executive orders and signing statements, to direct the military to operate beyond the reach of the law, to act as a dictator and a tyrant, above the law and beyond any real accountability—were inherited by Joe Biden.

    Biden has these powers because every successive occupant of the Oval Office has been allowed to expand the reach and power of the presidency through the use of executive orders, decrees, memorandums, proclamations, national security directives and legislative signing statements that can be activated by any sitting president. Those of us who saw this eventuality coming have been warning for years about the growing danger of the Executive Branch with its presidential toolbox of terror that could be used—and abused—by future presidents. The groundwork, we warned, was being laid for a new kind of government where it won’t matter if you’re innocent or guilty, whether you’re a threat to the nation or even if you’re a citizen. What will matter is what the president—or whoever happens to be occupying the Oval Office at the time—thinks. And if he or she thinks you’re a threat to the nation and should be locked up, then you’ll be locked up with no access to the protections our Constitution provides. In effect, you will disappear.

    Our warnings continue to go unheeded.

    The Legislative Branch:  Congress may well be the most self-serving, semi-corrupt institution in America. Abuses of office runs the gamut from elected representatives neglecting their constituencies to engaging in self-serving practices, including the misuse of eminent domain, earmarking hundreds of millions of dollars in federal contracting in return for personal gain and campaign contributions, having inappropriate ties to lobbyist groups and incorrectly or incompletely disclosing financial information. Pork barrel spending, hastily passed legislation, partisan bickering, a skewed work ethic, graft and moral turpitude have all contributed to the public’s increasing dissatisfaction with congressional leadership. No wonder only 31 percent of Americans approve of the job Congress is doing.

    The Judicial Branch: The Supreme Court was intended to be an institution established to intervene and protect the people against the government and its agents when they overstep their bounds. Yet through their deference to police power, preference for security over freedom, and evisceration of our most basic rights for the sake of order and expediency, the justices of the United States Supreme Court have become the guardians of the American police state in which we now live. As a result, sound judgment and justice have largely taken a back seat to legalism, statism and elitism, while preserving the rights of the people has been deprioritized and made to play second fiddle to both governmental and corporate interests. The courts have empowered the government to wreak havoc on our liberties. Protections for private property continue to be undermined. And Americans can no longer rely on the courts to mete out justice.

    Shadow Government: Joe Biden inherited more than a bitterly divided nation teetering on the brink of financial catastrophe when he assumed office. He also inherited a shadow government, one that is fully operational and staffed by unelected officials who are, in essence, running the country. Referred to as the Deep State, this shadow government is comprised of unelected government bureaucrats, corporations, contractors, paper-pushers, and button-pushers who are actually calling the shots behind the scenes right now.

    Law Enforcement: By and large the term “law enforcement” encompasses all agents within a militarized police state, including the military, local police, and the various agencies such as the Secret Service, FBI, CIA, NSA, etc. Having been given the green light to probe, poke, pinch, taser, search, seize, strip and generally manhandle anyone they see fit in almost any circumstance, all with the general blessing of the courts, America’s law enforcement officials, no longer mere servants of the people entrusted with keeping the peace but now extensions of the military, are part of an elite ruling class dependent on keeping the masses corralled, under control, and treated like suspects and enemies rather than citizens. As a result, police are becoming even more militarized and weaponized, and police shootings of unarmed individuals continue to increase.

    A Suspect Surveillance Society: Every dystopian sci-fi film we’ve ever seen is suddenly converging into this present moment in a dangerous trifecta between science, technology and a government that wants to be all-seeing, all-knowing and all-powerful. By tapping into your phone lines and cell phone communications, the government knows what you say. By uploading all of your emails, opening your mail, and reading your Facebook posts and text messages, the government knows what you write. By monitoring your movements with the use of license plate readers, surveillance cameras and other tracking devices, the government knows where you go. By churning through all of the detritus of your life—what you read, where you go, what you say—the government can predict what you will do. By mapping the synapses in your brain, scientists—and in turn, the government—will soon know what you remember. And by accessing your DNA, the government will soon know everything else about you that they don’t already know: your family chart, your ancestry, what you look like, your health history, your inclination to follow orders or chart your own course, etc. Consequently, in the face of DNA evidence that places us at the scene of a crime, behavior sensing technology that interprets our body temperature and facial tics as suspicious, and government surveillance devices that cross-check our biometricslicense plates and DNA against a growing database of unsolved crimes and potential criminals, we are no longer “innocent until proven guilty.”

    Military Empire: America’s endless global wars and burgeoning military empire—funded by taxpayer dollars—have depleted our resources, over-extended our military and increased our similarities to the Roman Empire and its eventual demise. Black budget spending has completely undermined any hope of fiscal transparency, with government contractors padding their pockets at the expense of taxpayers and the nation’s infrastructure—railroads, water pipelines, ports, dams, bridges, airports and roads—taking the hit. The U.S. now operates approximately 800 military bases in foreign countries around the globe at an annual cost of at least $156 billion. The consequences of financing a global military presence are dire. In fact, David Walker, former comptroller general of the U.S., believes there are “striking similarities” between America’s current situation and the factors that contributed to the fall of Rome, including “declining moral values and political civility at home, an over-confident and over-extended military in foreign lands and fiscal irresponsibility by the central government.”

    I haven’t even touched on the corporate state, the military industrial complex, SWAT team raids, invasive surveillance technology, zero tolerance policies in the schools, overcriminalization, or privatized prisons, to name just a few. However, what I have touched on should be enough to show that the landscape of our freedoms has already changed dramatically from what it once was and will no doubt continue to deteriorate unless Americans can find a way to wrest back control of their government and reclaim their freedoms.

    So how do we go about reclaiming our freedoms and reining in our runaway government?

    Essentially, there are four camps of thought among the citizenry when it comes to holding the government accountable.

    Which camp you fall into says a lot about your view of government—or, at least, your view of whichever administration happens to be in power at the time.

    In the first camp are those who trust the government to do the right thing, despite the government’s repeated failures in this department.

    In the second camp are those who not only don’t trust the government but think the government is out to get them.

    In the third camp are those who see government neither as an angel nor a devil, but merely as an entity that needs to be controlled, or as Thomas Jefferson phrased it, bound “down from mischief with the chains of the Constitution.”

    Then there’s the fourth camp, comprised of individuals who pay little to no attention to the workings of government. Easily entertained, easily distracted, easily led, these are the ones who make the government’s job far easier than it should be.

    It is easy to be diverted, distracted and amused by the antics of politicians, the pomp and circumstance of awards shows, athletic events, and entertainment news, and the feel-good evangelism that passes for religion today.

    What is far more difficult to face up to is the reality of life in America, where unemployment, poverty, inequality, injustice and violence by government agents are increasingly norms.

    The powers-that-be want us to remain divided, alienated from each other based on our politics, our bank accounts, our religion, our race and our value systems. Yet as George Orwell observed, “The real division is not between conservatives and revolutionaries but between authoritarians and libertarians.”

    The only distinction that matters anymore is where you stand in the American police state.

    In other words, you’re either part of the problem or part of the solution.

    America is at a crossroads.

    History may show that from this point forward, we will have left behind any semblance of constitutional government and entered into a militaristic state where all citizens are suspects and security trumps freedom.

    Certainly, we have moved beyond the era of representative government and entered a new age: the age of authoritarianism. Even with its constantly shifting terrain, this topsy-turvy travesty of law and government has become America’s new normal.

    As long as we continue to put our politics ahead of our principles—moral, legal and constitutional—“we the people” will lose.

    And you know who will keep winning by playing on our prejudices, capitalizing on our fears, deepening our distrust of our fellow citizens, and dividing us into polarized, warring camps incapable of finding consensus on the one true menace that is an immediate threat to all of our freedoms? The government.

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, when we lose sight of the true purpose of government—to protect our rights—and fail to keep the government in its place as our servant, we allow the government to overstep its bounds and become a tyrant that rules by brute force.

    Tyler Durden
    Thu, 07/22/2021 – 00:00

  • Russia Unveils "Checkmate": Its Latest, 5th Generation Stealth Fighter 
    Russia Unveils “Checkmate”: Its Latest, 5th Generation Stealth Fighter 

    Russian aircraft manufacturer JSC Sukhoi Company unveiled a new fifth-generation fighter jet that will supplement the Sukhoi Su-57 stealth fighter. Moscow plans to export the new fighter jet to countries around the world. Such was the buzz over the reveal that even President Vladimir Putin examined the Sukhoi Checkmate at the country’s annual MAKS Air Show on Tuesday. The new plane is expected to compete with the US Lockheed Martin F-35 Lightning II. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to RT News, Sukhoi said the first flight of the new jet is set to occur in 2023, and deliveries are to begin in 2026. 

    “We have been working on the project for just slightly longer than one year. Such a fast development cycle was possible only with the help of advanced computer technologies and virtual testing,” Yuri Slyusar, CEO of United Aircraft Corporation, said at MAKS.

    The Checkmate is a single-engine supersonic stealth fighter with internal weapon bays and short take-off capability. The maximum speed is Mach 1.8 with a 1,740-mile flight range. The total payload capacity is 16,300 pounds. 

    Russia’s Deputy Prime Minister Yuri Borisov expects Checkmate to be sold to China, India, Vietnam, and African countries. 

    He said foreign customers are expected to order up to 300 aircraft. 

    Borisov said one customer, who wanted to remain anonymous, showed strong interest in the jet. 

    The unveiling came one day after Sukhoi published a teaser video depicting pilots from around the world receiving the message, “It’s coming.:” 

    Checkmate is a much more affordable version of the SU-57 and cheaper than the Lockheed Martin F-22 Raptor and F-35, making stealth technology available for all. 

    Russia also plans to dominate the hypersonic weapons space with its latest test of the Zircon missile that is expected to be deployed with warships and submarines in the not too distant future. 

    Russia is catching up, having outfield the US in hypersonic weapons and could become an export giant of fifth-generation fighter jets in the back half of this decade.  

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 23:40

  • Cuba Demoted To "Not Real Socialism"
    Cuba Demoted To “Not Real Socialism”

    Authored by Art Carden via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    If the Socialist Party of Great Britain is an authority on such things, it is official: in light of recent anti-communist protests and civil unrest, Cuba has been demoted to “Not Real Socialism” and reclassified, along with the USSR and other failed socialist experiments, as “actually state capitalism.”

    La Revolucion, it appears, is moving into the last stage of what we might call the Niemietz Cycle in honor of Kristian Niemietz’s excellent-and-downloadable-for-$0 book Socialism: The Failed Idea That Never Dies (I review it here and here).

    The first stage is the “honeymoon” stage where things look like they’re going well. Contrary to what neoliberal naysayers might think, short-run successes seem to prove that socialism is viable. 

    In the second stage, which Niemietz calls the “Excuses-and-Whatabouttery” stage, mounting socialist failures are explained away as the products of a series of unfortunate (and entirely coincidental) events, like weather in the Soviet Union and Zimbabwe. In the case of Cuba, we’re told–as we have been hearing for six decades–that the country’s problems aren’t because of socialism. They’re actually because of the US embargo. If it weren’t for the embargo, we’re told, the regime would be stable and socialist Cuba would thrive.

    I think the embargo is a terrible idea that should be lifted immediately, as it has given Cuban communists a convenient scapegoat for their country’s problems. The embargo, however, is not what causes Cuba’s woes, and people blaming the embargo overlook the fact that Cuba trades pretty extensively with the rest of the world–how else do you think Canadian and Mexican merchants get the Cuban cigars they hawk to American tourists? It’s not because a Cuban Rhett Butler is smuggling them past a blockade. It’s because Cuba trades freely with the entire world. I suspect the US embargo hasn’t really hurt Cuba that much more than the “transgender bathroom” boycott hurt Target.

    The “embargo” story also doesn’t make a whole lot of sense in light of Marxish claims about imperialism and free trade. On one hand, we learn that “periphery” countries are poor because they trade freely with rich countries like the United States and welcome foreign direct investment. On the other hand, we learn that Cuba is poor because it cannot trade freely with the United States. I’m not sure how this works without a lot of auxiliary assumptions. It also ignores the conspicuous and inconvenient truth that the Cuban government restricts imports and has only lifted these restrictions for food, medicine, and toiletries “temporarily” in response to the protests.

    In the last stage of the Niemietz Cycle, the failures become too obvious to ignore or explain away, and the country is demoted to “not real socialism.” Western intellectuals fawned over Stalin’s experiment with socialism, and only after it became a conspicuous failure did we learn that “It wasn’t actually socialism; it was Stalinism, and if only Trotsky had been in charge instead of Stalin….”

    Cuba’s defenders have made much of its literacy programs and health care; however, 2018 research by Gilbert Berdine, Vincent Geloso, and Benjamin Powell shows that while Cuban health data aren’t exactly fake news, they aren’t exactly accurate, either. Even if the data are above reproach, there’s another important and uncomfortable question: if Cuba is a workers’ paradise, why are so many people trying so hard to leave? Migration patterns tell the clearest story. Cuba might provide asylum for high-profile American intellectuals and dissidents, but people “vote” overwhelmingly against socialism and for capitalism when they risk life and limb to get from Cuba to the United States. They may not be able to build a case from first principles explaining exactly why they prefer capitalism to socialism in a way that would satisfy a lot of intellectuals, but they demonstrate by their actions which system makes it possible for them to live as they see fit. Moreover, a few seconds with Google suggest to me that actually moving to and getting a job in Cuba would be really, really difficult, and if this website is correct that “A university professor can expect to earn in the region of CUP 1,500 (around US$68 per month),” I understand why so many intellectuals are perfectly happy to extol the virtues of Cuban socialism from comfortable offices and armchairs in the United States instead of lining up to live the collectivist dream.

    We can sit around all day and debate the merits and demerits of socialism, whether or not Cuba is “real socialism,” whether or not its apparent reclassification is a demotion or a promotion (as the Babylon Bee calls it), and what intellectuals think people should do and want. Alternatively, we can look at socialism’s miserable track record and try to learn from what people actually do and actually want. Retroactively saying “Actually, that isn’t real socialism” about the Cuban revolution won’t change the fact that people vote for freedom and against socialism in overwhelming numbers.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 23:20

  • State Department's #2 To Visit China, Will Discuss "Areas Of Serious Concern About PRC Actions"
    State Department’s #2 To Visit China, Will Discuss “Areas Of Serious Concern About PRC Actions”

    The US State Department’s #2, deputy secretary of state Wendy Sherman, will meet Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi in Tianjin on July 25-26, after her trip to Mongolia. In a short statement on Wednesday, the US State Department said the discussions were part of “ongoing US efforts to hold candid exchanges with PRC officials to advance US interests and values and to responsibly manage the relationship”.

    US deputy secretary of state Wendy Sherman (centre) will visit China on her trip to Asia. Photo: AP

    “The deputy secretary will discuss areas where we have serious concerns about PRC actions, as well as areas where our interests align,” it said, referring to the People’s Republic of China.

    In an earlier statement, Washington said Sherman would go to Japan, South Korea and Mongolia, raising concerns that she would not make a stop in China. Analysts wondered if Sherman’s original schedule suggested lingering tensions between the two sides, following the catastrophic summit in Alaska in March.

    On Tuesday, the State Department said a trip to China by Sherman remained possible during her current tour of Asia if officials determined that a meeting between Sherman and her Chinese counterparts would be productive.

    “We’ve been clear that when it comes to the [People’s Republic of China], we will engage when it’s in our interests to do so, and we do remain interested in doing so in a practical, substantive and direct manner. That certainly remains the case,” department spokesman Ned Price said.

    According to SCMP sources, China was planning for Xie Feng, a foreign vice-minister in charge of US affairs, to meet Sherman. Xie was the foreign ministry commissioner in Hong Kong and has also been a foreign ministry “point person” on Xinjiang – two key issues troubling China-US relations. Wang would also receive Sherman but Washington was hoping she could have greater access to President Xi Jinping’s inner circle.

    Commenting on the upcoming meeting, Newsquawk notes that a scheduled meeting implies that sides are working towards de-escalating tensions, with some suggesting that such meetings could augur well for a future meeting between President Biden and President Xi. It also comes after the FT reported last week that China had denied the request for US Deputy Secretary of State Sherman to meet with her Chinese counterpart during a proposed visit to the country this week.

    The meeting is expected to serve as a precursor for a meeting between Secretary of State Blinken and China’s Foreign Minister Wang Yi, the source added. The meeting is reportedly to “touch base and for both sides to get a sense of where the relationship is going” and also comes as tensions remain heightened on several fronts.

    The US ramped up its rhetoric on the Xinjiang issue last week when it warned American companies with interests in the area risks breaking US law. Furthermore, the military landscape remains heated. Earlier this week, China said it “drove away” a US warship that trespassed Chinese territory in the South China Sea.

    Further, China warned the US of “serious consequences” after the US Air Force delivered “diplomatic mail” to the de facto US embassy in Taipei, with Beijing claiming that the US trespassed its airspace.

    The SCMP also notes that over the past week, US President Joe Biden and his administration have taken a number of measures that have angered Chinese officials, including a declaration on Monday, together with Britain and the European Union, that Beijing was behind this year’s cyberespionage attack on a Microsoft Exchange email server, This followed the sanctioning of seven Chinese officials which Washington said were responsible for undermining the autonomy of Hong Kong. Beijing denounced the sanctions and threatened to take strong retaliation.

    Meanwhile, the trade deal will likely not be revisited in a meaningful way next week as the trade representatives from both sides are not meeting, as far as the reports go.

    Thus, the meeting will be observed with a geopolitical lens, and the tone between the nations will be eyed. SCMP also suggested that this meeting could eventually pave the way for a summit between the two presidents – some have raised the possibility of a Biden-Xi meeting at the October G20 summit in Rome. A joint press conference or statement will be viewed as constructive.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 23:00

  • First Somalia Airstrikes Of Biden Presidency As Congress Still Questioning Syria Strikes
    First Somalia Airstrikes Of Biden Presidency As Congress Still Questioning Syria Strikes

    The Pentagon has confirmed that President Joe Biden has carried out his first military strikes on the African continent, on Tuesday launching strikes on Somalia targeting al-Qaeda linked al Shabaab militants. “The Department of Defense can confirm that in coordination with the Federal Government of Somalia, US Africa Command forces conducted one airstrike against al-Shabaab in the vicinity of Galkayo, Somalia, today,” the Pentagon said.

    Pentagon spokeswoman Cindi King indicated the operation took place “in the vicinity of Galkayo, Somalia,” which is a city in the country’s center, according to The Hill. “A battle-damage assessment is still pending due to the ongoing engagement between al-Shabaab and Somali forces,” she said Tuesday.

    Aftermath of prior Al-Shabab terror attack, via AFP/Getty Images

    The Somali government has long been battling the Islamist insurgent group, which has in the past been responsible for hundreds of kidnappings as well as sporadic terror attacks on civilian areas of the war-torn country. The US military said it worked in coordination with the Somali government for Tuesday’s operation.

    It marks the third publicly confirmed Biden-ordered air strikes of his presidency, with the prior two launched in Eastern Syria along the Iraq border ostensibly against “Iran-backed militia” engaged in tit-for-tat attacks on American bases.

    According to The Hill, the last time US forces hit Somalia was on Jan. 19 – just before Biden was sworn into office – and after Trump had loosened the rules of engagement for drone strikes.

    Current US rules of engagement based on the stated policies of the Biden administration say that any planned airstrikes conducted outside Afghanistan, Syria, and Iraq have to be formally submitted to the White House to “ensure that the president has full visibility on proposed significant actions.” This means it’s most likely Biden personally signed off of the strikes.

    During the “global war on terror” years airstrikes in Somalia in grew, especially drone strikes, resulting in growing civilian casualties…

    Amnesty International and other human rights groups have previously urged a halt to America’s drone action in Somalia over mounting civilian casualties…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Alarmingly this suggests military commanders do have the option of ordering operations in these three countries without explicit approval from the commander-in-chief. While the US has long operated inside Iraq and Afghanistan at the invitation of the governments there, Damascus has long maintained that the US presence in Syria is a flagrant violation of its sovereignty.

    Some Congressional leaders – even among Democrats – have of late agreed, demanding that based on constitutional requirements he must submit notification to Congress. The same war powers debate could just as easily be had when it comes to Somalia, however, it probably won’t.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 22:40

  • WeWork Paid Founder Adam Neumann More Than $2 Billion, New Book Reveals
    WeWork Paid Founder Adam Neumann More Than $2 Billion, New Book Reveals

    A pair of WSJ reporters have just released a new book, “The Cult of We”, yet another wild tale chronicling the exploits of WeWork founder and former CEO Adam Neumann. As one might expect, the book features several new revelations about Neumann and the extent of Neumann’s extraction of resources from his cash-burning ‘unicorn’, primarily in the form of compensation.

    In fact, the book reveals that Neumann extracted even more wealth than previously believed: entities he controlled made more than $2.1 billion from the company between its founding to the present day, including via stock sales, cash settlement payments and shares.

    Offering yet another example of how WeWork’s backers and bankers – particularly SoftBank and its chairman Masayoshi Son – enabled Neumann and his manic impulses, the WSJ reporters reveal that Neumann and a group of his closest associates sold shares during every funding round. He made roughly $500MM from these sales. In 2019, Neumann pocketed $300MM from additional share sales. Then in May, it was reported that Neumann received another award worth $245MM, bringing the total value of Neumann’s exit package to nearly $1 billion.

    Later, via a renegotiation of his exit package, WeWork agreed to pay out another $185MM as part of a non-compete agreement while also ‘renegotiating’ a $431.5MM line of credit secured by more than 19MM shares of WeWork stock owned by a Neumann controlled entity.

    Following years of whispered reports about his erratic behavior, everything fell apart for Neumann after WeWork relased its S-1, exposing that Neumann and his family would retain virtually complete control over the company. WeWork quickly modified the voting rights’ arrangement, but it was too late. The combination of WeWork’s mounting losses, Neumann’s behavior and the insanity exposed by the company’s “consciousness-elevating” S-1 prompted investors to balk. The company’s valuation quickly dropped from nearly $50 billion to less than $10 billion.

    WeWork finally went public this spring in a deal with a SPAC called BowX Acquisition Corp. Its investors managed to raise some institutional capital, and have been pitching WeWork as a reopening play, arguing that its “flex space” offerings will become even more popular in a world where ‘hybrid work’ becomes the norm, and where companies don’t want to commit to long-term leases.

    In addition to the staggering payouts received by Neumann, the book also revealed many other ridiculous details. During the company’s early days, Neumann openly fantasized about trying to become Israel’s prime minister. He also said he wanted to become “president of the world” later on, after the company had achieved its massive valuation.

    For an executive who cultivated a personality cult, Neumann had a new exit designed to his offices so he could avoid running into staff in the main lobby on his way to the elevators. When it came to interactions with real-life politicians, Neumann was often late or otherwise impertinent.  He once tried to schedule a last-minute meeting with Canadian PM Justin Trudeau, and nearly missed a meeting with British PM Theresa May because his wife reportedly wanted him to skip it.

    Neuman also grew paranoid as top executives started to push back against more of his decisions. As the Verge reports, after 2012, priorities shifted at WeWork and management became obsessed with increasing WeWork’s “valuation”, often at the expense of creating a profitable and sustainable business.

    In an interview with the Verge, one of the authors of “the Cult of We” quipped that “it still is kind of wild to me how Adam Neumann had the ultimate power to make all of this happen and do all the things he did when you have some of the most sophisticated financiers in the world behind him…How did they all get played?”

    They didn’t, of course. They were in on it the whole time. WeWork’s bankers were happy to see it load up on debt and venture capital. And when it came time for the IPO, they were more than eager to dump the shares on the public markets – right up until it became clear that Neumann had poisoned the well.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 22:00

  • At Least 2 Iranian Protesters Shot As Water Crisis Grows: "Worst Drought In 50 Years"
    At Least 2 Iranian Protesters Shot As Water Crisis Grows: “Worst Drought In 50 Years”

    At least two have been killed after multiple nights of large-scale protests over severe water shortages in Iran’s southwest Khuzestan province. The region is said to be experiencing its worst drought in a half-century, which has devastated agriculture and livestock, and left many thousands of homes without water as families plea with authorities for a solution to the crisis. 

    Al Jazeera reports that the deaths came amid ongoing clashes with police: “Two young men were shot and killed during a second night of protests over water shortages in southwest Iran,” citing local reporting. People can be heard in social media videos chanting, “People are thirsty, we want water!”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Over the weekend Iranian authorities blamed “opportunists and rioters” for the violence, with a governor in the region, Omid Sabripour, telling state media:

    “During the rally, rioters shot in the air to provoke the people, but unfortunately one of the bullets hit a person present at the scene and killed him,” he said.

    The protests began last week, with Al Jazeera further noting that hugely provocative chants of “Death to the dictator” and “Death to Khamenei” were heard. 

    Already throughout the summer other parts of Iran have witnessed protests over severe electricity shortages leading to unplanned, intermittent blackouts – which Tehran officials have actually in some instances admitted is due in large part to mismanagement and neglect, while also blaming US-led sanctions.

    Both the energy and water crisis are deepening the outrage of the Iranian populace, particularly during a hot summer, and given apartment high rises in places like Tehran and other big cities are not designed to go long periods without air conditioning. The water protests have reached several cities in the oil rich southwest.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The regional news source Iran International previously explained that the country’s power consumption this summer “has topped 60,000 megawatts per day, a more than ten percent increase compared with last year, while electricity generation has remained the same at 50,000-56,000 megawatts.” And further the report noted:

    As electricity remains subsidized and cheap, there is no incentive for people to limit its use. It also makes Iran a magnate for cryptocurrency mining by huge computer farms that are consume perhaps up to ten percent of electricity supplies in the country.

    In recent months authorities have vowed to disrupt all illegal crypto mining, despite it once being a key way for the country to offset the severe US sanctions blow under the past Trump administration. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Associated Press recently emphasized that the water and electricity crises are closely intertwined: “The country has faced rolling blackouts for weeks now, in part over what authorities describe as a drought striking the nation.

    “Precipitation had decreased by almost 50 percent in the last year, leaving dams with dwindling water supplies to fuel the country,” the report said.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 21:40

  • If The US Wants To Beat China, Why Is It Copying China's Socialism?
    If The US Wants To Beat China, Why Is It Copying China’s Socialism?

    Authored by Mihai Macovei via The Mises Institute,

    Under the Biden administration the US continued escalating the economic and geopolitical frictions with China. At the recent G7 Summit in Carbis Bay, President Biden sought to rally a “united front” against China with traditional G7 allies and new ones such as Australia, India, South Korea, and South Africa and rebuked China on economic policies, human rights, and tensions in the East and South China Seas. The US also persuaded its G7 allies to back a massive infrastructure support package for developing countries. The so-called Build Back Better World Partnership (B3W) is a de facto rival to China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI). But it is far from obvious what the West stands to gain by emulating China’s exorbitant and highly controversial modern “Silk Road” venture.

    The US’s Ambitious Global Infrastructure Plan

    The B3W wants to mobilize “hundreds of billions of dollars of infrastructure investment,” in order to narrow an estimated infrastructure need of $40 trillion plus in the developing world. The B3W financing is expected to come from US budgetary instruments, such as the Development Finance Corporation and the United States Agency for International Development (USAID); from multilateral development banks (MDBs), such as the World Bank; and from the private sector and G7 partners. As the B3W is meant to challenge China’s project, we expect it to at least match the Chinese financial envelope, most commonly estimated at more than $1 trillion in investment and lending commitments so far. This is more than eight times higher than the nearly $113 billion in official development assistance and $22 billion in private sector investment provided by G7 countries for foreign infrastructure projects during 2015–19 (graph 1).

    Graph 1: G7 Infrastructure Development Assistance

    Source: Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS).

    In order to surpass China, the B3W aims at having a broader geographical coverage, a wider focus, and better project governance and standards. The BRI comprises a “Silk Road Economic Belt” trying to link China with Asia, Russia, and Europe by land, and a “Maritime Silk Road,” connecting China’s coastal regions with Asia, the South Pacific, Africa, and Europe, but its Western challenger aims at being global in scope. While the Chinese initiative is focused on traditional infrastructure projects—highways, railroads, ports, and power plants, the B3W wants to invest also in climate, health and digital technology. And because Chinese projects have been heavily criticized for lack of transparency, corruption, unsustainable debt and adverse environmental and social impacts, the B3W advertises itself as “a values-driven, high-standard, and transparent infrastructure partnership led by major democracies.”

    Holes in China’s “Silk Road”

    From its announcement in 2013, China’s megainfrastructure project has been met with suspicion in the West. Most important, it was feared that China had geostrategic ambitions to bring smaller BRI partners under its sphere of influence. It was also claimed that China was pursuing a “debt-trap diplomacy” in order to take over key strategic assets such as electric grids and ports, while the latter could be also used for military purposes.

    With time, many analysts realized that much of this criticism was exaggerated. First, almost 140 countries have signed on to the BRI as of this writing, of which eighteen are from the EU, showing that many governments find the Chinese deal beneficial. And although China has not financed in full the promised $1 trillion in projects so far, it did make $190 billion worth of investments and $390 billion in construction work (financed by Chinese loans in general) during 2014–18. This is more than the $467 billion of development loans provided by the World Bank during 2008–19. Second, while the number of requests for debt renegotiation and relief has increased, overseas asset seizures have rarely occurred. Third, many pundits concur that the BRI ports are commercially designed and almost impossible to employ militarily.

    Undeniably, China has been trying to enhance its political influence through the BRI, and is now perceived as the most influential economic actor in Southeast Asia and Africa. But resentments over some onerous projects, corruption scandals, and increasing debt burdens mean that such gains could be easily reversed, and China has started to improve its lending and investment standards. The BRI focus has been widened from traditional infrastructure to telecommunications, digital technology, and fintech. And China also expanded the BRI’s overarching goal to helping build a free trade and investment area which would accelerate economic growth for all partner countries.

    But BRI’s economic benefits are skewed in favor of Chinese construction companies at the expense of taxpayers. The BRI provided much business for China’s overstretched construction sector after the end of the domestic stimulus binge following the Great Recession. Almost 90 percent of the construction works funded under the BRI went to Chinese contractors, fueling criticism that the BRI creates unfair advantages for Chinese companies, which have become global leaders. Seven of the ten largest construction companies in the world by revenue were Chinese in 2017. At the same time, if China wanted to set a debt trap with the BRI, it seems that it is the country which has fallen into it. The pandemic has accelerated the already growing debt defaults and renegotiations and an estimated $94 billion, or a quarter of China’s overseas lending, has come under renegotiation so far (graph 2). It shows that the BRI’s most important lenders, i.e. China’s two main policy banks—the China Development Bank and the Export-Import Bank of China—have done a poor job of financing viable projects, for which the Chinese taxpayer is likely to foot the bill eventually.3 And given the sizeable amount of investments put on hold, scaled back, or cancelled, and the very low participation of private lenders, it is obvious that the BRI participating governments have made several bad investment decisions too.

    Graph 2: China’s Debt Renegotiation Cases

    Source: Rhodium Group Research.

    Over 2013–17, the BRI looked pretty successful and was growing fast in terms of contracts signed and loans. After high-profile contracts were cancelled and debt renegotiations surged, the project ran out of steam. China’s big banks started rethinking and reducing their overseas lending and the number of construction contracts went down too (graph 3). This was also driven by the deleveraging of Chinese banks after the large credit expansion following the global financial crisis. China’s large domestic growth stimuli weakened its external competitiveness and reduced current account surpluses and outward FDI (foreign direct investment). The balance of payments crisis of 2015–16, which was accompanied by a drop in international reserves of more than $1 trillion and imposition of capital controls, reduced China’s ability to fund the massive overseas demand for infrastructure projects and investment. In addition, domestic voices started to question why Chinese people, also relatively poor, should subsidize unprofitable capital investment overseas.

    Graph 3: China’s Overseas Construction Contracts

    Source: Rhodium Group.

    Should the West Go down China’s Road?

    Before pouring money into B3W, the US should heed important lessons from China’s BRI venture and its own past. First, trying to fill in the $40 trillion plus infrastructure gap in the developing world requires a massive amount of resources. Just printing trillions of US dollars will not be enough, because real savings, i.e., goods and services, will need to be transferred abroad as current account surpluses. In order to carry out mammoth BRI projects, China recorded large current account surpluses and drew on its huge international reserves. Japanese companies also have a long history of building infrastructure across Southeast Asia which was also backed by substantial current account surpluses for several decades. On the other hand, both the US and the UK have been running chronic current account deficits, while the euro area started to register small surpluses only a few years ago (graph 4).

    Graph 4: Current Account Balances

    Source: OECD Statistics.

    In addition, both the US and the EU are about to launch large domestic growth stimuli, including substantial green and digital investments, which are likely to strain further their feeble domestic real savings. Moreover, President Biden’s economic agenda includes important measures, such as tax and minimum wage hikes and higher social spending, that are likely to increase consumption while depressing economic activity and savings. Lastly, investment as a share of GDP is already relatively low in both the US and EU, calling into question the economic rationale for a government-led transfer of capital overseas (graph 5).

    Graph 5: Domestic Investment Ratios

    Source: World Bank Data.

    The second lesson is that BRI slowed down not only when domestic resources dwindled, but also when the wasteful projects and bad debts became visible. The US and its allies seem convinced that, unlike the BRI, their projects will be profitable and transparent. But this is not what history tells us. Jeffrey Tucker shows that the true intent of the much-hailed Marshall Plan was not to help foreign countries, but to internationalize the New Deal and for the American taxpayer to subsidize US corporates. The plan drained private capital out of the US economy, and the country fell into recession shortly thereafter. It also helped entrench unionism, welfare states, and heavy regulations in Europe. According to Ryan McMaken, the history of building transcontinental railroads in the US is also rife with crony capitalism and corruption. The track record of conditional development lending from the International Monetary Fund, the World Bank, and other institutions that are supposed to back the B3W is not spotless either. These institutions are rarely able to support viable projects and economic liberalization: given their role as global lenders of last resort, they must prop up foreign governments that are usually overbureaucratic and corrupt.

    In conclusion, if the US wants to strengthen its economic and geostrategic position versus China, it needs to apply the same free market principles that made it prosperous and powerful in the first place. Launching a second Marshall Plan, which mirrors China’s wasteful BRI, will only consolidate big government, crony capitalism, and corruption, eroding the US economy’s capital stock and competitiveness.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 21:20

  • ​​​​​​​Record Droughts Plague Argentina As Parana River Hits 77-Year Low
    ​​​​​​​Record Droughts Plague Argentina As Parana River Hits 77-Year Low

    Record droughts plague Argentina, Brazil, Mexico, and Paraguay, threaten crops, water reserves, and economic recovery. 

    Concentrating on Argentina, water levels on the Parana River are at 77 years lows, according to Reuters. The river is a major transport route for agricultural exports and a source of drinking water, irrigation, and energy. 

    “Water levels in the Parana are at the lowest level since 1944, which requires a commitment from everyone to attend and act preventively and responsibly against this situation,” the Government of Argentina said. 

    About 80% of the country’s farm exports flow from ports along the Parana River. If shipping vessels can’t traverse the waterway, then farm goods would be landlocked. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The top hemispheric factor contributing to drought conditions in South America is summer 2020 La Nina. It managed to push cold water in the eastern Pacific Ocean and reduced precipitation across the region. 

    Droughts threaten to damage crop yields in South American economies reeling from the virus pandemic and exacerbate the global food shortage pushing food prices higher. 

    S&P Global Platts expands more on the drought and impacts on the global food supply: 

    • Brazil — the second-largest corn exporter in the world — suffered severe drought during most of the corn-growing months and in addition to that, the southern part of the country was affected by frost toward the end of June, which exacerbated corn yield losses.
    • Persisting drought conditions in Brazil have trickled down to Argentina through the Parana river basin. Rainfall remained low across northern Argentina in recent months, where most agricultural activities are concentrated.

    Days ago, Argentina announced a $10.4 million relief fund to mitigate the impact of the drought. 

    S&P Global Platts also makes sense of the wild weather worldwide, contributing not to climate change but rather La Nina: 

    The latest forecast by the US Climate Prediction Center said La Nina will potentially emerge during September-November and last through the 2021-22 winter, with a 66% chance during November-January.

    The La Nina phenomenon, which is an occasional but natural cooling of the equatorial Pacific, is typically associated with above-normal rainfall in Southeast Asia, South Africa, India, and Australia, and drier weather in Argentina, Europe, Brazil, and the southern US.

    This all means that inflation is not “transitory” as the Federal Reserve and all their muppets have tried to convince the world – instead, it’ll be sticking around for some time as food prices will remain elevated. 

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 21:00

  • 'Zero COVID' Catastrophe: Participating Nations See New Records Across The Board
    ‘Zero COVID’ Catastrophe: Participating Nations See New Records Across The Board

    Authored by Jordan Schachtel via ‘Dossier’ substack,

    Zero Covid, the idea that heavy-handed government edicts and population controls can permanently eliminate a coronavirus from a country, is now failing spectacularly everywhere it is being tried.

    You might not read about it in western corporate press agencies, but Zero Covid nations are seeing explosions in Covid-19 cases across the board. The widely praised “success story” countries that followed the radical ideology that is Zero Covid have not only failed to contain a virus, but are now witnessing the uncontrolled spread of that virus in their population centers. The governments committed to this pseudoscientific, totalitarian adventure are scrambling for options, and responding by locking down their nations and further violating the rights of their citizens. The lid has flown off the Zero Covid pressure cooker, revealing the shortcomings of such a reckless ideological endeavor.

    Let’s take a look at how “Zero Covid” nations are holding up:

    Australia

    Australia is arguably the most dedicated large nation to a Zero Covid strategy. The country has been closed off from the vast majority of the world since the beginning of COVID Mania. Even many Australian citizens have been unable to enter or leave the country. 

    Australia has pursued so many lockdowns that it’s pretty much impossible to keep track of what number we’re currently at. Zero Covid has been an unmitigated disaster, as Canberra’s elimination strategy has unsurprisingly failed to permanently move cases to zero. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Thursday, Melbourne and Sydney, Australia’s two largest cities, enacted yet another lockdown. This will be Melbourne’s fifth lockdown in the span of a year and a half.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Australia’s lockdowns have been infamously ruthless.  In some places, lockdowns meant citizens were only allowed to leave their homes for one hour a day, and they were not allowed to travel outside of a certain radius from their homes. In many places, the act of protesting is illegal, and it will be met with by riot police. Australia has also enacted mandatory quarantine camps for citizens who are privileged enough to be allowed to return to the country.

    Vietnam

    Labeled a Zero Covid “success story” by the corporate press for its ultra stringent policies, cases are now exploding in Vietnam.

    The government, in full panic mode, has responded by locking down major cities, only for the case count to continue to move upwards.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    South Korea

    Seoul set up one of the most intrusive Covid surveillance regimes in the world. Applauded by authoritarians as a country that had its priorities in order, South Korea was supposedly the model “contact tracing” nation. Today, South Korea is seeing record numbers across the board.

    This week, the country has seen record case loads. Zero Covid has failed, and the government has responded by restricting rights even further.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Singapore

    Once a Zero Covid nation in good standing with the radical ideologue “public health experts,” the government in Singapore wised up and decided last month to drop the idea of forever eliminating a minimally threatening endemic virus.

    China

    China is lying about its COVID numbers and just about everything else. The Chinese Communist Party claims to be a Zero Covid participant, but in reality, Beijing has been fooling the world about mitigation and suppression “successes” since day one of Covid Mania.

    Thailand

    Thailand, a widely praised “success story” for its strict lockdowns and other draconian policies in pursuit of Zero Covid, is setting its own Covid case records.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    New Zealand

    New Zealand, which has been in a self siege since the beginning of 2020, remains completely committed to its Zero Covid elimination strategy. Like Australia, the country has set up quarantine camps for people who have been granted access to the nation. Due to isolation-related Covid “immunity debt,” the country is seeing skyrocketing hospitalizations among children, who are not threatened by Covid-19.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Free from Covid (for now), emergency rooms are said to be at a “breaking point” in the country, with the country dealing with unknown “winter illness.” It seems the Zero Covid fanatics have forgotten that there are still other ways to get sick.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Kiwi officials have not even commenced discussions over how long they will remain committed to their self siege strategy. Their closed borders have resulted in a massive shortage among hospital staff.

    Summary

    Every country that has embraced the radical notion of Zero Covid has ended up failing to contain a virus and/or failing to accept that the costs of attempting to contain a virus have been exponentially worse than the benefits of containing the virus. The promised “cures” have been infinitely worse than the disease. There are no longer any “success stories” involving nations using tyrannical means in an attempt to stop a virus. Zero Covid, as any rational person could have predicted a long time ago, has failed in spectacular fashion.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 20:40

  • Thousands Of Olympics Ticket Buyers Have Personal Info Leaked Online
    Thousands Of Olympics Ticket Buyers Have Personal Info Leaked Online

    If you bought tickets to the Tokyo Olympics, you may want to change your passwords.

    On Wednesday, a government official speaking on condition of anonymity revealed that thousands of login IDs and passwords of ticket buyers for the Paralympic events were leaked online, as well as the login credentials for those who had used a volunteer portal for the Summer Games, according to Kyodo News.

    Meanwhile – said ticket holders going to be unable to attend the actual events due to coronavirus restrictions, angering local officials over the decision to move forward with the event.

    As The Sun notes:

    There is a growing backlash in the city over the Olympic Games getting the green light to continue.

    And there is huge anger over foreign athletes, dignitaries and media being allowed to attend despite the capital being in a state of emergency.

    Our stars have been warned to follow protocols and told to ‘not visit restaurants that are open after 8pm or that serve alcohol’.

    It comes after organisers highlighted reports of accredited personnel for the Games being spotted drinking in downtown areas or violating quarantines.

    Chiefs said the reports ‘have the potential to severely damage the reputation of the Tokyo 2020 Games and your organisations’.

    Local concern in Tokyo is mounting over staging the Games.

    Tens of thousands of foreign athletes, officials and journalists could accelerate infection rates and introduce more infectious variants.

    And in a survey published by the Asahi Shimbun newspaper, over half of the Japanese public do not want the Games to go ahead.

    According to a Asahi Shimbun poll, 68 percent of Japanese respondents doubt that the Games can be held “safe and secure”, a promise repeatedly made by Prime Minister Yoshihide Suga and the IOC.

    The ticket sale fiasco is just the latest mishap plaguing the Olympics – as dozens of athletes and others involved in the games have tested positive for COVID-19, breaking the venue’s so-called ‘bubble’ designed to protect against the disease, with several participants pulling out of the games. Meanwhile, the Olympics lost its largest sponsor this week, Toyota, which announced it wouldn’t attend the opening ceremony either.

    And in the last bit of bad luck for the games, a BEAR was spotted at the Fukushima softball venue – the first event of the games, according to The Sun, which notes that “Officers have confirmed that they had been unable to track down the giant beast – which has been identified as an Asian black bear.”

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 20:20

  • Israel Seeks To Invoke US Anti-BDS Laws Against Ben & Jerry's
    Israel Seeks To Invoke US Anti-BDS Laws Against Ben & Jerry’s

    Authored by Dave DeCamp via AntiWar.com,

    Israeli leaders are furious with the American ice cream company Ben & Jerry’s for announcing that it will stop selling products in the occupied Palestinian territories of East Jerusalem and the West Bank.

    Gilad Erdan, Israel’s ambassador to the US, sent letters to the governors of the 35 US states that have laws on the books against the Boycott Divestment and Sanctions (BDS) movement that calls for a global boycott to pressure Israel over its occupation and other human rights abuses.

    Wikimedia Commons

    “I ask that you consider speaking out against the company’s decision, and taking any other relevant steps, including in relations to your state laws and the commercial dealings between Ben and Jerry’s and your state,” Erdan said in the letter that he sent Tuesday, which he coordinated with Israeli Foreign Minister Yair Lapid.

    Erdan said Israel views Ben and Jerry’s decision as “the de-facto adoption of antisemitic practices.” Lapid made similar comments on Twitter. “Ben & Jerry’s decision represents shameful surrender to antisemitism, to BDS and to all that is wrong with the anti-Israel and anti-Jewish discourse,” the foreign minister wrote on Monday.

    Lapid also vowed to contact US governors in states with anti-BDS laws. “Over 30 states in the United States have passed anti-BDS legislation in recent years. I plan on asking each of them to enforce these laws against Ben & Jerry’s. They will not treat the State of Israel like this without a response,” he said.

    The anti-BDS laws, which Israeli officials lobbied states to pass, deny state funds to those who advocate for the boycott of Israel and require state contractors to sign oaths pledging not to boycott the Jewish state. The laws are a clear violation of the First Amendment and are always ruled unconstitutional when brought to court.

    Vermont, the state Ben and Jerry’s is based in, does not have anti-BDS laws on the books. It’s not clear how other states’ anti-BDS laws could affect Ben & Jerry’s, but Israeli officials are exploring other ways to go after the ice cream company.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Israeli Prime Minister Naftali Bennett spoke with the head of Unilever, a consumer goods company of which Ben & Jerry’s is a subsidiary. According to a statement from Bennett’s office, the Israeli leader told Unilever CEO Alan Jope that Ben & Jerry’s decision will have “severe consequences” and said Israel will take “strong action.”

    The US State Department on Tuesday reaffirmed that the Biden administration is against the BDS movement, but declined to comment on Ben & Jerry’s decision. “I don’t have a reaction to offer regarding the actions of a private company. More broadly what I would say is that we firmly reject the BDS movement, which unfairly singles out Israel,” State Department spokesman Ned Price told reporters.

    Disclosure: Antiwar.com has received donations in the past from Ben Cohen, the co-founder of Ben & Jerry’s

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 20:00

  • Russia Announces Bilateral Nuclear Arms Control Talks With Biden Administration
    Russia Announces Bilateral Nuclear Arms Control Talks With Biden Administration

    Coming off the “positive” June Biden-Putin summit in Geneva, Russian media is now reporting the resumption of direct nuclear talks between Moscow in Washington set for end of this month.

    “Russia and the United States have agreed to hold their first round of nuclear strategic stability talks on July 28 in Geneva, the Kommersant newspaper reported on Tuesday,” according to Reuters.

    Via Reuters

    Biden and Putin had initially agreed that bilateral dialogue on nuclear arms control and reduction remains a top priority during last month’s summit. This after during the Trump administration the Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces (INF) Treaty was scrapped, after the US withdrew from it in 2019. New START was also on the chopping block.

    However, once Biden took office he scrambled to extend the New START nuclear arms reduction treaty with Russia, signing on to an immediate five year extension. 

    The supreme irony of course remains that it was Trump tearing up Cold War era treaties with Russia – all the while he was supposedly “Putin’s puppet” in the White House or something – while Biden is now busy seeking to restore direct dialogue (and then there’s also Biden also essentially greenlighting the completion of the Nord Stream 2 pipeline). 

    The AP had previously detailed based on the Geneva meeting

    The “strategic stability dialogue” would be a series of discussions designed to set the table for a negotiation by sorting out what exactly should be negotiated. More broadly, it would aim to reduce the risk of war between the world’s two largest nuclear powers.

    Biden said the goal is to work with Russia on “a mechanism that can lead to control of new and dangerous and sophisticated weapons that are coming on the scene now, that reduce the time for response, that raise the prospect of accidental war.” He said this was discussed in detail.

    Interestingly establishment media itself seemed hostile to any potential rapprochement between Putin and Biden along the lines of strategic arms reduction talks. Instead US journalists at the summit were more interested in seeing Biden aggressively “call out” Putin on alleged human rights crackdowns and abuses.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We wonder if the same journalist think avoiding the “prospect of accidental war” with Russia remains a good idea or bad idea, given they’ve spent the last five years stoking a jingoistic atmosphere of confrontation.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 19:40

  • Rand Paul Asks DoJ To Investigate Fauci For Lying To Congress
    Rand Paul Asks DoJ To Investigate Fauci For Lying To Congress

    During an otherwise routine hearing before the Senate, Sen. Rand Paul and Dr. Anthony Fauci clashed once again over whether President Biden’s top COVID advisor had lied to Congress when he insisted back in May that the NIH hadn’t finance gain-of-function research at the Wuhan Institute of Virology (Dr. Fauci also furiously pushed back on the assertion that COVID-19 may have leaked from the lab, before suddenly changing his tune).

    A clearly frazzled Dr. Fauci hurled insults at Sen. Rand Paul (a medical doctor) – “you don’t know what you’re talking about”, he shouted. However, after the dust settled, several reporters, including a reporter for the Washington Post, stepped up to point out that Dr. Fauci was, in fact, wrong. As we reported as far back as March, the NIH – which Dr. Fauci has been in charge of for decades – helped finance ‘gain-of-function’ research involving bat coronaviruses (research overseen by Dr. Shi ‘Batwoman’ Zhengli) via a third-party: EcoHealth Alliance.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This organization took grant money from the NIH and funneled to the WIV. And the leader of this organization? Dr. Peter Daszak, the same man tasked with investigating the origins of the virus by the WHO.

    As Dr. Fauci’s attempts to mask his potential culpability in encouraging research that may or may not have contributed to the outbreak that led to the pandemic, Sen. Rand Paul took to Fox News a couple of times last night. And during a prime-time interview with Sean Hannity, he announced that he planned to write a letter to the DoJ and ask that Dr. Fauci be investigated for lying to Congress.

    “Is it your belief Senator that he lied to Congress and broke the law?” Hannity asks. “Yes,” Sen. Paul responds. “And I will be sending a letter to the Department of Justice asking for a criminal referral.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    During the interview, Paul explains that he has found multiple doctors and scientists to confirm that the research the NIH helped to finance at the WIV was, in fact, gain of function research – which was made illegal for the NIH to finance by the Obama Administration. What’s clear is that Dr. Fauci, who led the agency and has been a vocal proponent of gain of function research, as the Australian first reported back in May. 

    “The NIH funded the lab…but once the public figures out that they were doing very, very dangerous research there…once everybody puts this together, he realizes where the blame is going to attach. He has at least tangential responsibility…if this came from the lab he was funding, my God just imagine the moral culpability the man has.”

    Paul also cited Dr. Fauci’s obvious conflict of interest when it comes to the origins of COVID, and that “he doesn’t really have the judgment to be in the position he’s in.”

    Finally, the senator revealed that he has received “at least five death threats” related to his campaign to expose Dr. Fauci’s conflict of interest.

    During a different interview on Fox a few hours earlier, Sen. Paul explained how scientists had repeatedly confirmed that the research being done by Dr. Zhengli in Wuhan absolutely constituted gain of function research. “When you talk to other scientists, they’re saying it’s the epitomy of ‘gain-of-function’ research. Despite Dr. Fauci’s refusal to acknowledge this, it’s clear he has a significant “conflict of interest.”

    Given the impact that Sen. Paul’s comments have made, and the fact that mainstream reporters are starting to acknowledge that he has been, in fact, correct all along, we can’t help but wonder: is Dr. Fauci’s tenure as America’s unofficial COVID czar finally coming to an end? How much longer until he becomes a political liability for the Democrats – at which point he will almost certainly be fired, or forced to resign, as Biden & Co. claim that the “inherited” the doctor from President Trump.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 19:25

  • Democrat Who Featured In Infamous 'Maskless Flight' Pic Calls For "Universal Mask-Wearing"
    Democrat Who Featured In Infamous ‘Maskless Flight’ Pic Calls For “Universal Mask-Wearing”

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    Democrat Texas state Rep. Donna Howard, who appeared in the now infamous photo of maskless Dem lawmakers on a private jet, faced ridicule after she called for “universal mask-wearing.”

    Howard was one of 60 Texas Democrats who boarded a jet to Washington, D.C., to skip out on a vote on Texas’ election reform bill. A photo of the plane cabin shows Howard and several other passengers not wearing masks.

    Following the trip, where they met with U.S. officials, Howard along with 5 of her colleagues tested positive for COVID-19.

    She subsequently tried to deflect criticism by remarking, “TSA exempts private, non-commercial flights from the mask requirement.”

    “Unfortunately, the spike in infections from the delta variant became apparent immediately after our flight,” Howard continued.

    “Had we known at the time, we would have worn masks.”

    Now Howard is facing more mockery after she vehemently called for schoolchildren to be forced to wear masks in class.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “We need to follow the science here,” tweeted Howard. Texas needs to change course and allow for universal mask-wearing to prevent spread of the highly contagious delta variant, esp as children under 12 cannot get vaccinated yet.”

    Apparently, Howard is really keen for kids to wear masks but not too bothered about covering her own face, even in close proximity to numerous other people inside a confined space.

    “It’s OK when we do it!”

    As we previously highlighted, Dr. Anthony Fauci wrote in a February 2020 that a typical store-bought face mask “is not really effective in keeping out virus, which is small enough to pass through material.”

    His sentiment was echoed earlier this week by Dr Colin Axon, a SAGE advisor for the UK government, who told the London Telegraph that medics have given people a “cartoonish” view of how how microscopic viruses travel through the air, and the masks have gaps in them that are up to 5000 times bigger than COVID particles.

    “The small sizes are not easily understood but an imperfect analogy would be to imagine marbles fired at builders’ scaffolding, some might hit a pole and rebound, but obviously most will fly through,” Axon said.

    *  *  *

    Brand new merch now available! Get it at https://www.pjwshop.com/

    *  *  *

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Get early access, exclusive content and behinds the scenes stuff by following me on Locals.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 19:20

  • Rockets Target Kabul Presidential Palace As US Afghan Draw Down Enters Final Days
    Rockets Target Kabul Presidential Palace As US Afghan Draw Down Enters Final Days

    Amid the US troop exit which is set to be ‘complete’ by August 31, based on Biden’s previously expressed timetable for withdrawal, Afghanistan’s presidential palace is already coming under rocket fire in what could be the early beginnings of a near-future Kabul offensive.

    At least three rockets hit near the presidential palace on Tuesday shortly before Afghan President Ashraf Ghani was to give an address to mark the major Muslim holiday of Eid al-Adha,” The Associated Press reports. Later the Islamic State claimed responsibility for the attack through one of its regional propaganda channels.

    A vehicle near the scene was completely destroyed, and despite there being no reported injuries, Afghan police are alarmed at how deeply inside a secured part of the city the attackers reached. “The palace is in the middle of a so-called Green Zone that is fortified with giant cement blast walls and barbed wire, and streets near the palace have long been closed off,” AP notes.

    Near the site of attack, via AP

    There’s long been concern that the Taliban could soon be close enough to Kabul to initiate an offensive on the capital. US intelligence previously predicted that the national government could collapse, with Kabul potentially overrun within six months of the US forces withdrawal.

    Earlier this month President Biden declared with US troop exit more than 95% complete, but at the same time the Taliban has gobbled up territory at lighting pace. Referencing the ongoing onslaught in various parts of the country, Afghan President Ashraf Ghani said during a speech marking a major Muslim holiday: “The Taliban have no intention and willingness for peace.” He said further, “We have proven that we have the intention, the willingness and have sacrificed for peace.”

    On Wednesday Gen. Mark Milley, chair of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, held out hope that Afghan forces will eventually push back the Taliban. Speaking at a Pentagon press briefing, he said, “I don’t think the end game is yet written,” and specified that “A negative outcome, a Taliban automatic takeover, is not a foregone conclusion.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He suggested that large gains in terms of physical territory taken does not equate to holding high population areas. His remarks struck a rare tone of optimist, as Politico relates of his words:

    Milley defended the strategy of the Afghan national security forces, who he said are consolidating to protect the major population centers, where most Afghan civilians are located.

    He contested the narrative that “the Taliban is winning,” saying the group is “propagating an inevitable victory” and “dominating the airwaves.”

    While “strategic momentum appears to be with the Taliban” right now, a lot could happen over the rest of the summer”, Milley said.

    “We’re going to find out, the levels of violence, does it go up, does it stay the same, there’s the possibility of negotiated outcome still out there, there’s the possibility of a Taliban takeover [and] any other number of scenarios,” Milley said.

    But the fact that insurgents are landing missiles in or near the high-secure Afghan presidential complex in Kabul doesn’t bode well for the near future. 

    The US is keeping some 650 security personnel in Kabul to protect the sprawling US embassy, but the question of air support to Afghan national forces who come under Taliban attack still remains an unsettled question.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 19:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 21st July 2021

  • "Hellish" Noise Complaints Lodged About £30,000 Per Week Luxury London Flat…Owned By The Vatican
    “Hellish” Noise Complaints Lodged About £30,000 Per Week Luxury London Flat…Owned By The Vatican

    A flat in London that is owned by none other than the Vatican has come under controversy for the amount of “hellish noise” coming from the unit late at night.

    The £30,000 per week luxury flat in question is at Hans Place in Chelsea, FT reported this week. Complaints about “loud events” with some involving DJs, have been lodged with the local council, the report notes. The unit is 9,000 square feet and houses a large garden and indoor swimming pool. 

    The property was bought among other luxury London properties in 2014 in a purchase that was “overseen by cardinal Giovanni Angelo Becciu”. Becciu was the first cardinal in modern times to be charged with financial crimes by the Vatican this year.

    Other investments overseen by Becciu have been “under mounting international scrutiny as a result of the allegations brought against him”, the FT reports. The London flat, and other properties, are held through Jersey shell companies through a Vatican unit in charge of “charitable donations that are intended for the poor and needy”.

    A local resident told the Financial Times that “people at the property held noisy parties and social gatherings there”, including parties that went into the early hours of the morning. As a result, neighbors lodged various complaints. 

    One such resident complaint cited “hellish noise” coming from the property. Another tried to go right to the source: “I have written to Apostolic Nuncio (the Vatican ambassador) but they have done nothing about this”.

    “With restrictions lifting hopefully people can party in night clubs not in flats,” the local council told FT. They are still investigating the complaints, the report notes. And despite the Vatican ownership, no complaints openly suggested that any Vatican employees were present at any of the late night gatherings. 

    Becciu denies wrongdoing and had “no role in overseeing the rental or management of any London property owned by the Vatican”.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 02:45

  • Today Hungary, Tomorrow Poland — Will German Pressure Cave Eastern Europe?
    Today Hungary, Tomorrow Poland — Will German Pressure Cave Eastern Europe?

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    Since it became clear that Joe Biden was going to be certified as the President-elect it’s been clear that Poland would become a major story. Poland is one of the bad boys of the European Union and with the return of The Davos Crowd’s favorite American, Barack Obama, to the White House all of Poland’s problems within the EU would intensify.

    With Nordstream 2 nearly complete, time is rapidly running out for Andrej Duda and his Law and Justice (PiS) party.

    Last week I discussed Hungary and whether Prime Minister Viktor Orban had the cards to play in resisting the EU’s pressure there. Orban’s a skilled player who has performed admirably in the face of EU intransigence on his sovereigntist agenda there. Orban always knew he had to balance the great powers around him while still maneuvering Hungary where he knew it needed to go.

    Poland hasn’t faired as well. Andrew Korybko hits the nail on the head in a recent post stating:

    It also puts the Central European leader in a disadvantageous position after having irresponsibly formulated its foreign policy on the expectation that former US President Trump would win re-election and continue reshaping European geopolitics in a manner that’s in close alignment with Polish interests.

    While Trump was in power Poland became increasingly strident in its opposition to both Germany and Russia thinking that U.S. policy would continue long into the future. It was a bad bet. If anyone in Poland’s leadership actually spoke with Vladimir Putin occasionally, even if just for tea, they would have remembered that the U.S. is “Not Agreement Capable.”

    This isn’t just hindsight talking. This was all said during Trump’s presidency. Poland’s leadership tried to have their cake and eat it too. Thinking Trump had their backs they could indulge their Russophobia while concurrently opposing Nordstream 2 and flex its sovereignty against Germany, even, like Hungary, inviting an Article 7 censuring by the EU.

    The more prudent approach, which myself and others said at the time, would have been to emulate Orban, finding ways to antagonize the EU but only so far while opening up relations with Putin and Trump. Orban showed far more strategic vision than Duda in this respect. He understood his position well by shoring up Hungary’s energy and trade positions.

    Unfortunately, without an aligned Poland, Hungary can only do so much.

    Poland, on the other hand, is now at the mercy of the Germans because of Nordstream 2 who will now control gas flows from it throughout the European pipeline network. I talked about this back as far back as 2017:

    Germany gets what it wants. And it wants to be able to use gas delivered by Nordstream 2 to put political pressure on Poland and the rest of the Visegrad Nations.

    This is the real crux of the issue for Poland. And they are free to entertain Trump’s offers to buy LNG from U.S. sources for three times the price of Russian piped gas. Poland can help themselves by siding with Russia over the separatists in the Donbass, but they won’t because the Law and Justice Party is a wholly-owned subsidiary of U.S. neoliberal and neoconservative interests.

    Sure, the Poles got a small win recently when the European Kangaroo Court of Justice ruled in their favor over Gazprom’s usage of the Opal pipeline, but that’s, at best, cold comfort.

    The play for Poland has always been to reach out to Russia rather than continue to think they can stand up to Germany from within the very political structure set up to enhance German power and influence in every way, the EU. They welcomed Trump’s promises of expensive U.S. LNG and resisted Visegrad solidarity. Because of their opposition to Nordstream 2 they were easily manipulated into helping NATO destabilize Ukraine and Belarus while setting themselves up to be slaughtered the moment Davos got rid of Trump and re-established the link between D.C. and Brussels.

    And now, as Korybko astutely points out, PiS is facing increasingly stiff competition from none other than former President Donald Tusk who was a miserable failure while President of the European Council. Davos is making its move to reassert its dominance over Poland.

    This leaves PiS in the unenviable position politically of having no good options. Korybko’s solution is a non-aggression pact with Russia to assuage the fears of Russian military advances because at this point Poland is quickly running out of options.

    It’s unclear exactly what the terms of an informal Polish-Russian “non-aggression pact” in Belarus and Ukraine would look like, but it could be modeled off of the much larger one that the US and Russia are also informally attempting to negotiate after last month’s Biden-Putin Summit. What’s most important is that their threat assessments of one another, influenced as they are by their suspicions of each other’s strategic motives, gradually decline to the point where a so-called “new normal” can set in for more responsibly regulating their regional competition.

    The biggest issue for Poland at this point is the loss of gas transit through Ukraine. Their fears over this and the regular pronouncements recently from Russia about Ukraine’s historical relationship to Russia make that threat more and more likely over the coming years. The government in Kiev is becoming desperate. President Zelensky’s meeting with German Chancellor Angela Merkel is focused on Germany paying Ukraine reparations for Nordstream 2.

    I’m inclined to agree with some of that, since Merkel was part of the group that began Ukraine’s troubles with the accession agreement to the EU which was blocked by Putin and set all of this nonsense in motion over the past eight years. And after breaking Ukraine Merkel has shown zero interest in trying to help it back to its feet.

    So, Ukraine will likely get nothing from Merkel of substance now that she has, for all intents and purposes, washed her hands of the country and she’s as lame-duck as lame-duck gets. All of this is really just theatre at this point. Ukraine will be a staging area in Eastern Europe to launch color revolutions across the region, including Poland and continued aggression against Belarus. This was always the fallback position of Davos and U.S. neoconservatives.

    To me, the real solution is to sit down with both Zelensky and Putin and work out a future which ensures gas transit and delivery between all three. From everything he’s said and intimated, Putin is more than happy to make that deal. A strong and vibrant eastern Europe is the perfect buffer between the EU and Russia.

    So, like Viktor Orban in Hungary, Poland’s leadership has a real choice, will they finally see their board position for how very weak it is and finally reach out to potential allies (Hungary, Czech Republic) and non-combatants (Russia) and start shoring up its position?

    Or will they continue to screech into a whirlwind of their own making, choosing to wallow in their (admittedly justified) past grievances with their neighbors rather than figure out which of them is the one most likely targeting them for destruction. Hint for Duda…. it ain’t Putin.

    The irony is that Poland is still worried about the communists from the East when the real commies are rising in the West.

    Like Hungary and the Czechs, Poland still has its own currency. They’ve been recent buyers of gold to shore up the Zloty. There is a real opportunity for all of these countries, along with Serbia, to form a strong economic bloc making them a destination for capital rather than seen as cannon fodder in the EU’s forever war with Russia, which isn’t over, it’s just on hold for now.

    Because if they don’t see this point soon, the window of opportunity for all of Eastern Europe to break the EU wide open closes.

    *  *  *

    Join my Patreon if you don’t like commies.

    Donate via
    BTC: 3GSkAe8PhENyMWQb7orjtnJK9VX8mMf7Zf
    BCH: qq9pvwq26d8fjfk0f6k5mmnn09vzkmeh3sffxd6ryt
    DCR: DsV2x4kJ4gWCPSpHmS4czbLz2fJNqms78oE
    LTC: MWWdCHbMmn1yuyMSZX55ENJnQo8DXCFg5k
    DASH: XjWQKXJuxYzaNV6WMC4zhuQ43uBw8mN4Va

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 02:00

  • Is Secretary Of State Blinken Setting Us Up For Paying Reparations?
    Is Secretary Of State Blinken Setting Us Up For Paying Reparations?

    Authored by Carol Greenwald via AmericanThinker.com,

    Secretary of state Antony Blinken is neither naïve nor stupid.  So why did he invite United Nations officials to investigate systemic racism in the United States?  It cannot be for the sophomoric reason he stated:

    Responsible nations must not shrink from scrutiny of their human rights record; rather, they should acknowledge it with the intent to improve.

    Antony Blinken (U.S. government public domain image).

    It is the responsibility of the American people and their elected representatives, not the U.N., to examine and improve, if needed, the human rights record of the U.S.  An April 2021 poll shows that nearly two thirds of Americans and 90% of Republicans oppose the idea of providing reparations to the descendants of slaves, according to the results of a nationwide University of Massachusetts Amherst/WCVB poll.  So the administration is seeking ways to affect the public’s views: bring in the U.N. and supposedly world opinion.

    The State Department invitation for an official visit, issued on July 13, was to the U.N. special rapporteur on contemporary forms of racism and the U.N. special rapporteur on minority issues.  The State Department plans to issue invitations to other U.N. experts who “report and advise on thematic human rights issues.”

    These other “experts” are the members of the U.N. Human Rights Council.  Secretary Blinken welcomed the U.N. Human Rights Council’s adoption of a resolution on July 13 that calls for action to combat systemic racism against Africans and people of African descent in the context of law enforcement.

    Both of the special rapporteurs who have been invited to the U.S. signed a U.N. Human Rights Council statement last year that called for “reparative (emphasis added) intervention for historical and contemporary racial justice” around the world.

    Take a look at the nations on the Human Rights Council that, on June 5, 2020, issued this report that said: “The uprising nationally is a protest against systemic racism that produces state-sponsored racial violence, and licenses with impunity this violence. … The protests the world is witnessing, are a rejection of the fundamental racial inequality and discrimination that characterizes life in the United States for black people, and other people of color.”

    The current fifteen members of the U.N. Human Rights Commission are in addition to China, Russia, and Cuba, such leading lights as Bolivia, Côte d’Ivoire, Gabon, Malawi, Mexico, Nepal, Pakistan, Senegal, and Uzbekistan.  France and the U.K. are the only liberal Western democracies included.

    We could write the report right now, without even knowing that the U.N. Human Rights chief, Michelle Bachelet, has already endorsed reparations on July 12 after issuing a U.N. report on systemic racism in late June, which called for wide range of reparation measures.

    The U.N. report will be used by the leftists and the Democrat party — but I repeat myself — as proof that a massive transfer of wealth is needed from white Americans to Americans “of color.”  The ideological framework for this has been made by Critical Race Theory, which alleges that all whites are by definition racist and that the American system of government is systematic racism.  Since only whites can be racist, the Chinese government, a non-white government, cannot be following a racist policy against the Uighurs.  The slavery of Africans today by other Africans and Arabs in Africa is a taboo subject, even though the U.N.’s International Labor Organization (ILO) estimates that there are more than three times as many people in forced servitude today as were captured and sold during the 350-year span of the transatlantic slave trade.  But do not expect the U.S. Human Rights Commission to address the modern slave trade of Africans by Africans and Arabs.

    The U.S. is the target.  The leading members on the council — China, Russia, and Cuba — will make sure that it is the U.S. that owes the rest of humanity reparations.

    So no, Blinken is neither naïve nor stupid.  This is a carefully orchestrated political power play against the American people.

    We are being set up.  The U.N. Human Rights Council, with its august sounding name, will issue its report decrying systemic racism in the U.S. and calling for financial reparations, among other remedies, and the Democrats will use the authority of this world forum to bludgeon Americans into accepting a vast transfer of wealth from one group of Americans to another.  It turns out that Elizabeth Warren’s wealth tax and Biden’s higher income tax rates are not the only things you have to fear as this administration tries to destroy the American middle class.

    Tyler Durden
    Wed, 07/21/2021 – 00:05

  • Russian Warship Reportedly Test-Fires New Hypersonic Weapon
    Russian Warship Reportedly Test-Fires New Hypersonic Weapon

    Russia’s defense ministry (MoD) released a video showing the successful test-fire of a new hypersonic missile on Monday, ahead of what could be a massive rollout to naval ships and submarines. 

    “The Zircon missile successfully struck the target in the White Sea with a direct hit at a distance of over 350 kilometers. The test confirmed the tactical and technical performance of the missile, and its flight speed was around Mach 7,” Russia’s MoD said in a statement. 

    The launch was conducted from an Admiral Gorshkov-class frigate located in the White Sea on the northwest coast of Russia. The missile reportedly struck a land-based target 350 kilometers (217 miles) on the coast of the Barents Sea. 

    Russian President Vladimir Putin has said the Zircon missile could travel upwards of Mach 9, or about 6,900 mph and a distance of 1,000 kilometers (621 miles). 

    The missile has conducted recent tests where Putin described the launches as a “great event not just in the life of our armed forces but for all of Russia.”

    Against a backdrop of soaring tensions between NATO and Russia, Moscow is in the process of deploying numerous hypersonic weapons that Putin deems “invincible.” 

    Only Russia and China have fielded hypersonic weapons while the US continues to lose military supremacy as the gap of when US hypersonic missiles are deployed continues to widen. 

    Russia’s MoD released a video of the launch. 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 23:45

  • Many Big-City Democrat Mayors Defunded Police While Spending Heavily On Their Security Details, Watchdog Finds
    Many Big-City Democrat Mayors Defunded Police While Spending Heavily On Their Security Details, Watchdog Finds

    Authored by Mark Tapscott via The Epoch Times,

    Democratic mayors in 20 of the nation’s 25 biggest cities slashed police department budgets and positions even as they spent millions of tax dollars on their own security details, according to data obtained by a government watchdog.

    “In 25 major U.S. cities, officials have proposed cutting—or in 20 cases already cut—police budgets. However, what OpentheBooks.com auditors found was that mayors and city officials still enjoy personal protection of a dedicated police detail costing taxpayers millions of dollars,” Adam Andrzejewski, Chief Executive Officer and Founder of Open The Books (OTB), said in a statement announcing the new data.

    “This is ‘police protection for me (the political elites), but not for thee (the citizens),’” Andrzejewski said.

    The Chicago-based group is a non-profit that uses public-right-to-know and freedom of information laws to maintains hundreds of publicly available databases of federal, state, and local spending with the goal of providing “every dime online in real time.”

    In San Francisco, for example, the costs of the security detail protecting Mayor London Breed and other city officials spiraled from $1.7 million in 2015 to $2.6 million in 2020.

    Breed has proposed shifting $120 million from the city’s police department to mental health and workforce training programs. City officials declined to say how many officers are assigned to the security details, according to OTB.

    In Chicago, Mayor Lori Lightfoot claimed to be opposed to defunding the police, but OTB found officials quietly abolished 400 police department positions last year.

    Those positions were eliminated even as the city’s “security detail costs peaked in 2020 – up $700,000 over five years: $2.7 million spent on 16 officers (2015); $2.9 million for 16 officers (2016); $2.7 million for 20 officers (2017); $2.8 million for 16 officers (2018); $2.8 million for 17 officers (2019); and $3.4 million for 22 officers (2020)—an all-time high,” OTB said.

    In New York City, Mayor Bill DeBlasio slashed $1 billion from the New York Police Department’s (NYPD) $6 billion annual budget, including $354 million transferred to mental health, homelessness, and education services.

    But the mayor, who briefly sought the Democratic presidential nomination last year, continues to enjoy tax-paid police protection for himself, his wife, and his son.

    City officials have not yet agreed to disclose the costs or number of officers assigned to the multiple DeBlasio security details, according to OTB.

    In Baltimore, Mayor Brendon Scott’s administration spent $3.6 million on a security detail that included 14 officers to protect the chief executive as well as States Attorney Marilyn Mosby and Police Commissioner Michael Harrison, according to the data compiled by OTB. The Baltimore Police Department budget has been reduced by $22 million.

    “Protection for the mayor included six officers and one sergeant, costing almost $2 million,” OTB said in the statement. “The state’s attorney has three officers and one sergeant, costing $1.3 million. The police commissioner’s security detail included two officers and one sergeant, costing $464,948.”

    Baltimore has been plagued for a decade with steadily rising rates of serious crime, including murder, robbery, and assault. The city has also seen two of the present mayor’s immediate predecessors, Catherine Pugh and Sheila Dixon, resign and be convicted on various corruption charges.

    In San Diego, Mayor Todd Gloria’s administration budgeted $2.6 million for 12 full-time officers to protect him and members of the city council during meetings and city hall.

    “However, the mayor’s budget calls for cutting $4.3 million from the police overtime budget and spending more than $1 million to set up the new police oversight body, the Commission on Police Practices,” OTB said.

    Notable among the other cities examined by OTB were these:

    • Minneapolis, where George Floyd was killed, cut $8 million from the police budget to launch a mental health team to respond to certain 911 calls.

    • Oakland officials cut the police budget by $14.6 million. Even bigger cuts are expected in the near future.

    • Despite two years of near-continuous rioting led by Antifa and Black Lives Matter (BLM) activists, Portland officials slashed $15 million from the police budget and disbanded a gun violence reduction unit and transit team that had been accused of over-policing Black communities, among other cuts.

    • Milwaukee officials are cutting 120 police officer positions, beginning with the current year’s budget. The reductions are to come mainly by not replacing retiring officers. Sixty positions were eliminated last year.

    • In Seattle, city council members at one point last year declared their intent to slash the police budget by half, but ultimately settled on a 20 percent reduction.

    • Los Angeles officials have approved a $150 million budget cut from its $1.86 billion proposed budget.

    • In the nation’s capital, officials reduced the Metropolitan Police Department’s budget by $15 million.

    • Philadelphia residents have seen local officials transfer $33 million from the police to other programs.

    • Austin officials cut about $20 million from the police department and shifted $80 million in services previously provided by law enforcement to other departments.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 23:25

  • Victoria's Secret Capitulates, Will Bring Back Its Fashion Show In A Way That's "Culturally Relevant"
    Victoria’s Secret Capitulates, Will Bring Back Its Fashion Show In A Way That’s “Culturally Relevant”

    Two years after Victoria’s Secret caved to social justice warriors by eliminating its fashion shows, the company has said it is ready to hold them again.

    Apparently, the company is finding out the hard way that giving in to social justice warriors, many of whom live at home and don’t even have the discretionary income to buy their products anyway, isn’t a good business decision.

    During an investor event held this week the company says it is going to bring back its runway show in a way that’s “culturally relevant”, which is likely code for plus sized women, transgender models, and androgynous fashion. Also known as the “Cosmopolitan” model.

    The company becomes “an independent company next month when L Brands completes a separation of the bath-products chain Bath & Body Works from Victoria’s Secret,” Bloomberg reported this week.

    Also as part of its shift to be “culturally relevant”, the company also said it is examining moving into maternity and bridal categories. Meanwhile, we still don’t see the problem with how the show used to be.

    Recall, back in 2019, we noted that the company had cancelled its fashion show as its brand struggles with its longtime CEO’s association with Jeffrey Epstein, the convicted pedophile who allegedly killed himself (or was murdered) in his prison cell in a Manhattan jail.

    After years of waning viewership and criticism that the company wasn’t an “all-inclusive” brand, L Brands, Victoria Secret’s parent company, decided that the fashion show was a relic from a bygone era, and that it was time for Victoria’s Secret’s marketing to evolve.

    “We think its important to evolve the marketing of Victorias Secret,” Stuart Burgdoerfer, the chief financial officer of L Brands, said on an earnings call back in 2019. “We’ll be communicating to customers, but nothing that I would say is similar in magnitude to the fashion show,” he added later.

    The announcement in 2019 came after Victoria’s Secret sales cratered. SJWs pointed to it as proof that the company had an image problem that was alienating customers – but we concluded it was more likely that the twin trends of e-commerce and fast fashion chipped away at the company’s profits.

    In 2018, Edward Razek, then CMO of L Brands, provoked a controversy for saying transgender women should not star in the show. Razek apologized for the remarks and ended up retiring soon after the company hired its first openly transgender model.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 23:05

  • Top Health Officer Orders Australians: "Don't Have A Conversation" With Each Other
    Top Health Officer Orders Australians: “Don’t Have A Conversation” With Each Other

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    The chief health officer of New South Wales gave a press conference telling Australians that they shouldn’t “engage in conversation with each other,” even if they’re wearing masks, in order to reduce the transmission of COVID.

    Yes, really.

    Dr. Kerry Chant made the remarks in response to people in NSW being ordered to comply with yet another lockdown triggered by just a handful of new cases, which included a man in Cootamundra who visited a Woolworths supermarket, Pizza Hut restaurant, petrol station and Officeworks store.

    Whilst it’s human nature to engage in conversation with others, to be friendly, unfortunately this is not the time to do that,” said Chant.

    So even if you run into your next door neighbor in the shopping center…don’t start up a conversation, now is the time for minimizing your interactions with others, even if you’ve got a mask, do not think that affords total protection, we wanna be absolutely sure that as we go about our daily lives we do not come into contact with anyone else that would pose a risk,” she added.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In addition to officials telling people they shouldn’t talk to their friends and neighbors, those living in or those who visited the affected areas are now under a minimum 7 day stay-at-home order, while masks will again become mandatory masks for teachers and high school students.

    Twitter users reacted to the statement by pointing out that this represents a new level in the complete inhumanity of lockdown.

    “Their desperation is front and centre. They’re either running out of time or they’re going insane right in front of our eyes,” commented British pop due Right Said Fred.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As we have previously highlighted, Australia has imposed innumerable brutal lockdowns, some of the most draconian in the western world, in the disastrous pursuit of a ‘zero COVID’ policy.

    Alice Springs, a town in Australia 800 miles away from the nearest city went into full lockdown last month after just a single new case of COVID-19 was detected.

    As we reported earlier this month, COVID-19 lockdowns were found to have been a major contributing factor to a doubling in attempted suicides of those aged between 5-25 in Australia.

    *  *  *

    Brand new merch now available! Get it at https://www.pjwshop.com/

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here.Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Get early access, exclusive content and behinds the scenes stuff by following me on Locals.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 22:45

  • Here's What Americans Think Of Famous Billionaires
    Here’s What Americans Think Of Famous Billionaires

    Hot on the heels of fellow billionaire Richard Branson, Amazon founder Jeff Bezos blasted into space this morning. He traveled onboard New Shepard, a rocket ship developed by his company Blue Origin. The capsule had the largest windows ever launched into space, affording Bezos and his crew spectacular views of planet Earth. In an interview before the launch, with CBS News, Bezos said “I’m excited. People keep asking me if I’m nervous. I’m not really nervous, I’m curious. I want to know what we’re going to learn.”

    Excitement is in short supply in some quarters, however, with a petition not allowing Bezos to return to planet Earth garnering more than 160,000 signatures by launch day.

    According to a recent YouGov poll, the U.S. public does not have a particularly positive opinion of the Amazon founder with 49 percent saying they find him very or somewhat unfavorable. Facebook boss Mark Zuckerberg is even more widely disliked with YouGov finding that 6 out of every 10 Americans find him very or somewhat unfavorable.

    Infographic: What Do Americans Think Of Famous Billionaires? | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    With states everywhere ‘defunding the police’, we suspect these billionaires will be increasing their private security crews because…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 22:25

  • "We've Got To Fight Disinformation", Says Empire Made Entirely Of Disinformation
    “We’ve Got To Fight Disinformation”, Says Empire Made Entirely Of Disinformation

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone,

    The weirdest thing about the Biden administration tasking itself with the censorship of “disinformation” on social media is that the United States is the hub of a globe-spanning empire that is built upon a foundation of disinformation, maintained by disinformation, and facilitated by disinformation.

    If the propaganda engine of the US-centralized empire ceased actively deceiving the public about the world, it would collapse immediately. There would be mass unrest at home and abroad, status quo politics would be abandoned, alliances and coalitions would crumble, leaders official and unofficial would be ousted, and US unipolar hegemony would end.

    The only thing keeping this from happening is the vast amounts of wealth and energy which are poured into continuously deceiving the people of America and its allies about what’s really going on in their nations and political systems, and in the world as a whole.

    Getting people believing they live in separate, sovereign nations which function independently from one another, instead of member states within a single undeclared empire which moves as one unit on the international stage.

    Getting people believing they control the fate of their nation via the democratic process, when in reality all large-scale politics are scripted puppet shows controlled by a plutocratic class who owns both the politicians and the media outlets which report on them.

    Getting people believing they are part of a virtuous rules-based international order which opposes totalitarian regimes to spread freedom and democracy, instead of a tyrannical empire that works to destroy any nation which disobeys its dictates.

    And above all, manufacturing the illusion that the oppressive, exploitative imperialist status quo is normal.

    It’s not the big, famous lies like those which preceded the invasion of Iraq that make up the bulk of the adhesive holding the empire together, it’s the small, mundane lies we’re fed every single day by the plutocratic media. The ones which distort our worldview by half-truths, spins and omissions designed to normalize a status quo of murder, theft and ecocide.

    This normalization happens in the way pundits and politicians treat any attempt to end wars or redress income inequality as freakish extremism and unrealistic fantasy, when in reality it’s the most sane and normal thing in the world and the only thing unrealistic about it is the fact that attempts to advance those agendas are always sabotaged by those same pundits and politicians.

    The normalization also happens in the way endless wars, starvation deaths by US sanctions, the looming threat of total extinction via climate collapse or nuclear war, rapidly exacerbating income inequality and increasing tyranny at home and abroad are not treated as newsworthy stories, while celebrity gossip and partisan bickering between AOC and Marjorie Taylor Greene makes headline news. Every day the news media fail to report on the greatest horrors that the empire has unleashed on our world while focusing on vapid trivialities, they help normalize the horrors.

    If the mass media actually existed to share important information about the world, the US-backed genocide in Yemen would be front-page news every day instead of something which gets a marginal mention once every few weeks. Every day it isn’t, this outrageous abuse is normalized.

    If the mass media actually existed to share important information about the world, the fact that Americans are getting poorer and poorer while billionaires multiply their wealth during the pandemic would be brought front and center to everyone’s attention. Every day it isn’t, this outrageous abuse is normalized.

    If the mass media actually existed to share important information about the world, the fact that the US military just spent trillions of dollars on a decades-long occupation of Afghanistan that accomplished nothing besides making horrible people rich would have been a national scandal. Every day it isn’t, this outrageous abuse is normalized.

    But the mass media do not exist to share important information about the world. They exist to share important disinformation about the world. If they did not do this, the same US empire which is decrying the spread of disinformation today would collapse into its own footprint.

    The US empire is without exception the single most corrupt and destructive force on this planet, and it’s not even close. It is the very last institution on earth that should be in charge of deciding what online content is true and what is “disinformation”. Absolute dead last, without exaggeration.

    Depraved institutions which lie constantly and have killed millions and displaced tens of millions just since the turn of this century should not be the Ministry of Truth for the world’s online communication systems. This should be extremely obvious to everyone.

    *  *  *

    My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, following me on FacebookTwitterSoundcloud or YouTube, or throwing some money into my tip jar on Ko-fiPatreon or Paypal. If you want to read more you can buy my books. The best way to make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for at my website or on Substack, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 22:05

  • Dam Near China's Flooded Zhenghou City Collapses, Third In Last 48 Hours
    Dam Near China’s Flooded Zhenghou City Collapses, Third In Last 48 Hours

    A dam near the city of Zhengzhou in central China’s Henan province has been destroyed by heavy flooding, after being seriously damaged in heavy storms that killed several people and brought the region to a halt, local media reported.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The dam is the third to fail in recent days: over the weekend, due to severe rain, two dams in Hulun Buir City in North China’s Inner Mongolia collapsed. Fortunately, however, no injuries have been reported.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to Xinhua News Agency, the meteorological bureaus of Henan and Zhengzhou have raised the level of emergency response to meteorological disasters to the first level. The Chinese media report that the subway in Zhengzhou was flooded, and rescuers evacuated blocked passengers.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Chinese army warned that a stricken dam in the centre of the country “could collapse at any time” after being severely damaged in torrential storms that killed at least three people and brought the region to a standstill. Weather authorities also issued the highest warning level for central Henan province as downpours caused widespread disruption and the evacuation of residents of flooded streets.

    On Tuesday evening the regional unit of the People’s Liberation Army warned that the relentless downpour had caused a 20-meter breach in the Yihetan dam in Luoyang — a city of around seven million people — with the risk that it “may collapse at any time.”

    This aerial photo taken on July 19, 2020 shows water released from the Xiaolangdi Reservoir Dam in Luoyang in central China’s Henan Province.

    The PLA’s Central Theater Command said it had sent soldiers to carry out an emergency response including blasting and flood diversion.

    “On July 20, a 20-meter breach occurred at the Yihetan dam ….the riverbank was severely damaged and the dam may collapse at any time,” it said in the statement according France 24.

    Earlier in the day, state media also reported that the army sent about 20,000 personnel to carry out emergency work to preserve the integrity of the dams.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    During China’s rainy season, floods are a frequent occurrence, causing annual destruction and washing away highways, crops, and homes. However, the threat has grown over time, partially due to the extensive construction of dams and levees that have cut connections between rivers and lakes and altered floodplains that had helped absorb the surge.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Local media also reported earlier in the day that at least 12 people died in the province due to floods caused by torrential rains. Around 100,000 residents have been evacuated in the province so far. More than 6,000 military and fire service personnel are involved in rescue operations.

    In the nearby city of Zhengzhou, at least one person died and two more were missing since heavy rain began battering the city, according to the state-run People’s Daily, which reported that houses have collapsed. Zhengzhou Airport also canceled flights until Wednesday.

    Since July 16, more than 144,660 people have been affected by torrential rains in Henan Province, with 10,152 being moved to safer areas, according to the provincial flood control and drought relief headquarters cited by Xinhua.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 21:45

  • Virginia PTA Leader Ousted After Being Caught Wishing Death On Anti-Critical Race Theory Parents
    Virginia PTA Leader Ousted After Being Caught Wishing Death On Anti-Critical Race Theory Parents

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A Virginia Parent-Teacher Association (PTA) official has resigned after she was seen on video at a protest making incendiary remarks about parents who oppose critical race theory.

    Demonstrators gather in front of Los Alamitos Unified School District Headquarters in protest of critical race theory teachings in Los Alamitos, Calif., on May 11, 2021. (John Fredricks/The Epoch Times)

    In a statement released over the weekend, the PTA said that its “executive committee requested and received the resignation of Michelle Leete, who served as Vice President of Training.”

    “The actions & rhetoric of Ms. Leete & all of the like-minded partisan supporters of the SB are deeply disappointing. It evinces a deep lack of concern for children & parents, particularly where the wellbeing of children & families clash with political considerations,” a Twitter post from the organization reads.

    Leete was recorded at a counter-protest criticizing those who oppose critical race theory (CRT), an offshoot of the European Marxist school of critical theory, being taught inside classrooms.

    Let them die,” Leete said, apparently referring to CRT’s opponents during the demonstration.

    The Virginia PTA’s statement also sought to distance the organization from Leete, stating that it doesn’t condone her words and noted that she wasn’t speaking in her capacity as a high-ranking member of the state’s PTA. Leete is also an executive within the Virginia NAACP.

    In recent months, parents around the United States—particularly in Virginia’s Fairfax and Loudon counties—have taken up arms against teachers who use curriculum that borrows from CRT, the closely associated “antiracist” movement, and the similarly aligned “1619 Project.”

    Opponents of the ideology say it foments communist class struggle along racial lines and will lead to catastrophic consequences, while proponents have attempted to separate CRT from Marxism by saying it provides a more accurate interpretation of U.S. and colonial history.

    An outgrowth of the European Marxist school of critical theory, critical race theory is an academic movement which seeks to link racism, race, and power,” Legal Insurrection’s Criticalrace.org website states, noting that it radically departs from the earlier Civil Rights movement.

    Notably, CRT attempts to “challenge the very foundations of the liberal order, such as rationalism, constitutional law, and legal reasoning,” and its proponents argue that nearly all aspects of American politics, social life, and economic systems are founded on race, the website states.

    However, universities and public schools have gone a step further, according to Legal Insurrection’s site, which has compiled the actions that school officials have recently taken to promote CRT or closely aligned movements.

    According to the website, a number of schools have started essentially forcing students to undergo diversity, antiracism, and bias training; have changed admissions policies and standardized testing; changed curriculum requirements; implemented disciplinary measures that prevent academic freedom; and have renamed buildings, among other policy shifts.

    Some Republican-led states have passed legislation in recent weeks that essentially bars the teaching of CRT-derived curriculum at public schools or the use of CRT-based training materials in government offices.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 21:25

  • Goldman Flow Desk: No Institutions Bought Today's Dip
    Goldman Flow Desk: No Institutions Bought Today’s Dip

    Overnight, Goldman trader John Flood had some advice for its institutional clients: “don’t buy this dip.”

    I am a consistent buyer of dips but this wobble feels different and I am bracing for a weaker tape this week. Negative Covid headlines are picking up in velocity. Issuance spigots are fully turned on and this paper is getting harder to place from my seat (after some choppy px action related to issuance last week).

    Well, judging by today’s furious bounce in the market which was the biggest one-day gain in the S&P following three days of losses, few followed his advice. Or maybe not – according to Goldman’s flow desk, despite all the sound and fury of today’s gain, virtually no institutions took part. Here is Flood again after the close:

    I was surprised by the velocity of today’s rebound but dont think we can scream all clear just yet (i am still bracing for choppiness over the next week or so due to various positioning dynamics I flagged pre mkt yesterday).

    Our desk during the drawdown yesterday was active but today eerily quiet and not seeing institutions add to risk on our desk…feels like short hedge band aids being ripped off at the moment…ETFs represent 32% of total tape (down from 35% yesterday but up from 24% ytd avg) Consumer Discretionary shorts a focal point of pain today….(GSCBMSDS INDEX) +437bps.

    Earlier today we showed that the biggest highlight of today’s move was the face-ripping short squeeze that started yesterday and ended almost where it started one week ago.

    If Goldman is right, and if today’s move was just one giant squeeze, brace for more fireworks tomorrow as the selling resumes from a freshly squeezed and higher price point…

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 21:05

  • Over 200 People In 27 States Being Monitored For Monkeypox: CDC
    Over 200 People In 27 States Being Monitored For Monkeypox: CDC

    The Centers for Disease Control (CDC) is monitoring over 200 people in 27 states for potential exposure to monkeypox after their contacts were traced with a Texan who contracted the rare disease while traveling in Nigeria weeks ago.

    CDC file photo

    According to Stat, state and local health officials are working with federal authorities to monitor those who were in contact with the monkeypox patient, who flew into Atlanta international airport on July 8, and then on to Dallas Love airport the next day. One week later, he was diagnosed with the rare disease, which can be transmitted through bodily fluids and respiratory droplets, according to the CDC.

    Monkeypox has an incubation period of three to 17 days.

    The individuals who came in contact with the man include passengers who sat within six feet of the patient, or used the mid-cabin bathroom during the overseas flight. They will be monitored until July 30, according to the report. Also included are airline workers and family members.

    “It is a lot of people,” said Andrea McCollum, epidemiologist for the National Center for Emerging Zoonotic and Infectious Diseases. “We’re in the timeframe where we certainly want to closely monitor people.”

    “We define indirect contact as being within 6 feet of the patient in the absence of an N-95 or any filtering respirator for greater than or equal to three hours,” McCollujm continued.

    Monkeypox is caused by a virus that is related to smallpox, the only human virus to have been eradicated. It causes less severe illness than smallpox, but is still quite dangerous. The CDC said that the fatality rate for the strain of monkeypox seen in the Dallas case is about 10%.

    Monkeypox is rarely seen in people. There was a large outbreak in the U.S. in 2003, when a shipment of animals from Ghana contained several rodents and other small mammals that were infected with the virus; 47 confirmed and probable cases were reported in five states. The outbreak was the first time human cases of monkeypox were reported outside of Africa. -Stat

    Nigeria has seen a sharp uptick of monkeypox cases over the past few years, while seven cases have been reported outside its borders; four in the UK, and one in Singapore, Israel and the United States. One of the UK patients was a local healthcare worker who had unprotected contact with a monkeypox patient.

    First identified in 1970 in the Democratic Republic of the Congo, the original source of the monkeypox virus has yet to be identified – however cases have been linked to the handling of bushmeat as well as the trade of exotic small mammals, according to McCollum.

    Those who contract the disease experience fever, chills, swollen glands, and its namesake rash that spreads across the body. It can spread via inhalation of respiratory droplets from infected individuals, or contact with their lesions or bodily fluids. It can also be transmitted via bed linens or other items used by an infected person.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 20:45

  • Street Justice: Man Found Dead On Staten Island With "I Touch Little Girls" Scrawled Across His Chest
    Street Justice: Man Found Dead On Staten Island With “I Touch Little Girls” Scrawled Across His Chest

    Is this what happens when the NYPD is discouraged from enforcing the law? Rising rates of violent crime offer a sense of impunity to both criminals and, eventually, the vigilantes. And the Big Apple has a long history with vigilantism.

    As murders mount, the New York Post and NBC New York reported on a grisly murder that was discovered by police Monday night on Staten Island.

    Source: Staten Island Advance

    An 80-year-old man was found dead in an apartment building with a message scrawled on his dead flesh: “I touch little girls”. Police were called to the scene Monday morning at around 0930ET. It’s not clear what lead police to the site, but the victim was found lying in a hallway, in an obviously public place where his body – and the messages written  on it – could be viewed.

    Both in prison, and on the outside, people who abuse children are often targeted with retributive justice, even if the allegations aren’t always accurate.

    Police said the suspect was lying shirtless, face up, with cuts to his forehead and two black eyes. He also had the messages “I take dolls in my room for girls age 1-5” on his stomach and “I touch” on his foot, per the NYP.

    The NYPD’s homicide squad is investigating the incident.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 20:25

  • California Appeals Court Overturns Anti-Misgendering Law On First Amendment Grounds
    California Appeals Court Overturns Anti-Misgendering Law On First Amendment Grounds

    Authored by Matthew Vadum via The Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    A California appeals court struck down as unconstitutional a state law that penalized elder-care workers for using pronouns inconsistent with elderly long-term care patients’ claimed gender identity.

    L.G.B.T. activists from the National Center for Transgender Equality rally in front of the White House in Washington on Oct. 22, 2018. (Chip Somodevilla/Getty Images)

    Gender identity is a disputed concept. A lack of linguistic clarity has clouded the issue in recent years as the concepts of sex and sexual identity, or gender, a politically and scientifically contentious concept whose definition isn’t universally agreed upon, have become difficult to separate. Despite the distinct meanings of the two words, many institutions and individuals use “gender” to mean biological sex, especially on fillable forms and documents.

    Failing to use gender in its new meaning can be costly nowadays.

    A New York human rights law banning gender identity discrimination imposes fines of up to $250,000 for failing to use a person’s preferred personal pronouns.

    Social media giant Twitter bans users for “misgendering” or “deadnaming” transgender people, categorizing it as harassment and abuse. Deadnaming is referring to people by names they used before they changed their gender identity—for example, calling Caitlyn Jenner by that person’s birth name, Bruce Jenner.

    Facebook reportedly recognizes at least 58 genders, allowing users to select which gender to use in their profile self-descriptions. Among them are Androgynous, Bigender, Cisgender, Gender Fluid, Genderqueer, Non-binary, Pangender, Trans, and Two-Spirit.

    But in a rare legal defeat for the transgenderism movement, a ruling by the Court of Appeal of the State of California, 3rd Appellate District, sided with First Amendment speech protections over activists. The ruling by the three-judge panel was unanimous.

    The court decision in Taking Offense v. State of California, came on July 16. Taking Offense is an informal group of state taxpayers.

    The court decision affects the Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender (LGBT) Long-Term Care Facility Residents’ Bill of Rights, which the California Legislature added to the state’s Health and Safety Code in 2017.

    State Sen. Scott Wiener, a Democrat, said in 2017 that he wrote the bill because LGBT seniors face special challenges that weren’t covered by existing nursing home laws, local media reported.

    Wiener said he had received reports of LGBT seniors being mistreated.

    “We have a number of advocacy organizations that are very excited about the bill, that helped us get it passed, and they are definitely putting the word out that people living in long-term care facilities have these protections and should be aware of them,” he said.

    Health and Safety Code section 1439.51, subdivision (a)(5), “prohibits staff members of long-term care facilities from willfully and repeatedly referring to a facility resident by other than the resident’s preferred name or pronoun when clearly informed of the name and pronoun,” according to court documents.

    Taking Offense challenged that provision, arguing that it violates care facility staff members’ rights to free speech, free exercise of religion, and freedoms of thought and belief, and is vague and overbroad.

    The court said it “recognized the Legislature’s legitimate and laudable goal of rooting out discrimination against LGBT residents of long-term care facilities,” but stated that “we agree with Taking Offense that … the pronoun provision, is a content-based restriction of speech that does not survive strict scrutiny.

    “The pronoun provision—whether enforced through criminal or civil penalties—is overinclusive in that it restricts more speech than is necessary to achieve the government’s compelling interest in eliminating discrimination, including harassment, on the basis of sex. Rather than prohibiting conduct and speech amounting to actionable harassment or discrimination as those terms are legally defined, the law criminalizes even occasional, isolated, off-hand instances of willful misgendering—provided there has been at least one prior instance—without requiring that such occasional instances of misgendering amount to harassing or discriminatory conduct.

    Using the workplace context as an analogy, the statute prohibits the kind of isolated remarks not sufficiently severe or pervasive to create an objectively hostile work environment.

    “There is no requirement in the statute that the misgendering at issue here negatively affect any resident’s access to care or course of treatment. Indeed, there is no requirement that the resident even be aware of the misgendering.”

    In this case, the attorney general “has not shown that criminalizing occasional, off-hand, or isolated instances of misgendering, that need not occur in the resident’s presence and need not have a harassing or discriminatory effect on the resident’s treatment or access to care, is necessary to advance that goal.”

    The Epoch Times requested comment from California’s attorney general, Rob Bonta, a Democrat, over the weekend, but didn’t receive a reply by press time.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 20:05

  • Watch: Chinese Subway Passengers Trapped In Chest-High Floodwaters As Heavy Rains Pound Henan Province
    Watch: Chinese Subway Passengers Trapped In Chest-High Floodwaters As Heavy Rains Pound Henan Province

    Torrential rains hit central China on Tuesday, overflowing the banks of major rivers, flooding streets of metro areas, and trapping subway passengers in chest-high floodwaters, according to RT News

    There has been no official word on deaths, but dramatic videos posted on social media show the devastation in Zhengzhou in China’s Henan province. 

    One video shows passengers stuck in a subway car in chest-high floodwaters

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In other videos, passengers experienced head-high water as, for whatever reason, many still wore their masks. Subway stations were also flooded. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China experiences frequent flooding during the summer months. Henan is a central regional transport hub – roads and tunnels have been logistical nightmares for companies moving freight. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Elsewhere in the region, the water levels of the Yi River have risen to dangerously high levels. 

    There are at least 31 large and medium-sized reservoirs in the province that have surpassed their warning levels.

    Reuters notes 19 inches of rain fell in the city of Lushan over the last several days. 

    “This is the heaviest rain since I was born, with so many familiar places flooded,” said a resident of Gongyi on Chinese social media.

    We shared on Monday that two dams collapsed in China’s northwestern region of Inner Mongolia after heavy rains. 

    Heavy rains in China and Europe, megadroughts in the US, what the heck is happening worldwide? 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 19:45

  • Taibbi: NPR's Brilliant Self-Own
    Taibbi: NPR’s Brilliant Self-Own

    Authored by Matt Taibbi via TK News,

    Yesterday’s NPR article, “Outrage As A Business Model: How Ben Shapiro Is Using Facebook To Build An Empire,” is among the more unintentionally funny efforts at media criticism in recent times.

    The piece is about Ben Shapiro, but one doesn’t have to have ever followed Shapiro, or even once read the Daily Wire, to get the joke. The essence of NPR’s complaint is that a conservative media figure not only “has more followers than The Washington Post” but outperforms mainstream outlets in the digital arena, a fact that, “experts worry,” may be “furthering polarization” in America. NPR refers to polarizing media as if they’re making an anthropological discovery of a new and alien phenomenon.

    The piece goes on to note that “other conservative outlets such as The Blaze, Breitbart News and The Western Journal that “publish aggregated and opinion content” have also “generally been more successful… than legacy news outlets over the past year, according to NPR’s analysis.” In other words, they’re doing better than us.

    Is the complaint that Shapiro peddles misinformation? No: “The articles The Daily Wire publishes don’t normally include falsehoods.” Are they worried about the stoking of Trumpism, or belief that the 2020 election was stolen? No, because Shapiro “publicly denounced the alt-right and other people in Trump’s orbit,” as well as “the conspiracy theory that Trump is the rightful winner of the 2020 election.”

    Are they mad that the site is opinion disguised as news? No, because, “publicly the site does not purport to be a traditional news source.”

    The main complaint, instead, is that:

    By only covering specific stories that bolster the conservative agenda (such as… polarizing ones about race and sexuality issues)… readers still come away from The Daily Wire’s content with the impression that Republican politicians can do little wrong and cancel culture is among the nation’s greatest threats.

    NPR has not run a piece critical of Democrats since Christ was a boy. Moreover, much like the New York Times editorial page (but somehow worse), the public news leader’s monomaniacal focus on “race and sexuality issues” has become an industry in-joke. For at least a year especially, listening to NPR has been like being pinned in wrestling beyond the three-count. Everything is about race or gender, and you can’t make it stop.

    Conservatives have always hated NPR, but in the last year I hear more and more politically progressive people, in the media, talking about the station as a kind of mass torture experiment, one that makes the most patient and sensible people want to drive off the road in anguish. A brief list of just a few recent NPR reports:

    Billie Eilish Says She Is Sorry After TikTok Video Shows Her Mouthing A Racist Slur.” Pop star caught on tape using the word “chink” when she was “13 or 14 years old” triggers international outrage and expenditure of U.S. national media funding.

    Black TikTok Creators Are On Strike To Protest A Lack Of Credit For Their Work.” White TikTok users dance to Nicky Minaj lyrics like, “I’m a f****** Black Barbie. Pretty face, perfect body,” kicking off “a debate about cultural appropriation on the app.”

    Geocaching While Black: Outdoor Pastime Reveals Racism And Bias.” Area man who plays GPS-based treasure hunt game requiring forays into remote places and private property describes “horrifying” experience of people asking what he’s doing.

    Broadway Is Reopening This Fall, And Every New Play Is By A Black Writer.” All seven new plays being written by black writers is “a step toward progress,” but critics “will be watching Broadway’s next moves” to make sure “momentum” continues.

    She Struggled To Reclaim Her Indigenous Name. She Hopes Others Have It Easier.” It took Cold Lake First Nations member Danita Bilozaze nine whole months to change her name to reflect her Indigenous identity.

    Tom Hanks Is A Non-Racist. It’s Time For Him To Be Anti-Racist.” Tom Hanks pushing for more widespread teaching of the Tulsa massacre doesn’t change the fact that he’s built a career playing “white men ‘doing the right thing,’” NPR complains.

    Mixed in with Ibram Kendi recommendations for children’s books, instructions on how to “decolonize your bookshelf” and “talk to your parents about racism” (even if your parents are an interracial couple), and important dispatches from the war on complacency like “Monuments And Teams Have Changed Names As America Reckons With Racism, Birds Are Next,” “National” Public Radio in the last year has committed itself to a sliver of a sliver of a sliver of the most moralizing, tendentious, humor-deprived, jargon-obsessed segment of American society. Yet without any irony, yesterday’s piece still made deadpan complaint about Shapiro’s habit of “telling [people] what their opinions should be” and speaking in “buzzwords.”

    This was functionally the same piece as the recent New York Times article, “Is the Rise of the Substack Economy Bad for Democracy?” which similarly blamed Substack for hurting “traditional news” — and, as the headline suggests, democracy itself — by being a) popular and b) financially successful, which in media terms means not losing money hand over fist. There, too, the reasons for the rise of an alternative media outlet were presented by critics as a frightening, unsolvable Scooby-Doo mystery.

    It’s not. NPR sucks and is unlistenable, so people are going elsewhere. People like Shapiro are running their strategy in reverse and making fortunes doing it. One of these professional analysts has to figure this one out eventually, right?

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 19:25

  • Lawmakers Sound Alarm Over China Purchases Of US Farmland
    Lawmakers Sound Alarm Over China Purchases Of US Farmland

    A group of bipartisan lawmakers are sounding the alarm over foreign purchases of prime US agricultural real estate, in an effort to lessen China’s influence on the US economy.

    Recent legislation advanced by House lawmakers warns that China’s presence in the American food supply poses a national security risk, while key Senators have expressed interest in keeping American farms in American hands, according to Politico.

    The debate over farm ownership comes amid broader efforts by Congress and the Biden administration to curb the nation’s economic reliance on China, especially in key industries like food, semiconductors and minerals deemed crucial to the supply chain. The call for tighter limits on who owns America’s farms has come from a wide range of political leaders, from former Vice President Mike Pence to Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), after gaining momentum seeded in farm states.

    “America cannot allow China to control our food supply,” said Pence during a Wednesday speech at the Heritage Foundation in which he urged President Biden and Congress to “end all farm subsidies for land owned by foreign nationals.”

    Former Vice President Mike Pence speaks during an event. | Sean Rayford/Getty Images

    By the beginning of 2020, Chinese owners controlled approximately 192,000 agricultural acres in the US, worth around $1.9 billion – including land used for farming, ranching and forestry, according to the Department of Agriculture. It’s a small but growing percentage of the nearly 900 million acres of total US farmland – with the USDA reporting in 2018 that China’s agricultural investments have grown more than tenfold since 2009.

    The Communist Party has actively supported investments in foreign agriculture as part of its “One Belt One Road” economic development plans, aiming to control a greater piece of China’s food supply chain.

    “The current trend in the U.S. is leading us toward the creation of a Chinese-owned agricultural land monopoly,” Rep. Dan Newhouse (R-Wash.) warned during a recent House Appropriations hearing.

    The committee unexpectedly adopted Newhouse’s amendment to the Agriculture-FDA spending bill (H.R. 4356 (117)) that would block any new agricultural purchases by companies that are wholly or partly controlled by the Chinese government and bar Chinese-owned farms from tapping federal support programs. -Politico

    Rep. Grace Meng (D-NY) warned that the new law would “perpetuate already rising anti-Asian hate,” however she and committee leaders have indicated a willingness to find a solution as the legislation works its way through Congress, according to the report. It’s expected to reach the House floor before the end of this month as part of a broader appropriations package, however the Senate has yet to draft their own version of the spending bill.

    Rep. Grace Meng, D-N.Y. speaks during a news conference on Capitol Hill, on May 27, 2020, in Washington. | Manuel Balce Ceneta/AP Photo

    Of note, Saudi Arabia has also been buying up US farmland in the Southwest.

    “We are new in this process,” said Rep. Sanford Bishop (D-GA.), chair of the agriculture appropriations subcommittee. “I would suggest that we sit down and we work through it so we can accomplish our objective, but do it in a way that is sensitive to all those who might be somewhat offended by the approach.”

    Read the rest of the report here.

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 19:05

  • What's It Like Hauling Nuclear Weapons Across The Country?
    What’s It Like Hauling Nuclear Weapons Across The Country?

    By Noi Mahoney of FreightWaves,

    Nuclear materials couriers (NMCs) might have one of the toughest and most secretive jobs in the transportation industry: hauling nuclear bombs and other dangerous material.

    The National Nuclear Security Administration oversees the transportation of nuclear bombs and other material across the U.S. Pictured is one of the tractor-trailers used by the agency. (Photo: National Nuclear Security Administration)

    The drivers who make up the covert fleet transporting nuclear weapons to locations across the United States are operated by the National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA), an organization established in 2000.

    The Office of Secure Transportation is part of the NNSA, which is a semi-autonomous agency within the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE). Curtis Johnson, the lead federal agent recruiter for NNSA, said in some ways the job is like other trucking jobs.

    “Similar to other truck driving jobs, the NMC position does have its share of routine and monotonous long hours over the road,” Johnson told FreightWaves. “However, unlike most other trucking careers, these long-haul trips are part of a larger operation and every vehicle in the convoy is manned by multiple federal agents who share the driving, communications and security.”

    The DOE continuously recruits and hires nuclear couriers year-round, Johnson said.

    “We typically advertise the NMC position on www.usajobs.gov three or four times per year, with each job announcement being open to new applicants for one or two weeks at a time,” Johnson said.

    After completing the hiring process, NMC candidates will spend approximately 18 weeks of training at Fort Chaffee, Arkansas. The 18-week-long course is referred to as nuclear materials courier basic (NMCB) training and is a requirement for all new NMC candidates.  

    “I don’t believe that comparing NMCB to a military boot camp would be the best comparison,” Johnson said. “Our agency’s NMCB training would better compare to the specialized schooling that military service members attend after graduating from boot camp, such as infantry school or security forces training.” 

    The NMCB training runs two to three classes per year and applicants must have either military or law enforcement experience.

    The NMCB has three primary phases of training in which candidates develop the requisite knowledge, skills and abilities to become an NMC, including:

    • Driver training provides candidates with the fundamental skills to operate OST transport vehicles. Candidates must secure a CDL and pass all driving performance tests. 
    • Firearms training is provided for OST’s primary weapons and candidates must qualify with them on DOE-approved courses under both day and night conditions.
    • The final phase of training is individual and small-unit tactics tailored to OST mission operations. Candidates must pass all tactics performance evaluations. Additionally, they receive instruction on the Advanced Radio Enterprise System, federal agent legal authorities and law enforcement control tactics.

    Throughout the NMCB program, candidates must pass a physical fitness test, numerous written examinations and multiple performance tests.

    After graduation, candidates who have successfully obtained a DOE security clearance participate in over-the-road mission operations with an active federal agent unit and undergo intense performance testing in convoy operations force-on-force exercises.

    The DOE tries to hold three NMC training classes per year, with each class containing 20 NMC candidates.

    “The numbers fluctuate, but quite often only 45 to 50 of the 60 trainees will graduate each year,” Johnson said. “The top three reasons for candidates not graduating are voluntary resignations, injuries and failing to satisfactorily complete a portion of the training.”

    The salary range for an NV-01 (basic) federal agent NMC is $48,682 to $76,981.

    Candidates must undergo an 18-week nuclear materials courier basic training program. Pictured are 24 new nuclear materials couriers who graduated from the training in 2018. (Photo: National Nuclear Security Administration)

    Once a candidate becomes an NMC, he or she is authorized to make warrantless arrests and use lethal force if necessary during missions, Johnson said.  Mission travel is generally performed year-round and is almost always preplanned. The position does not require nuclear couriers to be on call at all times. 

    Missions are always transporting either nuclear weapons, nuclear weapon components or special nuclear materials, such as uranium, to secure military sites across the U.S.

    Listening to the radio or music is allowable so long as it does not interfere with convoy communications, Johnson said. 

    “Though the travel element of the job can be less than exciting, NMCs train year-round when they are not on the road doing missions,” Johnson said. “The mission pace changes from month to month, but most trips occur every other week with the other weeks being dedicated to training (shooting range, physical fitness, computer-based training, tactics).” 

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 18:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 20th July 2021

  • England's "Freedom Day" Dulled By Looming Food Shortages As "Ping-Demic" Worsens
    England’s “Freedom Day” Dulled By Looming Food Shortages As “Ping-Demic” Worsens

    In keeping with Prime Minister Boris Johnson’s promise, England lifted its last remaining COVID-linked restrictions on movement and business at midnight on Monday, finally allowing people to move about more or less freely, even as new COVID cases are climbing in the UK and much of the EU.

    Despite the surge in new cases across the UK (which has been overwhelmingly driven by the Delta variant), instances of deaths and hospitalizations have climbed only slightly.

    Over the weekend, the number of new daily cases climbed above 50K for the first time since January… but deaths remain de minimus (and that is with a 2 month lag from cases picking up)…

    Across England, work from home guidance has been removed, along with the legal obligation to wear face masks in public places. Some “key protections” will remain, however. People who test positive for Covid-19 or are contacted by NHS Test and Trace will have to self-isolate, as will those arriving from amber and red-list countries.

    BoJo’s decision has also infuriated some public health “experts”, who have in turn condemned Boris Johnson’s lifting of most COVID legal restrictions as “a threat to the world.” The UK now has the third-highest number of active COVID cases outside Brazil and Indonesia.

    Others have complained – with good reason – that “Freedom Day” isn’t quite living up to its name, with one critic calling it “all mouth, no trousers”.

    And not without reason. As the economy is supposedly reopening, a deluge of mandatory quarantine orders have been handed down to coworkers and family members of the infected have created serious problems for the British economy. The British press is calling it the “ping-demic” – a reference to being “pinged” by the NHS test-and-trace system. Some are worried that it could soon lead to food shortages, the Evening Standard said.

    Tim Morris, chief executive of the UK Major Ports Group, called what has been dubbed the “ping-demic” as the most “significant threat to ports’ resilience we have seen yet…

    “If the current trajectory of absences continues without the Government taking any action, there has to be a risk of disruption to important supply chains, including food.”

    The NHS T&T app sent a record 520,194 alerts last week. Each of those represents a person (often a worker) who must quarantine for up to ten days after reportedly coming into “close contact” with someone who has tested positive.

    Meat processors are saying 1 in 10 of their workforce were being told to self-isolate by the app, a development that could require firms “to start shutting down production lines altogether”.

    Even BoJo has been impacted: Only hours “Freedom Day” began, the PM was himself forced to go into self-isolation after his government’s health secretary tested positive.

    As Deutsche Bank’s Jim Reid pointed out in a note to clients published Monday morning, it’s becoming “increasingly difficult” in the UK to have a conversation with anybody who disagrees with your views on ending the COVID lockdown.

    Those for suggest that with all the vulnerable groups fully vaccinated and every adult having been offered at least one jab then we have to start learning to live with the virus and the summer is the best place to start. To delay would only postpone cases and risks the peak occurring in winter when the health service is usually more stretched. Mental health considerations also come into the equation as does the still relatively low death rate. Those against will suggest that fully reopening now after the recent surge in cases could soon lead to high hospitalisations and genuinely risk pressurising the health service. They would also argue that new variants could emerge with such a wide prevalence of cases and could also create huge numbers of long covid cases and more deaths than should occur. Anyway, the world will be watching the U.K. experiment with huge interest. It could show a pathway back towards normality or it could be a warning to even heavily vaccinated countries that covid will be a problem for a decent length of time still.

    Breaking down the numbers the big growth area over this period has been males aged 15-40. It’s the first time in the pandemic that there’s been a notable gender split.

    The day has been nicknamed “Freedom Day”, and for many it didn’t disappoint. As nightclubs opened their doors and dancefloors for the first time in 16 months, young people packed into establishments to celebrate. In a message recorded at the PM’s country house, Chequers, where he is spending is quarantine, Johnson urged caution even as he said it was time to move away from government rules to a new era of personal responsibility: “If we don’t do it now we’ve got to ask ourselves, when will we ever do it?”

    Indeed!!

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 02:45

  • Floods Close Rail Lines In Europe For Months Or Longer
    Floods Close Rail Lines In Europe For Months Or Longer

    By Keith Fender of Trains.com,

    Portions of the rail network in Western Europe could be out of service for months or years after massive flooding that has left hundreds dead across a swath of western Germany and Belgium. Rail service has been suspended after the floods that saw rivers running 3 yards higher than previous records in some cases and destroyed homes and businesses.

    Stranded trains are partially submerged at Gerolstein in Germany’s Eifel region, on the route from Cologne to Trier. (Courtesy Deutsche Bahn)

    Flooding was caused by a slow-moving, low-pressure weather system that sat over the region from 15 July, releasing two months’ worth of rain in two days. Over 10 inches of rain fell continuously in some places in the hilly Ardennes, Eifel, and Ruhr regions; in many cases, this was then channeled down steep-sided river valleys, unleashing massive destructive power in towns and villages in the water’s path.

    In Belgium, most rail lines south of Brussels saw disruption, with many in the hilly Ardennes region seriously damaged. The high-speed rail line connecting Brussels with Cologne in Germany was briefly closed, but as this goes through hills and over valleys, it was not seriously damaged. Services restarted over the weekend. The older rail lines that follow river valleys, often no more than a few yards above the river, fared much less well. Several routes are so badly damaged that reconstruction is expected to take until late August; less damaged routes reopened July 19.

    Situation worse in Germany

    In neighboring Germany, where the scale of destruction and loss of life has been greater, some rail lines, again built following river valleys, have been completely washed out. In total, German national railroad Deutsche Bahn has reported 600 kilometers (more than 370 miles) of tracks and 80 stations  are impassable.

    The worst affected route along the valley of the river Ahr from Remagen to Ahrbrück has seen around 12.5 miles of its 18-mile length destroyed by flood water, with all seven bridges destroyed where the line crossed from one side of the river to the other. The town of Schuld, which has been seen on TV screens across the world, lies a few miles upstream of Ahrbrück in the same river valley (the rail line in this area closed in 1973); over 110 people were killed by the floods in this region alone. The German government has promised emergency funding for flood damaged areas but has already said it is likely to take years to rebuild the worst damaged areas and their road and rail infrastructure.

    A damaged rail bridge in the Ahr River valley, as seen from a drone (Courtesy Deutsche Bahn, Alexander Menk)

    Whilst the Ahr Valley damage has been widely reported, other towns in the wider Eifel region have suffered serious damage, and the rail network and equipment parked in flood areas is now out of action, probably for months. Further north, flood water hit towns around Aachen and Cologne, destroying buildings and disrupting some rail lines. Much of the flood water ended up in the river Rhine; this led to flooding in cities along the river.

    In the Ruhr region, the main station in the city of Hagen was flooded and closed, along with rail lines through the city, as were those in the nearby city of Wuppertal. The flood waters knocked out power and telecoms services in many areas. In the city of Bonn, the electronic signaling center controlling the main rail lines along the Rhine valley was unable to function due to flood damage.

    Countries neighboring Germany have also seen flooding, with the south of the Netherlands hit with largescale disruption to rail and road travel. As the weather system moved, on flood waters have affected Switzerland and by this weekend the rain had moved east to Bavaria in Germany and the neighbouring Czech Republic, with the rail line between Dresden and Prague shut down July 18 as the river Elbe burst its banks. The Elbe Valley was the scene of massive flooding in August 2002 which closed the rail line for three months.

    European rail companies face up to changing weather

    The intensity of the flooding and sheer amount of water — with the consequent damage and loss of life — has been characterized as exceptional, with the consensus view in Germany that this is due to changes in climate and weather patterns. While many of Germany’s big rivers, such as the Rhine or the Danube routinely flood, this has historically been in spring, when snow melting on higher ground swells the rivers. Most big cities on these rivers are built to either contain the flooding or to manage it, with some districts routinely flooded. What is so different this time is that the flooding was so fast and further upstream, where rivers normally no more than small streams in summer became raging torrents overnight.

    Rail companies across Europe have been aware of the danger to their networks caused by changing weather patterns in the last two decades with torrential rain becoming more common, overwhelming tracks or structures such as bridges. In another recent example. a passenger train in Scotland derailed in August 2020, with loss of life following heavy rain that covered the track in debris after drainage failed

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 02:00

  • The Propaganda War (And How To Fight It)
    The Propaganda War (And How To Fight It)

    Authored by Cj Hokpins via The Consent Factory,

    Every totalitarian system in history has used the power of visual propaganda to generate a new “reality,” one that reifies its official ideology, remaking the world in its own paranoid image. New Normal totalitarianism is no exception. For example, take a look at this panel copied from the landing page of The Guardian — one of the global-capitalist ruling classes’ primary propaganda organs — on July 17, 2021…

    This isn’t just “biased” or “sensationalist” journalism. It is systematic official propaganda, no different than that disseminated by every other totalitarian system throughout history. Here’s the one from the following day…

    Forget about the content of the articles for a moment and just take in the cumulative visual effect. Official propaganda isn’t just information, misinformation, and disinformation. It is actually less about getting us to believe things than it is about creating an official reality, and imposing it on society by force. When you’re setting out to conjure up a new “reality,” images are extremely powerful tools, just as powerful, if not more powerful, than words.

    Here are a few more that you might recall…

    Again, the goal of this type of propaganda is not simply to deceive or terrorize the public.

    That is part of it, of course, but the more important part is forcing people to look at these images, over and over, hour after hour, day after day, at home, at work, on the streets, on television, on the Internet, everywhere.

    This is how we create “reality.” We represent our beliefs and values to ourselves, and to each other, with images, words, rituals, and other symbols and social behaviors. Essentially, we conjure our “reality” into being like actors rehearsing and performing a play … the more we all believe it, the more convincing it is.

    This is also why mandatory masks have been essential to the roll-out of the New Normal ideology. Forcing the masses to wear medical-looking masks in public was a propaganda masterstoke. Simply put, if you can force people to dress up like they’re going to work in the infectious disease ward of a hopsital every day for 17 months … presto! You’ve got yourself a new “reality” … a new, pathologized-totalitarian “reality,” a paranoid-psychotic, cult-like “reality” in which formerly semi-rational people have been reduced to nonsense-babbling lackeys who are afraid to go outside without permission from “the authorities,” and are injecting their children with experimental “vaccines.”

    The sheer power of the visual image of those masks, and being forced to repeat the ritual behavior of putting them on, has been nearly irresistible. Yes, I know that you have been resisting. So have I. But we are the minority. Denying the power of what we are up against might make you feel better, but it will get us nowhere, or, in any event, nowhere good. The fact is, the vast majority of the public — except for people in Sweden, Florida, and assorted other officially non-existent places — have been robotically performing this theatrical ritual, and harassing those who refuse to do so, and thus collectively simulating an “apocalyptic plague.”

    The New Normals — i.e., those still wearing masks outdoors, shrieking over meaningless “cases,” bullying everyone to get “vaccinated,” and collaborating with the segregation of the “Unvaccinated” — are not behaving the way they’re behaving because they are stupid. They are behaving that way because they’re living in a new “reality” that has been created for them over the course of the last 17 months by a massive official propaganda campaign, the most extensive and effective in the history of propaganda.

    In other words, to put it bluntly, we are in a propaganda war, and we’re losing. We can’t match the propaganda power of the corporate media and New Normal governments, but that doesn’t mean we can’t fight back. We can, and must, at every opportunity. Recently, readers have been asking me how to do that. So, OK, here are a few simple suggestions.

    The vast majority of obedient New Normals are not fanatical totalitarians. They’re scared, and weak, so they are following orders, adjusting their minds to the new official “reality.” Most of them do not perceive themselves as adherents of a totalitarian system or as segregationists, although that is what they are. They perceive themselves as “responsible” people following sensible “health directives” to “protect” themselves and others from the virus, and its ever-multiplying mutant “variants.” They perceive the “Unvaccinated” as a minority of dangerous, irrational “conspiracy theorist” extremists, who want to kill them and their families. When we tell them that we simply want our constitutional rights back, and to not be forced into being “vaccinated,” and censored and persecuted for expressing our views, they do not believe us. They think we’re lying. They perceive us as threats, as aggressors, as monsters, as strangers among them, who need to be dealt with … which is exactly how the authorities want them to perceive us.

    We need to try to change this perception, not by complying or being “polite” to them. On the contrary, we need to become more confrontational. No, not violent. Confrontational. There is actually a difference, though the “woke” will deny it.

    To begin with, we need to call things what they are. The “vaccination pass” system is a segregation system. It is segregationism. Call it what it is. Those cooperating with it are segregationists. They’re not “helping” or “protecting” anybody from anything. They are segregationists, pure and simple. Refer to them as “segregationists.” Don’t let them hide behind their terminology. Confront them with the fact of what they are.

    Same goes for the rest of CovidSpeak. Covid “cases,” “deaths,” and “vaccines” get scare quotes. Healthy people are not medical cases. If Covid didn’t kill someone, they are not a Covid death, period. “Vaccines” that do not behave like vaccines, and that are killing and crippling tens of thousands of people, and that have not been adequately tested for safety, and that are being indiscriminatetly forced on everyone, do not get to be called vaccines.

    OK, here comes the big idea, which will only work if enough people do it. You probably won’t like it, but what the hell, here goes …

    This is the red inverted triangle the Nazis used in the concentration camps to designate political opponents and members of the anti-Nazi resistance. Make one. Make it out of fabric, paper, or whatever material you have at hand. Put a big, black “U” in the center of it to signify “Unvaccinated.” Wear it in public, conspicuously. When people ask you what it means and why you are wearing it in public, tell them. Encourage them to do the same, assuming they’re not New Normal segregationists, in which case … well, that will be a different conversation, but go ahead and tell them too.

    That’s it. That’s the whole big idea. That, and whatever else you are already doing. The triangle is not meant to replace that. It’s just one simple way for people to express their opposition to the totalitarian, pseudo-medical segregation system that is currently being implemented … despite all that other stuff you’ve been doing, and that I have been doing, for 17 months.

    All right, I can already feel your disappointment. You thought I was going to propose a frontal assault on Klaus Schwab’s secret castle, or a guerilla naval attack on Bill Gates’ yacht. Cathartic as either of those endeavors might be, they would be (a) futile, and (b) suicidal. Frustrating as it has been for all of us, this is still a battle for hearts and minds. Essentially, it is a War on Reality (or between two “realities” if you prefer). It is being fought in people’s heads, not in the streets.

    So, let me try to sell you on this red triangle thing.

    The point of a visual protest like this is to force the New Normals to confront a different representation of what they, and we, are. A representation that accurately reflects reality. No, of course we are not in concentration camps — so, please, spare me the irate literalist emails — but we are being segregated, scapegoated, censored, humiliated, and otherwise abused, not for any legitimate public health reasons, but because of our political dissent, because we refuse to mindlessly follow orders and conform to their new official ideology. The New Normals need to be forced to perceive their beliefs and actions in that context, even if only for a few fleeting moments at the mall, or in the grocery store, or wherever.

    Think of it this way … as I explained above, they are basically performing a theatrical event, conjuring up a “pandemic reality” with words, actions, and pseudo-medical stage props. What we need to become is that asshole in the audience who destroys the suspension of disbelief and reminds everyone that they’re sitting in a theater, and not in 15th Century Denmark, by loudly taking a call on his phone right in the middle of Hamlet’s soliloquy.

    Seriously, we need to become that asshole as conspicuously as possible, as often as possible, to disrupt the show the New Normals are performing … and to remind them what they are actually doingand who they are actually doing it to.

    Look at the white people in the tweet above tormenting that girl who is just trying to go to school like any other student.

    The New Normals do not want to perceive themselves that way, as a pack of fanatical, hate-drunk segregationists, but that is what they are, because it is what they are doing … but it is not what most of them are by nature. Yes, some people are congenitally sociopathic, but no one is inherently totalitarian. We are not born fascists or segregationists. We have to be programmed to be that way. That’s what the propaganda is for, not to mention all the other authoritarian conditioning we are subjected to from the time we are children.

    Or that’s the gamble, or the leap of faith, behind the inverted red triangle thing. It is a basic non-violent civil-disobedience tactic, which works on people who still have a conscience and haven’t gone full totalitarian yet.

    Granted, it might not work this time — we are already at the stage where they are going to imprison restaurant owners for serving the “Unvaccinated” — but it might, and what have we got to lose?

    Tyler Durden
    Tue, 07/20/2021 – 00:00

  • Democrats Introduce Bill To Rename "Racist" Place Names 
    Democrats Introduce Bill To Rename “Racist” Place Names 

    Congressional Democrats introduced the Reconciliation in Place Names Act last Friday to address land areas with racist and bigoted names. More than 1,000 land units and geographic features with racist names, such as “Negro Mountain” along the Allegheny Mountains, stretching 30-mile from Deep Creek Lake, Maryland, to Casselman River in Pennsylvania, are still labeled on US maps. 

    Democratic Sens. Elizabeth Warren, Edward Markey, and Rep. Al Green, along with 25 cosponsors, all Democrats, introduced the bill.

    “We need to immediately stop honoring the ugly legacy of racism and bigotry, and that’s why I’m introducing the Reconciliation in Place Names Act with my colleagues,” Warren said in a statement.

    “This is about ending egregious expressions of systemic racism and bigotry, and taking a step toward dismantling white supremacy in our economy and society. It’s about building an America that lives up to its highest ideals,” she stated. 

    In 2015, 1,441 federally recognized places, such as mountains, forests, rivers, streams, and parks, had questionable names. 

    The Reconciliation in Place Names Act would specifically:

    • Create an advisory board composed of individuals with backgrounds in civil rights and race relations, tribal citizens, and organizations to bring a depth of knowledge and experience to the process.

    • Solicit proposals from tribal nations, state and local governments, and members of the public, and would provide an opportunity for the public to comment on name change proposals.

    • Require the advisory board to make recommendations to the Board on Geographic Names on geographic features to be renamed and to Congress on renaming Federal land units with offensive names.

    More than 600 places are using “negro”, including Negro Mountain, Big Negro Creek in Warren, Illinois; Negro Foot, Virginia, and Dead Negro Spring in Oklahoma

    There’s also “Wetback Tank,” a reservoir in Sierra County, New Mexico, which has been criticized for containing the ethnic slur used to describe Mexican Americans. 

    The bill would create an advisory board of civil rights experts with help from the public to rename the questionable land areas.

    The name changes follow a couple of years of “racist” statues of and memorials to Confederate soldiers and generals were ripped down. 

    The history of yesterday is considered dishonorable today under the new era of “wokeness.” Should these land areas be renamed and statues removed or preserved as mementos of history?

    An Irish statesman by the name of Edmund Burke once said: “Those who don’t know history are doomed to repeat it.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 23:40

  • The Strategic Bomber Race Is On: U.S. B-21 Raider VS Russian PAK DA
    The Strategic Bomber Race Is On: U.S. B-21 Raider VS Russian PAK DA

    By Southfront,

    Strategic bombers are powerful and exclusive weapons that not every air force can get. Nowadays, only Russia and the United States have this type of combat aircraft in their arsenal.

    For all intents and purposes, it is a race – who will get the new-and-improved strategic bomber first. For the United States this is the B-21 Raider, under development by Northrop Grumman on top of the B-2 bomber. The B-21 should be a flying-wing- type aircraft with a wingspan of about 42 m.

    The main goal for the developers is to minimize the visibility of the aircraft in the radad and thermal ranges. According to the preliminary reports, the B-21 should cost much less than its predecessor, only $ 550 million. However, the U.S. promising weapons are known to easily rise in prize during their development.

    Much less is known about the strategic bomber being developed in Russia. Only project name is known: PAK DA, and it is an aircraft also made according to the “flying wing” scheme, taking into account the technologies of reducing its signature during flight. At the moment, the appearance of the aircraft has already been approved and tested for radar signature.

    PAK DA will be portable of modern cruise missiles with nuclear and conventional warheads, including high-precision hypersonic long-range missiles. It is hard to compare the two warplanes, currently, as they are both veiled in secrecy. It is likely that in terms of stealth, the B-21 will significantly surpass the PAK DA, since the Americans have a lot of experience in this area.

    Another potential advantage of the B-21 is their ability to detect air and ground targets, as the United States has been developing radars with AFAR for much longer.

    Additionally, the B-21 power plant, based on the latest technical solutions of the F135 or PW9000 engines, will also be better – the PAK DA power plant is made on the basis of the NK-32 engine developed in the late 1970s. A potential advantage of the Russian vehicle may be the presence of decimeter L-band antennas, which provide detection of low-signature aircraft, which partly compensates for the greater radar signature of the PAK DA compared to the B-21.

    A serious drawback of Russian combat aircraft is the lack of small-sized interceptor missiles capable of hitting enemy air-to-air missiles with a direct hit.

    Both B-21 and PAK DA should also include the unmanned flight mode and will be able to carry long-range subsonic cruise missiles with nuclear and conventional warheads, as well as promising hypersonic weapons.

    Meanwhile, Moscow could have the upper hand in terms of hypersonic weapons.

    Thus, the U.S. B-21 has better stealth, and more efficient engines, and the best AFAR radars. This comes in addition to compact anti-missiles, and laser self-defense weapons. In conclusion, it should be considered that the advantage of a particular platform can only be proved by its long-term operation, since technologically sophisticated models risk reducing overall efficiency as they are less convenient to operate.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 23:20

  • "Your Safety Is In Jeopardy!" – Baltimore City Hit With Cop And Firefighter Shortage
    “Your Safety Is In Jeopardy!” – Baltimore City Hit With Cop And Firefighter Shortage

    Baltimore City continues to descend into chaos this summer as labor shortages plague the police department and firehouses. 

    Residents could be at risk of police not responding to 911 calls or firefighters not arriving to a fire or other emergency. Under new management, newly elected Mayor Brandon Scott fails to keep public emergency services stocked with first responders. 

    According to Baltimore City Fraternal Order of Police’s (FOP) Twitter, the city is experiencing a cop shortage as patrols plunge. The police department is more than 500 cops short (something we outlined not too long ago). 

    “CITIZENS OF BALTIMORE: Last night, the @baltimorepolice Northern District had 7 officers on the street and the other Districts averaged 12 officers. Ten years ago the average was 20 officers/shift. YOUR SAFETY IS IN JEOPARDY!” Baltimore City FOP tweeted. 

    Declining patrols and a liberal City Hall have transformed the city into a chaotic mess this summer. Violent crime is surging, and homicides are expected to break above the 300-level for the six consecutive year. 

    Maryland Governor Larry Hogan has blamed the surge in violent crimes on Baltimore City State’s Attorney Marilyn Mosby’s halt on prosecuting minor traffic violations, prostitution, drug possession, and other minor offenses during the virus pandemic.

    Meanwhile, the official Twitter handle for the Baltimore Firefighters Union IAFF Local 734, reports one of the busiest fire departments in the city, Engine 13, closed on Saturday because of “staffing issues.” The video below shows the firehouse unable to respond to fire down the street. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Police and fire shortages can’t be good. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The question remains if America’s labor shortage is driving police and firefighter shortages in the city, or people just don’t want to risk their lives for an imploding town. Soon, basic public services could be in jeopardy. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 23:00

  • Beijing Vet Dies Of Monkey B Virus, Which Has 70-80% Fatality Rate
    Beijing Vet Dies Of Monkey B Virus, Which Has 70-80% Fatality Rate

    Authored by Nicole Hao via The Epoch Times,

    On July 16, China reported the first Monkey B Virus death in its history. The individual, identified as a veterinarian in Beijing, was infected by monkeys in March and passed away on May 27.

    Monkey B virus (BV), also known as Herpes B virus, has a fatality rate of 70 to 80 percent, the Chinese Center for Disease Control and Prevention’s English journal the “China CDC Weekly” cited in its July 17 report. The report said that the deceased’s close contacts were tested in April and were free of the virus.

    According to the U.S. CDC, humans typically get infected with BV when bitten or scratched by an infected macaque monkey, or have contact with a macaque’s eyes, nose, or mouth. The CDC highlighted that there has only been one case of BV human-to-human transmission documented in history.

    It’s unclear which type of monkey the victim was in contact with when he contracted the virus.

    First Death in China

    The deceased veterinary was 53 years old. He worked for a non-human primate breeding and experimental institution in Beijing.

    On March 4 and 6, the veterinarian dissected two dead monkeys. One month after the dissections, the veterinarian “experienced nausea and vomiting followed by fever with neurological symptoms,” according to the report.

    Because doctors in Beijing didn’t have any experience with BV infections, the veterinarian was asked to visit several hospitals for treatment, but was not diagnosed until April 17 when doctors collected his cerebrospinal fluid and that of his two co-workers to test for monkey-related viruses.

    The results showed that the veterinarian was infected with BV.

    A group of scientists from China CDC and Capital Medical University concluded in their report: “This implied that BV in monkeys might pose a potential zoonotic threat to the occupational workers.”

    Medical workers deliver a patient to the fever clinic at a hospital in Beijing, China, on Jan. 13, 2021. (GREG BAKER/AFP via Getty Images)

    According to the U.S. CDC, BV infections start with flu-like symptoms, which include fever and chills, muscle aches, fatigue, and headaches. The symptoms typically start within one month after exposure to a BV infected monkey.

    The first human infection was identified in 1932, and since then, only 50 cases of transmission to humans have been reported. Of those, most had come into contact with a monkey, and 21 died.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 22:40

  • Tokyo Olympics Face Widespread Opposition
    Tokyo Olympics Face Widespread Opposition

    With the Tokyo Olympics just four days away, now would normally be the time for anticipation to build, for the Olympic spark to spread from the host country all over the world and for athletes to wrap up years of preparation.

    This year though, as Statista’s Felix Richer notes, with COVID-19 still lurking, things are sadly different.

    The 2020 Summer Olympics, postponed to 2021 due to the pandemic, are widely met with a strange mix of indifference and dismissal. Amid fears of rising case numbers and aggressive virus variants, the Japanese people are firmly against the Tokyo Games, while the global public has trouble getting excited for yet another crowdless event, seemingly prioritizing commercial interests over public health concerns.

    According to a recent Ipsos survey, an average of 57 percent of respondents across the 28 countries in which the poll was conducted are opposed to holding the games this year, with Japanese opposition particularly strong at 78 percent.

    Infographic: Tokyo Olympics Face Widespread Opposition | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    With athletes pulling out of the Olympics due to COVID infections and others reportedly testing positive after arriving at the Olympic Village, doubts over the safety of the megaevent continue to mount.

    According to a Asahi Shimbun poll, 68 percent of Japanese respondents doubt that the Games can be held “safe and secure”, a promise repeatedly made by Prime Minister Yoshihide Suga and the IOC.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 22:20

  • Evergrande Stock Sinks Below Liquidation Level
    Evergrande Stock Sinks Below Liquidation Level

    By Sofia Horta e Costa, Bloomberg reporter and macro commentator

    The steepening rout in China Evergrande’s shares have sent them far below the value of its assets, showing how pessimistic investors are about the developer’s ability to generate cash.

    Evergrande shares trade at just 62% of book value following Monday’s plunge, the lowest-ever valuation in data compiled by Bloomberg going back to its IPO in 2009. The wide deviation from its market value suggests shareholders are pricing in a significant decline in the assets’ earnings power. In terms of dollar amounts, its shares have lost $15 billion in value since this year’s January high.

    The collapse in the valuation of the shares is a problem for a heavily indebted company with narrowing options for raising funds. It’s not just its own shares: subsidiary Evergrande Property Services has lost about $17 billion in value since its February high, while Evergrande New Energy Vehicle is down more than $60 billion in the period. Evergrande controls more than 60% of both firms. The value of Hengten Networks — a Hong Kong-listed internet services provider in which Evergrande has a 38% stake — has dropped about $15 billion.

    The company’s access to freely available cash is also shrinking. After the shares plunged 16% on Monday following the freezing of a bank deposit, a city in Hunan province halted sales at two of the company’s residential projects, alleging the developer didn’t properly handle funds. The suspension will last until Oct. 13 and Evergrande can’t use funds currently deposited in supervised bank accounts, according to a statement.

    Evergrande will discuss plans for a special dividend to its shareholders at a board meeting on July 27. The developer is unlikely to fund such a plan with cash, according to CCB International analysts. They predict the most likely outcome would involve a share distribution in one of its units, namely Evergrande New Energy Vehicle, but the value of those shares is fast evaporating.

    The company’s bonds are also pricing in a bleak outcome for the developer. Evergrande’s 8.75% dollar bond due 2025 trades at 58.5 cents, Bloomberg-compiled prices show. That’s down from 82.9 cents at the beginning of the year. The company hasn’t sold a single dollar bond in more than 17 months.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 22:00

  • Half Million Chinese Sign Letter Demanding WHO Probe US Fort Detrick Lab 
    Half Million Chinese Sign Letter Demanding WHO Probe US Fort Detrick Lab 

    Chinese state-run media Global Times attempts to flip the narrative that maybe COVID-19 originated from a US Lab.

    Chinese Communist Party’s top mouthpiece, Global Times, says more than half a million Chinese citizens have endorsed a letter to request the World Health Organization (WHO) to investigate a top-secret biosafety level 4 lab in Maryland. 

    The move to divert attention from the Wuhan Institute of Virology comes as the Chinese media outlet points out that a group of Chinese netizens drafted a letter to the WHO to investigate the US Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases at Fort Detrick, Maryland.

    The letter went on to say Fort Detrick lab is known to store some of the most deadly and infectious viruses, including Ebola, novel coronavirus, SARS, MERS, smallpox, among others. It added if any of these dangerous diseases were leaked or accidentally escaped, they could pose a severe risk to the international community. 

    “But this lab has a notorious record on lab security. There have been scandals of anthrax bacterium from the lab being stolen, causing poisoning to many and even death. There has been a leakage incident in the lab in the autumn of 2019 right before the outbreak of the COVID-19 epidemic, however, detailed information had been withheld by the US under excuses of national security,” the letter said. 

    Global Times continues to twist the narrative that perhaps the novel coronavirus could be linked to the Maryland lab. 

    The letter noted that China has allowed Western virologists and US media to visit the Wuhan lab, while the US has not followed suit with Fort Detrick nor released data with “countries including China that are independent from US geopolitical influence.”

    “What is more perplexing is that, when China allowed virologists from Western countries and even US mainstream media to visit the Wuhan Institute of Virology, the US has not opened the Fort Detrick lab, let alone shared the original data with countries including China that are independent from US geopolitical influence,” it added. 

    We’ve noted before the US funded research at the Wuhan lab for “understanding the risk of bat coronavirus emergence.”

    The game at play between superpowers is to control the narrative of COVID’s origins. Notice how there’s no mention of Wuhan South China Seafood Wholesale Market anymore as top Biden administration officials push the theory that the virus accidentally escaped from the Wuhan lab.  

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 21:40

  • The Panic Pandemic
    The Panic Pandemic

    Authored by John Tierney via City-Journal.com,

    Fearmongering from journalists, scientists, and politicians did more harm than the virus…

    The United States suffered through two lethal waves of contagion in the past year and a half. The first was a viral pandemic that killed about one in 500 Americans—typically, a person over 75 suffering from other serious conditions. The second, and far more catastrophic, was a moral panic that swept the nation’s guiding institutions.

    Instead of keeping calm and carrying on, the American elite flouted the norms of governance, journalism, academic freedom—and, worst of all, science. They misled the public about the origins of the virus and the true risk that it posed. Ignoring their own carefully prepared plans for a pandemic, they claimed unprecedented powers to impose untested strategies, with terrible collateral damage. As evidence of their mistakes mounted, they stifled debate by vilifying dissenters, censoring criticism, and suppressing scientific research.

    If, as seems increasingly plausible, the coronavirus that causes Covid-19 leaked out of a laboratory in Wuhan, it is the costliest blunder ever committed by scientists. Whatever the pandemic’s origin, the response to it is the worst mistake in the history of the public-health profession. We still have no convincing evidence that the lockdowns saved lives, but lots of evidence that they have already cost lives and will prove deadlier in the long run than the virus itself.

    One in three people worldwide lost a job or a business during the lockdowns, and half saw their earnings drop, according to a Gallup poll. Children, never at risk from the virus, in many places essentially lost a year of school. The economic and health consequences were felt most acutely among the less affluent in America and in the rest of the world, where the World Bank estimates that more than 100 million have been pushed into extreme poverty.

    The leaders responsible for these disasters continue to pretend that their policies worked and assume that they can keep fooling the public. They’ve promised to deploy these strategies again in the future, and they might even succeed in doing so—unless we begin to understand what went wrong.

    The panic was started, as usual, by journalists. As the virus spread early last year, they highlighted the most alarming statistics and the scariest images: the estimates of a fatality rate ten to 50 times higher than the flu, the chaotic scenes at hospitals in Italy and New York City, the predictions that national health-care systems were about to collapse.

    The full-scale panic was set off by the release in March 2020 of a computer model at the Imperial College in London, which projected that—unless drastic measures were taken—intensive-care units would have 30 Covid patients for every available bed and that America would see 2.2 million deaths by the end of the summer. The British researchers announced that the “only viable strategy” was to impose draconian restrictions on businesses, schools, and social gatherings until a vaccine arrived.

    This extraordinary project was swiftly declared the “consensus” among public-health officials, politicians, journalists, and academics. Anthony Fauci, director of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, endorsed it and became the unassailable authority for those purporting to “follow the science.” What had originally been a limited lockdown—“15 days to slow the spread”—became long-term policy across much of the United States and the world. A few scientists and public-health experts objected, noting that an extended lockdown was a novel strategy of unknown effectiveness that had been rejected in previous plans for a pandemic. It was a dangerous experiment being conducted without knowing the answer to the most basic question: Just how lethal is this virus?

    The most prominent early critic was John Ioannidis, an epidemiologist at Stanford, who published an essay for STAT headlined “A Fiasco in the Making? As the Coronavirus Pandemic Takes Hold, We Are Making Decisions Without Reliable Data.” While a short-term lockdown made sense, he argued, an extended lockdown could prove worse than the disease, and scientists needed to do more intensive testing to determine the risk. The article offered common-sense advice from one of the world’s most frequently cited authorities on the credibility of medical research, but it provoked a furious backlash on Twitter from scientists and journalists.

    The fury intensified in April 2020, when Ioannidis followed his own advice by joining with Jay Bhattacharya and other colleagues from Stanford to gauge the spread of Covid in the surrounding area, Santa Clara County. After testing for Covid antibodies in the blood of several thousand volunteers, they estimated that the fatality rate among the infected in the county was about 0.2 percent, twice as high as for the flu but considerably lower than the assumptions of public-health officials and computer modelers. The researchers acknowledged that the fatality rate could be substantially higher in other places where the virus spread extensively in nursing homes (which hadn’t yet occurred in the Santa Clara area). But merely by reporting data that didn’t fit the official panic narrative, they became targets.

    Other scientists lambasted the researchers and claimed that methodological weaknesses in the study made the results meaningless. A statistician at Columbia wrote that the researchers “owe us all an apology.” A biologist at the University of North Carolina said that the study was “horrible science.” A Rutgers chemist called Ioannidis a “mediocrity” who “cannot even formulate a simulacrum of a coherent, rational argument.” A year later, Ioannidis still marvels at the attacks on the study (which was eventually published in a leading epidemiology journal). “Scientists whom I respect started acting like warriors who had to subvert the enemy,” he says. “Every paper I’ve written has errors—I’m a scientist, not the pope—but the main conclusions of this one were correct and have withstood the criticism.”

    Mainstream journalists piled on with hit pieces quoting critics and accusing the researchers of endangering lives by questioning lockdowns. The Nation called the research a “black mark” for Stanford. The cheapest shots came from BuzzFeed, which devoted thousands of words to a series of trivial objections and baseless accusations. The article that got the most attention was BuzzFeed’s breathless revelation that an airline executive opposed to lockdowns had contributed $5,000—yes, five thousand dollars!—to an anonymized fund at Stanford that had helped finance the Santa Clara fieldwork.

    The notion that a team of prominent academics, who were not paid for their work in the study, would risk their reputations by skewing results for the sake of a $5,000 donation was absurd on its face—and even more ludicrous, given that Ioannidis, Bhattacharya, and the lead investigator, Eran Bendavid, said that they weren’t even aware of the donation while conducting the study. But Stanford University was so cowed by the online uproar that it subjected the researchers to a two-month fact-finding inquiry by an outside legal firm. The inquiry found no evidence of conflict of interest, but the smear campaign succeeded in sending a clear message to scientists everywhere: Don’t question the lockdown narrative.

    In a brief interlude of journalistic competence, two veteran science writers, Jeanne Lenzer and Shannon Brownlee, published an article in Scientific American decrying the politicization of Covid research. They defended the integrity and methodology of the Stanford researchers, noting that some subsequent studies had found similar rates of fatality among the infected. (In his latest review of the literature, Ioannidis now estimates that the average fatality rate in Europe and the Americas is 0.3 to 0.4 percent and about 0.2 percent among people not living in institutions.) Lenzer and Brownlee lamented that the unjust criticism and ad hominem vitriol had suppressed a legitimate debate by intimidating the scientific community. Their editors then proceeded to prove their point. Responding to more online fury, Scientific American repented by publishing an editor’s note that essentially repudiated its own article. The editors printed BuzzFeed’s accusations as the final word on the matter, refusing to publish a rebuttal from the article’s authors or a supporting letter from Jeffrey Flier, former dean of Harvard Medical School. Scientific American, long the most venerable publication in its field, now bowed to the scientific authority of BuzzFeed.

    Editors of research journals fell into line, too. When Thomas Benfield, one of the researchers in Denmark conducting the first large randomized controlled trial of mask efficacy against Covid, was asked why they were taking so long to publish the much-anticipated findings, he promised them as “as soon as a journal is brave enough to accept the paper.” After being rejected by The LancetThe New England Journal of Medicine, and JAMA, the study finally appeared in the Annals of Internal Medicine, and the reason for the editors’ reluctance became clear: the study showed that a mask did not protect the wearer, which contradicted claims by the Centers for Disease Control and other health authorities.

    Stefan Baral, an epidemiologist at Johns Hopkins with 350 publications to his name, submitted a critique of lockdowns to more than ten journals and finally gave up—the “first time in my career that I could not get a piece placed anywhere,” he said. Martin Kulldorff, an epidemiologist at Harvard, had a similar experience with his article, early in the pandemic, arguing that resources should be focused on protecting the elderly. “Just as in war,” Kulldorff wrote, “we must exploit the characteristics of the enemy in order to defeat it with the minimum number of casualties. Since Covid-19 operates in a highly age specific manner, mandated counter measures must also be age specific. If not, lives will be unnecessarily lost.” It was a tragically accurate prophecy from one of the leading experts on infectious disease, but Kulldorff couldn’t find a scientific journal or media outlet to accept the article, so he ended up posting it on his own LinkedIn page. “There’s always a certain amount of herd thinking in science,” Kulldorff says, “but I’ve never seen it reach this level. Most of the epidemiologists and other scientists I’ve spoken to in private are against lockdowns, but they’re afraid to speak up.”

    To break the silence, Kulldorff joined with Stanford’s Bhattacharya and Sunetra Gupta of Oxford to issue a plea for “focused protection,” called the Great Barrington Declaration. They urged officials to divert more resources to shield the elderly, such as doing more tests of the staff at nursing homes and hospitals, while reopening business and schools for younger people, which would ultimately protect the vulnerable as herd immunity grew among the low-risk population.

    They managed to attract attention but not the kind they hoped for. Though tens of thousands of other scientists and doctors went on to sign the declaration, the press caricatured it as a deadly “let it rip” strategy and an “ethical nightmare” from “Covid deniers” and “agents of misinformation.” Google initially shadow-banned it so that the first page of search results for “Great Barrington Declaration” showed only criticism of it (like an article calling it “the work of a climate denial network”) but not the declaration itself. Facebook shut down the scientists’ page for a week for violating unspecified “community standards.”

    The most reviled heretic was Scott Atlas, a medical doctor and health-policy analyst at Stanford’s Hoover Institution. He, too, urged focused protection on nursing homes and calculated that the medical, social, and economic disruptions of the lockdowns would cost more years of life than the coronavirus. When he joined the White House coronavirus task force, Bill Gates derided him as “this Stanford guy with no background” promoting “crackpot theories.” Nearly 100 members of Stanford’s faculty signed a letter denouncing his “falsehoods and misrepresentations of science,” and an editorial in the Stanford Daily urged the university to sever its ties to Hoover.

    The Stanford faculty senate overwhelmingly voted to condemn Atlas’s actions as “anathema to our community, our values and our belief that we should use knowledge for good.” Several professors from Stanford’s medical school demanded further punishment in a JAMA article, “When Physicians Engage in Practices That Threaten the Nation’s Health.” The article, which misrepresented Atlas’s views as well as the evidence on the efficacy of lockdowns, urged professional medical societies and medical-licensing boards to take action against Atlas on the grounds that it was “ethically inappropriate for physicians to publicly recommend behaviors or interventions that are not scientifically well grounded.”

    But if it was unethical to recommend “interventions that are not scientifically well grounded,” how could anyone condone the lockdowns? “It was utterly immoral to conduct this society-wide intervention without the evidence to justify it,” Bhattacharya says. “The immediate results have been disastrous, especially for the poor, and the long-term effect will be to fundamentally undermine trust in public health and science.” The traditional strategy for dealing with pandemics was to isolate the infected and protect the most vulnerable, just as Atlas and the Great Barrington scientists recommended. The CDC’s pre-pandemic planning scenarios didn’t recommend extended school closures or any shutdown of businesses even during a plague as deadly as the 1918 Spanish flu. Yet Fauci dismissed the focused-protection strategy as “total nonsense” to “anybody who has any experience in epidemiology and infectious diseases,” and his verdict became “the science” to leaders in America and elsewhere.

    Fortunately, a few leaders followed the science in a different way. Instead of blindly trusting Fauci, they listened to his critics and adopted the focused-protection strategy—most notably, in Florida. Its governor, Ron DeSantis, began to doubt the public-health establishment early in the pandemic, when computer models projected that Covid patients would greatly outnumber hospital beds in many states. Governors in New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and Michigan were so alarmed and so determined to free up hospital beds that they directed nursing homes and other facilities to admit or readmit Covid patients—with deadly results.

    But DeSantis was skeptical of the hospital projections—for good reason, as no state actually ran out of beds—and more worried about the risk of Covid spreading in nursing homes. He forbade long-term-care centers to admit anyone infected with Covid and ordered frequent testing of the staff at senior-care centers. After locking down last spring, he reopened businesses, schools, and restaurants early, rejected mask mandates, and ignored protests from the press and the state’s Democratic leaders. Fauci warned that Florida was “asking for trouble,” but DeSantis went on seeking and heeding advice from Atlas and the Great Barrington scientists, who were astonished to speak with a politician already familiar with just about every study they mentioned to him.

    “DeSantis was an incredible outlier,” Atlas says. “He dug up the data and read the scientific papers and analyzed it all himself. In our discussions, he’d bounce ideas off me, but he was already on top of the details of everything. He always had the perspective to see the larger harms of lockdowns and the need to concentrate testing and other resources on the elderly. And he has been proven correct.”

    If Florida had simply done no worse than the rest of the country during the pandemic, that would have been enough to discredit the lockdown strategy. The state effectively served as the control group in a natural experiment, and no medical treatment with dangerous side effects would be approved if the control group fared no differently from the treatment group. But the outcome of this experiment was even more damning.

    Florida’s mortality rate from Covid is lower than the national average among those over 65 and also among younger people, so that the state’s age-adjusted Covid mortality rate is lower than that of all but ten other states. And by the most important measure, the overall rate of “excess mortality” (the number of deaths above normal), Florida has also done better than the national average. Its rate of excess mortality is significantly lower than that of the most restrictive state, California, particularly among younger adults, many of whom died not from Covid but from causes related to the lockdowns: cancer screenings and treatments were delayed, and there were sharp increases in deaths from drug overdoses and from heart attacks not treated promptly.

    Chart by Jamie Meggas

    If the treatment group in a clinical trial were dying off faster than the control group, an ethical researcher would halt the experiment. But the lockdown proponents were undeterred by the numbers in Florida, or by similar results elsewhere, including a comparable natural experiment involving European countries with the least restrictive policies. Sweden, Finland, and Norway rejected mask mandates and extended lockdowns, and they have each suffered significantly less excess mortality than most other European countries during the pandemic.

    A nationwide analysis in Sweden showed that keeping schools open throughout the pandemic, without masks or social distancing, had little effect on the spread of Covid, but school closures and mask mandates for students continued elsewhere. Another Swedish researcher, Jonas Ludvigsson, reported that not a single schoolchild in the country died from Covid in Sweden and that their teachers’ risk of serious illness was lower than for the rest of the workforce—but these findings provoked so many online attacks and threats that Ludvigsson decided to stop researching or discussing Covid.

    Social-media platforms continued censoring scientists and journalists who questioned lockdowns and mask mandates. YouTube removed a video discussion between DeSantis and the Great Barrington scientists, on the grounds that it “contradicts the consensus” on the efficacy of masks, and also took down the Hoover Institution’s interview with Atlas. Twitter locked out Atlas and Kulldorff for scientifically accurate challenges to mask orthodoxy. A peer-reviewed German study reporting harms to children from mask-wearing was suppressed on Facebook (which labeled my City Journal article “Partly False” because it cited the study) and also at ResearchGate, one of the most widely used websites for scientists to post their papers. ResearchGate refused to explain the censorship to the German scientists, telling them only that the paper was removed from the website in response to “reports from the community about the subject-matter.”

    The social-media censors and scientific establishment, aided by the Chinese government, succeeded for a year in suppressing the lab-leak theory, depriving vaccine developers of potentially valuable insights into the virus’s evolution. It’s understandable, if deplorable, that the researchers and officials involved in supporting the Wuhan lab research would cover up the possibility that they’d unleashed a Frankenstein on the world. What’s harder to explain is why journalists and the rest of the scientific community so eagerly bought that story, along with the rest of the Covid narrative.

    Why the elite panic? Why did so many go so wrong for so long? When journalists and scientists finally faced up to their mistake in ruling out the lab-leak theory, they blamed their favorite villain: Donald Trump. He had espoused the theory, so they assumed it must be wrong. And since he disagreed at times with Fauci about the danger of the virus and the need for lockdowns, then Fauci must be right, and this was such a deadly plague that the norms of journalism and science must be suspended. Millions would die unless Fauci was obeyed and dissenters were silenced.

    But neither the plague nor Trump explains the panic. Yes, the virus was deadly, and Trump’s erratic pronouncements contributed to the confusion and partisanship, but the panic was due to two preexisting pathologies that afflicted other countries, too. The first is what I have called the Crisis Crisis, the incessant state of alarm fomented by journalists and politicians. It’s a longstanding problem—humanity was supposedly doomed in the last century by the “population crisis” and the “energy crisis”—that has dramatically worsened with the cable and digital competition for ratings, clicks, and retweets. To keep audiences frightened around the clock, journalists seek out Cassandras with their own incentives for fearmongering: politicians, bureaucrats, activists, academics, and assorted experts who gain publicity, prestige, funding, and power during a crisis.

    Unlike many proclaimed crises, an epidemic is a genuine threat, but the crisis industry can’t resist exaggerating the danger, and doomsaying is rarely penalized. Early in the 1980s AIDS epidemic, the New York Times reported the terrifying possibility that the virus could spread to children through “routine close contact”—quoting from a study by Anthony Fauci. Life magazine wildly exaggerated the number of infections in a cover story, headlined “Now No One Is Safe from AIDS.” It cited a study by Robert Redfield, the future leader of the CDC during the Covid pandemic, predicting that AIDS would soon spread as rapidly among heterosexuals as among homosexuals. Both scientists were absolutely wrong, of course, but the false alarms didn’t harm their careers or their credibility.

    Journalists and politicians extend professional courtesy to fellow crisis-mongers by ignoring their mistakes, such as the previous predictions by Neil Ferguson. His team at Imperial College projected up to 65,000 deaths in the United Kingdom from swine flu and 200 million deaths worldwide from bird flu. The death toll each time was in the hundreds, but never mind: when Ferguson’s team projected millions of American deaths from Covid, that was considered reason enough to follow its recommendation for extended lockdowns. And when the modelers’ assumption about the fatality rate proved too high, that mistake was ignored, too.

    Journalists kept highlighting the most alarming warnings, presented without context. They needed to keep their audience scared, and they succeeded. For Americans under 70, the probability of surviving a Covid infection was about 99.9 percent, but fear of the virus was higher among the young than among the elderly, and polls showed that people of all ages vastly overestimated the risk of being hospitalized or dying.

    The second pathology underlying the elite’s Covid panic is the politicization of research—what I have termed the Left’s war on science, another long-standing problem that has gotten much worse. Just as the progressives a century ago yearned for a nation directed by “expert social engineers”—scientific high priests unconstrained by voters and public opinion—today’s progressives want sweeping new powers for politicians and bureaucrats who “believe in science,” meaning that they use the Left’s version of science to justify their edicts. Now that so many elite institutions are political monocultures, progressives have more power than ever to enforce groupthink and suppress debate. Well before the pandemic, they had mastered the tactics for demonizing and silencing scientists whose findings challenged progressive orthodoxy on issues such as IQ, sex differences, race, family structure, transgenderism, and climate change.

    And then along came Covid—“God’s gift to the Left,” in Jane Fonda’s words. Exaggerating the danger and deflecting blame from China to Trump offered not only short-term political benefits, damaging his reelection prospects, but also an extraordinary opportunity to empower social engineers in Washington and state capitals. Early in the pandemic, Fauci expressed doubt that it was politically possible to lock down American cities, but he underestimated the effectiveness of the crisis industry’s scaremongering. Americans were so frightened that they surrendered their freedoms to work, study, worship, dine, play, socialize, or even leave their homes. Progressives celebrated this “paradigm shift,” calling it a “blueprint” for dealing with climate change.

    This experience should be a lesson in what not to do, and whom not to trust. Do not assume that the media’s version of a crisis resembles reality. Do not count on mainstream journalists and their favorite doomsayers to put risks in perspective. Do not expect those who follow “the science” to know what they’re talking about. Science is a process of discovery and debate, not a faith to profess or a dogma to live by. It provides a description of the world, not a prescription for public policy, and specialists in one discipline do not have the knowledge or perspective to guide society. They’re biased by their own narrow focus and self-interest. Fauci and Deborah Birx, the physician who allied with him against Atlas on the White House task force, had to answer for the daily Covid death toll—that ever-present chyron at the bottom of the television screen—so they focused on one disease instead of the collateral damage of their panic-driven policies.

    “The Fauci-Birx lockdowns were a sinful, unconscionable, heinous mistake, and they will never admit they were wrong,” Atlas says. Neither will the journalists and politicians who panicked along with them. They’re still portraying lockdowns as not just a success but also a precedent—proof that Americans can sacrifice for the common good when directed by wise scientists and benevolent autocrats. But the sacrifice did far more harm than good, and the burden was not shared equally. The brunt was borne by the most vulnerable in America and the poorest countries of the world. Students from disadvantaged families suffered the most from school closures, and children everywhere spent a year wearing masks solely to assuage the neurotic fears of adults. The less educated lost jobs so that professionals at minimal risk could feel safer as they kept working at home on their laptops. Silicon Valley (and its censors) prospered from lockdowns that bankrupted local businesses.

    Luminaries united on Zoom and YouTube to assure the public that “we’re all in this together.” But we weren’t. When the panic infected the nation’s elite—the modern gentry who profess such concern for the downtrodden—it turned out that they weren’t so different from aristocrats of the past. They were in it for themselves.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 21:20

  • Iraq's PM To Tell Biden In White House Visit: 'US Combat Troops Have Got To Go'
    Iraq’s PM To Tell Biden In White House Visit: ‘US Combat Troops Have Got To Go’

    Next week on July 26 President Joe Biden is expected to host Iraqi Prime Minister Mustafa al-Kadhemi at the White House in order to “highlight the strategic partnership between the United States in Iraq,” according to a US statement. 

    But the Iraqi side is now saying that American combat troops have got to go. Al-Kadhemi emphasized in a new statement at the start of this week: “The visit will be to set out this relationship, and to put an end to the presence of combat forces, because the Iraqi army can now fight for itself on behalf of Iraqis and the world against terrorist groups in Iraq. There is no need for combat troops.”

    Then Senator Joe Biden in Iraq in 2007, Getty Images

    He did say that US training and intelligence assistance, along with air power when requested would continue to aid the anti-ISIS and counterterror mission in the country.

    Since Trump’s final year in office, the presence of US combat forces in Iraq has been scaled down little by little, with some bases even being handed over to Iraq’s army; however, Iraq’s parliament all the way back in January 2020 passed a resolution demanding a full and final exit of all US troops. This was prompted by the assassination that month of IRGC Quds chief Qassem Soleimani and founder of Iraq’s powerful Kataib Hezbollah militia, Abu Mahdi al-Muhandis.

    This was followed by large-scale protests across major Iraqi cities demanding that foreign troops leave. Since then there’s also been tit-for-tat attacks between pro-Iranian Iraq groups and American forces. Recently Biden has struck ‘Iran-backed’ targets inside eastern Syria near the Iraq border. 

    Days ago US Mideast envoy Brett McGurk reportedly discussed a full US withdrawal with Kadhemi in Baghdad, in order to lay some of the groundwork for the later July meeting at the White House. According to AFP:

    Some 3,500 foreign troops are still on Iraqi territory, including 2,500 Americans, who have been posted to help fight the Islamic State group since 2014.

    In Washington, Kadhemi is expected to push for a concrete timetable of American troop withdrawal. The implementation of their departure could take years.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But given such a relatively small presence of about 2,500 troops, one wonders why a draw down would “take years”.

    No doubt a stalled US exit has much more to do with ensuring the ‘security vacuum’ isn’t immediately filled by Iran. However, it’s too little, too late given Iranian Shia ascendancy in Baghdad happened the moment the Bush administration toppled Saddam Hussein.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 21:00

  • How Breakdown Cascades Into Collapse
    How Breakdown Cascades Into Collapse

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Maintaining the illusion of confidence, permanence and stability serves the interests of those benefiting from the bubbles and those who prefer the safety of the herd, even as the herd thunders toward the precipice.

    The misconception that collapse is an all or nothing phenomenon is common: Either the system rights itself with a bit of money-printing and rah-rah or it collapses into post-industrial ruin and gangs are battling over the last stash of canned beans.

    Neither scenario considers the fragility and resilience of the socio-economic system as a whole. It is both far more fragile than the believers in the permanence of the waste is growth model grasp and more resilient than the complete collapse prognosticators grasp.

    The recent relatively mild logjams in global supply chains of essentials are mere glimpses of precariously fragile delivery-supply systems. These can be understood as bottlenecks that only insiders see, or as unstable nodes through which all the economy’s connections run. Put another way, the economy’s as a network appears decentralized and robust, but this illusion vanishes when we consider how the entire economy rests on a few unstable nodes.

    One such node is the delivery of gasoline and fuels. It’s such an efficient and reliable system that 99.9% of us take it for granted: there will always be plenty of gasoline at every station, the tanks of jet fuel will always be topped off, and so on.

    The 0.1% know that this system, once disrupted, would knock over dominoes all through the economy.

    Hyper-efficiency and hyper-globalization has reduced the number of producers of essentials to the point that disruptions cannot be overcome with redundant sources. We see this everywhere in the global economy: a handful of plants and companies (sometimes a single source of essential components) process or manufacture essential components in much larger systems.

    This is how you end up with thousands of newly manufactured vehicles parked in lots awaiting one critical part that is in short supply.

    Another key weakness is the entire system’s reliance on debt, leverage and speculation. Few seem to understand that physical production and delivery systems can grind to a halt for financial reasons–for example, lines of credit being pulled, a counterparty to some arcane commodity swap goes under, taking the presumably solvent corporation down with it, and so on.

    The more debt that’s been piled up, the greater the instability of the entire system. Risk always appears low until the system destabilizes, and then all the hedges fail and risk breaks out, flooding through the entire financial system.

    Leverage is great fun on the way up, as it magnifies gains. Since the Federal Reserve implicitly guarantees that “buy the dip” will generate massive gains, why not ramp up leverage ten-fold to maximize those Fed-guaranteed gains?

    Leverage is less fun on the way down. When the underlying collateral has shrunk to 20% of the leveraged bets being made, a 21% decline in the asset wipes out all the collateral holding up the palace of leveraged debt.

    The Fed can print money but it can’t create collateral, nor can it make insolvent entities solvent. All the Fed can do is increase the debt and leverage, which is not the solution, it’s the problem.

    Speculation is also inherently unstable, as the euphoric herd, once startled, turns in panic and stampeded in fear. Markets which appeared liquid–i.e., sellers could count on someone buying as many millions of shares as they desired to sell–become illiquid, as buyers vanish like mist in Death Valley. With buyers gone, prices plummet to levels the herd reckoned “impossible” just days before.

    The Fed’s entire strategy in the 21st century has been to inflate asset bubbles that generate the illusion of wealth–the so-called wealth effect which is presumed to inspire voracious borrowing and spending.

    Unfortunately for the Fed, most of the gains flowed to the top 0.1%, and an economy based on a handful of billionaires buying super-yachts and spaceships is a line of dominoes awaiting the inevitable “accident.” So there are two systemic problems with relying on asset bubbles to generate “wealth”: 1) since 90% of the assets are owned by a thin slice of the populace, bubbles increase destabilizing inequality, and 2) bubbles are intrinsically unstable. So the U.S. economy, dependent on the Fed for the “juice” of monetary stimulus, is now dependent on incredibly unstable bubbles in assets, debt and leverage, bubbles which have generated extremes of wealth/income inequality that are destabilizing the social and political orders.

    As the three charts below illustrate, the fragility and instability are well hidden until it’s too late: bubbles, debt, leverage, budgets and revenues can only click higher because the system breaks down if there is any sustained decline (the rising wedge model of breakdown). Once the subsystems fail, there’s no putting the eggshell back together.

    The second chart depicts how buffers thin beneath the surface, masking the systemic fragility. The loss of redundancy, the decay of maintenance, the loss of experienced workers–all of these are hidden from public view until the system breaks down.

    The third chart tracks the S-curve of expansion, confidence, complacency, delusion and collapse followed by human systems, from nations to empires to corporations: as the buffers thin and the rising wedge reaches an apex of vulnerability, the leadership evinces a delusional confidence in the permanence and stability of increasingly fragile, unstable systems.

    Maintaining the illusion of confidence, permanence and stability serves the interests of those benefiting from the bubbles and those who prefer the safety of the herd, even as the herd thunders toward the precipice.

    This is how breakdowns in apparently stable subsystems triggers the fall of dominoes throughout the larger system, leading to a collapse that was widely viewed as “impossible.” Such is the power of complacency and delusion.

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    A Hacker’s Teleology: Sharing the Wealth of Our Shrinking Planet (Kindle $8.95, print $20, audiobook $17.46) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World (Kindle $5, print $10, audiobook) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($5 (Kindle), $10 (print), ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 20:40

  • White House Transfers Its First Gitmo Detainee To Morocco In Effort To Shut Down Facility
    White House Transfers Its First Gitmo Detainee To Morocco In Effort To Shut Down Facility

    On Monday the Biden White House announced its first transfer of a detainee from Guantanamo Bay as part of previously reported plans to “quietly” pursue a permanent closure of the high secure military prison which since 9/11 has controversially housed ‘terror masterminds’ as well as suspects rounded up in the wake of the 2001 invasion of Afghanistan. 

    The Hill identified 56-year old Abdul Latif Nasir as the detainee who has been repatriated to Morocco after in 2016 the Periodic Review Board (PRB) deemed that his detention “no longer remained necessary to protect against a continuing significant threat to the national security of the United States.” 

    Abdul Latif Nasir

    Despite this 2016 judgement, no action was taken to move Nasir out of Gitmo either during Obama’s final year in office, or Trump’s four years. The number of detainees at Gitmo is now at 39. Military documents alleged that Nasir had “traveled to Afghanistan for jihad” and engaged in combat actions against US troops. Trump had previously accused the Obama administration of “returning terrorists to the battlefield” for efforts to send inmates back to their countries of origin.

    “The United States is also extremely grateful for the Kingdom’s willingness to support ongoing U.S. efforts to close the Guantanamo Bay Detention Facility,” the Pentagon said in reference to Morocco. Presumably other repatriations to foreign countries are currently being negotiated.

    Of those 39, a whopping 28 have yet to be charged with war crimes or specific criminal or terroristic acts despite being there for two decades. The Bush administration had argued that ‘War on Terror’ captives were not subject to the Geneva conventions and so could be held indefinitely without trial.

    State Department spokesperson Ned Price issued the following statement confirming prior reporting that Biden has reprioritized shutting down Gitmo for good: The president is “dedicated to following a deliberate and thorough process focused on responsibly reducing the detainee population of the Guantanamo facility while also safeguarding the security of the United States and its allies,” Price said.

    Inside Gitmo, Getty Images

    Biden’s approach will reportedly be centered on a plan to transfer most of the remaining 39 detainees to foreign countries for these host countries to deal with them legally. This would not, however, include the most infamous prisoner at Gitmo Khalid Sheikh Mohammed and the group dubbed the “9/11 five” – believed to be directly behind the 9/11 terror attacks which killed about 3,000 Americans.

    The “five” were supposed to stand trial in January 2021 but controversy over transferring them to the continental United States has seen any such request blocked by Congress. This also after Trump previously signed an executive order to keep Gitmo open.

    A top former Biden administration official privy to the ongoing discussions said in June of the Biden White House and its “quiet” approach to closing Gitmo: “They don’t want it to become a dominant issue that blows up,” and further “They don’t want it to become a lightning rod. They want it to be methodical, orderly.” 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 20:20

  • "It's Not A Conspiracy"
    “It’s Not A Conspiracy”

    Authored by James Rickards via DailyReckoning.com,

    Philosophers and analysts use a principle called Occam’s Razor (sometimes Ockham’s Razor) to solve difficult problems. It says that when you are confronted with two possible solutions to a problem, one complicated and one simple, it’s usually better to select the simple solution.

    There’s always some attraction to the complicated solution because humans like intrigue and plot twists. But statistically, the simple solution is more likely to be correct and therefore the one that analysts should prefer unless contrary evidence presents. This approach is useful in dealing with conspiracy theories.

    Yes, real conspiracies exist (such as the plot to assassinate JFK), and analysts must be alert to the possibility. But most so-called conspiracies have much simpler explanations that are more likely to be correct.

    One of the most potent drivers of coordinated political action is not a deep, dark conspiracy. It’s usually just the result of like-minded individuals cooperating to achieve the same goal.

    It’s Groupthink, Not Conspiracy

    If the political players all think alike and agree on goals, you don’t need a conspiracy. Just let them go to work every day and communicate with each other, and you’ll get the coordinated result without the inevitable twists and turns of a conspiracy.

    That’s a good thing to bear in mind when considering the current administration. 23, top Biden administration officials all worked at the same consulting firm called WestExec Advisors. These officials include Press Secretary Jen Psaki, Secretary of State Tony Blinken and Director of National Intelligence Avril Haines.

    For those who may be unfamiliar, “WestExec” is a reference to West Executive Avenue, a non-public road that runs between the West Wing of the White House and the Eisenhower Executive Office Building.

    The West Wing is not that large and only has a few choice offices plus the Situation Room, the Roosevelt Room (for larger meetings) and the Cabinet Room, which is smaller. Most officials who say they “work in the White House” actually work in the Eisenhower Building, which means they walk across West Executive Avenue when they have meetings with top Biden officials.

    The WestExec Advisors name is a play on that kind of insider status of the long list of former WestExec principals who are now running the country. (Don’t look to Biden as the source of power; he’s not mentally competent and does what the WestExec crowd or the rest of the Biden family tell him to do).

    A Threat to National Security

    So, with all of this power emerging from one firm, does that mean there’s a conspiracy among the alums to control the world?

    Not really. But, it points to a bigger problem, which is the lack of cognitive diversity. The WestExec crowd all went to top schools, had top jobs in previous administrations, exhibit high IQs, and boast lots of credentials.

    If you look at their resumes, you’ll see they all went to the same schools, had the same professors and pursued the same career paths. With few exceptions, it’s all Harvard, Yale and Columbia with a small dose of Stanford or Chicago for good measure.

    They all went to law school or got PhDs and worked for the same small set of law firms or consulting firms. Then they all worked in a small set of government agencies, including the State Department, National Security Council or the Intelligence Community.

    They all think alike. That’s an acute weakness because if they all look at things the same way, they will all miss the real dangers coming that don’t fit into their mental molds. Lack of cognitive diversity is a fatal weakness.

    As a leader, you should always be willing to lower the average IQ if it means you can increase the range of viewpoints. At least someone might point out it’s raining to a group that’s too buried in briefing books to look out the window. This uniform mindset is itself a danger to national security. Sooner than later, a threat will arise that none of them will see coming.

    On the Verge of the Most Destructive War Since WWII?

    And there’s no shortage of threats in the world. Perhaps the most pressing right now is China’s aggressive posturing in East Asia. It’s not just China and the U.S.

    The world’s three largest economies — the U.S., China and Japan — may be squaring off for the most destructive and costly war since the end of World War II.

    The main protagonists will be China and the U.S. The cause of war will be a Chinese invasion of Taiwan, which may be coming much sooner than the world expects.

    China would start the war with an invasion across the Taiwan Strait. The U.S. would be obliged to come to the defense of Taiwan and take measures to disable the Chinese fleet and its air support. But, Japan is no bystander.

    A glimpse at a map shows that if Taiwan were in Communist China’s hands, Japan’s own sea lanes would be threatened, including its access to imported oil. Japan has its own island disputes with China. If China were to capture Taiwan, Japan’s islands in the East China Sea would likely be the next to fall.

    The U.S. could fall back to a line of islands, including Guam, Hawaii and the Aleutians, but no fallback is possible for Japan. If China seizes Taiwan and the U.S. falls back, Japan would be under the thumb of China, and they know it.

    Of course, a fallback by the U.S. would be an enormous blow to U.S. credibility, as well as its economic power. That’s why an alliance of the U.S. and Japan against China to defend Taiwan (along with Taiwan’s own formidable defense capability) is the most likely response to a Chinese amphibious assault.

    “Wolf Warrior” Diplomacy

    The question for the world is whether China will get the message and refrain from attacking Taiwan. Unfortunately, signs point in the opposite direction. China has left its non-threatening style of diplomacy in the past.

    Today, China pursues “Wolf Warrior diplomacy,” named after a popular Chinese movie that features aggressive Navy SEAL-style tactics as practiced by Peoples’ Liberation Army commandos.

    China has come out of its shell and seeks regional hegemony to be followed by global hegemony. It is aggressively pushing on its neighbors in India, Myanmar, and the six nations that surround the South China Sea. Taiwan is the prize, and China is preparing to seize it.

    This attack will be Xi Jinping’s legacy and his attempt to rival the reputation of Mao Zedong. Will Team Biden be able to see it coming?

    U.S. investors should not take Chinese restraint for granted. Allocations to cash, gold and U.S. Treasury notes will preserve wealth when the worst happens.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 20:00

  • Watch: Two Dams In China's Inner Mongolia Collapse After Heavy Rain 
    Watch: Two Dams In China’s Inner Mongolia Collapse After Heavy Rain 

    Two dams collapsed in China’s northwestern region of Inner Mongolia after heavy rains, Reuters reports, citing a statement from the water ministry on Monday. 

    Both dams were located in the Inner Mongolian city of Hulunbuir and collapsed on Sunday. There were more than 1.6 trillion cubic feet of water capacity between both dams. 

    On July 18, the dams on the open spillway of Yong’an Reservoir and Xinfa Reservoir in the Daur Autonomous Banner of Morin Dawa, were breached and collapsed as the water level of the Nuomin River continued to rise because of heavy rain, according to People’s Daily.

    The dam collapse reportedly affected 16,660 people, flooded 325,622 mu (21708.1 hectares) of farmland, and destroyed 22 bridges, 124 culverts, and 15.6 kilometers of highways.

    At 8 pm on Sunday, the national flood control administration issued a third-level emergency response and sent a working group to the scene to guide and assist local emergency management.

    Local citizens were evacuated to safe places before the collapse, and no casualties have been reported as of press time. –Global Times

    Footage posted on social media shows the collapse and subsequent flooding downstream. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The collapse of the dams highlights the safety risks posed by aging infrastructure during the summer flood season. 

    During this time last year, the Three Gorges Dam was suspected to be on the edge of failure after water levels at the world’s largest dam were at extreme levels. 

    Severe weather has been seen worldwide, with floods in Europe and Asia and heatwaves in North America. 

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 19:40

  • Critical Race Enthusiasts Should Learn The Lesson Of "Defund The Police"
    Critical Race Enthusiasts Should Learn The Lesson Of “Defund The Police”

    By Frederick M. Hess, director of education policy studies at the American Enterprise Institute, via Real Clear Policy,

    A year ago, “defund the police” activists were having quite a time. Outlets like CNN and Vox were publishing fawning profiles. Social media sensations like Reps. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez and Ilhan Omar were leading the parade. Cities like Los Angeles, Minneapolis, and Austin even approved partial defundings. It was a juggernaut.

    Now? A tough-on-crime former cop just won the Democratic mayoral nomination in Bill de Blasio’s New York. Former President Barack Obama is warning fellow Democrats, “You lost a big audience the minute you say [‘defund the police’].” Sen. Bernie Sanders has rejected calls for “no more policing.” And White House Press Secretary Jen Psaki, a few weeks ago, bizarrely claimed that it was not Democrats but Republicans who wanted to defund the police (because they opposed President Biden’s $1.9 trillion stimulus bill).

    What happened? Intoxicated by a few policy wins in deep blue cities, enthusiasm in the left-leaning Twitter echo chamber, and their viselike grip on the national media, “defund” activists overlooked one important detail: Their agenda was deeply unpopular with most Americans. A summer 2020 YouGov poll found that just 16 percent of adults wanted to cut police funding — much less “defund” the police. Indeed, 81 percent of black Americans wanted police to spend as much or more time in their communities. During a year when major American cities saw an unnerving increase in homicides, after years of declines, that reaction was not just understandable, it was wholly predictable.  

    As a result, Democrats squandered an opportunity to build consensus around meaningful police reform. After all, in the wake of the George Floyd murder, there was broad national agreement supporting a range of reforms. Prominent Republicans like Sen. Tim Scott were eager to negotiate. Sen. Ted Cruz, sitting on a panel alongside Houston’s Democratic mayor, insisted it was time for “all of us together to look at ways to make sure that our justice system is more fair.” Rather than pressing an advantage where most Americans were with them, though, Democrats got suckered by a woke fringe into embracing a deeply unpopular agenda.

    Those who embrace the stew of “anti-racist” policies and practices loosely referred to as “Critical Race Theory” should take note. As with policing, there’s broad-based support for practical efforts to address persistent inequalities. For instance, while residential attendance zones lock many black and brown children into schools that fail to provide crucial supports, set high expectations, or deliver first-rate instruction, the nation’s parents support school choice policies by hefty margins.

    Moreover, there’s widespread agreement that schools can do better talking about race. There’s broad sympathy for the notion that schools have, at times, taught a white-washed version of history that minimizes our failings and overlooks the contributions of minority communities to American commerce and culture. If Democrats want to tackle such concerns in a practical manner, they have the wind at their back.+

    As with the self-destructive push to “defund the police,” though, those intent on tackling such problems have stood by as their efforts have been overtaken by ideologues in thrall to a vision of “anti-racist” education that is noxious to the vast majority of Americans.

    Take, for instance, the “anti-racist” insistence that universal values are actually hallmarks of “white supremacy” culture. The famed KIPP charter schools announced last summer that the chain was abandoning its slogan “Work Hard, Be Nice” as an “anti-racist” blow against “white supremacy” culture. The Smithsonian published a guide asserting that “hard work,” “self-reliance,” and “be[ing] polite” are all a product of the “white dominant culture.” Bellevue School District in Washington state paid for “aspiring white antiracist leaders” to attend a class called “Humble & Brave,” where educators learn that these traits “go against the white norm.”

    It should come as no great surprise that all of this is out of step with what the lion’s share of Americans believe. If one asks parents — of any race — what values they want their kids to learn, more than 4 out of 5 will endorse concepts like “hard work,” “being well-mannered,” and “being responsible.” In fact, Black parents are slightly more likely than white parents to say that these traits are important. It’s not that hard to understand why Black, Latino, or Asian parents might resent the notion that “hard work” or “responsibility” are somehow alien to their culture. As one parent put it, “We did not immigrate to this country for our children to be taught in taxpayer-funded schools that punctuality and hard work are white values.”

    The woke fringe cheered earlier this spring when the Biden Department of Education held up as a model of civic education the 1619 Project, which teaches that America was founded as a “slavocracy” and is a nation where “anti-black racism runs in the very DNA of this country.” Most Americans reject this cartoonish narrative of their country, with more than two-thirds of adults opposed to having schools tell students that America was founded on racism.

    And yet, Democratic officials have blithely gone along as progressive pundits, union leaders, and advocates have raced to defend even the most noxious goings-on against the critics of Critical Race Theory.

    Look, there’s much of value in today’s efforts to make education more effective, responsive, and just. Indeed, there are plenty of places where people of goodwill can find common ground on school improvement. But, if Democrats intent on school improvement follow the woke fringe down the same Twitter-inspired, navel-gazing rabbit hole that swallowed police reform, they oughtn’t be unduly surprised when they look up in the heat of the 2022 midterm elections to see Jen Psaki insisting that Critical Race Theory was really a Trumpian scheme all along

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 19:20

  • Scramble Into Treasurys Could Spark Month-End Reverse Repo Chaos
    Scramble Into Treasurys Could Spark Month-End Reverse Repo Chaos

    In the days following the quarter-end burst to almost $1 trillion, usage of the Fed’s infamous overnight reverse repo facility had shrunk by roughly $200BN, gravitating in the $750BN – $800BN range, until today when 71 counterparties parked $860.5BN worth of reserves at the Fed, the second highest amount on record.

    But despite renewed expectations that this latest push will finally send total RRP activity above $1 trillion as banks seek to park excess reserves/deposits anywhere but in the economy and/or markets, Curvature’s Scott Skyrm disagrees, pointing to one notable change: the surge in yields.

    As Skyrm writes in his latest Repo Market Commentary “with the stock market sell-off and the bond market rally, it only means one thing! A flight-to-quality.” This matters because traditionally “a flight-to-quality will affect the Repo market by removing securities from the market.”

    And as “end buyers” purchase Treasurys and pack them away in their portfolios, “it means less collateral in the market” (reserves, i.e., cash, is what banks use to buy TSYs with, or – in the case of JPMorgan not buy TSYs with as discussed earlier).  Skyrm then writes that historically a large percentage of the securities purchased are the on-the-run issues, so “given the slow summer weeks and large issue sizes, I don’t expect Repo market activity to increase substantially.”

    However, after a sleepy August, if volatility continues into the refunding and if yields reverse course and collateral is once again dumped, Skyrm warns that “we could have a pretty active August.”

    Not everyone agrees with this take: according to interbroker dealer Wrightson ICAP, RRP volumes could return to the $900 billion level by Wednesday or Thursday.

    But the biggest reason why many expect the RRP balance to explode in the next 10 days is because in May, the Treasury forecast that its cash balance on July 31 will drop to $450 billion; it was $698 billion on July 16, meaning that the Treasury will have to drain $250 billion in cash from the Treasury General Account, with the resultant reserves likely getting parked immediately at the Fed’s repo facility…

    … unless of course the Fed makes equities eligible for CET1 coverage, encouraging banks to use Fed reserves to buy stocks outright instead of through market intermediaries.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 19:00

  • Victor Davis Hanson: The American Descent Into Madness
    Victor Davis Hanson: The American Descent Into Madness

    Authored by Victor Davis Hanson via AmGreatness.com,

    America went from the freest country in the world in December 2019 to a repressive and frightening place by July 2021. How did that happen?

    Nations have often gone mad in a matter of months. The French abandoned their supposedly idealistic revolutionary project and turned it into a monstrous hell for a year between July 1793 and 1794. After the election of November 1860, in a matter of weeks, Americans went from thinking secession was taboo to visions of killing the greatest number of their fellow citizens on both sides of the Mason-Dixon line. Mao’s China went from a failed communist state to the ninth circle of Dante’s Inferno, when he unleashed the Cultural Revolution in 1966.

    In the last six months, we have seen absurdities never quite witnessed in modern America. Madness, not politics, defines it. There are three characteristics of all these upheavals. One, the events are unsustainable. They will either cease or they will destroy the nation, at least as we know it. Two, the law has largely been rendered meaningless. Three, left-wing political agendas justify any means necessary to achieve them.

    Citizenship as Mere Residency

    Two million people are anticipated to cross the southern border, en masse and illegally, over a 12-month period. If that absurdity were to continue, we would be adding the equivalent of a major U.S. city every year. The new arrivals have three things in common: Their first act was to break U.S. law by entering the country. Their second was to break the law by residing here illegally. And their third will be to find false identification or other illegal means to continue breaking the law. One does not arrive as a guest in a foreign country and immediately violate the laws of his host—unless one holds those laws in contempt.

    Arrivals now cross a border that had been virtually closed to illegal immigration by January 2021. In the cynical and immoral logic of illegal immigration (that cares little for the concerns either of would-be legal immigrants or U.S. citizens), arrivals will be dependent upon the state and thus become constituents of progressives who engineered their arrival.

    Yet the issue is not illegal immigration per se. If protests were to continue in Cuba, and 1 million Cubans boated to Miami, the Biden Administration would stop the influx, in terror that so many anti-Communists might tip Florida red forever.

    How strange that the U.S. government is considering going door-to-door to bully the unvaccinated, even as it ignores the daily influx of thousands from Mexico and Latin America, without worrying whether they are carrying or vaccinated for COVID-19. Meanwhile, the progressive media shrilly warns that the new Delta Variant of the virus is exploding south of the border. Note how the administration applies standards to its own citizens that it does not apply to foreign nationals illegally entering the country.

    Crime as Construct

    Crime is another current absurdity. There exists a mini-industry of internet videos depicting young people, disproportionately African American males, stealing luxury goods from Nieman-Marcus in San Francisco, clearing a shelf from a Walgreens with impunity, or assaulting Asian Americans. These iconic moments may be unrepresentative of reality, but given the mass transfers and retirements of police, and the frightening statistics of large increases in violent crime in certain cities, the popular conception is now entrenched that it is dangerous to walk in our major metropolises, either by day or at night. Chicago has turned into Tombstone or Dodge City in the popular imagination.

    Scarier still is the realization that if one is robbed, assaulted, or finds one’s car vandalized, it is near certain the miscreant will never be held to account. Either the police have pulled back and find arrests of criminals a lose-lose situation, or radical big-city district attorneys see the law as a critical legal theory construct, and thus will not enforce it. Or the criminal will be arrested and released within hours.

    So a subculture has developed among Americans, of passing information about where in the country it is safe, where it is not, and where one can go, where one cannot. This is clearly not America, but something bizarre out of Sao Paulo, Durban, or Caracas.

    The Campus Con

    The universities over the past 40 years were intolerant, hard Left, and increasingly anti-constitutional. But they also fostered a golden-goose confidence scheme that administrators dared not injure, given the precious eggs of federally guaranteed student loans that ensured zero academic accountability and sent tuition costs into the stratosphere. There was an unquestioned supposition that a degree of any sort, of any major, was the ticket to American success. In cynical fashion, we shrugged that most prestigious institutions were little more than cattle branders that stamped graduates with imprints that gave them unearned privilege for life.

    Yet universities now have both hands around their golden goose’s neck and are determined to strangle it. The public is becoming repulsed at the woke McCarthyite culture on campus, and will be more turned off when campuses open in the fall in 2019-style. At the Ivy League or major state university campuses, admissions are no longer based on proportional representation in the context of affirmative action, but are defined increasingly by a reparatory character.

    Grades, test scores, and “activities” of the white and Asian male college applicants are growing less relevant. Only “privileged” white males with sports skills, connections, or families who give lots of money are exempt from the new racial reparation quotas. The new woke admission policy ironically is targeting the liberal suburban professional family, the Left’s constituency, whose lives are so fixated on whether children graduate from Yale, Princeton, Harvard, Stanford, or like campuses.

    Given the radical change in incoming student profiles, the faculty increasingly will have to choose between accusations of racism, or grading regardless of actual performance, given thousands of new enrollees do not meet the entrance standards of just two or three years ago. Remember that since wokeism was always a top-down elite industry, minority progressives still will fight it out with white leftists in intramural scraps over titles, salaries, and managerial posts.

    The public has had enough. For the first time, people will ask why are we subsidizing student loans, why are multibillion-dollar endowments not taxed, and why do we think a B.A. in sociology or psychology or gender studies is an “investment” that prepares anyone for anything?

    Commissars and Jacobins

    The critical race theory craze is reaching peak woke, or is already on the downslope. No complex and sophisticated society is sustainable with a Maoist creed of cannibalizing citizens for thought crimes. Commissars do not produce anything or serve anybody, but only monitor thoughts and speech to ascertain the purity of diversity, equity, and inclusion. They are not just a drain on the productive sector but will insidiously destroy it, since their currency is to ensure a timid, obsequiousness and banal orthodoxy.

    We know from the failed Soviet system and from the French Revolution that the most mediocre in society became its most eager auditors of correct behavior. The arbiters of proper thought—the self-righteous paid toady, the perpetual victim employed in service to government payback, the freelancing snitch—were always the villains of freedom, productivity, and humanity, whether we read of the killing off of Alexander the Great’s inner circle, the forced suicides of the Neronian circle, the Jacobin murder spree, or the nightmarish world described by Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn.

    That the Biden Administration has now joined with Silicon Valley to hunt down on social media any dissenters from this month’s official policy on vaccinations and mask-wearing was not so shocking as to be expected from a media that banned coverage of Hunter Biden’s laptop. In Cuban-fashion, millions of judge-jury-executioner online snitches, with government encouragement, will help root out incorrect thoughts at light speed.

    Inflation Is a Mere Construct

    We used to know what inflation was, its pernicious role in past civilizations, and how to combat it. The danger of worthless currency is a staple of classical literature from Aristophanes to Procopius. The scary fact is not just that we are destroying the value of our money—the exploding price of gas, food, appliances, lumber, power, and housing are overwhelming even Joe Biden’s entitlement machine—but that we are constructing pseudoeconomics to justify the nihilism.

    Right now, we witness a multitrillion-dollar fight over borrowing beyond our $30 trillion debt to build “infrastructure,” a word that has been expanded to include mostly anything but roads and bridges. What exactly is so liberal about the farmworker paying $5 a gallon for gas to commute to the fields, the small contractor doing a remodeling job with plywood at $80 a sheet, or the young couple whose loan qualification is always a month behind the soaring price of a new home?

    Our People’s Military

    Americans during this entire descent in madness sighed, “Well, at least there is the military left.” By that, I think they meant John Brennan had all but wrecked the CIA, while James Comey, Andrew McCabe, Kevin Clinesmith, Peter Strzok, and Lisa Page, et al. had weaponized the FBI. But the military was still a bastion of traditional, nonpartisan service, whose prime directive was to defend the country, win any war it was ordered to fight, and to maintain deterrence against opportunistic enemies. It was not envisioned as a “people’s army.” It was not a revolutionary Napoleonic “nation in arms.” And it was not a “liberation army.” The Constitution, 233 years of tradition, and the Uniform Code of Military Justice all reassured America of its wonderful defense forces.

    And now? We are in the process of a massive reeducation and indoctrination campaign. The revamping not only draws scarce resources away from military readiness, but targets, without evidence, the white working class, and defames it as insurrectionary—the very same cohort that disproportionately died in Afghanistan and Iraq.

    If only General Mark Milley, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and Admiral Michael Gilday, chief of naval operations, had been as animated, as combative, and as fired up in congressional testimony about winning in Afghanistan or deterring the Chinese in the waters off Taiwan as they were in defense of their recommended lists of Marxist-inspired critical race theory texts!

    One purpose of the Uniform Code of Military Justice was not to prevent retired top brass from attacking beloved presidents, or even blasé ones. Its aim was to remind the country that it is the business of civilians, not pensioned retired military subject to recall in times of crisis, to galvanize opinion against loudmouth unpopular presidents like Harry Truman, Richard Nixon, or Donald Trump.

    The reason why the “revolving door” became a bipartisan worry was that four-star officers had mastered the navigation of Pentagon procurement. They possessed a rare skill easily—and hugely—monetized upon retirement, and thus its use was to be discouraged wholeheartedly.

    And now?

    The code is a mere construct. The revolving door is an advertisement for advancing to high rank. Policing the thoughts of American soldiers is apparently more important than fathoming the minds of our enemies on the battlefield.

    Keep Cuba Castroite?

    What was so hard about understanding that Cuba since 1959 has been a Communist gulag, antithetical to human freedom and consensual government? What was so difficult about conceding that Cuba had been an ally of the nuclear Soviet Union, always egging it on to war against the United States?

    Yet here we are with protestors against a failed, evil state in the streets of Havana, and our own government, media, and professional classes are worried that ossified Communism in Cuba may fall.

    After opening the U.S. southern border to pseudo-political refugees, the Biden Administration is terrified that thousands of real ones might come to Miami in the fashion it invited millions to storm into Texas. The Biden Administration, and the Left in general, finally revealed what many of us have known: it had no real ideological view on illegal immigration. Its immigration policy was entirely utilitarian and hinged only on whether illegal immigration altered the demography of the electorate in the correct way.

    The United Nations Über Alles

    Finally, almost all Americans used to agree that the U.S. Constitution was unique and guaranteed personal freedom in a way the United Nations charter could not. Dozens of fascist, Communist, totalitarian, and authoritarian regimes, usually the majority of governments on earth, ensured that any General Assembly or U.N. committee ruling would parrot the views of its illiberal and corrupt members.

    Not anymore. Biden’s secretary of state, Antony Blinken, has invited in the U.N. to assess whether the United States meets global standards of justice or, in fact, is racist and in need of global censure: “I urge all U.N. member states to join the United States in this effort, and confront the scourge of racism, racial discrimination, and xenophobia,” he said last week.

    That is like asking Libya in 2001 to assess whether our airline pilot training met proper standards or having China adjudicate the conditions in U.S. prisons.

    America went from the freest country in the world in December 2019 to a repressive, and frightening place by July 2021. It went not so much hard-Left, as stark-raving mad.

    That abrupt descent, too, is not workable and millions will collectively decide they have no choice but to push back and conclude, “In the 233rd year of our republic, we tens of millions are not going to cede freedom of thought and expression to thousands of Maoists. Sorry, no can do.”

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 18:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 19th July 2021

  • Transgender Biological Male Cleared To Compete In Women's Weightlifting In Tokyo Olympics
    Transgender Biological Male Cleared To Compete In Women’s Weightlifting In Tokyo Olympics

    In continuing with the total farce this year’s Olympics has become thanks to Tokyo’s overzealous response to Covid, the International Olympic Committee has given the “all clear” for a transgender biological male to compete on behalf of New Zealand in the women’s weightlifting super-heavyweight category.

    43 year old Laurel Hubbard’s inclusion “does not violate the current rules on the books,” the committee ruled, according to the New York Post. She would be the first transgender athlete to compete in the Olympic Games, despite the fact that transgender athletes have been allowed to compete in the Olympics since 2015.  

    IOC head Thomas Bach commented: “The rules for qualification have been established by the International Weightlifting Federation before the qualifications started. These rules apply, and you cannot change rules during ongoing competitions.”

    Bach also noted the rules were “currently under evaluation” and would be reviewed “at a later date”, the Post wrote.

    He continued: “The IOC is in an inquiry phase with all different stakeholders… to review these rules and finally to come up with some guidelines, which cannot be rules because this is a question where there is no one-size-fits-all solution. It differs from sport to sport.”

    The idea of transgender women in sports remains a point of contention in the U.S., with states like Florida and Montana looking to bar then from middle school and high school sports. Skeptics argue that “women” who go through bone and muscle development as biological men have (obviously) unfair advantages. 

    Meanwhile, we’ve spotted the other women competing against Hubbard…

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 02:45

  • 'Havana Syndrome' Strikes U.S. Diplomats In Vienna
    ‘Havana Syndrome’ Strikes U.S. Diplomats In Vienna

    Authored by Rick Moran via PJMedia.com,

    The New Yorker reported on Friday that State Department and intelligence officials were probing a recent spate of mysterious illnesses that have struck U.S. diplomats in Vienna.

    Sources say that many of the symptoms resemble those experienced by diplomats in Cuba in 2016-17. The illnesses have been investigated by intelligence agencies, the State Department, and the National Academy of Sciences with no conclusions drawn about what is causing them.

    The illnesses were first reported in Havana, but other embassies in Eastern Europe have also reported outbreaks of the illness. Individual cases have been reported in Washington, D.C., and several cases were discovered in Miami.

    The State Department refers to the conditions, commonly known as “The Havana Syndrome,” as “unexplained health incidents (UHI).”

    “In coordination with our partners across the U.S. government, we are vigorously investigating reports of possible unexplained health incidents among the U.S. Embassy Vienna community,” the State Department said.

    “Any employees who reported a possible UHI received immediate and appropriate attention and care.”

    Some in the intelligence community believe the UHIs are the result of some kind of directed energy weapon. There are some scientists who doubt whether the UHIs are the result of a “weapon” of any kind, and suggest that the symptoms can be explained as some kind of “mass psychogenic illness” in which people learning of others with symptoms begin to feel sick themselves.

    A State Department report on “Havana Syndrome” obtained by CNN through a Freedom of Information Act request “concludes that the US government’s response and investigation into the so-called Havana Syndrome may have been botched from the beginning” and was characterized by “chaos” and disorganization.

    Associated Press:

    The Vienna-based employees have reported suffering from mysterious symptoms since President Joe Biden was inaugurated, according to the officials. The Vienna cases were first reported Friday by The New Yorker magazine.

    Vienna has for centuries been a center for espionage and diplomacy and was a hub for clandestine spy-versus-spy activity during the Cold War. The city is currently the site of indirect talks between Iran and the United States over salvaging the nuclear deal that was negotiated there in 2015.

    Those talks are now in hiatus and it was not immediately clear if any members of the U.S. negotiating team were among those suffering from injuries.

    Try as they might, investigators have been unable to duplicate the symptoms of UHI using microwaves or any other energy source. In fact, there is nothing in the scientific literature that suggests anything similar happening anywhere.

    If this is, indeed, an attack, it’s an act of war. But even if scientists figure out exactly what’s causing the symptoms, who or what is responsible may never be revealed.

    How close would the “weapon” have to be to cause the symptoms? How much energy would have to be released?  Would such a weapon be mobile enough to carry in a car or truck? What parts of the brain are being “attacked”? That’s what leads some scientists to believe in the mass psychogenic illness theory.

    Some of the symptoms apparently linger for months. Most have reported headaches, dizziness, and symptoms consistent with concussions. Some have reported hearing a loud noise before the sudden onset of symptoms.

    Whatever is causing Havana Syndrome, American diplomats appear to be walking around in some countries with bullseye on their backs.

    Tyler Durden
    Mon, 07/19/2021 – 02:00

  • Russiagate: Luke Harding's Hard Sell
    Russiagate: Luke Harding’s Hard Sell

    Authored by Joe Lauria via ConsortiumNews.com,

    The only interests this leak serves – if it was a leak – are those of Harding and U.S. intelligence, who were hung out to dry by the collapse of the Russiagate narrative…

    Luke Harding of The Guardian on Thursday came out with a new story that looks at first glance like an attempt to rescue the Russiagate story and the reputations of Harding and U.S. intelligence.

    The headline reads, “Kremlin papers appear to show Putin’s plot to put Trump in White House” with the subhead: “Exclusive: Documents suggest Russia launched secret multi-agency effort to interfere in US democracy.”

    Harding’s report says that during a Jan. 22, 2016 closed session of the Russian national security council, President Vladimir Putin ordered Russian spies to back a “mentally unstable” Donald Trump for the White House to “help secure Moscow’s strategic objectives, among them ‘social turmoil’ in the US.”

    “Russia’s three spy agencies were ordered to find practical ways to support Trump, in a decree appearing to bear Putin’s signature,” Harding writes. “A report prepared by Putin’s expert department recommended Moscow use ‘all possible force’ to ensure a Trump victory.”

    The article, starting with the headline, is littered with the use of qualifiers such as “appears,” “suggests,” “apparent,” and “seems.” Such qualifiers tell the reader that even the newspaper is not sure whether to believe its own story.

    Quoting from what he says is an authentic document marked “secret,” Harding writes that there is “apparent confirmation” that the Kremlin had dirt on Trump it could use to blackmail him, gathered during earlier Trump “‘non-official visits to Russian Federation territory.’”

    This would seem to confirm a central part of the so-called Steele dossier, which Harding hawked in his bestselling book Collusion.

    Harding’s newest story though says nothing about the involvement of Trump operatives with this Kremlin plot, as that was unfounded by Special Counsel Robert Mueller’s report.

    Harding also suggests that the documents that came into his possession provides evidence of a Russian hack of Democratic National Committee computers.

    Harding at the Nordic Media Festival, 2018. (Thor Brødreskift / Nordiske Mediedager/ Wikimedia Commons)

    He writes:

    “After the meeting, according to a separate leaked document, Putin issued a decree setting up a new and secret interdepartmental commission. Its urgent task was to realise the goals set out in the ‘special part’ of document No 32-04 \ vd. …

    The defence minister was instructed to coordinate the work of subdivisions and services. [Sergei] Shoigu was also responsible for collecting and systematising necessary information and for “preparing measures to act on the information environment of the object” – a command, it seems, to hack sensitive American cyber-targets identified by the SVR. …

    The papers appear to set out a route map for what actually happened in 2016.

    A matter of weeks after the security council meeting, GRU hackers raided the servers of the Democratic National Committee (DNC) and subsequently released thousands of private emails in an attempt to hurt Clinton’s election campaign.”

    These documents would perfectly confirm the story put out by U.S. intelligence and an eager Democratic media: that Russia’s defense intelligence agency GRU hacked the DNC and Russia leaked DNC emails to damage Hillary Clinton.

    Except that Shawn Henry, the head of the company CrowdStrike hired by the Democratic Party and the Clinton campaign (while keeping the FBI away) to examine the DNC servers declared under oath to the House Intelligence Committee that no evidence of a hack was discovered. “It appears it was set up to be exfiltrated, but we just don’t have the evidence that says it actually left,” Henry told the committee.

    WikiLeaks, which Harding doesn’t mention, has also denied getting the DNC material from Russia that Harding says was released by Moscow. And Harding ignores the true contents of the emails.

    Dmitri Peskov, Putin’s spokesman, told The Guardian the story was “great pulp fiction.”

    Let’s look at the motives of the players involved in this story.

    The Kremlin, Moscow. (Pavel Kazachkov/Flickr, CC BY 2.0, Wikimedia Commons)

    Harding’s Motives

    Henry’s denial of a hack and Mueller’s inability to prove Collusion, embarrassed Harding after he staked his reputation on his bestseller of that name. The book is essentially the story of Christopher Steele, the ex-MI6 agent, who was paid by the DNC and the Clinton campaign to come up with opposition research against Trump.

    Harding, like the Democratic media establishment, mistook opposition research, a mix of fact and fiction to smear a political opponent, for an intelligence document paid for by taxpayers, presumably in the interests of protecting the country rather than a political candidate. Of course, the FBI and the CIA sold it to the media as such to undermine the other candidate.

    Harding has had a major omelet on his face after the Russiagate tale was ultimately exposed as opposition research paid for by the Democrats, who elevated it to a new Pearl Harbor.

    Now I will engage in qualifiers here but it seems Harding is desperate to find anything that might rescue the story and his reputation. That’s a vulnerable position to be in, easily exploited by intelligence operatives, the way he was exploited with the original story.

    An earlier attempt by Harding at rescuing himself was the disastrous piece he wrote for The Guardian that Paul Manafort, briefly Trump’s 2016 campaign manager, had visited Julian Assange at the Ecuador Embassy in London. It blew up in Harding’s face though his paper has never pulled the story.

    U.S. Intelligence Motives

    Members of the U.S. intelligence committee were staring at possible prosecution in the investigation run by U.S. Attorney John Durham for their role in pushing the opposition research as truth, leading, among other things, to a doctored FBI report to the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court to monitor a Trump campaign worker.

    The Steele dossier became the basis for other shenanigans by U.S. intelligence. Though in the end there were no indictments, the reputation of especially the FBI took a hit.

    Leaking a story now that it was all true, after all, might do wonders to restore its standing among wide sections of the U.S. public who lost faith in the bureau over Russiagate.

    A Kremlin Leakers’ Motives

    A military parade on Red Square. May 9, 2016 Moscow. (Kremlin) 

    Harding writes in a cryptic way about how he got hold of these materials. He says the story is based on “what are assessed to be leaked Kremlin documents.” As they were marked “secret,” and supposedly came from Putin’s innermost circle, as Harding says, it stands to reason that few people in the Russian government would have had access to them outside of that circle.

    We are being asked to believe that someone closet to Putin leaked these documents either directly to Harding or to U.S. or British intelligence who then passed it on to Harding. (Harding calling it a leak would rule out that they were obtained through a Western intelligence hack.)

    It can’t be dismissed that U.S. intelligence may have an active mole inside the Kremlin. But one must ask would that mole — if he or she exists — risk their freedom by leaking documents that have absolutely no current strategic or even political significance, rather than, say, classified information about Russian troop movements and military intentions?

    The only interests this leak serves — if it was a leak — are those of Harding and U.S. intelligence, who were hung out to dry by the collapse of the Russiagate narrative.

    Evaluating the Story

    Harding is clearly reporting from Russian-language documents, snapshots of which are reproduced in The Guardian article. He writes that these documents were shown to “independent experts” who said they “appear” to be “genuine.” Harding does not reveal who these experts are.

    To evaluate the credibility of Harding’s story would require knowing how he got the documents, not the names of the person or persons who gave them to him, but the interests they represent. He is especially vague about this.

    Harding writes:

    “Western intelligence agencies are understood to have been aware of the documents for some months and to have carefully examined them. The papers, seen by the Guardian, seem to represent a serious and highly unusual leak from within the Kremlin.”

    If they were handed to Harding by U.S. or British intelligence who had them for months, the idea that these are the products of spycraft cannot be dismissed. Crafting what looks like classified evidence from an adversarial power and then leaking it to friendly press has long been in the arsenal of intelligence agencies around the world.

    It is unlikely we will ever know how Harding came into possession of these documents or who the experts are who said they “seem” genuine.

    But the purpose of this piece may have already been achieved.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 23:30

  • Visualizing The Best-Selling Car In America, Every Year Since 1978
    Visualizing The Best-Selling Car In America, Every Year Since 1978

    Cars have been a staple of the U.S. economy almost since their inception. But, as Visual Capitalist’s Omri Wallach notes, as vehicle designs have evolved over time, and consumer tastes alongside them, the best-selling car in America has changed as well.

    Finding the right mix of affordability, style, and features has meant that different manufacturers have been in the market lead during different decades.

    This infographic from Alan’s Factory Outlet shows the most-purchased cars in the U.S. since 1978, not including trucks and SUVs.

    What Is The Best-Selling Car in America By Year?

    From 1978 to 2020, over 348 million cars were sold in the U.S., or an average of 8.1 million cars per year. Car sales were especially strong during times of high oil prices, such as following the 1979 oil crisis, as consumers avoided less fuel-efficient trucks and SUVs.

    And throughout most of the 20th century, car sales in the U.S. were led by American manufacturers.

    From 1978 to 1988, two of the “Big Three” Detroit-based auto manufacturers had the best-selling cars in the country. GM had two models of the Oldsmobile Cutlass and two different Chevrolets in the top spot, while Ford was able to compete with the compact Ford Escort.

    But since the late 1980s, Japanese manufacturers started to take over in affordability, reliability, and overall sales.

    After Honda and Ford fought closely for the most popular cars with the Accord and the Taurus, Toyota grabbed the crown with the ultra-popular Toyota Camry.

    Toyota, which was the world’s largest automaker by market cap for a majority of the last 30 years, also has the world’s best-selling car of all-time with another popular model, the Toyota Corolla.

    The company’s cars have resonated with consumers due to reliability, safety, and efficiency in spite of being mass-produced and affordable. High ownership satisfaction and low incidence rates also led Camrys to have high resale value.

    Runner Ups and Best-Selling Trucks and SUVs

    Just behind Toyota for many years was another Japanese automaker, Honda. The company’s Accord and Civic models consistently ranked just behind the Toyota Camry in U.S. sales throughout most of the 2000s.

    Despite most of the world preferring cars for vehicle purchases, the U.S. has become light truck and SUV dominant since the 2000s.

    The proliferation of light trucks also meant that Toyota, one of the world’s leading hybrid sellers, saw the crossover/SUV Toyota RAV4 Hybrid beat the well-known Prius consistently in U.S. sales.

    Meanwhile, electric car sales in the U.S. are still far behind, climbing up to 1.8% of sales in 2020 from 1.4% the year before. Compared to countries like Norway where electric cars make up the majority of vehicle sales, the U.S. will likely be dominated by light-trucks for years to come.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 23:00

  • "World's Most Bearish Hedge Fund" Goes Short Tech
    “World’s Most Bearish Hedge Fund” Goes Short Tech

    The world’s financial graveyards are covered with the career tombstones of those who, over the past decade, have called the end to a tech bubble that not only has yet to pop but has culminated with just 5 tech names – the FAAMGs – comprising 23% of the S&P’s market cap vastly surpassing the lofty dot com days, with a combined valuation of over $7 trillion.

    Among those who were steamrolled by the tech juggernaut is Ned David Research, traditionally known for its accurate market timing calls if certainly not this time: two months ago it slapped a sell reco on tech right before it ripped the bears’ faces off and embarked on a 14% rally. And then, just as the FAAMGs fell out of bed late last week, the firm’s strategists pulled a Gartman, and abandoned their underweight stance, expecting that the rotation out of reflation and into growth, coupled with a plunge in yields, will lead to more tech buying when we may well be facing the first market rout since March considering last week’s coordinate selloff.

    “The rapidly evolving COVID landscape, coupled with the Fed’s more hawkish tone at the June FOMC meeting” have “gone against cyclical Value sectors that tend to be positively correlated to interest rates and the yield curve,” said Ned Davis strategist Rob Anderson. “The progression of the virus will likely influence whether Growth or Value sectors gain the upper hand in the second half.”

    After trailing small-cap stocks which were the biggest beneficiaries of economic reopening, the Russell 100 Index erased its underperformance last Wednesday. The momentum continued this week, when small caps plunged 3.9%, while the Nasdaq 100 Index fell 0.2% and tech stocks in the S&P 500 added 0.4%.

    As Bloomberg further notes, halfway into July, small caps trail their megacap peers by the most since March 2020, adding anxiety that a once-hot reflation trade is sputtering, with the delta variant of coronavirus quickly spreading and economic indicators moderating after a breakneck advance.

    By abandonging its bearish bias, Ned Davis joins a host of Wall Street strategists who are currently bullish on tech including Goldman Sachs, Citigroup, UBS, Oppenheimer and JPMorgan, all of whom are overweight the sector while Deutsche Bank, Morgan Stanley, BMO, Bank of America and BTIG strategists are neutral on information technology.

    Yet as institutional strategists cover their bearish bets at the first sign of a substantial uptick, the mega bears crawl out of the woodwork, and in the world of bears (those that manage money) none is more familiar to our readers than Russell Clark, formerly of Horseman – which  had earned the reputation of the world’s most bearish hedge fund on these pages – and currently of Russell Clark Investment Management, who in his latest letter tells his patient investors that his fund, which is now down to just $296MM in AUM, had its worst month of the year in June when it dropped 5.37%…

    … and may be en route to much more painful months if indeed the tech rally is just getting restarted. Why? Because as Clark says, “I am thinking of going net short in tech.” The only question is where.

    This is how Clark lays out the investment thesis:

    First of all, I now understand why tech stocks, even loss-making ones, have been able to move such excessive valuations. Amazon showed that loss making companies capturing the consumer can build a monopoly position. Facebook shows even when firms abuse a monopoly position, the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) can only fine USD 5bn, and not force a breakup. A Supreme Court ruling in 2019 (Ohio v American Express) showed that the court only considers a company to be a monopoly if it raises prices to both its suppliers and its customers. In American Express’ case, it could charge high fees to retailers, but unless it could be proven that consumers suffered, the Supreme Court would do nothing to stop the abuse of market power. The potential implications of cases like these is that investors could find potential consumer facing monopolies, and force excessive valuations to make both capital raising and M&A easy (making it more likely companies are the dominant player). This has a knock-on effect of making M&A targets more attractive. You can see this effect in stocks like Tesla, Adobe, Slack, and it seems to be present in every 20 times sales loss making company I can find.

    The question then, is “why should this end?”

    Well, as mentioned last month, the US House of Representatives are keen to regulate big tech. But as mentioned above, the Supreme Court is still supportive of monopolies. So much so its dismissal of a lawsuit by the FTC against Facebook saw Facebook shares rally 5%. China has recently enacted very similar regulations against tech companies. And of course, in China government is king, with no Supreme Court to get in the way. The regulations, basically stop the two big tech oligopolies from favouring subsidiaries, has had a dramatic effect. Vipshop, TAL Education, Oriental Education and KE Holdings have all seen share prices break away from the Nasdaq, some falling 50% or more.

    Taking this argument to its absurd extreme, Clark concludes that while Facebook, Amazon, Netflix and Facebook (FANG) stocks continue to rise, “it is beginning to look more difficult to invest in loss making stocks in the hope they can become a monopolist or be bought by a monopolist. The combination of the current US administration and the Chinese authoritarian government will ensure that every transaction will be scrutinised, and competition will be encouraged. For venture capital, this could be a disaster, particularly for those invested in Chinese start-ups. I am encouraged to take this view by the poor performance of Softbank, which has also diverged radically from the Nasdaq. The Softbank Vision Fund is the largest VC fund in the world, by quite a margin.”

    Going even further, Clark picks up on a point BofA CIO Michael Hartnett has been making for the past year, and claims that as China is attacking income inequality, he believes that Beijing is leading the world here, and is not an outlier:

    Its policies are set to reduce liquidity in markets, keep a strong currency, whilst raising wages, and promote competition. These policies now seem to be taking hold, which means we are adjusting the fund’s portfolio.

    In practical terms, this means that Clark has started to short Chinese tech, “as many of these companies seem to have no business strategy for making money” and he is also looking at loss making tech companies in the West whose exit strategy was M&A and shorting them as he believes that they are set to underperform.

    At the same time, Clark will pair trade his growing tech short with agricultural related longs, “but we are going to hedge with liquidity driven assets that are being affected by Chinese monetary policy, namely crypto and gold.”

    As a result, Clark concludes that he expects his fund – which has been net short for much of the past decade before briefly turning bullish around the time of the covid crisis helping its 14.3% return in 2020…

    … once again “being mildly net short either this month or next month” as he is “long farmers, and short monopolists and proto monopolists.”

    While we wish Clark all the best, we would like to remind him that by going short tech he is not only fighting the central banks whose primary goal – above all else – is to prop up the wealth effect and nowhere do they have as much leverage as with the 5 companies which account for more than 20% of total market cap, but will also now be fighting the retail/reddit crowd which hones in like a heatseeker missile on any fund net short and then squeezes its biggest short holdings until the fund taps out (see Melvin). So while we wish Clark all the best – as we have for so many years – we can’t help but wonder if the fund’s AUM one year from now won’t be in the double (or fewer) digits, if it’s still around at all…

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 22:30

  • French Face 6 Months In Jail For Entering A Bar Or Restaurant Without A COVID Pass
    French Face 6 Months In Jail For Entering A Bar Or Restaurant Without A COVID Pass

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    People in France who enter a bar or restaurant without a COVID pass face 6 months in jail, while business owners who fail to check their status face a 1 year prison sentence and a €45,000 fine.

    Yes, really.

    The punishments are part of a draconian effort by the French government to force citizens to get the coronavirus jab amidst multiple unruly protests across numerous major cities.

    President Emmanuel Macron announced earlier this week that those unable to prove they’re vaccinated or a negative COVID test (at their own cost) will be banned from using public transport, entering a cinema, shopping mall, bar, cafe, restaurant and other venues from August 1st.

    “People unable to present a valid health pass risk up to six months in prison and a fine of up to €10,000 (£8,500), according to the draft text of the law, while owners of “establishments welcoming the public” who fail to check patrons’ passes could go to jail for a year and be hit with a €45,000 fine,” reports the Guardian.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The sanctions represent the most authoritarian move to force vaccine compliance in the west, and probably outstrip a lot of actual dictatorships in other parts of the world.

    The Guardian rather euphemistically describes it as a “big stick approach,” which would be true if that ‘big stick’ were an electric cattle prod the size of the One World Trade Center building in New York.

    The government had to withdraw a similar law back in December following numerous riots, but merely re-introduced the same legislation with even tougher punishments for dissenters.

    As we previously highlighted, police in Paris used tear gas to disperse demonstrators protesting against the measures in scenes that unfolded in several other major cities throughout the country.

    We are now entering the phase of the pandemic where it’s becoming clear that those who refuse to take the vaccine will remain under the most onerous lockdown measures yet in perpetuity.

    *  *  *

    Brand new merch now available! Get it at https://www.pjwshop.com/

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Get early access, exclusive content and behinds the scenes stuff by following me on Locals.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 22:11

  • Indiana To Build Wireless In-Motion Charging For Electric Vehicles On Highway 
    Indiana To Build Wireless In-Motion Charging For Electric Vehicles On Highway 

    The Indiana Department of Transportation (INDOT) has begun the first phase of a project to transform a segment of the state’s highway into wireless charging pavement for electric vehicles, according to local news WRTV

    INDOT partnered with Advancing Sustainability through Power Infrastructure for Road Electrification (ASPIRE) Initiative, in a three-phase project that will use magnetizable concrete, developed by a German startup Magment GmbH, to allow seamless wireless charging of electric vehicles while in motion. 

    “We’re quite eager to see this first of its kind project unfold in Indiana,” David Christensen, the ASPIRE Innovation Director, said. “This partnership that includes Magment, INDOT, Purdue University, and the larger ASPIRE consortium has great promise to really move the needle on technology development, which will, in turn, enable more positive impacts from deeper electric vehicle adoption.”

    The project will be conducted in three phases. The first and second will be pavement testing at Purdue University’s West Lafayette campus. The third phase will be INDOT installing a quarter-mile-long wireless charging pavement on a stretch of highway in the state. 

    “Indiana is known as the Crossroads of America and we’re committed to fortifying our position as a transportation leader by innovating to support the emerging vehicle technology,” Gov. Eric Holcomb said. “This partnership to develop wireless charging technology for highways sends a strong signal that Indiana is on the leading edge of delivering the infrastructure needed to support the adoption of electric vehicles.”

    Projects like these are set to spring up across the country as funding for green projects could flourish once Washington passes an infrastructure program

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 22:00

  • Ending Anonymity: Why The WEF's Partnership Against Cybercrime Threatens The Future Of Privacy
    Ending Anonymity: Why The WEF’s Partnership Against Cybercrime Threatens The Future Of Privacy

    Authored by Whitney Webb via TheLastAmericanVagabond.com,

    With many focusing on the recent Cyber Polygon exercise, less attention has been paid to the World Economic Forum’s real ambitions in cybersecurity – to create a global organization aimed at gutting even the possibility of anonymity online. With the governments of the US, UK and Israel on board, along with some of the world’s most powerful corporations, it is important to pay attention to their endgame, not just the simulations.

    Amid a series of warnings and simulations in the past year regarding a massive cyber attack that could soon bring down the global financial system, the “information sharing group” of the largest banks and private financial organizations in the United States warned earlier this year that banks “will encounter growing danger” from “converging” nation-state and criminal hackers over the course of 2021 and in the years that follow.

    The organization, called the Financial Services Information Sharing and Analysis Center (FS-ISAC), made the claim in its 2021 “Navigating Cyber” report, which assesses the events of 2020 and provides a forecast for the current year. That forecast, which casts a devastating cyber attack on the financial system through third parties as practically inevitable, also makes the case for a “global fincyber [financial-cyber] utility” as the main solution to the catastrophic scenarios it predicts.

    Perhaps unsurprisingly, an organization close to top FS-ISAC members has recently been involved in laying the groundwork for that very “global fincyber utility” — the World Economic Forum, which recently produced the model for such a utility through its Partnership against Cybercrime (WEF-PAC) project. Not only are top individuals at FS-ISAC involved in WEF cybersecurity projects like Cyber Polygon, but FS-ISAC’s CEO was also an adviser to the WEF-Carnegie Endowment for International Peace report that warned that the global financial system was increasingly vulnerable to cyber attacks and was the subject of the first article in this 2-part series.

    Another article, published earlier this year at Unlimited Hangout, also explored the WEF’s Cyber Polygon 2020 simulation of a cyber attack targeting the global financial system. Another iteration of Cyber Polygon is due to take place tomorrow July 9th and will focus on simulating a supply chain cyber attack.

    A major theme in these efforts has not only been an emphasis on global cooperation, but also a merging of private banks and/or corporations with the State, specifically intelligence and law enforcement agencies. In addition, many of the banks, institutions and individuals involved in the creation of these reports and simulations are either actively involved in WEF-related efforts to usher in a new global economic model of “stakeholder capitalism” or are seeking to imminently introduce, or are actively developing, central bank-backed digital currencies, or CBDCs.

    In addition, and as mentioned in the first article in this series, a cyber attack like those described in these reports and simulations would also provide the perfect scenario for dismantling the current failing financial system, as it would absolve central banks and corrupt financial institutions of any responsibility. The convergence of several concerning factors in the financial world, including the end of LIBOR at the end of year and the imminent hyperinflation of globally important currencies, suggests that the time is ripe for an event that would not only allow the global economy to “reset”, but also absolve the fundamentally corrupt financial institutions around the world from any wrongdoing. Instead, faceless hackers can be blamed and, given recent precedents in the US and elsewhere, any group or nation state can be blamed with minimal evidence as politically convenient.

    This report will closely examine both FS-ISAC’s recent predictions and the WEF Partnership against Cybercrime, specifically the WEF-PAC’s efforts to position itself as the cybersecurity alliance of choice if and when such a catastrophic cyber attack cripples the current financial system.

    Of particular interest is the call by both FS-ISAC and the WEF Partnership against Cybercrime to specifically target cryptocurrencies, particularly those that favor transactional anonymity, as well as the infrastructure on which those cryptocurrencies run. Though framed as a way to combat “cybercrime”, it is obvious that cryptocurrencies are to be unwanted competitors for the soon-to-be-launched central bank digital currencies. 

    In addition, as this report will show, there is a related push by WEF partners to “tackle cybercrime” that seeks to end privacy and the potential for anonymity on the internet in general, by linking government-issued IDs to internet access. Such a policy would allow governments to surveil every piece of online content accessed as well as every post or comment authored by each citizen, supposedly to ensure that no citizen can engage in “criminal” activity online. 

    Notably, the WEF Partnership against Cybercrime employs a very broad definition of what constitutes a “cybercriminal” as they apply this label readily to those who post or host content deemed to be “disinformation” that represents a threat to “democratic” governments. The WEF’s interest in criminalizing and censoring online content has been made evident by its recent creation of a new Global Coalition for Digital Safety to facilitate the increased regulation of online speech by both the public and private sectors.

    FS-ISAC, its influence and its doomsday “predictions” for 2021

    FS-ISAC officially exists to “help ensure the resilience and continuity of the global financial services infrastructure and individual firms against acts that could significantly impact the sector’s ability to provide services critical to the orderly function of the global economy.” In other words, FS-ISAC allows the private financial services industry to decide on and coordinate sector-wide responses regarding how financial services are provided during and after a given crisis, including a cyber attack. It was tellingly created in 1999, the same year that the Glass-Steagall Act, which regulated banks after the onset of the Great Depression, was repealed.

    Though FS-ISAC’s members are not publicly listed on the group’s website, they do acknowledge that their membership includes some of the world’s largest banks, Fintech companies, insurance firms and payment processors. On their board of directors, the companies and organizations represented include CitiGroup, Bank of America, Wells Fargo and Morgan Stanley, among others, strongly suggesting that FS-ISAC is largely a Wall Street-dominated entity. SWIFT, the society that manages inter-bank communication and dominates it globally, is also represented on FS-ISAC’s board. Collectively, FS-ISAC members represent $35 trillion in assets under management in more than 70 countries.

    FS-ISAC also has ties to the World Economic Forum due to the direct involvement of its then-CEO Steve Silberstein in the WEF-Carnegie initiative and FS-ISAC’s participation in the initiative’s “stakeholder engagements.” There is also the fact that some prominent FS-ISAC members, like Bank of America and SWIFT, are also members of the WEF’s Centre for Cybersecurity, which houses the WEF Partnership against Cybercrime project. 

    At the individual level, the founding director of FS-ISAC, Charles Blauner, is now an agenda contributor to the WEF who previously held top posts at JP Morgan, Deutsche Bank and CitiGroup. He currently is a partner and CISO-in-residence of Team8, a controversial start-up incubator that operates as a front for Israeli military intelligence in tech-related ventures that is part of the WEF Partnership against Cybersecurity. Team8’s CEO and co-founder and the former commander of Israeli intelligence outfit Unit 8200, Nadav Zafrir, has contributed to WEF Centre for Cybersecurity policy documents and WEF panels on the “Great Reset”. 

    In addition, current FS-ISAC board member Laura Deaner, CISO of Northwestern Mutual, served as the co-chair for the WEF’s Global Futures Council on Cybersecurity. Teresa Walsh, the current global head of intelligence for FS-ISAC, will be a speaker at the WEF’s Cyber Polygon 2021 regarding how to develop an international response to ransomware attacks. Walsh previously worked as an intelligence analyst for Citibank, JP Morgan Chase and the US Navy. 

    The FS-ISAC’s recent report is worth looking at in detail for several reasons, with the main one being the sheer power and influence that its members, both known and unknown, hold over the current fiat-based financial system. The full report is exclusive to FS-ISAC members, but a “thematic summary” is publicly available.

    The FS-ISAC’s recent report on “Navigating Cyber” in 2021 is “based on the contributions of our members and the resulting trend analysis by FS-ISAC’s Global Intelligence Office (GIO)” and includes several “predictions” for the current calendar year. The group’s GIO, led by Teresa Walsh, soon-to-be speaker at Cyber Polygon 2021, also “coordinates with other cybersecurity organizations, companies and agencies around the world” in addition to its intelligence gathering from FS-ISAC members.

    At the beginning of 2020, when the COVID-19 crisis resulted in an overt push towards digitization, FS-ISAC launched a “new secure chat and intelligence sharing platform” that “provided a new way for members to discuss threats and security trends.” It is fair to assume that the private discussions on this platform directly informed this report. According to the recent FS-ISAC report, the main trends and threats discussed by its members through this service over the past year were “third party risks”, such as the risk presented by major hacks of third party service providers, like the SolarWinds hack, and “geopolitical tensions.”

    The report contains several “predictions for 2021 and beyond.” The first of these predictions is that adversarial nation-states will team up with “the cybercriminal underworld” in order to “obfuscate their activity and complication attribution.” FS-ISAC does not provide evidence of this having happened, but supporting this claim makes it easier to blame state governments for the activities of cybercriminals when politically convenient without concrete evidence. This has happened on several occasions with recent high-profile hacks, most recently with SolarWinds. As noted in previous reporting, prominent companies that contract for the US government and military, like Microsoft, and intelligence-linked cybersecurity companies, are often the sole sources for such narratives in the past and, in those cases, do not provide evidence, instead qualifying such assertions as “likely” or probable.” Even mainstream outlets reporting on FS-ISAC’s “predictions” noted that “FS-ISAC did not point to specific examples of spies relying on such tradecraft in the past,” openly suggesting that there is little factual basis to support this claim. 

    Other predictions focus on how third party service providers, such as SolarWinds and the more recently targeted Kaseya, will dominate, affecting potentially many thousands of companies across multiple sectors at once. However, the SolarWinds hack was not properly investigated, merely labeled by US intelligence as having “likely” ties to “Russian” state-linked actors despite no publicly available evidence to support that claim. Instead, the SolarWinds hack appears to have been related to its acquisition of an Israeli company funded by intelligence-linked firms, as discussed in this report from earlier this year. SolarWinds acquired the company, called Samanage, and integrated its software fully into its platform around the same time that the backdoor used to execute the hack was placed into the SolarWinds platform that was later compromised.

    FS-ISAC also predicts that attacks will cross borders, continents, and verticals, with increasing speed. More specifically, it states that the cyber pandemic will begin with cyber criminals that “test attacks in one country and quickly scale up to multiple targets in other parts of the world.” FS-ISAC argues that it is therefore “critical to have a global view on cyber threats facing the sector in order to prepare and defend against them.”  Since FS-ISAC made this prediction, cyber attacks and especially ransomware have been occurring throughout the world and targeting different sectors at a much more rapid pace than has ever been seen before. For instance, following the Colonial Pipeline hack in early May, JapanNew Zealand, and Ireland all experienced major cyber attacks, followed by the JBS hack on June 1. The hack of Kaseya, believed by some to be just as consequential and damaging as SolarWinds, took place about a month later on July 2, affecting thousands of companies around the world.

    The final, and perhaps the most important, of these predictions is that “economic drivers towards cybercrime will increase.” FS-ISAC claims that the current economic situation created by COVID-related lockdowns will “make cybercrime an ever more attractive alternative,” noting immediately afterwards that “dramatic increases in cryptocurrency valuation may drive threat actors to conduct campaigns capitalising on this market, including extortion campaigns against financial institutions and their customers.”

    In other words, FS-ISAC views the increase in the value of cryptocurrency as a direct driver of cybercrime, implying that the value of cryptocurrency must be dealt with to reduce such criminal activities. However, the data does not fit these assertions as the use of cryptocurrency by cybercriminals is low and getting lower. For instance, one recent study found that only 0.34% of cryptocurrency transactions in 2020 were tied to criminal activity, down from 2% the year prior. Though the decrease may be due to a jump in cryptocurrency adoption, the overall percentage of crime-linked crypto transactions is incredibly low, a fact obviously known to FS-ISAC and its members.

    However, cryptocurrency does present a threat to the plans by FS-ISAC members and its partners to begin producing digital currencies controlled either by approved private entities (like Russia’s Sbercoin) or central banks themselves (like China’s digital yuan). The success of that project depends on neutering the competition, which is likely why FS-ISAC subtitled its 2021 report as “the case for a global fincyber utility,” with such a utility framed as necessary to defend the financial services industry against cyber threats.

    The WEF’s Partnership Against Cybercrime

    Conveniently for FS-ISAC, there is already a project that hopes to soon become this very global fincyber utility – the WEF Partnership Against Cybercrime (WEF-PAC). Partners in WEF-PAC include some of the world’s largest banks and financial institutions, such as Bank of America, Banco Santander, Sberbank, UBS, Credit Suisse and the World Bank, as well as major payment processors such as Mastercard and PayPal. Also very significant is the presence of all of the “Big Four” global accounting firms: Deloitte, Ernst & Young, KPMG and PricewaterhouseCoopers.

    Think tanks/non-profits, including the Council of EuropeThird Way and the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace as well as the WEF itself, are also among its members as are several national government agencies, like the US Department of Justice, FBI and Secret Service, the UK’s National Crime Agency and Israel’s National Cyber Directorate. International and regional law enforcement agencies, such as INTERPOL and EUROPOL, both of which are repeat participants in the WEF’s Cyber Polygon, are also involved. Silicon Valley is also well represented with the presence of Amazon, Microsoft, and Cisco, all three of which are also major US military and intelligence contractors. Cybersecurity companies founded by alumni and former commanders of Israeli intelligence services, such as Palo Alto Networks, Team8 and Check Point, are also prominent members. 

    The Israeli intelligence angle is especially important when examining WEF-PAC, as one of its architects and the WEF’s current Head of Strategy for Cybersecurity is Tal Goldstein, though his biography on the WEF website seems to claim that he is Head of Strategy for the WEF as a whole. Goldstein is a veteran of Israeli military intelligence, having been recruited through Israel’s Talpiot program, which feeds high IQ teenagers in Israel into the upper echelons of elite Israeli military intelligence units with a focus on technology.  It is sometimes referred to as the IDF’s “MENSA” and was originally created by notorious Israeli spymaster Rafi Eitan. Eitan is best known as Jonathan Pollard’s handler and the mastermind behind the PROMIS software scandal, the most infamous Israeli intelligence operation conducted against Israel’s supposed “ally”, the United States. 

    Due to its focus on technological ability, many Talpiot recruits subsequently serve in Israel’s Unit 8200, the signals intelligence unit of Israeli military intelligence that is often described as equivalent to the US’ NSA or the UK’s GCHQ, before moving into the private tech sector, including major Silicon Valley companies. Other Talpiot-Unit 8200 figures of note are one of the co-founders of Check Point, Marius Nacht, and Assaf Rappaport, who designed major aspects of Microsoft’s cloud services and later managed that division. Rappaport later came to manage much of Microsoft’s research and development until his abrupt departure early last year.

    In addition to his past as a Talpiot recruit and 8 years in Israeli military intelligence, the WEF’s Tal Goldstein had played a key role in establishing Israel’s National Cyber Bureau, now part of Israel’s National Cyber Directorate, now a WEF-PAC partner. The National Cyber Bureau was established in 2013 with the explicit purpose “to build and maintain the State of Israel’s national strength as an international leader in the field” of cybersecurity. According to Goldstein’s WEF biography, Goldstein led the formation of Israel’s entire national cybersecurity strategy with a focus on technology, international cooperation, and economic growth. 

    Goldstein was thus also one of the key architects of the Israeli cybersecurity policy shift which took place in 2012, whereby intelligence operations formerly conducted “in house” by Mossad, Unit 8200 and other Israeli intelligence agencies would instead be conducted through private companies that act as fronts for those intelligence agencies. One admitted example of such a front company is Black Cube, which was created by the Mossad to act explicitly as its “private sector” branch. In 2019, Israeli officials involved in drafting and executing that policy openly yet anonymously admitted to the policy’s existence in Israeli media reports. One of the supposed goals of the policy was to prevent countries like the US from ever boycotting Israel in any meaningful way for violations of human rights and international law by seeding prominent multinational tech companies, such as those based in Silicon Valley, with Israeli intelligence front companies. This effort was directly facilitated by American billionaire Paul Singer, who set up Start Up Nation Central with Benjamin Netanyahu’s main economic adviser and a top AIPAC official in 2012 to facilitate the incorporation of Israeli start-ups into American companies.

    Goldstein’s selection by the WEF as head of strategy for its cybersecurity efforts suggests that Israeli intelligence agencies, as well as Israeli military agencies focused on cybersecurity, will likely play an outsized role in WEF-PAC’s efforts, particularly its ambition to create a new global governance structure for the internet. In addition, Goldstein’s past in developing a policy whereby private companies acted as conduits for intelligence operations is of obvious concern given the WEF’s interest in simulating and promoting an imminent “cyber pandemic” in the wake of the COVID crisis. Given that the WEF had simulated a scenario much like COVID prior to its onset through Event 201, having someone like Goldstein as the WEF’s head of strategy for all things cyber ahead of an alleged “cyber pandemic” is cause for concern.

    A Global Threat to Justify a Global “Solution”

    Last November, around the same time the WEF-Carnegie report was released, the WEF-PAC produced its own “insight report” aimed at “shaping the future of cybersecurity and digital trust.” Chiefly written by the WEF’s Tal Goldstein alongside executives from Microsoft, the Cyber Threat Alliance, and Fortinet, the report offers “a first step towards establishing a global architecture for cooperation” as part of a global “paradigm shift” in how cybercrime is addressed.

    The foreword was authored by Jürgen Stock, the Secretary-General of INTERPOL, who had participated in last year’s Cyber Polygon exercise and will also participate in this year’s Cyber Polygon as well. Stock claims in the report that “a public-private partnership against cybercrime is the only way to gain an edge over cybercriminals” (emphasis added). Not unlike the WEF-Carnegie report, Stock asserts that only by ensuring that large corporations work hand in glove with law enforcement agencies “can we effectively respond to the cybercrime threat.”

    The report first seeks to define the threat and focuses specifically on the alleged connection between cryptocurrencies, privacy enhancing technology, and cybercrime. It asserts that “cybercriminals abuse encryption, cryptocurrencies, anonymity services and other technologies”, even though their use is hardly exclusive to criminals. The report then states that, in addition to financially motivated cybercriminals, cybercriminals also include those who use those technologies to “uphold terrorism” and “spread disinformation to destabilize governments and democracies”. 

    While the majority of the report’s discussion on the cybercrime threat focuses on ransomware, the WEF-PAC’s inclusion of “disinformation” highlights the fact that the WEF and their partners view cybercriminals through a much broader lens. This, of course, also means that the methods to combat cybercrime contained within the report could be used to target those who “spread disinformation”, not just ransomware and related attacks, meaning that such “disinformation” spreaders could see their use of cryptocurrency, encryption, etc. restricted by the rules and regulations WEF-PAC seeks to promote. However, the report promotes the use of privacy-enhancing technologies for WEF-PAC members, a clear double standard that reveals that this group sees privacy as something for the powerful and not for the general public.

    This broad definition of “cybercriminal” conveniently dovetails with the Biden administration’s recent “domestic terror” strategy, which similarly has a very broad definition of who is a “domestic terrorist.” The Biden administration’s strategy is also not exclusive to the US, but a multinational framework that is poised to be used to censor and criminalize critics of the WEF stakeholder capitalism model as well as those deemed to hold “anti-government” and “anti-authority” viewpoints. 

    The WEF-PAC report, which was published several months before the US strategy, has other parallels with the new Biden administration policy, such as its call to crack down on the use of anonymity software by those deemed “cybercriminals” and calling for “international information sharing and cross-border operational cooperation,” even if that cooperation is “not always aligned with existing legislative and operational frameworks.” In addition, the Biden administration’s strategy concludes by noting that it is part of a broader US government effort to “restore faith” in public institutions. Similarly, the WEF-PAC report frames combatting all types of activities they define as cybercrime necessary to improving “digital trust”, the lack of which is “greatly undermining the benefits of cyberspace and hindering international cyber stability efforts.”

    In discussing “solutions”, the WEF-PAC calls for the global targeting of “infrastructures and assets” deemed to facilitate cybercrime, including those which enable ransomware “revenue streams”, i.e. privacy-minded cryptocurrencies, and enable “the promotion of illegal sites and the hosting of criminal content.” In another section, it discusses seizing websites of “cybercriminals” as an attractive possibility. Given that this document includes online “disinformation” as cybercrime, this could potentially see independent media websites and the infrastructure that allows them to operate (i.e. video sharing platforms that do not censor, etc.) emerge as targets.

    The report continues, stating that “in order to reduce the global impact of cybercrime and to systematically restrain cybercriminals, cybercrime must be confronted at its source by raising the cost of conducting cybercrimes, cutting the activities’ profitability and deterring criminals by increasing the direct risk they face.” It then argues, unsurprisingly, that because the cybercrime threat is global in scope, it’s “solution must also be a globally coordinated effort” and says the main way to achieve this involves “harnessing the private sector to work side by side with law enforcement officials.” This is very similar to the conclusions of the WEF-Carnegie report, released around the same time as the WEF-PAC report, which called for private banks to work alongside law enforcement and intelligence agencies as well as their regulators to “protect” the global financial system from cybercriminals.

    The Framework for a Global Cyber Utility

    This global coordination, per the WEF-PAC, should be based around a new global system uniting law enforcement agencies from around the world with cybersecurity companies, large corporations such as banks, and other “stakeholders.” 

    The stakeholders that will make up this new entity, the structure of which will be discussed shortly, is based around 6 founding principles, several of which are significant. For example, the first principle is to “embrace a shared narrative for collective action against cybercrime.” Per the report, this principle involves the stakeholders comprising this organization having “joint ownership of a shared narrative and objective for the greater good of reducing cybercrime across all industries and globally.” The second principle involves the stakeholders basing their cooperation on “long-term strategic alignment.” The fifth principle involves “ensuring value for participating in the cooperation”, with such that “value” or benefit being “aligned with the public and private sectors’ strategic interests.” In other words, the stakeholders of this global cyber utility will be united in their commitment to a common, public-facing “narrative” that serves their organizations’ “strategic interests” over the long term. The decision to emphasize the term “shared narrative” is important as a narrative is merely a story that does not necessarily need to reflect the truth of the situation, thus suggesting that stakeholders merely be consistent in their public statements so they all fit the agreed upon narrative. 

    Many organizations that are related to or are formally part of WEF-PAC are deeply invested in Central Bank Digital Currencies (CBDCs) as well as efforts to digitalize and thus more easily control nearly every sector of the global economy and to regulate the internet. Therefore, it is reasonable to conclude that many of these groups may look to justify regulations and other measures that will advance these agendas in which they have long-term “strategic interests” through the promotion of a “shared narrative” that is deemed most palatable to the general public, but not necessarily based in fact. Business is business, after all.

    The WEF-PAC report concludes with its three-tier model for “a global architecture for public-private cooperation against cybercrime.” The top level of this system is referred to as the “global partnership”, which will build on the existing WEF-PAC and will “bring together international stakeholders to provide an overarching narrative and commitment to cooperate; foster interaction within a global network of entities that drive efforts to fight cybercrime; and facilitate strategic dialogues and processes aiming to support cooperation and overcome barriers in the long term.” 

    Elsewhere in the report it notes that chief among these “barriers” are existing pieces of legislation in many countries that prohibit law enforcement agencies and government regulators from essentially fusing their operations with private sector entities, particularly those they are meant to either oversee or prosecute for wrongdoing. In addition, the report states that this “global partnership” would focus on fostering “a shared narrative to increase commitment and affiliation”, amplifying “operational cooperation” between the public and private sectors and improving “stakeholders’ understanding of respective interests, needs, goals, priorities and constraints.”

    The second level of this system is called “permanent nodes” in the report. These are defined as “a global network of existing organizations that strive to facilitate public-private cooperation over time.” The main candidates to occupy the role of “permanent nodes” are “non-profit organizations that are already spurring cooperation between private companies and law enforcement agencies,” specifically the Cyber Threat Alliance and the Global Cyber Alliance. Both are discussed in detail in the next section. Other potential “permanent nodes” mentioned in the report are INTERPOL, EURPOL and, of course, FS-ISAC. While the top level “global partnership” represents the “strategic level” of the organization, the “permanent node” level represents the “coordination level” as the nodes would supply necessary infrastructure, operational rules, and management, as well as “strategic dialogue” among member organizations.

    The permanent nodes would directly enable the third level of the organization, which are referred to as “Threat Focus Cells” and are defined as representing the organization’s “operational level.” The WEF-PAC defines these cells as “temporary trust groups consisting of both public- and private-sector organizations and they would focus on discreet cybercrime targets or issues.” Per the report, each cell “would be led jointly by a private-sector participant, a law enforcement participant and a designated representative” of the permanent node that is sponsoring the cell. 

    Ideally, it states that cells should have between 10 to 15 participants and that “private-sector participants would typically represent organizations that can act to enhance cybersecurity on behalf of large constituencies, that have unique access to relevant cybersecurity information and threat intelligence, or that can contribute on an ecosystem-wide basis.” Thus, only massive corporations need apply. In addition, it states that law enforcement members of threat cells should “represent national-level agencies” or hail from “network defence or sector-specific agencies” at the national, regional or international level. Cell activities would range from “scouting a new threat” to “an infrastructure takedown” to “arrests.”

    The WEF-PAC concludes by stating that “in the coming months, the Partnership against Cybercrime Working Group will continue to prepare the implementation of these concepts and widen the scope of the initiative’s efforts”, including by inviting “leading companies and law enforcement agencies” to pledge their commitment to the WEF-PAC’s efforts. It then states that “the suggested architecture could eventually evolve into a newly envisioned, independent Alliance to Combat Global Cybercrime.” “In the interim,” it continues, “the World Economic Forum and key stakeholders will work together to promote the desired processes and assess the validity of the concept.”

    Meet the “Nodes”

    Among the organizations that the WEF-PAC highlights as shoo-in candidates for “permanent nodes” in their proposal for a global cyber utility, there are two that stand out and are worth examining in detail. They are the Cyber Threat Alliance (CTA) and the Global Cyber Alliance (GCA), both of which are formal members of the WEF-PAC.

    The Cyber Threat Alliance (CTA) was initially founded by the companies Fortinet and Palo Alto Networks in May 2014, before McAfee and Symantec joined CTA as co-founders that September. Today, Fortinet and Palo Alto Networks are charter members alongside Check Point and Cisco, while Symantec and McAfee are affiliate members alongside Verizon, Sophos and Avast, among several others. The mission of CTA is to allow for information sharing among its many partners, members, and affiliates in order to “allow the sharing of threat intelligence to better protect their customers against cyberattacks and to make the defense ecosystem more effective,” according to CTA’s current chief executive. CTA, per their website, also focuses on “advocacy” aimed at informing policy initiatives of governments around the world.

    CTA is directly partnered with FS-ISAC and the WEF-PAC as well as the hawkish, US-based think tank the Aspen Institute, which is heavily funded by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation and the Carnegie Corporation. Other partners include: MITRE Engenuity, the “tech foundation for public good” of the secretive US intelligence and military contractor MITRE; the Cyber Peace Institute, a think tank seeking “peace and justice in cyberspace” that is largely funded by Microsoft and Mastercard (both of which are WEF partners and key players in ID2020); the Cybersecurity Coalition, whose members include Palo Alto Networks, Israeli intelligence front company Cybereasonintelligence and military operative Amit Yoran’s Tenable, Intel, AT&T, Google, McAfee, Microsoft, Avast and Cisco, among others; the Cybercrime Support Network, a non-profit funded by AT&T, Verizon, Google, Cisco, Comcast, Google and Microsoft, among others; and the Global Cyber Alliance, to be discussed shortly. Another key partner is the Institute for Security and Technology (IST), which has numerous ties to the US military, particularly DARPA, and the US National Security State, including the CIA’s In-Q-Tel. The CEO of the Cyber Peace Institute, Stéphane Duguin, was a participant in Cyber Polygon 2020, and the CEO of the Cybercrime Support Network, Kristin Judge, contributed to the WEF-PAC report. Some of the CTA’s partners are listed in the WEF-PAC report as other potential “permanent nodes.”

    The CTA is led by Michael Daniel, who co-wrote the WEF-PAC report with Tal Goldstein. Daniel, immediately prior to joining CTA as its top executive in early 2017, was a Special Assistant to former President Obama and the Cybersecurity coordinator of Obama’s National Security Council. In that capacity, Daniel developed the foundations for the US government’s current national cybersecurity strategy, which includes partnerships with the private sector, NGOs and foreign governments. Daniel has stated that some of his cybersecurity views at CTA are drawn “in part on the wisdom of Henry Kissinger” and he has been an agenda contributor to the WEF since his time in the Obama administration. Daniel is one of Cyber Polygon 2021’s experts and will be speaking alongside Teresa Walsh of FS-ISAC and Craig Jones of INTERPOL on how to develop an international response to ransomware attacks.

    The fact that CTA was founded by Fortinet and Palo Alto Networks is notable as both companies are intimately related. Fortinet’s founder Ken Xie, who sits on CTA’s board and is a founding member and advisor to the WEF’s Centre for Cybersecurity, previously founded and then ran NetScreen Technologies, where Palo Alto Network’s founder, Nir Zuk, worked after his earlier company OneSecure was acquired by NetScreen in 2002. Zuk is an alumni of Israeli intelligence’s Unit 8200 and was recruited directly out of that unit in 1994 by Check Point, a CTA charter member, WEF-PAC member and tech company founded by Unit 8200 alumni. Zuk has been open about maintaining close ties to the Israeli government while operating the California-based Palo Alto Networks. Fortinet, for its part, is known for hiring former US intelligence officials, including former top NSA officials. Fortinet is a US government and US military contractor and came under scrutiny in 2016 after a whistleblower filed suit against the company for illegally selling the US military technological products that had been disguised in order to appear as American-made, but were actually made in China. Fortinet’s Derek Manky is one of the co-authors of the WEF-PAC report.

    Check Point’s co-founder and current CEO, Gil Shwed, currently sits on CTA’s board of directors and is also a WEF “Global Leader for Tomorrow”, in addition to his longstanding ties to the Israeli National Security State and his past work for Unit 8200. Another Check Point top executive, Dorit Dor, is a member of the WEF Centre for Cybersecurity and a speaker at Cyber Polygon 2021, where she will speak on protecting supply chains. Gil Shwed, over the past few weeks, has been making numerous appearances on US cable television news to warn that a “cyber pandemic” is imminent. In addition to those appearances, Shwed produced a video on June 23rd asking “Is a Cyber Pandemic Coming?”, in which Shwed answers with a resounding yes. The term “cyber pandemic” first emerged on the scene last year during WEF chairman Klaus Schwab’s opening speech at the first WEF Cyber Polygon simulation and it is notable that the WEF-connected Shwed uses the same terminology. Schwab also stated in that speech that the comprehensive cyber attacks that would comprise this “cyber pandemic” would make the COVID-19 crisis appear to be “a small disturbance in comparison.”

    In addition to CTA, another international alliance named by the WEF-PAC as a “permanent node” candidate is the Global Cyber Alliance (GCA). The GCA was reportedly the idea of Manhattan District Attorney Cyrus Vance Jr. who “knew that there had to be a better way to confront the cybercrime epidemic” back in 2015. GCA was born through discussions Vance held with William Pelgrin, former President and CEO of the Center for Internet Security (CIS) and one of New York Governor Andrew Cuomo’s top cyber advisors. Pelgrin and Vance later approached Adrian Leppard, the then- police commissioner of the City of London, the controversial financial center of the UK. Unsurprisingly, CityUK, the City of London’s main financial lobby group, is a member of the GCA. 

    If one is familiar with Cyrus Vance’s time as Manhattan DA, his interest in meaningfully pursuing crime, particularly if committed by the wealthy and powerful, is laughable. Vance infamously dropped cases against and/or declined to prosecute powerful New York figures, including Donald Trump’s children and Harvey Weinstein, subsequently receiving massive donations to his re-election campaigns from Trump family and Weinstein lawyers. His office also once lobbied a New York court on behalf of intelligence-linked pedophile Jeffrey Epstein, who was seeking at the time to have his registered sex offender status downgraded. Vance’s office later U-turned in regards to Weinstein and Epstein after more and more accusers came forward and after considerable press attention was paid to their misdeeds. Vance also came under scrutiny after dropping charges against former head of the International Monetary Fund (IMF), Dominique Strauss-Kahn, for the sexual assault of a hotel maid.

    Vance used $25 million in criminal asset forfeiture funds to create GCA, in addition to funding from Pelgrin’s CIS and the Leppard-run City of London police. Its official yet opaque purpose is “to reduce cyber risk” on a global scale in order to create “a secure, trustworthy internet.” Their means of accomplishing this purpose is equally vague as they claim to “approach this challenge by building partnerships and creating a global community that stands strong together.” For all intents and purposes, GCA is a massive organization whose members seek to create a more regulated, less anonymous internet. 

    The role of the Center for Internet Security (CIS) in the GCA is highly significant, as CIS is the non-profit that manages key bodies involved in the maintenance of critical US infrastructure, including for US state and local governments and for federal, state and local elections. CIS, which is also partnered with CTA, also works closely with the main groups responsible for protecting the US power grid and water supply systems and is also directly partnered with the Department of Homeland Security (DHS). Its board of directors, in addition to William Pelgrin, includes former high-ranking military and intelligence operatives (i.e. the aforementioned Amit Yoran), former top officials at the DHS and the National Security Agency (NSA) and one of the main architects of US cyber policy under the administrations of both George W. Bush and Barack Obama. CIS was created through private meetings between “a small group of business and government leaders” who were members of the Cosmos Club, the “private social club” of the US political and scientific elite whose members have included three presidents, a dozen Supreme Court justices and numerous Nobel Prize winners.

    GCA’s main funders are the founders listed above as well as the William and Flora Hewlett Foundation, the foundation of the co-founder of Hewlett-Packard (HP), a tech giant with deep ties to US intelligence; Craig Newmark Philanthropies, the “philanthropic” arm of the Craigslist founder’s influence empire; and Bloomberg, the media outlet owned by billionaire and former Mayor of New York Mike Bloomberg. GCA’s premium partners, which also fund GCA and secure a seat on GCA’s Strategic Advisory Committee, include Facebook, Mastercard, Microsoft, Intel, and PayPal as well as C. Hoare & Co., the UK’s oldest privately owned bank and the fifth oldest bank in the world. Other significant premium partners include the Public Interest Registry, which manages the .org domain for websites, and ICANN (the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers), that manages much of the Internet’s global Domain Name System (DNS). Those two organizations together represent a significant portion of website domain name management globally. Notably, the founding chairwoman of ICANN was Esther Dyson, whose connections to Jeffrey Epstein and the Edge Foundation were discussed in a recent Unlimited Hangout investigation.

    In terms of partners, GCA is much larger than CTA and other such alliances, most of which are themselves partners of GCA. Indeed, nearly every partner of CTA, including the CTA itself are part of the GCA as is CTA co-founder Palo Alto Networks. GCA’s partners include several international law enforcement agencies including: the National Police, National Gendarmerie and Ministry of Justice of France, the Ministry of Justice of Lagos, the Royal Canadian Mounted Police, the UK Met Police, and the US Secret Service. The state governments of Michigan and New York are also partners. Several institutions and companies deeply tied to the US National Security State, such as Michael Chertoff’s the Chertoff Groupthe National Security Institute, and MITRE, are part of GCA as are some of the most controversial and intelligence-connected cybersecurity companies, such as Crowdstrike and Sepio Systems, another Unit 8200 alumni-founded company whose chairman of the board is former Mossad director Tamir Pardo. The Israeli intelligence-linked initiative CyberNYC is also a member. Major telecommunication companies like Verizon and Virgin are represented alongside some of the world’s largest banks, including Bank of America and Barclays, as well as FS-ISAC and the UK’s “most powerful financial lobby”, the CityUK.

    Also crucial is the presence of several media organizations as partners, chief among them Bloomberg. Aside from Bloomberg and Craig Newmark Philanthropies (which funds several mainstream news outlets and “anti-fake news” initiatives), media outlets and organizations partnered with GCA include Free Press Unlimited (funded by George Soros’ Open Society Foundations, the European Union, and the US, Dutch, Belgian and UK governments), the Institute for Nonprofit News (funded by Craig Newmark, Pierre Omidyar’s Omidyar Network and George Soros’ Open Society Foundations, among others), and Report for America (funded by Craig Newmark Philanthropies, Facebook, Google and Bloomberg). PEN America, the well-known non-profit  and literary society focused on press freedom, is also a member. PEN has become much more closely aligned with US government policy and particularly the Democratic Party in recent years, likely owing to its current CEO being Suzanne Nossel, a former deputy Assistant Secretary of State for International Organizations at the Hillary Clinton-run State Department. The many other members of GCA can all be found here.

     The End of Anonymity

    The considerable involvement of some of the most powerful corporations in the world from some of the most critical sectors that underpin the current economy, as well as non-profits that manage key internet, government and utility infrastructure in these organizations that comprise WEF-PAC is highly significant and also concerning for more than a few reasons. Indeed, if all were to follow the call to form a “shared narrative”, whether it is true or not, in pursuit of long-term “strategic interests”, which the WEF and many of its partners directly relate to the rapid implementation of the 4th Industrial Revolution via the “Great Reset”, the WEF-PAC  global cyber utility could emerge sooner rather than later. 

    As evidenced by the architecture put forth by WEF-PAC, the power that organization would have over the public and private sectors is considerable. Such an organization, once established, could usher in long-standing efforts to both require a digital ID to access and use the internet as well as eliminate the ability to conduct anonymous financial transactions. Both policies would advance the overarching goal of both the WEF and many corporations and governments to usher in a new age of unprecedented surveillance of ordinary citizens.

    The effort to eliminate anonymous transactions in digital currency has become very overt in some countries in recent weeks, particularly in the US. For instance, Anne Neuberger, current Deputy National Security Adviser who has deep ties to the US-Israel lobby, stated on June 29 that the Biden administration was considering obtaining more “visibility” into ransomware groups’ activities, particularly anonymous cryptocurrency transactions. Such efforts could easily cross the line into state surveillance of any and all Americans’ online crypto transactions, especially given the US government’s history of habitually engaging in surveillance overreach in the post-9/11 era. One specific possibility mentioned by Neuberger was to prohibit companies from keeping crypto payments of concern secret, suggesting possible, imminent regulation of cryptocurrency exchanges. Current efforts, per Neuberger, also include an effort to build “an international coalition” against ransomware, which will likely tie into WEF-PAC given that the FBI, DOJ and US Secret Service are already members. 

    Neuberger also stated that the recent public-private partnership that took down the Trickbot botnet “should be the kind of operation used to tackle ransomware gangs in the future.” However, that effort, led by WEF partner Microsoftpreemptively took down a network of computers “out of fear that hackers could deploy [that network] to launch ransomware attacks to inhibit election-supporting IT systems” ahead of the US election. Using Trickbot as the model for future ransomware operations means opening the door to companies like Microsoft taking preemptive action against infrastructure used by people that the government and private sector “fear” may engage in “cybercrime” at some point in the future.

    Notably, on the same day as Neuberger’s statements, Congressional representative Bill Foster (D-IL) told Axios that “there’s significant sentiment in Congress that if you’re participating in an anonymous crypto transaction that you are a de facto participant in a criminal conspiracy.” Coming from Rep. Foster, this is quite significant as he is a member of the Financial Services Committee, the Blockchain Caucus and a recently formed Congressional working group on cryptocurrency. His decision to use the phrase “anonymous crypto transaction” as opposed to a transaction linked to ransomware or criminal activity is also significant, as it suggests that the possibility that complete anonymity is seen to be the target of coming efforts to regulate the crypto space by the US Congress. While Foster claims to oppose a “completely surveilled environment” for crypto, he qualifies that by stating that “you have to be able to unmask and potentially reverse those [crypto] transactions.” However, if this becomes government policy, it will mean the only group allowed to have complete anonymity in online financial transactions will be the State and will open the door to the government’s abuse of “unmasking”, which the US government has done in numerous instances over the years through the systematic abuse of FISA warrants.

    It is also important to mention that the US is hardly alone in its effort to wipe out online financial anonymity in the crypto world, as several governments that are supporting Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) projects, which includes the US, are either moving towards or have already cracked down on the crypto space. For example, soon after China introduced the “digital yuan”, it cracked down on bitcoin miners and companies that provide services, including ads and marketing, to crypto-related entities. This had major implications for the crypto market and resulted in a considerable reduction in bitcoin’s value, which it has yet to fully recover. It is reasonable to assume that other governments will work to aggressively regulate or even ban crypto markets following the introduction of their CBDC projects in order to force widespread adoption of the digital currency favored by the State. It is also worth highlighting the additional fact that, as China introduced the digital yuan, it also sought to crackdown on cash, stating that the anonymity offered by cash – much like anonymous crypto transactions – could also be used for “illicit activity.”

    However, there are some obvious holes in the WEF-PAC’s narratives and justifications for its “solutions.” For example, even if cryptocurrencies are banned or heavily regulated, it is unlikely that this will end cyber attacks, with hackers likely finding a new way to conduct operations that provide them with some sort of financial benefit. Cyber attacks and cybercrime precede the creation of crypto considerably and would continue even if crypto were somehow magically removed from the equation.

    In addition, there has been speculation about the nature of the 3 big hacks that took place over the past year: SolarWinds, Colonial and JBS. In the case of SolarWinds, attribution of blame to “Russian hackers” came down to CIA-linked cybersecurity firm FireEye claiming that the “disciplined” methodology of the hackers could only possibly have been individuals tied to Russia’s government and because FireEye’s CEO received a postcard he “suspects” was Russian in origin. Left uninvestigated was the firm Samanage, which is linked to the same intelligence networks in which the WEF’s current head of cyber strategy worked for years. 

    Regarding the Colonial pipeline hack, there is the fact that the original narrative was later proven false, as the pipeline itself remained functional, but services were halted due to the company’s concerns about their ability to bill customers properly. In addition, the US Department of Justice managed to seize the vast majority of the bitcoin ransomware payment Colonial had made, suggesting that extreme regulation of the crypto market may not actually be necessary to deter cybercriminals or recuperate ransomware payments. Surely, WEF-PAC is aware of this because the US Department of Justice is one of its members. 

    With the JBS hack, there is the fact that the company, the world’s largest meats processor, had partnered with the WEF just months before regarding the need to reduce meat consumption and had begun to heavily invest and acquire non-animal-based alternatives. Blackrock, a major WEF partner, is the 3rd largest shareholder in JBS. Notably, after the hack, the situation was quickly used to warn of upcoming, widespread meat shortages, even though the disruption of the hack paused operations for just one day. In addition, the JBS hack was supposedly executed by “Russian hackers” being given “safe haven” by Russia’s government. However, JBS somehow has no problem partnering the WEF, which co-hosts Cyber Polygon alongside the cybersecurity subsidiary of Sberbank, which is majority owned by the same Russian government supposedly enabling JBS’ hackers.

    In addition to the effort to regulate crypto, there is also a push by WEF-partnered governments to end privacy and the potential for anonymity on the internet in general, by linking government-issued IDs to internet access. This would allow every piece of online content accessed to be surveilled, as well as every post or comment authored by each citizen, supposedly to ensure that no citizen can engage in “criminal” activity online. This policy is part of an older effort, particularly in the US, where creating a nationwide “Driver’s License for the Internet” was proposed and then piloted by the Obama administration. The European Union made a similar effort to require government-issued IDs for social media access a few years later. 

    The UK also launched its Verify digital ID program around the same time, something which former UK Prime Minister and WEF associate Tony Blair has been pushing aggressively to have expanded into a compulsory requirement in recent months. Then, just last month, the EU implemented a sweeping, new digital ID service that could easily be expanded to fit with the Union’s past efforts to link such IDs to access to online services. As Unlimited Hangout noted earlier this year, the infrastructure for many of these digital IDs, as well as vaccine passports, have been set up so that they are also eventually linked to financial activity and potentially online activity as well. 

    Ultimately, what WEF-PAC represents is a global organization that aims to neuter anonymity online, whether for financial purposes or for browsing and other activities. It is a global effort combining powerful governments and corporations that seeks to usher in a new age of surveillance that makes such surveillance a requirement to participate in the online world or use online services. It is being sold to the public as the only way to stop a coming “pandemic” of cybercrime, a crisis taking place largely in murky parts of the internet that few understand or have any direct experience with. Having to rely on State intelligence agencies and intelligence-linked cybersecurity firms for attribution of these crimes, it has never been easier for corrupt actors in those agencies or their partners to either manufacture or manipulate a crisis that could upend online freedom as we have known it, something these very groups have sought to implement for years.

    All of this should serve as a poignant reminder that, as much as our lives have become interconnected with the internet and online activity, the fight to protect human freedom, dignity and liberty against a predatory, global oligarchy is fundamentally one that must take place in the real world, not only online. May the coming “cyber war”, whatever form it takes, remind many that online activism must be accompanied by real world actions and organizing.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 21:30

  • Damage Control: Elon Musk Admits Cybertruck Could "Flop", Writes Off Summon Feature As Just A "Fun Trick"
    Damage Control: Elon Musk Admits Cybertruck Could “Flop”, Writes Off Summon Feature As Just A “Fun Trick”

    As the cold hard reality of Elon Musk’s promises of years past start to catch up to the Tesla CEO – who last week testified in a trial where he is alleged to have made a unilateral decision to poorly allocate shareholder capital by bailing out his cousin’s failing Solar City business that was on the verge of insolvency – Musk now appears to be embarking on a journey to try and talk his way out of past promises and manage expectations.

    And while the mainstream financial press and regulators seem to be just fine with allowing Musk to get away with this, we’d be remiss if we didn’t point out each time the Earth’s boy genius attempts to re-write history right in front of our faces, with a smile, as though no one would notice and/or remember a half-decade of missed deadlines and false promises along the path of selling equity to investors and pushing poorly made vehicles, many hand-assembled in a makeshift tent (hereinafter referred to as “the Alien dreadnaught”) to marks willing to buy. 

    Musk Walks Back Full Self Driving

    The walk back of history began with a mega-huge whopper about 2 weeks ago when, at the beginning of July, Musk admitted that Full-Self Driving – a non-existent feature customers have been paying for for a half-decade – was a “hard problem”, casually dropping into conversation the idea that the company may not be anywhere close to meeting Musk’s promises about FSD. 

    As a reminder, Musk said in 2019 he was “very confident” in predicting autonomous robotaxis “next year”, which would have been 2020, which has now turned into “last year” and is six months away from being “two years ago”. Earlier this year Tesla offered up another reality check when it admitted to regulators that it was still “firmly in level 2” autonomy. 

    “Generalized self-driving is a hard problem, as it requires solving a large part of real-world AI. I didn’t expect it to be so hard, but the difficulty is obvious in retrospect. Nothing has more degrees of freedom than reality,” Musk wrote on Twitter in early July. 

    It’s a far cry from what Musk was saying years ago. “Tesla will have over 1 million robotaxis on the road next year,” Musk proclaimed in April of 2019, now more than 2 years ago. 

    Great, so you’ll just issue refunds to everyone who has paid for the feature over the last 5 years, right?

    Regardless, even the latest much heralded update to Full Self Driving, which arrived about a month late and had been touted as a solution to the last beta, which was such a disaster it was pulled off the market quickly, appears to be more of the same: jerky movements, uncertain vehicle operation and constant necessary interruptions from the driver. 

    After Full Self Driving 9.0’s release, even the company’s biggest fans like Galileo Russell said he saw little difference between the last beta and this one – and he still thinks the company is “still a long way away” to truly autonomous driving “where you never have to intervene”. 

    Musk Walks Back Cybertruck Expectations

    In another walk-back and reset of expectations last week, Elon Musk also Tweeted that there was “always some chance” that the Cybertruck – a product introduced almost two years ago in November 2019 to ridiculous fanfare – could “flop”. 

    This stands at obvious odds with statements Musk made in September at the company’s shareholder meeting, where he said  “The orders are gigantic” about the truck. Musk claimed there were ”… well over half a million orders.” He continued: “It’s a lot, basically. We stopped counting.”

    Recall, at the introduction of the Cybertruck, Musk had an assistant come on stage and try to break the truck’s armored glass.

    “Normal glass shatters immediately,” Musk said as his assistants, dressed like characters from The Matrix, dropped a metal ball on conventional glass, causing it to shatter.

    At which point another of Musk’s assistants gently threw a similar metal ball at the Cybertruck parked on stage. The driver’s side window promptly broke.

    “Oh my fucking God,” Musk nervously said, live on the stream, after the front window shattered into a million pieces. 

    Are you not amused?

    And if this demo wasn’t enough to “manage expectations”, Musk is now admitting the truck could “flop”. 

    But don’t worry shareholders, Musk has your back. He Tweeted: “To be frank, there is always some chance that Cybertruck will flop, because it is so unlike anything else. I don’t care. I love it so much even if others don’t. Other trucks look like copies of the same thing, but Cybertruck looks like it was made by aliens from the future.”

    Actually, it appears Musk doesn’t have your back – it appears he’s going to do whatever the hell he wants regardless of whether or not it’s good for the company. 

    “In end, we kept production design almost exactly same as show car. Just some small tweaks here & there to make it slightly better. No door handles. Car recognizes you & opens door. Having all four wheels steer is amazing for nimble handling & tight turns!” Musk gushed about the truck, which is still not in production. 

    Some critics not only believe the truck is already a “flop”, but also that its claimed specs are outright fraudulent.

    “This fraud is no different from those of Theranos or Nikola,” Stanphyl Capital’s Mark Spiegel wrote on Twitter last week. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Time will tell the tale. 

    Musk Walks Back Years Of Bluster About “Smart Summon”

    And now, the most recent walk-back. Shortly after Musk’s Cybertruck comments came Musk’s “realigning” of expectations about Tesla’s Summon feature, which Musk has been boasting about whilst collecting order money, for years. 

    This series of Tweets is a great starter thread on Musk’s previous statements about summon – including ones claiming it can go across the country and others using Summon as a reason to bump up the price of the non-existent Full Self Driving – (additional sources here), which include:

    • January 10, 2016: “In ~2 years, summon should work anywhere connected by land & not blocked by borders, eg you’re in LA and the car is in NY.”
    • October 20, 2016: “When you want your car to return, tap Summon on your phone. It will eventually find you even if you are on the other side of the country.”
    • October 31, 2018: “By next year, a Tesla should be able to drive around a parking lot, find an empty spot, read signs to confirm it’s valid & park.”
    • November 1, 2018: “Tesla advanced Summon ready in ~6 weeks! Just an over-the-air software upgrade, so will work on all cars made in past 2 years (Autopilot hardware V2+).”
    • November 1, 2018: “Car will drive to your phone location & follow you like a pet if you hold down summon button on Tesla app.”
    • April 6, 2019: “Tesla Enhanced Summon coming out in US next week for anyone with Enhanced Autopilot or Full Self-Driving option.”
    • May 23, 2019: “Smart Summon coming soon!”
    • October 11, 2019: “Now that Tesla V10.0 with Smart Summon is out, Full Self-Driving price will increase by $1000 on Nov 1.”
    • April 16, 2020: “We’re working super hard on getting traffic lights & stops released. Reverse summon (auto park) will be part of the core Autopilot software upgrade for FSD later this year.”

    And then, finally, just this past week: “Current Summon is sometimes useful, but mostly just a fun trick,” Musk nonchalantly wrote on Twitter this weekend. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    More than five years after Musk claimed Summon would work cross-country, it appears he is now giving up on the feature as it stands today. It’s yet one more walk back and re-writing of history that both customers and regulators will likely be just fine with.

    Everyone Can See It Except Regulators And Tesla Cultists

    Keep in mind these walk-backs don’t even include the company’s Solar Roof rollout. Even the mainstream media is catching up to that disaster: Bloomberg’s Dana Hull published a piece last month aptly titled “Tesla’s Solar Roof Rollout Is a Bust — And a Fixation for Elon Musk”.

    “It needs to be beautiful, affordable and seamlessly integrated,” Musk said about the company’s solar roof shingle back in 2016. “You’ll want to call your neighbors over and say, ‘check out this sweet roof.’”

    Except now it’s a half decade later and the company has barely rolled out any solar roofs, struggling to hit 200 installations per week. This is despite the fact that Musk set a goal to install more than 1,000 of them a week back in 2019. It raised prices in April of this year, leading to a slew of cancellations, Hull notes. 

    We don’t seem to be the only ones exasperated about the lack of regulatory oversight on Musk’s actions, either. For example, many on social media and podcasts have honed in on the fact that Full Self Driving is a complete and total bait and switch – except the “switched” item doesn’t seem to exist, either!

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some call it “the greatest consumer fraud in history”:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Even owners and cultists are starting to notice…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The “false advertising” seems to be clear as a bell to some…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As does the walk-back of “features” Musk has already sold customers on…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Once again – the only people Musk’s constant pathological lying hasn’t become clear to are the ones keeping him afloat: the cult-members that continue to happily shovel Musk their hard earned (or government issued) cash, and the regulators tasked with making sure that executives – and specifically car companies – don’t do…well…exactly what Musk is doing.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 21:11

  • Walmart Brings Automation To Regional Distribution Centers
    Walmart Brings Automation To Regional Distribution Centers

    The progressive press had a field day with “woke” Walmart highly publicized February decision to hikes wages for 425,000 workers to an average above $15 an hour. We doubt the obvious follow up – the ongoing stealthy replacement of many of its minimum wage workers with machines – will get the same amount of airtime.

    As Chain Store Age reports, Walmart is applying artificial intelligence to the palletizing of products in its regional distribution centers. I.e., it is replacing thousands of workers with robots.

    Since 2017, the discount giant has worked with Symbotic to optimize an automated technology solution to sort, store, retrieve and pack freight onto pallets in its Brooksville, Fla., distribution center. Under Walmart’s existing system, product arrives at one of its RDCs and is either cross-docked or warehoused, while being moved or stored manually. When it’s time for the product to go to a store, a 53-foot trailer is manually packed for transit. After the truck arrives at a store, associates unload it manually and place the items in the appropriate places.

    https://cdn.corporate.walmart.com/dims4/WMT/990cdc4/2147483647/strip/true/crop/604x394+48+0/resize/1840x1200!/quality/90/?url=https%3A%2F%2Fcdn.corporate.walmart.com%2F4e%2F32%2Fc19082344a818af02eb50c6ec0b3%2Fsymbotic-gif-4.gif

    Leveraging the Symbiotic solution, a complex algorithm determines how to store cases like puzzle pieces using high-speed mobile robots that operate with a precision that speeds the intake process and increases the accuracy of freight being stored for future orders. By using dense modular storage, the solution also expands building capacity.  

    In addition, by using palletizing robotics to organize and optimize freight, the Symbiotic solution creates custom store- and aisle-ready pallets.

    Why is Walmart doing this? Simple: According to CSA, “Walmart expects to save time, limit out-of-stocks and increasing the speed of stocking and unloading.” More importantly, the company hopes to further cut expenses and remove even more unskilled labor from its supply chain.

    This solution follows tests of similar automated warehouse solutions at a Walmart consolidation center in Colton, Calif., and perishable grocery distribution center in Shafter, Calif. 

    Walmart plans to implement this technology in 25 of its 42 RDCs. 

    “Though very few Walmart customers will ever see into our warehouses, they’ll still be able to witness an industry-leading change, each time they find a product on shelves,” said Joe Metzger, executive VP of supply chain operations at Walmart U.S. “There may be no way to solve all the complexities of a global supply chain, but we plan to keep changing the game as we use technology to transform the way we work and lead our business into the future.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 21:00

  • Beijing's Grip Means Hong Kong Is No Longer Special
    Beijing’s Grip Means Hong Kong Is No Longer Special

    By Ye Xie, Bloomberg report and macro commentator

    Three things we learned last week:

    1. Beijing signals that Hong Kong is preferable to New York for Chinese IPOs

    China plans to exempt companies that are going public in Hong Kong from seeking approval from its cybersecurity regulator, following its recent proposed new laws requiring vetting companies for IPOs in foreign countries.

    The move sends a clear signal that Hong Kong, Shanghai and Shenzhen are the preferred destinations for Chinese tech companies that want to go public, as the government grows warry that the vast data controlled by tech giants can be vulnerable to the prying eyes of foreign governments. Startups including Xiaohongshu, or “Little Red Book,” are putting their U.S. IPOs on hold.

    Meanwhile, the Biden administration warned investors Friday about the risks of doing business in Hong Kong, issuing an advisory that China’s push to exert more control over the financial hub threatens the rule of law and endangers employees and data.

    At least Presidents Xi Jinping and Joe Biden can agree on one thing: Hong Kong is no longer special. It’s basically the same as any other Chinese city.

    2. China’s economy is doing fine.

    The surprising cut to the reserve requirement ratio earlier this month triggered concern in markets that China’s economy may be deteriorating fast under the weight of slower credit growth and Beijing’s zero-tolerance policy for Covid. But it turns out there was little reason to worry, as data from retail sales to trade all beat economists’ forecasts. The RRR cut was largely a fine-tuning of its monetary policy toward supporting more growth, but it wasn’t the start of an easing cycle.

    3. Yuan carry trade is alive and well

    The trade-weighted yuan has reached the strongest level since 2016. China’s currency has benefited from investors’ preferences for carry trades after Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell reiterated that the central bank is a “ways off” from tapering. Adjusted for volatility, the yuan ranked as the world’s fourth highest-yielding currency, trailing only the Argentine peso, Turkish lira and Indian rupee.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 20:30

  • Will Biden Burst The Record M&A Bubble
    Will Biden Burst The Record M&A Bubble

    2021 has been a blockbuster year for virtually every banking product: from IPOs and equity offerings, to investment grade and junk bond sale and yes – even M&A: according to Goldman, through July 15, some $1.9 trillion of deal value for US-based acquirers has been announced, the highest volume of M&A by this point in the year since at least 2000.

    Specifically, among the strategic deals over $100 million that have been announced by US-based acquirers, Tech, Leisure & Recreation, and Telecom firms account for a combined 56% of total deal value. Why? Because thanks to the 2020 depression and subsequent Fed nationalization of the bond market, we saw record debt and equity issuance resulting in trillions in cash new cash. Now, corporate cash balances are among the highest ever and S&P 500 managements are deploying some of the cash on M&A deals.

    While there is nobody doubt the M&A market is gripped by epic euphoria, Goldman’s David Kostin observes a curious twist: companies are funding their mergers in an anomalous way compared to history, paying above-average premiums and using less stock consideration than usual given high equity multiples,almost as if they have cash to burn. During the last 20 years, high S&P 500 forward P/E multiples have been associated with greater stock consideration in M&A deals.

    This is intuitive; when equity multiples are high, the acquirer’s stock becomes more valuable in potential transactions. On an absolute basis, the S&P 500 trades at a near record high valuation. However, as shown in the chart above, only 28% of completed deal value (>$100 million) for strategic US acquirers has been in stock consideration vs. the almost 50% that history would imply. Within that universe, deals have also been completed at a larger premium than usual. In the last two decades, the mean deal premium to pre-bid price has been 32%. The average $100+ million deal in 2021 has been struck at a 44% premium to pre-bid price, showing buyers’ appetites to pay a premium for acquisitions post-pandemic.

    Looking ahead, there are two possible paths: continued record activity or a regulatory crackdown by the BIden admin.

    As Kostin notes, one reason M&A could continue to surge is the $104 billion in equity capital raised YTD across 336 SPAC IPOs, augmenting the $77 billion in SPAC issuance in 2020. Already, 154 de-SPAC mergers have been announced in 2021, absorbing $54 billion of SPAC equity capital and driving $384 billion of deal EV. But the Goldman strategist estimates that there is still $118 billion of cash in 394 SPACs currently searching for a target. On average, the aggregate ratio of target EV at merger announcement to SPAC capital is roughly 7x, implying that SPACs could drive $800 billion of M&A enterprise value during the next two years.

    All else equal, Goldman forecasts that S&P 500 companies will spend $324 billion in cash M&A in 2021 (+45% year/year) and $340 billion in 2022 (+5%). The bank recently noted that cash M&A growth is positively correlated with S&P 500 earnings growth, and Goldman forecasts that S&P 500 earnings growth of 35% this year will drive a rebound in cash M&A, supported by the strong backlog of announced deals and record-high cash to asset ratios.

    But while Goldman – which makes generous fees on advisory assignments – would love nothing more than continued record M&A activity, storm clouds are gathering. One headwind to the cash component of M&A is elevated equity valuations. On the other hand, the low interest rate environment that has supported equity valuations also makes it easier for companies to issue debt to fund acquisitions with cash.

    A bigger concern as Goldman itself admits, and why the bank expects more muted growth in cash M&A in 2022, is due to policy risk, or as Kostin put it: “A key risk to the outlook for M&A is increased regulatory scrutiny due to antitrust concerns. This week, we explored the topic in more detail in our report on antitrust risk in the US stock market (Equities, antitrust, and the “inestimable” value of due process, Jul. 13, 2021).” The bottom line, according to Goldman, is that increased antitrust scrutiny has different implications for key stakeholders in the capital markets ecosystem:

    • First, company managements may find the prospect of growing by way of acquisition less appealing in a stricter regulatory environment. President Biden released an executive order earlier this week that calls for the FTC to take a more aggressive approach to regulating merger activity. The initiative will affect firms in a variety of sectors, primarily by making it more onerous to complete deals as regulators review the competitive implications of proposed transactions. Hurdle rates for mergers will be higher and deal break fees greater than they would have been prior to the Executive Order. Firms whose business models have previously relied on external growth may pivot to organic growth initiatives to boost profits. The cutoff rate for possible capital spending projects may actually decline from current thresholds.
    • Second, merger arbitrage investors may see the timing, odds of success, and spreads in their trades shift significantly. Merger arbitrage spreads have declined but are now likely to widen. The amount of time between the announcement of a $5+ billion deal and its completion has been relatively stable at around 7 months for the past several years. A more interventionist FTC will hinder merger activity. Announced deals may face additional uncertainty, take longer to execute, and be assessed as generally less likely to succeed, which could result in wider merger arb spreads.

    Passive or index investors could also be affected by the new era of antitrust given the companies in the S&P 500 that are most likely to be subject to scrutiny are also the largest constituents in major equity benchmarks.President Biden’s executive order, proposed legislation, and pending lawsuits specifically target “Big Tech” (AAPL, AMZN, FB, and GOOGL).

    These four firms have a current aggregate equity cap of $7 trillion and comprise 17% of the S&P 500 equity cap and 28% of the Russell 1000 Growth benchmark…

    … and Goldman notes that in an increasingly concentrated market, risks to the trajectory of sales growth and profitability of these companies represent risks for the broader market. However, a sum-of-the-parts valuation could be higher or lower than the original company’s valuation and would impact the stock market accordingly if a full break-up were undertaken. In addition to the largest companies, the FTC’s stricter regulatory posture could also indirectly weigh on potential M&A targets.

    Goldman concludes by listing its tactical research team’s basket of likely M&A candidates screens for companies that its analysts deem to have at least a 15% likelihood of being acquired. The basket sharply outperformed as the economy reopened, corporate balance sheets improved, and M&A activity picked up. However, since March of this year, the basket has underperformed the market by 7 pp and trades at a valuation discount of 20% vs. the S&P 500.

    The list of basket constituents is shown below.

    Kostin’s bottom line is rather obvious: “More regulatory scrutiny could represent a persistent overhang to potential M&A targets, particularly in industries with high market concentration. On the other hand, if strategic buyers take a step back from M&A, it could create an opportunity for private equity firms: alternatives have $3.3 trillion in dry powder.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 20:00

  • Did Japan Just Warn The US Of An Impending Joint Attack From China And Russia?
    Did Japan Just Warn The US Of An Impending Joint Attack From China And Russia?

    Authored by Aden Tate via The Organic Prepper blog,

    Four days before Americans celebrated Independence Day, the number two defense official in Japan offered some strange advice that has many Americans concerned.

    After noting the Chinese and Russians are excellent allies and have engaged in several military drills together of late, Japanese State Defense Minister Yasuhide Nakayama, in a press interview, had this to say, “[Russian naval forces] are really exercising just right in front of the western part of Honolulu, and so I don’t want to remind the [sic] seventy years ago, but we have to be careful of the exercising of the Russians.” 

    Nakayama made this statement because many Russian ships are operating just 35 miles off of Hawaii’s coast. They conducted several drills, one of which has been a rehearsal on sinking an aircraft carrier. And what could Nakayama possibly be alluding to that happened in Hawaii roughly seventy years ago?

    Pearl Harbor.

    So what exactly does Nakayama mean by this?

    Is he alluding to the possibility of a surprise attack by a joint China-Russia military operation on military soil? Or are people reading into this too much?

    According to American Military News, the above statement is clear and presents evidence that just such an alliance prepares for action. And while I do not doubt that both Russia and China are hostile to the US, I have to wonder, is this the best evidence to fall back on for such?

    Nakayama went on to describe potential nuclear destruction:

    “If some country shoot’s [a nuclear weapon] from their continent towards Honolulu, that missile’s…the warheads compared to Hiroshima, it’s 200 times more than Hiroshima.” 

    He went on to add, “So I’ve been to Hiroshima before and I went to the museum before, from that experience and the perspective, if 200 times more strong atomic bombs or torpedoes or missiles, warheads towards Honolulu, I think Honolulu will be erased from the map. So we have to think before using those powers, we have to think how to stop it.”

    Is this how World War 3 begins?

    Isn’t that a rather strange subject to bring up?

    Why would Nakayama point out to the US the dangers of a nuclear attack – and the potential devastation – on American soil? Is 35 miles a significant enough distance away to survive the destruction caused by a 200 times more powerful bomb than Hiroshima?

    He went on to offer some advice, saying, “We have to show the deterrence towards China, and not just China but also the Russians, because, as I told you, that they are doing their exercises together.”

    So Nakayama seems to believe that America needs to take a stronger stance militarily on proving that we can and will defend ourselves. While I most certainly believe the same thing, his next statement may (or may not) give us a little more insight:

    What we can do is show the deterrence and also [that an attack] or happening towards Taiwan, it’s straight to relate to not just Japan, but also the US-Japan alliance even.”

    Is this his inspiration for such a warning all along?

    I don’t think there’s any doubt in anybody’s mind that Taiwan is now screwed. It’s only a matter of time before the Chinese invade and take it. Really, what’s stopping them now?

    Absolutely nothing.

    And Taiwan is a very short hop away from Japan, potentially serving as a perfect launching point for future offensives. And China hates Japan.

    Is Nakayama providing this warning to the US to bolster Japan’s own chances of defense against a Chinese invasion? Is there something more that he knows but isn’t stating? What conclusions can we draw from all this?

    I’ll leave that up to the reader to decide, but to reiterate, here’s where we’re at:

    Speaking of China, an article published on The Organic Prepper pointed out that America’s military may soon be unable to equip itself for modern warfare without relying on Chinese suppliers.

    Is American Military News on point with this being a valid indicator of an impending attack? Are the quotes being read into too much? Or, in light of other current happenstances, are they something Americans should take note of?

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 19:30

  • "Most People Don't Wanna Turn To Brian Stelter To Tell Them What's Real": CNN Guest Obliterates 'Reliable Sources' Host
    “Most People Don’t Wanna Turn To Brian Stelter To Tell Them What’s Real”: CNN Guest Obliterates ‘Reliable Sources’ Host

    Controversial author Michael Wolff (of dubious Trump White House ‘tell-all’ and earpiece malarkey fame) was trotted out on CNN Sunday, where he proceeded (was allowed) to excoriate “Reliable Sources” host Brian Stelter for doing a “terrible job” and being “full of sanctimony.”

    You become part of, one of the parts of the problem of the media. You know, you come on here, and you have a monopoly on truth – you know, you know exactly how things are supposed to be done. You know, you are why one of the reasons people can’t stand the media, I’m sorry.” said Wolff.

    To which Stelter laughed, saying “You’re cracking me up.”

    “It’s your fault,” Wolff shot back, to which Stelter asked what he could do better.

    “You know, don’t talk so much, listen more. You know, people have genuine problems with the media, the media doesn’t get the story right. The media exists in its own bubble,” Wolff replied. “Also, you’re incredibly repetitive. It’s week after week,” Wolff continued. “I mean, you’re the flip side of Donald Trump. You know, fake news and you say virtuous news.”

    When Stelter then asked him why he’s been on CNN several times this week, Wolff hung his head and replied: “You know, I’m a book salesman.”

    Were Wolff’s comments truly off-the-cuff? Or as one Zero Hedge reader suggested, could CNN be resorting to a “very strategic capitulation” in order to “turn over a new leaf” and regain credibility amid dismal ratings and all-time low trust in the media?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 19:00

  • Johnstone: Violent Extremists Took Over The US Capitol Long Before January 6
    Johnstone: Violent Extremists Took Over The US Capitol Long Before January 6

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone,

    No longer content with absurd claims that the January 6 Capitol riot was as bad as the 9/11 attacks, Democratic Party-aligned pundits are now insisting that it was in fact worse.

    On a recent appearance with MSNBC’s ReidOut with Joy Reid, former Bush strategist Matthew Dowd said he felt the Capitol riot was “much worse” than 9/11 and that this is the “most perilous point in time” since the beginning of the American Civil War.

    “To me, though there was less loss of life on January 6, January 6 was worse than 9/11, because it’s continued to rip our country apart and get permission for people to pursue autocratic means, and so I think we’re in a much worse place than we’ve been,” Dowd said. “I think we’re in the most perilous point in time since 1861 in the advent of the Civil War.”

    “I do too,” Reid said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Not to be outdone, Lincoln Project co-founder Steve Smith cited Dowd’s hysterical claim but adding that not only was January 6 worse than 9/11, but it was actually going to kill more Americans somehow, even counting all those killed in the US wars which ensued from the 9/11 attacks.

    “He couldn’t be more right,” Schmidt said at a town hall for the Lincoln Project.

    “The 1/6 attack for the future of the country was a profoundly more dangerous event than the 9/11 attacks. And in the end, the 1/6 attacks are likely to kill a lot more Americans than were killed in the 9/11 attacks, which will include the casualties of the wars that lasted 20 years following.”

    A total of 2,996 Americans were killed in the 9/11 attacks, and a further seven thousand US troops have been killed in Iraq and Afghanistan. Exactly one person was killed in the January 6 riot, and it was a rioter shot by police inside the Capitol Building. Early reports that rioters had beaten a police officer to death with a fire extinguisher turned out to have been false.

    These bizarre alternate-reality takes are awful for a whole host of reasons, including the fact that this so-called “insurrection” everyone is still shrieking about never at any point in its planning or enactment had a higher than zero percent chance of overthrowing the most powerful government in the world, and the fact that they are manufacturing consent for new authoritarian measures just like 9/11 did.

    But perhaps the most annoying thing about all the melodramatic garment-rending over how close the US Capitol came to being taken over by violent extremists is that the US Capitol has been under the control of violent extremists for a very long time already.

    For all the fretting everyone has been doing about fascists and white supremacist groups, those are not the violent extremists posing the greatest threat and amassing the highest body count today. Neither are the communists. Neither are the anarchists. Neither are the radicalized Muslims, nor the fundamentalist Christians, nor the environmentalists, nor the incels. No, the most dangerous and deadly group of violent extremists in our day are adherents of the mainstream status quo politics of the US-centralized power alliance.

    And it’s not even close. Certainly many of the groups listed above are dangerous and undesirable, but they’re not the ones raining explosives upon families around the world for power and profit. They’re not the ones brandishing nuclear weapons with steadily increasing recklessness as they ramp up a new cold war against Russia and China. They’re not the ones poisoning the air and the water and rapidly destroying the environment we all depend on for survival. They’re not the ones enslaving humanity to a brutal, oppressive and exploitative global capitalist system which leaves far too many toiling for far too little when there’s plenty for everyone.

    That would be the so-called “moderates” of the western empire, who in reality are anything but.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It is violent to wage nonstop campaigns of military mass murder and impose civilian-killing economic sanctions on nations which disobey your dictates. It is extremist to brutalize, brainwash and enslave humanity while continuously shoving the world in the direction of extinction and armageddon in the name of profit and unipolar hegemony. Because US officials sit almost entirely on the right side of the global political spectrum, we can accurately say that everyone is fretting about violent right-wing extremists storming a Capitol building that had already long been occupied by violent right-wing extremists.

    And yet when Facebook started sending Americans warnings that they may have viewed “extremist content” scrolling through their feeds, posts supporting this most dangerous group of extremists were not the content they were being warned about, but any kind of content which opposes the status quo those extremists have created. They’re killing the ecosystem and murdering people every single day while imperiling us all with the risk of nuclear war, my social media feeds are full of Americans literally trying to crowdfund their own survival while the world’s worst add trillions to their wealth, but it’s the people who want to change this abusive system who are the dangerous extremists.

    Some analysts focus primarily on criticizing the really obvious monsters who spout racist and bigoted rhetoric to advance their toxic agendas. Others focus more on criticizing the monsters that are harder to see through the fog of feigned politeness and propaganda distortion, the ones you see in government buildings and on Fortune Magazine covers and on TV news shows telling you what to think about the world. Those who spend their time criticizing the latter more than the former are often attacked and ridiculed as fascist sympathizers and Kremlin assets, but only by those who don’t actually see the monsters that they are pointing to.

    Hollywood trained us to fear psychopathic killers prowling around in the dark so we won’t notice the psychopathic killers who rule our world in broad daylight. We’ve been trained to fear the serial killer covered in blood and wielding a chainsaw so we won’t notice the serial killer wearing a suit and wielding a pen.

    Our collective maturity cannot begin until we learn to see the violent extremist monsters where they actually exist, and not just where we’ve been trained to look for them.

    *  *  *

    My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, following me on FacebookTwitterSoundcloud or YouTube, or throwing some money into my tip jar on Ko-fiPatreon or Paypal. If you want to read more you can buy my books. The best way to make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for at my website or on Substack, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

    Liked it? Take a second to support Caitlin Johnstone on Patreon!

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 18:30

  • Xiaomi Dethrones Apple As The World's #2 Smartphone Maker
    Xiaomi Dethrones Apple As The World’s #2 Smartphone Maker

    Could the bedrock of the smartphone market be moving before our very eyes?  

    A new report from market research firm Canalys last week suggests that could be the case.

    The report revealed that Chinese smartphone maker Xiaomi had surpassed Apple in the second quarter of 2021 to become the world’s number two smartphone maker, according to Reuters. The report measures the number of handsets that manufacturers sell to distributors. 

    It was the first time Xiaomi took the second place spot, with the company getting 17% of worldwide smartphone shipments, up from 3% the previous quarter.

    The market for global smartphone shipments was up 12% in the second quarter, with Samsung leading the charge at 19% per share and Apple in third place at 14% per share. Chinese smartphone makers Oppo and Vivo had 10% each. 

    Xiaomi phones are about 40% tp 75% cheaper than its Samsung and Apple rivals, according to Canalys Research Manager Ben Stanton. The company now has its sights on prioritizing its high-end devices. 

    Shipments for Xiaomi were up 300% in Latin America, 150% in Africa and 50% in Western Europe, according to the report. 

    Lei Jun, founder and CEO of Xiaomi, called it an “important milestone in Xiaomi’s history.”

    “Notwithstanding the celebrations now, I want to make sure we can maintain our second place steadily and firmly in the future,” he wrote in a letter to employees last week. 

    The company’s stock was up about 5% on Friday. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 18:00

  • Buchanan: Is Biden Really The Lincoln Of Our Time?
    Buchanan: Is Biden Really The Lincoln Of Our Time?

    Authored by Pat Buchanan,

    Traveling to Philadelphia Tuesday, President Joe Biden laid out in apocalyptic terms the gravity of the “threat” to American democracy from Republican efforts to reform and rewrite state election laws.

    “We are facing the most significant test of our democracy since the Civil War. That’s not hyperbole. Since the Civil War. The Confederates back then never breached the Capitol as insurrectionists did on Jan. 6.”

    Biden is inviting a comparison of what he faces with what Abraham Lincoln faced when he took office in 1861 with seven Southern states having voted to secede and Fort Sumter a month away.

    The Republican “threat” to our democracy, implied Biden, is mortal.

    “I never thought in my entire career I’d ever have to say it. But I swore an oath to you, to God — to preserve, protect and defend the Constitution. And that’s an oath that forms a sacred trust to defend America against all threats both foreign and domestic.

    “The assault on free and fair elections is just such a threat.”

    Republicans seek to deny “full and free and fair elections” and are engaged in “the most un-American thing that any of us can imagine, the most undemocratic, the most unpatriotic.”

    Un-American? Undemocratic? Unpatriotic?

    When Sen. Joseph McCarthy challenged the patriotism of Truman Democrats in such terms in the 1950s, he was censured by the Senate.

    Is Biden really saying that minor alterations in election laws, all of which would have to pass muster with federal courts and the Supreme Court, represent an existential threat to our republic?

    This is beyond hyperbole. It is ridiculous. It is absurd.

    Such hype is a measure of just how far out of touch with the real world the rhetoric of our reigning elites has drifted.

    Yet, by casting himself and his party as today’s party of Lincoln, and Republican governors as Confederates, with the stakes equal to the survival of the Union, Biden has raised the stakes of this minor political skirmish.

    And raised the political risk to himself, if he fails, as is likely.

    Biden has just shoved a large pile of his political chips into the middle of the table in a show of confidence that he can bring off Senate passage of the For the People Act and the John Lewis Voting Rights Act, when both pieces of legislation look to be certain losers.

    Neither has the 60 votes needed for passage. Neither has a single Republican vote. Nor is there evidence either can gain the 50 Democratic votes in the Senate that would require a unanimous caucus.

    And if either measure got the 50 votes needed for passage, Democrats would still need 50 votes to break a GOP filibuster. Yet, Democratic senators such as Joe Manchin and Kyrsten Sinema are opposed to abolishing the filibuster. As six-term Sen. Joe Biden appears to be himself.

    Is Biden putting on a show of defiance for the progressive wing of his party? For, again, what is at issue here so critical as to elicit comparison with a Civil War that cost 600,000 American lives?

    To prevent voting legislation from being enacted into law, Texas Democrats fled from the state legislature in Austin and from Texas itself — to deny Republicans a quorum.

    And what do the liberal and progressive Texans fear?

    Two pieces of legislation, says The New York Times:

    “Both measures would ban 24-hour voting and drive-through voting; prohibit election officials from proactively sending absentee ballot applications to voters who had not requested them; add new voter identification requirements for voting by mail; limit the types of assistance that can be provided to voters; and greatly expand the authority and autonomy of partisan poll watchers.”

    Are such modest proposals, all within the prerogatives of state government under the Constitution, truly a threat to the republic as serious as the possibility of a second Civil War?

    Democrats are faking this, casting themselves in the familiar role of progressives fighting heroically for democracy against neo-fascist forces of the right.

    Declared Biden at the National Constitution Center: “The 21st-century Jim Crow assault is real. It’s unrelenting.”

    Yet, with all his rhetoric placing himself in the tradition of Lincoln, and casting Republicans in the role of die-hard segregationists and vote deniers, Biden is promising something he almost surely cannot deliver.

    What lies ahead?

    Having raised the stakes in this fight, Biden has raised the cost of his likely defeat. The probable elements of that defeat will be a failure to bring about a unanimous Democratic Senate vote or the refusal of Democratic senators to break a Republican filibuster.

    Out of this will come anger at Biden among progressives for his not going public to demand suspension of the filibuster, rage at Manchin and Sinema and other Democratic senators who secretly back retention of the filibuster, another victory for Sen. Mitch McConnell, and more lost time for the bigger items on the Biden agenda.

    All the price of Joe Biden’s absurd rhetorical hype.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 17:30

  • Uber's $59 Million Fine Over Sexual Assault Data Was Just Reduced To $150K
    Uber’s $59 Million Fine Over Sexual Assault Data Was Just Reduced To $150K

    Uber has ‘come to an arrangement’ with a California regulator that would reduce a $59 million fine to just $150,000, according to the proposed agreement filed Thursday.

    In December of 2020, the California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) fined the ride-sharing company $59 million and threatened to suspend its license if they didn’t comply with a request for data on sexual assaults, according to The Verge.

    Under the terms of the new deal, however, Uber will provide anonymized data on sexual assault incidents and will give accusers the ability to opt-in to being contacted by CPUC in the future. The company will also contribute $5 million to the California Victims Compensation Board, and $4 million towards developing industry-wide efforts to report and respond to these types of incidents. Uber will deposit the combined $9 million with the CPUC’s Fiscal Office.

    The CPUC fine was in response to a damning 84-page safety report published in 2019, which included aggregate data on thousands of sexual assaults in the US between 2017 and 2018 during trips taken in Uber vehicles.

    Uber called the report “jarring,” but declined to provide more specific information about the assaults when the CPUC came asking. The CPUC also wanted to know more information about who at the company authored the report, especially because Uber admitted in the fine print that it did not “assess or take any position on whether any of the reported incidents actually occurred.” (The CPUC has regulatory authority over transportation companies in California and regularly investigates complaints against them.)

    Uber refused to answer the CPUC’s questions and hand over the data on the grounds that it would put sexual assault survivors at risk. It appealed the CPUC’s fine in January, calling the $59 million fine “extraordinary” and claiming that the CPUC was “penaliz[ing] Uber for its good-faith efforts to stand with survivors.” –The Verge

    Uber has faced numerous lawsuits stemming from alleged sexual assault. In April, 2019, a Washington DC woman sued the company for negligence and consumer protection violations after she says a driver sexually assaulted her. In 2017, a woman in India who says she was raped in 2014 by an Uber driver also sued the company – after an Uber executive illegally disclosed a portion of her medical records to other Uber employees, including former CEO Travis Kalanick.

    In 2019, 19 women sued Uber competitor Lyft for failure to prevent sexual assault perpetrated by drivers on the platform, then doing virtually nothing to investigate the complaints.

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 17:00

  • Goodhart's Law: When Investors Mistake The Distortions Of The Wall Of Money For Wisdom
    Goodhart’s Law: When Investors Mistake The Distortions Of The Wall Of Money For Wisdom

    By One River Asset Management CIO, Eric Peters

    “When a measure becomes a target, it ceases to be a good measure,” said the Englishman, stepping outside of himself. “That’s Goodhart’s Law.”

    Charles Goodhart observed that central banks measured money supply, and found certain M1 growth rates to be optimal. But once they targeted that optimal range, M1 lost its value as a measure.

    Market and economic actors adjusted their behavior to game the M1 system. So central bankers shifted to M2, then M3, and M4.

    “Investing is obviously not a science, but if it were, we would say that you can’t act on something and observe it at the same time.” French colonialists discovered this in rat infested Hanoi, when they offered a bounty for killing rodents. To receive the reward, the Vietnamese were required to produce severed tails.

    Soon thereafter, tail-less rats scurried throughout the city. The bounty hunters removed their tails and released them to the filthy sewers to breed. Boosting their bounty.

    “Investors discover pricing anomalies from the past. And they pile into them, ensuring that for a time they persist.” They mistake the distortions of their wall of money for the wisdom of their observations.

    They interact with the market as if they’re exogenous, when, in fact, they’ve become endogenous. “Today’s greatest example of Goodhart’s Law in action can be found in volatility markets.”

    The VIX index measures the expected volatility of the S&P 500, and is calculated by multiplying expected 30-day variance by 100. As a measure of market fear, it was quite useful, until it became something that could be traded.

    “The sheer size of outstanding positions in VIX futures, VIX options, ETFs, ETNs and bank volatility selling programs is such that those trading these markets can no longer separate the true measure of volatility from their own actions.”

    Tyler Durden
    Sun, 07/18/2021 – 16:31

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 18th July 2021

  • Escobar: Russia-China Advance Asian Roadmap For Afghanistan
    Escobar: Russia-China Advance Asian Roadmap For Afghanistan

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    Shanghai Cooperation Organization’s ‘facilitate, not mediate’ role could be the key to solving the Afghan imbroglio…

    Kazakhstan’s Foreign Minister Mukhtar Tileuberdi, Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov, Tajik Foreign Minister Sirojiddin Muhriddin and Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi pose for a family photo before a meeting of Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) Contact Group on Afghanistan, in Dushanbe, Tajikistan. Photo: Russian Foreign Ministry / Sputnik via AFP

    Shanghai Cooperation Organization meeting of Foreign Ministers on Wednesday in Dushanbe, the Tajik capital, may have been an under-the-radar affair, but it did reveal the contours of the big picture ahead when it comes to Afghanistan.

    So let’s see what Russia and China – the SCO’s heavyweights – have been up to.

    Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi laid out the basic road map to his Afghan counterpart Mohammad Haneef Atmar. While stressing the Chinese foreign policy gold standard – no interference in internal affairs of friendly nations – Wang established three priorities:

    1. Real inter-Afghan negotiations towards national reconciliation and a durable political solution, thus preventing all-out civil war. Beijing is ready to “facilitate” dialogue.

    2. Fighting terror – which means, in practice, al-Qaeda remnants, ISIS-Khorasan and the Eastern Turkestan Islamic Movement (ETIM). Afghanistan should not be a haven for terrorist outfits – again.

    3. The Taliban, for their part, should pledge a clean break with every terrorist outfit.

    Atmar, according to diplomatic sources, fully agreed with Wang. And so did Tajik Foreign Minister Sirojiddin Muhriddin. Atmar even promised to work with Beijing to crack down on ETIM, a Uighur terror group founded in China’s western Xinjiang. Overall, the official Beijing stance is that all negotiations should be “Afghan-owned and Afghan-led.”

    There is no sign yet that the Taliban will enter a power-sharing arrangement with President Ashraf Ghani’s government. Photo: AFP/Wali Sabawoon/NurPhoto

    It was up to Russian presidential envoy Zamir Kabulov to offer a more detailed appraisal of the Dushanbe discussions.

    The main Russian point is that Kabul and the Taliban should try to form a provisional coalition government for the next 2-3 years while they negotiate a permanent agreement. Talk about a Sisyphean task – and that’s an understatement. The Russians know very well that both sides won’t restart negotiations before September.

    Moscow is very precise about the role of the extended troika – Russia, China, Pakistan and the US – in the excruciatingly slow Doha peace process talks: the troika should “facilitate” (also Wang’s terminology), not mediate the proceedings.

    Another very important point is that once “substantive” intra-Afghan negotiations resume, a mechanism should be launched to clear the Taliban of UN Security Council sanctions.

    This will mean the normalization of the Taliban as a political movement. Considering their current diplomatic drive, the Taliban do have their eyes on the ball. So the Russian warning that they should not become a security threat to any of the Central Asian “stans” or there will be “consequences” has been fully understood.

    Four of the five “stans” (Turkmenistan is the exception) are SCO members. By the way, the Taliban have sent a diplomatic mission to Turkmenistan to ease its fears.

    Break for the border

    In Dushanbe, a special meeting of the SCO-Afghanistan Contact Group, established in 2005, for the first time was held at the foreign minister level.

    This shows that the SCO as a whole is engaged in making its “facilitate, not mediate” role the prime mechanism to solve the Afghan drama. It’s always crucial to remember that no fewer than six SCO member-nations are Afghanistan’s neighbors.

    During the main event in Dushanbe – the SCO Foreign Ministers Council – the Russians once again framed Washington’s Indo-Pacific strategy as an attempt to deter China and isolate Russia.

    Following recent analyses by President Vladimir Putin and Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov, the Russian delegation explained to its SCO counterparts its view counterposing Moscow and Beijing’s effort to develop a polycentric world system based on international law, on the one hand, with the Western concept of the so-called “rules-based world order.”

    The Western approach, they said, puts pressure on countries that pursue independent foreign policy courses, ultimately legitimizing the West’s “neocolonial policy.”

    On the ground

    While the SCO was discussing the drive towards a polycentric world system, the Taliban, on the ground, kept doing what they’ve been doing for the past few weeks: capturing strategic crossroads.

    The Taliban already controlled border crossings with Tajikistan, Uzbekistan, Iran and Turkmenistan. Now they have taken over ultra-strategic Spin Boldak, bordering Balochistan in Pakistan, which in trade terms is even more important than the Torkham border crossing near the Khyber Pass.

    Taliban in Spin Boldak, the very busy commercial border between Afghanistan and Balochistan in Pakistan. Photo: AFP

    According to Taliban spokesman Suhail Shaheen, “the Spin Boldak district in Kandahar province has been cleared of the enemy” – Kabul’s forces – “and the district is now under the control of the mujahideen.” The term “mujahideen” in the Afghan context means indigenous forces fighting foreign invaders or proxies.

    To have an idea of the importance of Spin Boldak for the Taliban economy during their years in power, see the third chapter of a series I published in Asia Times in 2010, here and here. Eleven years ago, I noted that “the Afghan-Pakistan border is still porous, and the Taliban seem to believe they may even get their Talibanistan back.” They believe that now, more than ever.

    Meanwhile, in the northeast, in Badakhshan province, the Taliban are getting closer and closer to the border with Xinjiang – which has led to some hysteria about “terrorism” infiltrating China via the Wakhan corridor.

    The Wakhan corridor in Afghanistan, seen from the Tajik side. Photo: Pepe Escobar, November 2019

    Nonsense. The actual Afghanistan-China border in the Wakhan is roughly 90 kilometers. Beijing can exercise full electronic surveillance on everything that moves.

    I crossed part of the Wakhan on the Tajik side, bordering Afghanistan, during my Central Asian loop in late 2019, and on some stretches of the Pamir Highway I was as close to Xinjiang as 30 kilometers or so through no man’s land. The only people I saw along the geologically spectacular, desolate landscape were a few nomad caravans. The terrain can be even more forbidding than the Hindu Kush.

    If any terror outfits try to get to Xinjiang, they won’t dare cross the Wakhan; they will try to infiltrate via Kyrgyzstan. I met a lot of Uighurs in Bishkek, the Kyrgyz capital: mostly businessman, legally going back and forth. On the Kyrgyz-Xinjiang border, there was a steady flow of cargo trucks. ETIM was dismissed as a bunch of nutcases.

    What’s way more relevant is that the Ministry of Public Works in Kabul is actually building a 50-kilometer road – for the moment unpaved –  between Badakhshan province and Xinjiang, all the way to the end of the Wakhan corridor. They will call it the Wakhan Route.

    No imperial graveyard ahead

    SCO member Pakistan remains arguably the key to solve the Afghan drama. The Pakistani ISI remains closely linked to every Taliban faction: never forget the Taliban are a creation of legendary General Hamid Gul in the early 1990s.

    At the same time, for any jihadi outfit it’s easier to hide and lie low deep in the Pakistani tribal areas than anywhere else – and they can buy protection, irrespective of what the Taliban are doing in Afghanistan. Prime Minister Imran Khan and his circle are very much aware of it – as much as Beijing. That will be the ultimate test for the SCO in its anti-terror front.

    China needs an eminently stable Pakistan for all the long-term Belt and Road/China-Pakistan Economic Corridor projects and to fulfill its goal of incorporating Afghanistan. Kabul would be bound to benefit not only from increased connectivity and infrastructure development but also from future mineral including rare earth exploration projects.

    Meanwhile, Hindu nationalists would love to outflank Pakistan and extend their influence in Kabul, encouraged by Washington. For the Empire of Chaos, the ideal agenda is – what else? – chaos: disrupting Belt and Road and the Russia-China road map for Eurasian integration, Afghanistan included.

    Added hysteria depicting Russia and China involved in Afghan reconstruction as but a new chapter in the never-ending “graveyard of empires” saga does not even qualify as nonsense. The talks in Dushanbe made clear that the Russia-China strategic partnership approach to Afghanistan is cautiously realistic.

    Taliban negotiators Abdul Latif Mansoor (right), Shahabuddin Delawar (center) and Suhail Shaheen (left) walk to attend a press conference in Moscow on July 9, 2021. Photo: AFP / Dimitar Dilkoff

    It’s all about national reconciliation, economic development and Eurasian integration. Not included are a military component, hubs for an Empire of Bases, foreign interference. Moscow and Beijing also recognize, pragmatically, that fulfilling those dreams will not be possible in an Afghanistan hostage to ethno-sectarianism.

    The Taliban for their part seem to have recognized their own limits, hence their current inter-regional diplomatic drive. They seem to be paying close attention to the inevitable heavyweights – Russia and China – as well as the Central Asian “stans” plus Pakistan and Iran.

    Whether all this interconnection dance will herald the beginning of a post-war Afghanistan as a real functioning state, all we can say is insha Allah.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 23:30

  • The World's Tech Giants, Compared To The Size Of Nations' Economies
    The World’s Tech Giants, Compared To The Size Of Nations’ Economies

    It’s no secret that tech giants have exploded in value over the last few years, but, as Visual Capitalist’s Omri Wallach notes, the scale can be hard to comprehend.

    Through wide-scaling market penetration, smart diversification, and the transformation of products into services, Apple, Microsoft, Amazon, and Google have reached market capitalizations well above $1.5 trillion.

    To help us better understand these staggering numbers, a recent study at Mackeeper took the market capitalization of multiple tech giants and compared them with the annual Gross Domestic Product (GDP) of countries.

    Editor’s note: While these numbers are interesting to compare, it’s worth noting that they represent different things. Market cap is the total value of shares outstanding in a publicly-traded company and gives an indication of total valuation, and GDP measures the value of all goods and services produced by a country in an entire year.

    Companies vs. Countries: Tech Giants

    If Apple’s market capitalization was equal to a country’s annual GDP, it might just be in the G7.

    At a market cap of more than $2.1 trillion, Apple’s market capitalization is larger than 96% of country GDPs, a list that includes Italy, Brazil, Canada, and Russia.

    In fact, only seven countries in the world have a higher GDP than Apple’s market cap.

    Further back is Microsoft, which would be the 10th richest country in the world if market cap was equivalent to GDP.

    With a market cap of more than $1.9 trillion, Microsoft’s value is larger than the GDP of global powerhouses Brazil, Canada, Russia, and South Korea.

    Though all of the tech giants fared well during the COVID-19 pandemic, perhaps none have stood to benefit as much as Amazon.

    With online retail and web services both in high demand, Amazon’s market cap has grown to $1.7 trillion, larger than 92% of country GDPs.

    Other Companies “Bigger” Than Countries

    Tech giants aren’t the only companies that would give countries a run for their money.

    Market cap data as of June 13, 2021

    Saudi Arabia’s state-owned corporation Saudi Aramco also makes the list, boasting a market cap more than double the GDP of its home country.

    China’s tech giant Tencent also has a market cap that towers over many country GDPs, such as those of Switzerland or Poland.

    Until recently, Tencent was also ahead of fellow tech giant Facebook in market cap, but the social network has climbed ahead and almost reached $1 trillion in market capitalization.

    Of course, the biggest caveat to consider with these comparisons is the difference between market cap and GDP numbers.

    A company’s market cap is a proxy of its net worth in the eyes of public markets and changes constantly, while GDP measures the economic output of a country in a given year.

    But companies directly and indirectly affect the economies of countries around the world. With international reach, wealth accumulation, and impact, it’s important to consider just how much wealth and power these companies have.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 23:00

  • Are Justices Kavanaugh & Barrett Feeling The Threat Of Expansion?
    Are Justices Kavanaugh & Barrett Feeling The Threat Of Expansion?

    Via TechnoFog’s “The Reactionary” Substack,

    Law professor (and prolific writer) Josh Blackman has an interesting piece in Newsweek, where he observes that Justices Clarence Thomas, Samuel Alito, and Neil Gorsuch have “warned that Justices Brett Kavanaugh and Amy Coney Barrett lack backbone.”

    He provides as an example the case of Fulton v. City of Philadelphia, in which the Court was presented with the question of whether the City of Philadelphia violated the First Amendment after it stopped referring foster children to a Catholic foster care agency after the agency “would not certify same-sex couples to be foster parents due to its religious beliefs about marriage.”

    Justices Thomas, Alito, and Gorsuch were ready to overturn Supreme Court arguably incorrect precedent (dating back to 1990) that “the First Amendment’s Free Exercise Clause tolerates any rule that categorically prohibits or commands specified conduct so long as it does not target religious practice.”

    Justices Kavanaugh and Barrett weren’t willing to take that step. (In its February 2021 decision, the Supreme Court held the City of Philadelphia violated the Free Exercise Clause of the First Amendment but the Court did not go far enough for religious freedom advocates.)

    Justice Gorsuch, in his concurring opinion, called out the Court’s lack of courage:

    “Dodging the question today guarantees These cases will keep coming until the Court musters the fortitude to supply an answer.”

    Blackman notes this “personal attack no doubt reflects simmering tensions within the Court.”

    He also observes how Justices Barrett and Kavanaugh (contrary to Thomas and Gorsuch and Alito) argued that California’s singing ban on churches could remain in place during the COVID pandemic. Barrett “thus used her first separate writing on the Court to rule against people of faith.”

    Then there is the case of Barronelle Stutzman, a Christian florist from Washington state who is being punished by the state for declining to create a floral arrangement for a same sex wedding. 

    Three justices –Thomas, Alito, and Gorsuch – voted to take her case. She needed just one more justice to vote in her favor in order to get before the Supreme Court. Justices Kavanaugh and Barrett (and Roberts) declined.

    Blackman writes of other cases where Thomas, Alito, and Gorsuch alleged “Kavanaugh and Barrett were afraid of public criticism.” Like Blackman, we have previously noted Justice Thomas took aim at the refusal of the Court to act on an issue of “undisputed importance” where the Pennsylvania Supreme Court usurped the state legislature’s authority by changing the state election laws.

    Questions of motive.

    All this leads us to ask about the reasons for Kavanaugh and Barrett’s lack of fortitude.

    It could be that they have aligned themselves with the political leanings of Chief Justice Roberts, who tries to steer the Court away from controversial decisions, even if those decisions would be correct and Constitutional.

    We suspect there might be something else.

    Since 2020, there have been increasing calls to expand the Supreme Court. Then-candidate Biden refused to condemn the expansion, thus revealing his belief that expansion is necessary.

    After the election, Biden issued an Executive Order to form a Commission to report on expanding the Court. The Commission’s membership – majority liberal – make it more likely than not that they will recommend expanding the Court.

    Properly understood, expansion is a threat against “conservatives” on the Court. The message is clear: Watch what you do or there will be changes.

    The Supreme Court is certainly aware of this cloud over its head. Legal writers and professors have observed that the Court, under the direction of Chief Justice Roberts, has seen an uptick in the amount of “unanimous or near-unanimous” decisions. A show to the public that the Court isn’t as divided as some may believe.

    If the threat of expansion has increased the amount of agreement within the Court, it very well may a factor in the cases the Court has declined to consider.

    In other words, it is time we ask whether certain Justices – Roberts, Kavanaugh, and Barrett – are allowing themselves to be held hostage by this threat.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 22:30

  • People Are Now 3-D Printing Lego Guns Following US Gunmaker Halt Of "Block 19" Sales 
    People Are Now 3-D Printing Lego Guns Following US Gunmaker Halt Of “Block 19” Sales 

    We noted days ago how Danish toymaker The Lego Group sent a cease and desist letter to a US gunmaker for selling a Glock handgun kit that resembled Lego blocks. It was also noted that “once the 3D-printing community” develops computer-aided design kits for Lego guns that anyone can print at home, then “there’s no way to stop it.” 

    While Utah-based Culper Precision‘s “Block 19” Lego handgun has been pulled off shelves, we predicted that the 3D-printing community would begin printing their own Lego guns. 

    Come to find out Saturday, that’s precisely what Redditor “chairmanjuan” on “r/guns” has done.

    Called the “MEGA GLOCK,” chairmanjuan posted a picture of what appears to be a Glock 19. They said, “MEGA GLOCK 19X, my 3d printed knockoff of Culper Precision’s BLOCK 19 they got in trouble for. The slide cover only works for RMR cut slides, it screws into the optic mounting holes so it doesn’t fly off into your face.”

    Another Redditor said, “I think anybody oughta be able to do whatever they wanna do. F**k seatbelts, for instance. Cocaine’s bad for you but whatever, go ahead.” The person was referring to the Lego company shooting down Culper Precision’s Block 19.

    Chairmanjuan didn’t release the file for the 3-D printed Lego Glock 19, but we’re assuming someone else will.  

    So what’s The Lego Group going to do now that private citizens are now printing Lego guns at home? Spend hundreds of thousands of dollar, if not more, and send cease and desist letters to everyone who prints these guns? 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 22:00

  • Now They Are Saying That The Republican Party Is The #1 "National Security Threat To The United States Of America"
    Now They Are Saying That The Republican Party Is The #1 “National Security Threat To The United States Of America”

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    When one major political party starts labeling the other major political party as a “national security threat”, that should set off major alarm bells because that means that total tyranny is very near.  Needless to say, Democrats and Republicans have always had bitter words for one another, but when you start calling the other side a “national security threat” that is taking things to an entirely different level.  Al-Qaeda was a “national security threat”, and so we invaded Afghanistan.  ISIS was a “national security threat”, and so we bombed them into oblivion.  The full weight of U.S. power is often used to “neutralize” national security threats, and so when a former Department of Homeland Security official went on MSNBC and said that the Republican Party is now a more serious national security threat than either Al-Qaeda or ISIS, that sent chills down the spines of a whole lot of people…

    Miles Taylor, a former Department of Homeland Security (DHS) official, made the comment during a Thursday interview on MSNBC’s “The Reid Out.”

    “I’ve spent my whole career not as a political operative. I’ve never worked on a campaign in my life other than campaigning against Trump. I’m a national security guy. I’ve worked in national security against ISIS, al Qaeda and Russia,” Taylor said.

    “And the No. 1 national security threat I’ve ever seen in my life to this country’s democracy is the party that I’m in — the Republican Party. It is the No. 1 security national security threat to the United States of America,” he said.

    I couldn’t believe that he actually said that.

    In the past, members of the Biden administration have labeled certain political subgroups as national security threats, but now Miles Taylor is saying that the entire Republican Party is the number one national security threat that our nation is facing.

    Just think about what that means.

    When we would capture a member of Al-Qaeda or ISIS, we would ship them off to Guantanamo Bay and torture them for months or even years.

    I always spoke out against such torture, because it was morally wrong.

    And I knew that eventually the same tactics would be used against Americans.

    With each passing day, the U.S. is getting closer and closer to becoming an authoritarian regime.  On Friday, we learned that the Biden administration has been regularly working with social media companies to censor the speech of people that are concerned about the safety of the COVID vaccines…

    President Biden on Friday accused Facebook of “killing people,” just after White House press secretary Jen Psaki said the Biden administration is “in regular touch” with the platform to ensure correct “narratives” are promoted — elaborating on her Thursday admission that the White House is “flagging problematic posts” for the social media giant to censor.

    Social media companies are private entities, and so they can theoretically argue that they have the right to determine what is allowed to be posted on their platforms.

    But when the federal government colludes with social media companies to censor speech, that is a crystal clear violation of our First Amendment rights.

    As Glenn Greenwald has noted, if you support the Biden administration’s attempts to censor speech on social media platforms, that also makes you an authoritarian…

    In an eight-tweet thread posted Thursday afternoon, Greenwald said this idea that a president’s administration can remove content it deems ‘problematic’ is dangerous.

    ‘If you don’t find it deeply disturbing that the White House is “flagging” internet content that they deem “problematic” to their Facebook allies for removal, then you are definitionally an authoritarian. No other information is needed about you to know that,’ Greenwald tweeted.

    Not only is the Biden administration actively involved in censoring speech, they are also specifically demonizing 12 particular individuals that the Biden administration claims are responsible for “65% of anti-vaccine misinformation on social media platforms”

    The White House turned up the pressure on Silicon Valley to get a handle on vaccine misinformation Thursday, specifically singling out 12 people one group dubbed the “disinformation dozen,” saying they were responsible for a great deal of misinformation about Covid-19.

    “There’s about 12 people who are producing 65% of anti-vaccine misinformation on social media platforms,” White House Press Secretary Jen Psaki said Thursday.

    At this point, freedom of speech is virtually a dead right in the United States of America, and that means that all of our other rights are in danger of being completely stripped away as well.

    Because once freedom of speech is gone, the government will be free to take away the rest of our rights at their leisure.

    Never before in U.S. history have we seen such a massive attempt by one side of the political spectrum to silence the speech of the other side of the political spectrum.

    And ultimately, they won’t just be satisfied with shutting people up.  In fact, there are some activists that are already wishing death upon their political opponents…

    “Let them die,” Fairfax County NAACP First Vice President Michelle Leete said about people against her leftist ideology during a speech to protesters at Luther Jackson Middle School Thursday evening.

    Parents and concerned citizens had gathered in Fairfax, Virginia, prior to a school board meeting to protest Fairfax County Public Schools teaching Critical Race Theory (CRT), while others had come to support CRT and the LGBT agenda in schools. It was the final meeting before the school board’s summer break.

    There is so much hatred on both sides of the political spectrum right now, and that makes me extremely sad.

    As I discuss in my brand new book entitled “7 Year Apocalypse”, we are moving into a very troubled chapter in American history, and we are doing so at a time when most people are absolutely filled with rage.

    Everywhere you look, people are extremely angry.  Our nation has become a tinderbox that can literally erupt in flames at any moment, and we have seen quite a few examples of this over the past year.

    We used to be such a civilized country.

    What in the world has happened to us?

    Freedom is such a precious thing.  Previous generations of Americans sacrificed so much to win it for us, and now we are on the verge of losing it for good.

    *  *  *

    It is finally here! Michael’s new book entitled “7 Year Apocalypse” is now available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 21:30

  • Coffee, Tea, Or Soda: What Caffeine Drinks Do Countries Prefer?
    Coffee, Tea, Or Soda: What Caffeine Drinks Do Countries Prefer?

    Coffee, tea, or soft drinks… How do you get your caffeine fix?

    It might be the world’s most widely consumed psychoactive substance, but your preferred caffeine drink of choice might come down to where you live.

    As Visual Capitalist’s Omri Wallach details below, a study into caffeine consumption of 57 countries examined the role it plays in our diets, using the volume sales of caffeine-containing beverages from Euromonitor to see what caffeine source each country prefers.

    The resulting map of caffeine preference shows regional trends, including some surprising standouts.

    Most Purchased Caffeine Drink By Country

    There are many different caffeine drinks for consumers to choose from, from brewed drinks to ready-to-drink vending machine options.

    To simplify tastes, we grouped them into three types:

    • Coffee — Includes fresh brewed coffee, instant coffee, and ready-to-drink coffee.

    • Tea — Includes herbal, black, green, and other teas, as well as ready-to-drink tea.

    • Soft Drinks — Includes colas, other soft drinks, sports drinks, and energy drinks.

    Examining the regional spread shows us some expected caffeine strongholds.

    Tea was the preferred drink of choice for many countries in most of Asia, including ChinaIndiaIndonesia, and Japan. But it also showed a strong foothold in Africa, as Kenya is the world’s largest black tea exporter, and in Europe, as TurkeyIreland, and the UK are the world’s top three tea-consuming countries per capita.

    Coffee was the most preferred caffeine drink in a number of countries in Europe, including all of the Nordic countries. It is also the drink of choice in CanadaSouth Korea, and Brazil, the latter two being the only countries in Asia and South America to prefer coffee.

    Perhaps most surprising is the global preference for soft drinks. The U.S. and most of Latin America overwhelmingly consumed soft drinks over other caffeine drinks, as did the PhilippinesThailand, and Australia. Even in Europe, some countries that are heavy coffee drinkers like Italy and Switzerland purchased more soft drinks than coffee by narrow margins.

    Coke’s Influence on the Coffee vs Tea vs Soft Drinks Debate

    Though the global map of caffeine preference looks regionally-specific at a glance, there are some notable business influences at play.

    The proliferation of soft drinks in Latin America is largely due to the power of Coca-ColaMexico, the country which preferred soft drinks the most over other drinks, is also the world’s biggest consumer of Coca-Cola per capita. Coca-Cola also reached far beyond the borders of the U.S. where it originated, becoming a staple drink in many parts of Europe, Australia, and Asia.

    This power of brands extends to coffee as well. Many coffee-preferring countries actually leaned more towards instant coffee purchases over freshly brewed coffee, a mark of the lasting influence of Nestlé’s brand of instant coffee, Nescafé.

    But it’s important to note that many countries were not tabulated, and that caffeine purchases don’t differentiate between every single possible caffeine drink. There are many different types of coffees, teas, soft drinks, and even yerba mate for consumers to choose from.

    As a snapshot of global caffeine consumption, it’s a reminder that the world’s most commonly consumed psychoactive stimulant is taken in many different forms. Both throughout history, and in modern times.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 21:00

  • LA County Sheriff Says He Will Not Enforce New Indoor Mask Mandate
    LA County Sheriff Says He Will Not Enforce New Indoor Mask Mandate

    By Mimi Nguyen Ly via The Epoch Times,

    Los Angeles County Sheriff Alex Villanueva announced Friday that he will not enforce a new indoor mask mandate set to be reinstated in the country’s most populous county amid the CCP virus pandemic.

    County health officials decided that the indoor mask mandate would apply regardless of a person’s vaccination status. The mandate, announced on Thursday, takes effect at 11:59 p.m. on Saturday.

    “Forcing the vaccinated and those who already contracted COVID-19 to wear masks indoors is not backed by science and contradicts the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) guidelines,” Villanueva said in a statement.

    “The Los Angeles County Department of Public Health (DPH) has authority to enforce the order, but the underfunded/defunded Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department will not expend our limited resources and instead ask for voluntary compliance.

    “We encourage the DPH to work collaboratively with the Board of Supervisors and law enforcement to establish mandates that are both achievable and supported by science.”

    People wear masks as they walk in a shopping district in the Hollywood section of Los Angeles on July 1, 2021. (Marcio Jose Sanchez/AP Photo)

    The CDC announced in May this year that people fully vaccinated against the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus, which causes the disease COVID-19, no longer have to wear masks indoors.

    An updated guidance on the CDC website as of Friday reads,

    “Fully vaccinated people can resume activities without wearing a mask or physically distancing, except where required by federal, state, local, tribal, or territorial laws, rules, and regulations, including local business and workplace guidance.”

    The LA County Health Department said on Thursday that transmission of the CCP virus was increasing “from Moderate to Substantial,” citing the “trend in daily new cases of COVID-19.”

    In a statement, the department said that it had observed a seven-times increase in new cases since California fully reopened its economy on June 15 by dropping all physical distancing requirements and capacity limits, and relaxed most of its mask requirements.

    “Wearing a mask when indoors reduces the risk of both getting and transmitting the virus. This additional layer of protection can help to slow the spread and does not limit business occupancy and operations,” the department asserted.

    LA County Health Officer Muntu Davis said the new mask mandate will remain in place “until we begin to see improvements in our community transmission of COVID-19.”

    He adds that the health department urges all residents who are eligible to get vaccinated.

    “Although not at 100 [percent], [getting vaccinated] significantly reduces the risk of infection and, for the small number of people that get infected, it reduces the risk of hospitalization and death once you are fully vaccinated against COVID-19,” Davis said.

    The department said in its statement that it is “a great time” to plan on vaccinating children who are 12 and older, and pointed out that the Pfizer COVID-19 vaccine is approved for those aged 12 and older.

    It announced incentives for receiving the vaccine, saying that starting Friday through July 22, people 18 and older can have a chance at winning grand prizes if they get vaccinated at county-run vaccination sites, LA City sites, and St. John’s Well Child and Family Center sites. There are seven packages of tickets to attend the Staples Center to certain performances, it announced.

    Vaccine providers can report any serious adverse effects or vaccination administration errors to VAERS, hosted by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

    Vaccine manufacturers are immune from liability for any adverse reactions to their products unless there’s “willful misconduct” involved.

    The federal government has a Countermeasures Injury Compensation Program that can pay compensation to eligible persons who suffer serious injury from approved vaccines. But the burden of proof has proven a challenging process.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 20:44

  • CDC Scrambles After Rare Case Of Monkeypox Turns Up In Texas
    CDC Scrambles After Rare Case Of Monkeypox Turns Up In Texas

    CDC health officials are now working vigorously to trace contacts of anyone directly exposed to a Dallas resident who recently returned to the US on a trip to Nigeria. The man is now in isolation at a Dallas hospital after testing positive for an extremely rare disease known as Monkeypox – said to be the first ever case of its kind in Texas.

    It’s also the first case seen inside the United States in two decades, with the last significant outbreak in 2003 including 47 reported human cases. The infected person flew into Atlanta international airport on July 8, and then on to Dallas Love Field the next day.

    Illustrative CDC file photo of Monkeypox infected person.

    Dallas health officials have declared there’s “no cause for alarm” given monkeypox has a lower fatality rate than smallpox. The two diseases are similar in that they can cause a severe rash which lasts for about a month. But the rash causing large swollen bumps all over the body appear particularly nasty and painful-looking in the case of Monkeypox.

    However monkeypox may not be as easily spreadable given it’s carried by rodents or other animals and human-to-human transmission is through bodily fluids and respiratory droplets. 

    NBC details further of the rare disease:

    It usually takes seven to 14 days after a person is exposed to the monkeypox virus to develop symptoms, according to the CDC, which begin like many other viruses: fatigue, fever, headache, muscle aches.

    Within a week of symptom onset, an infected person develops a bumpy, raised rash that often spreads to the entire body. The person is considered contagious until those raised bumps have scabbed over and fallen off.

    It’s this lengthy period in which a person may not know they have it which may allow for a rapid undetected outbreak.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to more details via the AP:

    Monkeypox symptoms typically begin with flu-like illness and swelling of the lymph nodes, then a widespread rash on the face and body, according to the CDC. Most infections last 2-4 weeks. Infections with this strain of monkeypox are fatal in about 1 in 100 people, but the mortality rate can be higher among those with weakened immune systems.

    CDC information on the illness indicates that while the main carrier is still unknown, it’s believed that “African rodents are suspected to play a part in transmission.”

    Via the WHO/Reuters

    Given the rarity of the disease, there’s as yet no treatment despite past attempts to develop a vaccine. CDC officials have expressed that an outbreak is unlikely given current mask mandates and other distancing measures aboard domestic airlines due to the coronavirus pandemic – likely meaning the infected Dallas resident was unlikely to have spread it during the two flights inbound to the US, or at least that’s the hoped-for optimistic scenario.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 20:00

  • Remember Those Texas Democrats Who Fled To DC On A Maskless Plane? Three Have COVID
    Remember Those Texas Democrats Who Fled To DC On A Maskless Plane? Three Have COVID

    Authored by Steve Straub via The Federalist Papers,

    According to a new report several Texas Democrats who fled the state in a private jet, without masks, to avoid having to vote on the state’s election integrity bill have tested positive for Covid-19.

    Via Fox News:

    “Several of the Texas Democrats who fled the state capital to avoid voting on an election integrity bill have tested positive for the coronavirus.

    Three of the 60 Texas House Democrats tested positive for the virus while staying in Washington, D.C., according to Texas House Democratic Caucus leadership.

    One of the members found out about their positive test late on Friday evening but did not have symptoms, officials say. All House members were notified of the positive tests and were all tested themselves immediately.

    The caucus says that the two other members found out about their positive test on Saturday.

    The members who tested positive will be forced to isolate themselves for 10 days.”

    I guess karma really is a bitch.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Maybe next time they’ll stay and do their duty.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 19:30

  • Hospitals Charging Absurd 'Trauma' Fees To Treat Minor Injuries
    Hospitals Charging Absurd ‘Trauma’ Fees To Treat Minor Injuries

    Hospitals across the country have been charging ridiculous ‘trauma alert’ fees for patients requiring minimal treatment.

    The fees, which can be upwards of $50,000 per patient, are billed when a hospital’s top surgical specialists are summoned – typically for the most severely injured patients.

    One such case, found within court filings from a 2017 trial, revealed that a 30-year-old man who arrived at a Modesto, California hospital for shoulder and back pain following a car accident was billed $44,914 by Sutter Health Memorial Medical Center, which included a $8,928 “trauma alert” fee. The man went home in less than three hours, according to CNN.

    Some hospitals are using it as a revenue generator,” said registered nurse and medical claims consultant, Tami Rockholt, who appeared as an expert witness in the Sutter Health trial.

    “It’s being taken advantage of,” she continued, adding that such cases are “way more numerous” in recent years. “If someone is not going to bleed out, or their heart is not going to stop, or they’re not going to quit breathing in the next 30 minutes, they probably do not need a trauma team.”

    Tens of thousands of times a year, hospitals charge enormously expensive trauma alert fees for injuries so minor the patient is never admitted.
     
    In Florida alone, where the number of trauma centers has exploded, hospitals charged such fees more than 13,000 times in 2019 even though the patient went home the same day, according to a KHN analysis of state data provided by Etienne Pracht, an economist at the University of South Florida. Those cases accounted for more than a quarter of all the state’s trauma team activations that year and were more than double the number of similar cases in 2014, according to an all-payer database of hospital claims kept by Florida’s Agency for Health Care Administration. -CNN

    The underlying justification for the fees is that trauma centers should be able to recoup the cost of having a crack squad of doctors and nurses assembled when an ambulance crew reports an incoming patient who needs trauma care – even if said squad never actually swings into action. 

    “We do see quite a bit of non-appropriate trauma charges — more than you’d see five years ago,” according to Pat Palmer, co-founder of Beacon Healthcare Costs Illuminated, which analyzes thousands of bills for insurers and patients. Palmer says that recently “we saw a trauma activation fee where the patient walked into the ER” and walked out shortly thereafter.

    Between 2012 and 2020, Florida trauma activation team cases without an admission rose from 22% to 27% – with one facility, Broward Health Medical Center counting 1,285 trauma activation cases with no admission – nearly the same number of patients who were admitted without a trauma fee.

    “Trauma alerts are activated by EMS [first responders with emergency medical services], not hospitals, and we respond accordingly when EMS activates a trauma alert from the field” not hospitals, said Broward Health spokesperson, Jennifer Smith.

    According to standards published by the Florida Department of Health, hospitals can declare an “in-hospital trauma alert” for “patients not identified as a trauma alert.”

    Not all hospitals appear to be taking advantage. At Regions Hospital in St. Paul, Minnesota, it’s “very rare” not to admit a trauma alert patient. Last year, around 5% (42 out of 828 cases) were non-admitted trauma alert patients, according to Dr. Michael McGonical, the center’s director who runs The Trauma Pro blog.

    If you’re charging an activation fee for all these people who go home, ultimately that’s going to be a red flag,” he said.

    That said, while hospitals may bill trauma fees, insurance companies are drawing lines.

    Reimbursement for trauma activations is complicated. Insurers don’t always pay a hospital’s trauma fee. Under rules established by Medicare and a committee of insurers and health care providers, emergency departments must give 30 minutes of critical care after a trauma alert to be paid for activating the team. For inpatients, the trauma team fee is sometimes folded into other charges, billing consultants say.
     
    But, on the whole, the increase in the size and frequency of trauma team activation fees, including those for non-admitted patients, has helped turn trauma operations, often formerly a financial drain, into profit centers. In recent years, hundreds of hospitals have sought trauma center designation, which is necessary to bill a trauma activation fee. -CNN
    “There must have been a consultant that ran around the country and said, ‘Hey hospitals, why don’t you start charging this, because you can,” said Marc Chapman, founder of Chapman Consulting, which challenges large hospital bills for auto insurers and other payers. “In many of those cases, the patients are never admitted.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 19:00

  • Many Indians Depend On Gold To Stay Afloat During Pandemic
    Many Indians Depend On Gold To Stay Afloat During Pandemic

    Via SchiffGold.com,

    Gold has served as a lifeline for Indians pummeled by the economic storm caused by the government response to the coronavirus pandemic.

    The Indian government’s response to the first wave of COVID-19 ravaged the economy. As a result, many banks were reluctant to extend credit due to fear of defaults. In this tight lending environment, many Indians used their stashes of gold to secure loans. As Indians battle the second wave of COVID-19, many Indians have now turned to selling their gold outright in order to make ends meet.

    When coronavirus gripped the world, Paul Fernandes initially took out a loan using gold as collateral to pay for his children’s education after he lost his job on a cruise ship. Now he’s turned to selling gold jewelry to meet expenses. He told Bloomberg selling gold keeps him from taking on more debt.

    “Selling my jewelry means I am not obligated to pay someone back along with an additional interest on that,” he said.

    The second wave of COVID-19 has made a bad situation worse. For many Indians, particularly in rural areas, their investment in gold and gold jewelry is the only thing keeping them afloat.

    You already had a financial problem last year and you got out of that problem through gold loans. Now again, you are having financial problems this year with a potentially third wave on the way, which can again mean lockdowns and job losses,” a consultant at London-based Metals Focus told Bloomberg.

    “We can expect distress sales in a big way in August and September when the third wave could actually set in.”

    The pandemic (and the government’s response) has pushed millions of Indians into poverty or bankruptcy. Selling gold jewelry is the last resort. As Bloomberg put it, “People in rural areas rely on gold in times of need as it can be easily liquidated.”

    In southern India, the country’s biggest per-capita gold consumer, about 25% more of old gold than usual has been sold to jewelers this year, according to Bloomberg.

    Gold jewelry in India is different from the US. It’s more than fashion. Indians generally buy 24-karat gold jewelry as opposed to the 14 or 18-karat jewelry found in the US. Indians consider their gold jewelry part of their savings.

    And for many Indians, gold is a lifesaver, providing liquidity that they otherwise wouldn’t have.

    Indians traditionally buy and hold gold. Collectively, Indian households own an estimated 25,000 tons of gold and that number may be higher given the large black market in the country. The yellow metal is interwoven into the country’s marriage ceremonies and cultural rites. Indians also value gold as a store of wealth, especially in poor rural regions. Two-thirds of India’s gold demand comes from these areas, where the vast majority of people live outside the official tax system.

    Gold is not just a luxury in India. Even poor people buy gold in the Asian nation. According to an ICE 360 survey in 2018, one in every two households in India purchased gold within the last five years. Overall, 87% of households in the country own some amount of the yellow metal. Even households at the lowest income levels in India own some gold. According to the survey, more than 75% of families in the bottom 10% had managed to buy gold.

    Gold was also a major source of liquidity in 2016 when the Indian government launched a demonetization scheme. In November of that year, the Indian government declared that 1,000 and 500 rupee notes would no longer be valid. They gave the public just four hours notice. The 1,000 and 500 rupee notes made up 86 % of the currency in circulation in the country. With a single pronouncement, the Indian government made virtually all of the cash in India valueless. Many Indians have thwarted a government policy to bring the underground economy out of the shadows by converting their “black money” into gold.

    Indians understand that gold tends to store value, and that in the end, gold is money. If they have gold, they know they will be able to get the goods and services they need – even in the event of an economic meltdown. And while westerners may not embrace the cultural and religious aspects of the Indian love affair with gold, the economic reasons for their devotion to the yellow metal are every bit as applicable in places like the US.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 18:30

  • "This Is Worrying Me Quite A Bit": mRNA Vaccine Inventor Shares Viral Thread Showing COVID Surge In Most-Vaxxed Countries
    “This Is Worrying Me Quite A Bit”: mRNA Vaccine Inventor Shares Viral Thread Showing COVID Surge In Most-Vaxxed Countries

    Dr. Robert Malone, a pioneer in the field of mRNA vaccines, shared a viral Twitter thread on Friday which lays out a disturbing trend; the most-vaccinated countries in the world are experiencing  a surge in COVID-19 cases, while the least-vaccinated countries are not.

    “This is worrying me quite a bit,” tweeted Malone, embedding the lengthy thread authored by Twitter user @holmenkollin (Corona Realism) via the ‘thread reader’ app.

    Here’s what has Malone worried: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 18:00

  • "Let Them Die": Fairfax PTA & NAACP Officer Calls For The Death Of Those Who Oppose CRT
    “Let Them Die”: Fairfax PTA & NAACP Officer Calls For The Death Of Those Who Oppose CRT

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    As many on this blog are aware, I have long been an advocate of public education and we feel deeply fortunate to have sent all four of our kids to public schools in Alexandria and McLean in Fairfax County.  I still have one child in the Fairfax system. I was therefore shocked like many Fairfax parents to see the videotape of Michelle Leete, Vice President of Training at the Virginia PTAVice President of Communications for the Fairfax County PTA and First Vice President of the Fairfax County NAACP as she called for those who oppose critical race theory and identity divisions in school to “die.”

    What was even more unnerving is the applause from other parents to her “let them die” declaration.

    The video was taken by a Fairfax parent, Asra Nomani, whose son recently graduated from Fairfax County Public Schools and helps run the watchdog group Parents Defending Education. The speech was reportedly held at a counter-protest a meeting billed as “STOP CRT RALLY.”

    Leete railed against those objecting to the identity-based lesson plans. Notably, Leete fell back on the same shaming that accused parents of hating everything and everyone because they do not want this material to be taught to their children.  Keep in mind that this would encompass the majority of parents according to recent polls.

    “So let’s meet and remain steadfast in speaking truth, tearing down double standards, and refuting double talk. Let’s not allow any double downing on lies. Let’s prepare our children for a world they deserve. Let’s deny this off-key band of people that are anti-education, anti-teacher, anti-equity, anti-history, anti-racial reckoning, anti-opportunities, anti-help people, anti-diversity, anti-platform, anti-science, anti-change agent, anti-social justice, anti-healthcare, anti-worker, anti-LGBTQ+, anti-children, anti-healthcare, anti-worker, anti-environment, anti-admissions policy change, anti-inclusion, anti-live-and-let live people. Let them die.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The unhinged attack on parents opposing these lessons is all-too-familiar in our age of rage. It is not enough to disagree on what is appropriate for our schools, you have to paint the other side as bizarrely opposing the environment, workers, “help people,” inclusion, healthcare, LGBTQ, and of course children.Fairfax has become a major battleground over CRT and race-based programs.  That debate has reached out Thomas Jefferson High Schoo, ranked No. 1 among all public high schools nationwide by U.S. News & World Report.

    TJ is a source of pride for the county as an elite school that offers advanced courses for our best students. However, as with other jurisdictions where meritocracy  and standardized testing have been declared racist, school officials have moved to drop actual grades and scores as the critical qualifications for entry in order to increase African American participation.

    The race-blind entrance exam was successful in picking the best students in the county and the school serves as a wonderful goal for students who need advanced school work. So the school board went to a “holistic” approach to increase diversity. The primary racial group targeted by the board was Asian students. The result was that this year Asian-Americans admitted to TJ dropped to 54% this year from 73% last year. These students were no longer admitted entirely on their academic achievement on tests and scores. Their race was the motivating factor in changing the entry requirements.

    In some ways, Fairfax is still better than many jurisdictions that are eliminating elite schools and advanced courses because of the race of the students in those programs.

    It is incredibly sad to see this type of reckless rhetoric in our school district. Many of us came to Fairfax because it has always been viewed as a district that put academic excellence as the highest priority. We have found the schools in McLean to be terrific and the teachers to be incredibly supportive. I hate to see that long-successful approach swamped by the unrestrained rage and divisions of our contemporary politics.

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 17:30

  • U.S.-Backed Tech Restores Internet To More Than 1 Million Cubans Amid Uprisings Against Gov't 
    U.S.-Backed Tech Restores Internet To More Than 1 Million Cubans Amid Uprisings Against Gov’t 

    Readers may recall after Arab Spring a decade ago. There was intense debate over the role social media platforms had on the uprisings. With summer uprisings in Cuba, the communist government has discovered ways to cut the internet off to millions of residents, so organized protesting on social media is near impossible. 

    Let’s take a step back to early last week when reports of the Cuban regime used China-made technology systems to block internet and cell phone service to prevent pictures and videos of what was happening on the ground published online near impossible for the outside world to see. The regime also blocked popular social media channels that would make organized protesting impossible. 

    Remember, a decade ago, during Arab Spring, Facebook and Twitter were critical for organizers to orchestrate uprisings in Tunisia, Egypt, Libya, and Bahrain.

    The Biden administration is finding ways to provide anti-censorship tools to Cubans to access social media during the blackouts. 

    According to Bloomberg, the U.S. government supports a censorship circumvention tool designed to unblock content in Cuba and is powered by a company called Psiphon Inc. 

    As of Thursday, Psiphon tweeted, “1.389 Million daily unique users accessed the open web from Cuba through the Psiphon network. Internet is ON; circumvention tools ARE working.”

    Psiphon uses proxy servers that disguise internet traffic so Cuban authorities cannot tell if people are accessing social media platforms. The Toronto-based nonprofit has received money from the U.S. government. Republican Senator Marsha Blackburn tweeted Saturday that the proxy service is working well:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Biden administration has been strategizing on other ways to provide the people of Cuba with internet access. 

    “They have cut off access to the internet. We are considering whether we have the technological ability to reinstate that access,” President Biden said on Friday.

    Biden commented after Florida Governor Ron Desantis told the president the federal government should restore internet on the island located in the northern Caribbean Sea. 

    Desantis said there’s a technology that would allow the U.S. to broadcast internet access into Cuba remotely. 

    “Technology exists to provide Internet access into Cuba remotely, using the innovation of American enterprise and the diverse industries here,” the governor wrote. He said this reminds him of the Cold War when the U.S. funded radio stations to broadcast information into the Soviet Union. 

    “Similar to the American efforts to broadcast radio into the Soviet Union during the Cold War in Europe, the federal government has a history of supporting the dissemination of information into Cuba for the Cuban people through Radio & Televisión Martí, located in Miami,” he said.

    DeSantis has urged Cuba’s military to “live in the history books” by overthrowing the communist government. 

    Meanwhile, Cuban president, Miguel Díaz-Canel, has attacked the U.S. for their blatant and “shameful” attempts to “fracture” his country by triggering the largest anti-government protests in three decades. 

    Tyler Durden
    Sat, 07/17/2021 – 17:00

  • Another Dangerous Heat Wave Returns To Northwest This Weekend 
    Another Dangerous Heat Wave Returns To Northwest This Weekend 

    The Pacific Northwest and the central Rockies and especially in south-central Canada, are experiencing the next round of heat this weekend. 

    This new round of scorching temperatures began on Saturday. It will continue through early next week, will bring above-average temperatures to the Pacific Northwest region, the central Rockies, and South-central Canada. The epicenter of the heat wave will be in Montana, where parts of the state will be 20 to 25 degrees or more above historical averages. 

    The Western US has been plagued with four heat waves this year. An extremely hot spring/beginning to summer has resulted in megadroughts, water shortages, and wildfires

    “A major concern on Sunday and Monday is the prospect of dry thunderstorms, from the Sierra Nevada mountain range northward through much of northern Nevada, eastern Idaho, and central Montana. These storms could unleash cloud-to-ground lightning that ignites new blazes,” Washington Post said. 

    Wildfire statistics in California, through July 11, show a dramatic increase over the prior year, which may suggest a dangerous fire season is ahead. 

    Tens of millions of people could experience temperatures topping 100 degrees across the Pacific Northwest, the central Rockies, and south-central Canada. The heat wave will intensify Sunday and continue through Tuesday. 

    Steve Bowen, head of catastrophe insight at Aon, told Axios that “much of the West is a tinderbox right now and if dry lightning or human actions lead to even more fires, the potential for explosive growth is seriously concerning.” 

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 07/17/2021 – 16:30

    • Japan-South Korea Diplomatic Scandal Erupts Over Moon 'Masturbating' Comment
      Japan-South Korea Diplomatic Scandal Erupts Over Moon ‘Masturbating’ Comment

      A huge diplomatic row has erupted after a senior Japanese diplomat made crude remarks about South Korean President Moon Jae-in “masturbating” to a South Korean TV channel, intending it as a metaphor for lack of motivation to dialogue between the two countries which have of late had “very difficult” relations.

      The diplomat at first was unnamed, but the comments went viral in regional media, fueling outrage. AFP gave the following details of what was said

      A senior Japanese diplomat had reportedly ridiculed Mr Moon’s desire to meet with Japanese Prime Minister Yoshihide Suga, describing the South Korean leader as “masturbating with himself”.

       South Korean President Moon Jae-in, via Reuters

      The scandal immediately resulted in South Korea angrily summoning the Japanese envoy, demanding an apology as well as concreate action to punish the senior diplomat.

      Apparently the offending reference about Moon was made more than once:

      The diplomat, who was not identified, added in the same interview with South Korean cable network JTBC that Mr Moon was in a “tug of war only with himself” since Japan has “no space to pay attention to Seoul-Tokyo relations” at the moment.

      The comments were divulged on air Friday by South Korean cable TV broadcaster JTBC, with the news anchor introducing the incident by saying the high ranking diplomat’s words were “difficult to put into words”. 

      The crass reference was in response to recent attempts of President Moon Jae-in to hold a summit with Japanese Prime Minister Yoshihide Suga during the Olympic Games in Tokyo – games which have been beset with immense challenges over a surge in coronavirus cases in Japan’s capital. 

      South Korean President Moon Jae-in, left, and Japanese Prime Minister Yoshihide Suga, right, via AP

      The Japanese side on Saturday issued an apology but also somewhat of a deflection, saying the offending diplomat has been “sternly warned” – while also identifying him for the first time:

      Following JTBC’s report, the Japanese ambassador said it was his deputy Hirohisa Soma who had spoken the “highly inappropriate” words, though he did not confirm exactly what was said.

      “While it is true that such terms were used during the conversation it was not directed at President Moon,” Ambassador Koichi Aiboshi said in a statement.

      “I have sternly warned Deputy Chief Soma,” Japan’s ambassador added. But Seoul is calling for more, with Vice-Foreign Minister Choi Jong-kun demanding punitive action so that relations won’t spiral further downward.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 07/17/2021 – 16:00

    • Facebook Responds With Facts After Biden Proclaims Big Tech Is "Killing People" By Not Censoring Speech
      Facebook Responds With Facts After Biden Proclaims Big Tech Is “Killing People” By Not Censoring Speech

      Update (1530ET): Facebook responded to President Joe Biden’s claim that  the technology giant is “killing people.”

      We will not be distracted by accusations which aren’t supported by the facts. The fact is that more than 2 billion people have viewed authoritative information about COVID-19 and vaccines on Facebook, which is more than any other place on the internet,” Facebook spokesman Kevin McAlister told news outlets.

      “More than 3.3 million Americans have also used our vaccine finder tool to find out where and how to get a vaccine. The facts show that Facebook is helping save lives. Period,” he added.

      Google and Twitter have not responded to requests for comment.

      *  *  *

      As Jonathan Turley detailed earlier, President Joe Biden slammed Big Tech companies this week for “killing people” by failing to engage in even greater censorship of free speech on issues related to the pandemic. It was a surprising condemnation of companies who have been loyal allies of Biden, including killing stories embarrassing to his family like the Hunter Biden laptop scandal before the election. It also has censored stories questioning his victory in 2020. Nevertheless, Biden denounced the range of uncensored free speech as the cause of death for many — the ultimate anti-free speech trope for those seeking to convince people to embrace their own censorship.

      Biden was asked by a reporter what his message was to “platforms like Facebook” on the subject of “COVID misinformation.” He responded:

      “They’re killing people. The only pandemic we have is among the unvaccinated, and they’re killing people.”

      This comes as these companies have been criticized for censoring debates over the origin or treatment of Covid-19.

      For a year, Big Tech has been censoring those who wanted to discuss the origins of pandemic.  It was not until Biden admitted that the virus may have originated in the Wuhan lab that social media suddenly changed its position. Facebook only recently announced that people on its platform will be able to discuss the origins of Covid-19 after censoring any such discussion.

      The White House recently admitted that it was flagging “misinformation” for censorship by companies like Facebook. Moreover, White House press secretary Jen Psaki has called for people to be banned from all social media if any one company bans them.

      Biden is accusing these companies of actually killing people for refusing even more extensive censorship of speech. The statement equates free speech with death itself.

      We have seen this type of reckless rhetoric in other areas where disagreement with a policy or proposal is treated as de facto racism or hate speech. That was the case recently with the NAACP official who denounced those of opposing what is commonly referred to as critical race theory lessons as haters of a long litany of groups from the disabled to children to “help people.” This was followed by the chilling words “Let them die.”

      Rather than seek to convince the skeptical, Biden wants to silent them and use these companies to control what is read and discussed about the pandemic. What is chilling is the degree to which reporters and academics have supported the massive censorship system in the United States. However, that system is clearly not (to use Sen. Blumenthal’s words) “robust enough” for Biden who wants these companies to carry out a more complete censorship of opposing views.

      I do not fault those who want to convince citizens to take the vaccinations. I have had the vaccinations as has my family. However, this is part of an overall push for greater censorship and speech controls. Governments always claim noble purposes as the basis for limiting speech or other rights. It is the very danger Louis Brandeis once described in his dissenting opinion in Olmstead v. United States, 277 U.S. 438 (1928):

      Experience should teach us to be most on our guard to protect liberty when the government’s purposes are beneficent. Men born to freedom are naturally alert to repel invasion of their liberty by evil-minded rulers. The greatest dangers to liberty lurk in insidious encroachment by men of zeal, well-meaning but without understanding.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 07/17/2021 – 15:30

    • "Mansion Shortage" – Palm Beach Luxury Home Supply Hits Record Low 
      “Mansion Shortage” – Palm Beach Luxury Home Supply Hits Record Low 

      Migration to Florida has been supercharged during the coronavirus pandemic as remote working, fewer taxes, less violence, cheaper living, and minimal virus restrictions enticed people from big Northeast metro areas to the Sunshine State. 

      The great migration to Florida, some figures have at around 900 people per day, are moving to the state from the Tri-state area, have bought up all the luxury single-family homes in Palm Beach, triggering a “mansion shortage,” according to CNBC, citing a Douglas Elliman and Miller Samuel real estate report. 

      The ultra-rich Palm Beach community saw the average single-family home hit $11.7 million in the second quarter, up 38% from a year earlier. Real estate brokers say there’s a steady flow of hedge fund managers, private equity chiefs, and other financial elites moving from New York and New Jersey. 

      “This is a whole reset of the market,” said Jonathan Miller, CEO of Miller Samuel, the appraisal firm. “We’re now seeing $50 million transactions on almost a weekly basis. That’s a big change. And it appears to be sustainable.”

      The report showed Palm Beach price-per-square-foot is on par with Manhattan’s of around $1,500. 

      The number of sales of single-family homes for the quarter soared 90% over the prior year’s. There’s only about a one-month supply of homes for sale in Palm Beach, a record low, according to the Miller Samuel. At the end of the quarter, there were only about 25 homes listed. 

      Brokers contribute the mansion shortage to the “Palm Beach boom” as herds of wealthy people flee Northeast states for sunshine. 

      We’ve noted in the past that multiple Wall Street firms, such as Tiger Global Management and Goldman Sachs, have purchased office space in South Florida. Some are stating this could be the beginning of “Wall Street South.” 

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 07/17/2021 – 15:00

    • Ask The Cubans: Can Communism Mean Anything Other Than A Two-Tier Society?
      Ask The Cubans: Can Communism Mean Anything Other Than A Two-Tier Society?

      Authored by Mark Jeftovic via BombThrower.com,

      When Dictatorships Collapse, They Fail Fast

      Both the Biden administration in the US and Trudeau here in Canada were slow off the blocks to rally behind the Cuban people who are fighting for their freedom and an end to Communist dictatorship in Cuba. Had they been BLM protestors or Antifa I’m sure they would have been there in solidarity immediately. But because the people of Cuba want to go in the opposite direction that the US and Canada seem to be headed, what we got instead was COVID-shaming from the corporate media and hedging, half-assed platitudes from Western governments.

      The textbook definition of Communism is supposed mean a classless society, one in which everybody is treated the same, even to the point where beyond having equal access to opportunity, we arrive at equality of outcome.

      Nevermind that, as Kristian Niemietz enumerated in his Socialism: The Failed Idea That Never Dies, equality hasn’t happened in any self-described communist or socialist regime, either now or in the past. The Cubans have experienced this viscerally for over 60 years and they’ve had enough of it.

      They know that communism means a bifurcation of society into two tiers. A small overlord class to whom all the privilege and wealth accrues, and the larger underclass. Equality only exists in this latter pool of serfs in that they are all equally impoverished and subjugated. That’s equality of outcome.

      Simon Mikhailovich, am emigre from the Soviet Union was on George Gammon’s Rebel Capitalist Show  and he described what it was like in the closing years of the USSR:

      “By the time the 70’s came, The Soviet Union had gotten into stagnation, and so the economy started stagnating. Nothing was going anywhere. People had the same jobs, the same salaries, and lived in the same apartments. It took 12 years to get a phone line and you had to know somebody. It became more and more difficult to get decent food. If you wanted it you had to go to the farmers market where very few people could afford it.

      In the meantime the elites and the party oligarchs here, whatever you want to call it, they have their own transportation system, their own system of sanitoriums and resorts. Their own cars in trains. Any of that sounds familiar to you?

      There are restaurants where they could get in and other people couldn’t get in. And normal people, even middle class people, had no access to any of that, and of course working class people? Forget it. So as the inequality started growing at that level (I’m not comparing it necessarily directly to the United States), but  by this time inequality started growing, the government propaganda intensified, because of the inability to explain coherently why there’s no meat in the stores while every five year plan was always over fulfilled and everything was better than expected and every number was better than anybody could’ve hoped for.”

      When Gammon asked him how the government was able to explain the cognitive dissonance at such as mass level, Mikhailovich replied with one word: “Propaganda”.

      Despite the documented fact that this is where socialism invariably leads, every time, collectivism’s star is ascendent. Call it Democratic Socialism, Cultural Marxism or even its palatable sounding dog whistles like Stakeholder Capitalism, the masses are being gaslit and propagandized into a state where they yearn for subjugation.

      They crave for it. They’ll vote for it. They’ll demand it.

      In a recent interview on Macro Voices, Victor Shvets was describing why, with the cost of capital headed for zero and being stuck there permanently, we’re departing an era of capitalism and headed into one of global collectivism. The conversation was supposed to be your standard issue inflation-or-deflation debate. Instead Shvet came right out and said it: we’re headed for a period of, for lack of a better descriptor, global communism.

      “The question of whether we need freedom in order to be wealthy, prosperous and innovative,  over the last 500 years the answer was absolutely yes, but is it still the answer as we go forward?”

      He thinks not, and he drew a  through-line from Karl Marx, to Keynesian Bliss all the way into Fully Automated Luxury Communism, saying in essence,

      “ Capital markets will be nationalized because it will be too dangerous to be left in private hands. At the end of this process, there are no capital markets, because everything is either infinite or zero, you’re either worth everything, or you’re worth nothing”

      I ordered Shvets book, called fittingly enough “The Great Rupture”, and it hasn’t arrived yet, so I don’t know if he’s advocating for this or just prognosticating it (although the subtitle is “Do we need to be FREE?“). I too have been predicting a similar outcome while wishing (hoping) I’m completely wrong about it. This is The Great Bifurcation scenario from my Jackpot Chronicles series.

      Where I possibly differ from Shvets is he seemed to think this would become a ubiquitous state for everyone. But I think it plays out the way it always does: A two tier society with hyper-cronyism on top and communism on the bottom. Only this time, if it succeeds, it could happen globally. Everywhere.

      No more middle class, and the lower class thinks they’re saving the world from climate change and evil capitalists when all they’ve really done is abrogated their own rights, traded their property for debt and consigned themselves to never-ending  servitude. Meanwhile the elites will rule from their private jets and super-yachts. Pontificating about carbon footprints and wealth inequality.

      But the Great Bifurcation isn’t inevitable.

      It’s only one of the four scenarios posited in a post-pandemic world but the worrisome aspect is that the globalists appear to be preferring this outcome. The defining characteristic of the zeitgeist is a largely manufactured narrative that for the good of the collective, everybody else has to ratchet down their living standards and forfeit their civil liberties.

      Another possibility is The Great Reject.

      This is the idea that with COVID, lockdowns, the New Normal and The Great Reset; tectonic shifts that would have otherwise taken decades or more to play out have been pulled forward too fast. That the people trying to ram it through, the Davos crew, the global elites,  the Brahmin woke and the technocrats, have all overplayed their hands and set off a backlash.

      I am beginning to see signs that this scenario is unfolding.

      That may seem counter-intuitive, with government overreach and post-pandemic mission creep seemingly in overdrive.

      But this moment in time seems reminiscent  of how Mikhailovich further describes the end of not one, but two totalitarian regimes in Russia within the same century.

      He relates to us the words of Georgy Lvov who, headed the provisional government in 1917 before the Bolshevik coup. In a 1964 interview when Lvov was in his 80’s, he described how an 800-year old regime empire fell and teaches  those who care to listen just how fast a seemingly unassailable power structure can turn to dust, almost overnight:

      “The crisis started in the fall of [19]16. The Tsar was deposed in February of 17, so five months before it happened, nobody realized it. Not only did nobody realize it, the consensus was for exactly the opposite, The consensus was that the Tsar’s administration was clamping down on civil liberties and the dark road of repression was ahead. Civil liberties were constrained and the Tsar was going to take over, and would clamp down even more. The Deep State in todays language, was in complete control and clamping down.

      For context, the tradition that fell apart was in power for 800 years leading up to that moment, and the Romanov Dynasty was in power for 300 years.

      And then the whole thing came down in 72 hours.”

      After 800 years, from one Friday to Sunday night. It was all over.

      We’re headed for something very different than the prior neo-Liberal era and we don’t know exactly what that is.  The best we can do is to try to position for it in against a backdrop of  a world where everything will be digital and centralized, albeit increasingly unstable, volatile and ultimately unsustainable. We see decentralization in the crypto-economy  and anti-fiat like gold as the inoculants against late stage globalism and insurance for whatever comes next.

      There may be a last ditch head fake into collectivism and socialism that could last a generation, perhaps even two. But as happens with all centrally planned systems in general and collectivist regimes specifically, they ultimately fail.

      The Cubans may even leapfrog this phase as they may be exiting their Communist experiment now, just as the rest of us seem to be intent on entering one.

      *  *  *

      To receive future posts in your mailbox join the free Bombthrower mailing listfollow me on Twitter, or use the current weakness in cryptos to take advantage of my Crypto Capitalist Portfolio trial offer.

      Tyler Durden
      Sat, 07/17/2021 – 14:30

    Digest powered by RSS Digest